Page 1211
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50288 (Ring Gear Stop) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on
December 3, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account was charged $26.90 plus applicable taxes and
freight.Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins), also considered
"Essential", was shipped to each dealer November 2009.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Write down all radio station presets.
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Page 3388
Lock nut : Refer to See: Steering/Steering Gear/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE
1. Set the front wheels in a straight-ahead position. Then move the vehicle forward until the front
wheels rest on the turning radius gauge as shown. 2. Rotate steering wheel all the way right and
left; measure the turning angles "A" and "B" as shown.
Wheel turning angle (full turn) : Refer to See: Specifications.
Power Door Lock System
Power Sliding Door Switch: Locations Power Door Lock System
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 988
Disclaimer
Page 3206
Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Auto Active Test
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Auto Active Test
DESCRIPTION In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive
signal to the following systems:
- Rear window defogger - Front wipers - Tail, license and parking lamps - Cornering lamps - Front
fog lamps - Headlamps (High, Low) - A/C compressor (magnet clutch) - Cooling fan
OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from
windshield (to prevent glass damage by wiper operation).
NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield
beforehand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press
front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10
seconds after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6.
After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF.
CAUTION: Be sure to perform See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Door Lock System/Door Switch
Check (With Automatic Back Door System) or See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Door Lock System/Door Switch
Check (Without Automatic Back Door System) when the auto active test cannot be performed.
INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE When auto active test mode is actuated, the
following nine steps are repeated three times.
(A): Oil pressure warning lamp is blinking when the auto active test is operating.
Specifications
Power Steering Fluid: Specifications
Power Steering Fluid
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
........................... Genuine Nissan PSF or equivalent.
Page 1404
4. Install the fuel pressure gauge as shown in the figure. Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth moistened with gasoline.
- Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel tube and No.1 spool.
- Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches the No.1 spool on fuel tube.
- Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439 N4710 or 16439 40U00).
- When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
- When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality.
- Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
- Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 -0.08in).
Tightening torque: 1 - 1.5 Nm (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m, 9 - 13in-lb)
- Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts.
5. After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose with a force of approximately 98
N (10 kg, 22lb) to confirm fuel tube does not
come off.
6. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage. 7. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 8.
Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false
readings.
- During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
9. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
10. Check the following.
- Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
- Fuel filter for clogging
- Fuel pump
- Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or
replace.
Method B
CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick
connector O-ring maintains seal ability.
- Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel
pressure.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove fuel hose
using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction/Fuel
Rail/Service and Repair.
- Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
Page 1205
Figure 2.
NOTE
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (See Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION
Tighten the bolt no more then necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Page 2588
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment
1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Remove cable from range lever. 3. Set range lever in neutral
position.
4. Remove range lever and install Tool.
Tool number : KV911J0060 (J-45404)
5. Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts. 6. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns
with neutral base line on PNP switch body.
7. Tighten PNP switch bolts. 8. Reinstall range lever and cable. 9. Adjust control cable. Refer to
See: Valve Body/Adjustments.
10. Reinstall battery and bracket. 11. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic
Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0705.
Page 3763
REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear heater and cooling unit assembly from the vehicle. Refer to See:
Heater Core Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the rear blower motor.
3. Remove the variable blower control (rear).
4. Remove the rear air mix door motor. 5. Remove the rear duct and blend door assembly. Refer to
See: Air Duct/Service and Repair/Manual/Removal And Installation. 6. Disassemble the rear heater
and cooling unit assembly to remove the evaporator.
INSTALLATION
Page 3183
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/System Description/CAN Communication System.
ACTIVE TEST
Locations
Collision Avoidance System Switch: Locations
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Navigation System
Navigation Module: Locations Navigation System
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Component Parts Location
Page 655
4. Install the fuel pressure gauge as shown in the figure. Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth moistened with gasoline.
- Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel tube and No.1 spool.
- Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches the No.1 spool on fuel tube.
- Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439 N4710 or 16439 40U00).
- When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
- When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality.
- Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
- Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 -0.08in).
Tightening torque: 1 - 1.5 Nm (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m, 9 - 13in-lb)
- Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts.
5. After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose with a force of approximately 98
N (10 kg, 22lb) to confirm fuel tube does not
come off.
6. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage. 7. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 8.
Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false
readings.
- During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
9. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
10. Check the following.
- Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
- Fuel filter for clogging
- Fuel pump
- Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or
replace.
Method B
CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick
connector O-ring maintains seal ability.
- Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel
pressure.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove fuel hose
using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction/Fuel
Rail/Service and Repair.
- Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
Page 3355
^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep.
7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and
adjustments.
NOTE:
If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not
necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster
and easier.
^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system.
If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a
centered steering wheel.
^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right.
This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall
mounted rack and pinion units.
IMPORTANT:
If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to
jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct.
After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment
8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order.
9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight
flat road.
Page 2627
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement
1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove bolt, and turbine
revolution sensor from A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Do not reuse seal bolt.
Page 4703
Power Sliding Door Switch: Locations Automatic Sliding Door System
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Diagram Information and Instructions
Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Page 708
DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART
Page 1432
Spark Plug: Specifications Torque
Spark Plug
Page 2563
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 5199
^ These scratches are typically long and have several scratches concentrated together.
^ These scratches can be found anywhere on the glass surface.
^ Thoroughly examine the entire length of the crack to identify any scratch as a start point.
3) How to determine if glass has distortion or cracks due to manufacturing Issue.
Disclaimer
Page 5146
> Window glass run rubber is replaced.
> Window is partly opened and/or closed many times without being fully closed.
Page 1648
Ignition Relay: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 109
Concept of Auto Active Test
- IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN
communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN
communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal.
- If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily
diagnosed using auto active test.
Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode
Page 2933
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Disc Brake
Removal And Installation
REAR DISC BRAKE
Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor
REMOVAL
1. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies using power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to See:
Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. 3. Remove union bolt and torque member bolts using power
tool, and remove cylinder body. 4. Remove caliper and disc rotor. If the disc rotor cannot be
removed, remove as follows: Make sure parking brake lever is completely disengaged.
- Hold down the disc rotor with the wheel nut and remove the adjuster hole plug.
- Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver through the plug opening and rotate the adjuster in the direction
shown to loosen and retract the brake shoes.
- Prior to removing disc rotor, make alignment mark using a marker between the hub and disc rotor.
- Remove wheel nut and rotor.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Install the disc rotor. Align the marks made during removal on the hub and disc rotor.
2. Install the cylinder body, and tighten the torque member bolts to specification. Refer to See: Disc
Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear/Exploded View.
CAUTION: Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off oil and grease on washer seats
on axle assembly and mounting surface of cylinder body. 3. Install brake hose to cylinder body and
tighten union bolt to specification. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear/Exploded View.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper washer for the union bolts.
- Securely attach the brake hose to the protrusion on the cylinder body.
Page 201
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 3482
Control Arm: Service and Repair Rear Lower Link And Coil Spring
REAR LOWER LINK AND COIL SPRING
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly using power tool. Refer to See: Wheels and
Tires/Service and Repair/Pax Run Flat Tires And Wheels See:
Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel.
2. Set a transmission jack or suitable tool, to relieve the coil spring tension and support the rear
lower link.
3. Loosen the rear lower link adjusting bolt and nut connected to the rear suspension member,
using power tool.
4. Remove the rear lower link bolt and nut from the wheel hub and spindle assembly using power
tool. 5. Slowly lower the transmission jack to release the coil spring tension. Then remove upper
rubber seat, coil spring and lower rubber seat from the
rear lower link.
6. Remove the rear lower link adjusting bolt and nut from the rear suspension member using power
tool, then remove the rear lower link.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Suspension.
Page 3044
Yaw Rate Sensor: Locations Electrical Units Location
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 2450
Locations
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SRS Component Parts Location
Page 3812
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A)
Service Procedure.
WARNING: Avoid breathing the A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate the eyes, nose and
throat.
- If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming removal.
2. Remove the cowl top cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service
and Repair. 3. Disconnect the ECM from the cowl top extension and reposition it out of the way. 4.
Remove the two heater pump clips from the cowl top extension and reposition the heater pump out
of the way. Refer to See: Heater Core/Service
and Repair/Heater Pump.
5. Disconnect the heater hose clips from the cowl top extension and reposition the heater hose out
of the way. 6. Remove the wiper motor and linkage. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer
Systems/Wiper Motor/Service and Repair/Front Wiper And Washer
System.
7. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding /
Trim/Service and Repair.
8. Carefully cut the high pressure pipe (1) using a suitable tool (ratchet-type pipe cutter) (A) as
shown.
CAUTION: Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when cutting the pipe.
- A small amount of refrigerant may discharge from the pipe when it is cut.
- Do not allow debris to fall into the cut ends of the pipe.
9. Carefully cut the low pressure pipe (1) using a suitable tool (ratchet-type pipe cutter) (A) as
shown.
CAUTION: Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when cutting the pipe.
- A small amount of refrigerant may discharge from the pipe when it is cut.
10. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum hose from the intake manifold collector to allow
removal of the cut A/C pipes.
11. Disconnect the high pressure pipe connection (1), low pressure pipe connection (2), and the
A/C pipe clamp bolt (A) located near the RH front
Page 4131
2. Check continuity between the following Bluetooth control unit terminals and ground.
OK or NG OK - Inspection End. NG - Repair or replace harness.
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Front Axle Nut
Page 4829
The ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION maintenance intervals can be reset to 0 miles (kilometers).
Select the "Reset" key using the joystick and press the ENTER button.
Displaying the maintenance notice reminder
Select the "Display Maintenance Notification" key and press the ENTER button to display the
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automatically at the set maintenance interval.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen (ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION) will be automatically
displayed as shown when both of the following conditions are met:
- The vehicle is driven the set distance and the ignition key is turned OFF.
- The ignition key is turned ON the next time the vehicle will be driven.
To return to the previous display after the MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press the
BACK button.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays each time the key is turned ON until one of the
following conditions are met:
- "Reset" key is selected.
- "Display Maintenance Notification" is set to OFF.
- The maintenance interval is set again.
Tire pressure information
To display tire pressure information, press the TRIP button repeatedly until the MAINTENANCE
screen is displayed. Select the "Tire Pressure" key using the joystick and press the ENTER button.
Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indicates that the pressure is being measured. After a
few driving trips, the pressure for each tire will be displayed randomly.
The order of tire pressure figures displayed on the screen does not correspond with the actual
order of the tire position.
Page 3312
Power Distribution Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R
Service and Repair
Fluid Pump: Service and Repair
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Oil Pump, 2nd Coast Brake and 2nd Brake
COMPONENTS
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove oil seal from oil pump assembly using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch oil pump assembly.
Page 4172
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
Page 1213
Figure 2.
NOTE
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (See Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION
Tighten the bolt no more then necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Page 2920
CAUTION: Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after
replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Rear
Brake Burnishing Procedure.
Page 974
Wheel Bearing: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheel Bearing (Rear)
Page 1244
Page EM-2
Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Page 742
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50288 (Ring Gear Stop) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on
December 3, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account was charged $26.90 plus applicable taxes and
freight.Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins), also considered
"Essential", was shipped to each dealer November 2009.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Write down all radio station presets.
Page 3860
Page 3311
Inspection With CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis)
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Inspection with CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis)
1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK 1. Connect CONSULT-III and select "IPDM E/R" on the
"SELECT SYSTEM" screen. 2. Select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE"
screen. 3. Check display content in self-diagnosis results.
NOTE: The Details for Display for the Period are as follows: CRNT: Error currently detected by IPDM E/R.
- PAST: Error detected in the past and stored in IPDM E/R memory.
Contents displayed NO DTC DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE
REQUIRED.-INSPECTION END. CAN COMM CIRC-Print out the self-diagnosis result and refer to
See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/System Description/CAN Communication
System.
Lifting Points
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Lifting Points
Garage Jack And Safety Stand
LIFTING POINT
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
WARNING:
Park the vehicle on a level surface when using the jack. Make sure to avoid damaging pipes, tubes,
etc. under the vehicle.
Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands when
you have to get under the vehicle.
Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.
-
Lift at reinforced area of front suspension member where lower control arm attaches, staying in
center line of wheels.
2-Pole Lift
LIFTING POINT
2-Pole Lift
WARNING: When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the
front and rear of the vehicle are well balanced. When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to
contact the brake tubes, brake cable, fuel lines and sill spoiler.
Locations
Horn Relay: Locations
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Page 2691
Wheel Bearing: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheel Bearing (Rear)
Page 1710
Page 3893
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations MTC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2035
Oxygen Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2565
Page 1613
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 3694
Page 45
Locations
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Locations
Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SRS Component Parts Location
Page 3128
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Page 4158
Page 3105
Page 531
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Page 5035
- Inspection End.
Page 606
^ Make sure the rear slide plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place.
NOTE:
Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep.
The Alignment Process
The Alignment Process
IMPORTANT:
Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the
alignment.
1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack.
^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in
Figure 4.
^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5).
^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then
re-enter the rack.
^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front
wheels straight.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Combination Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Page 3786
Heater Core: Service and Repair Heater Pump
ATC
HEATER PUMP
Removal and Installation
Heater Pump
REMOVAL 1. Remove the cowl top. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding /
Trim/Service and Repair. 2. Partially drain the engine cooling system. Refer to See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 3. Unclip the heater pump from
the cowl top extension. 4. Disconnect the heater pump electrical connector and the two heater
hoses, then remove the heater pump.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the heater pump, replace the heater pump as an assembly.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
MTC
HEATER PUMP
Removal and Installation
Heater Pump
Page 1333
Page EM-3
Page 1527
Tool numbers : KV10114400 (J-38365)
- Install the bank 1 (1) and bank 2 (2) three way catalyst support bolts in the order as shown.
Arrow Indicates : Engine front
Three way catalyst support bolts : 22.0 N.m (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft-lb)
- Install the exhaust manifold heat shield bolts.
- Install the three way catalyst manifolds heat shield bolts.
Three way catalyst manifold heat shield bolts : 8.3 N.m (0.85 kg-m, 73 in-lb)
Page 4366
^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise.
^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise.
2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator.
3. Install the regulator assembly into the door.
4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to
regulator.
5. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top.
Page 924
The ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION maintenance intervals can be reset to 0 miles (kilometers).
Select the "Reset" key using the joystick and press the ENTER button.
Displaying the maintenance notice reminder
Select the "Display Maintenance Notification" key and press the ENTER button to display the
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automatically at the set maintenance interval.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen (ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION) will be automatically
displayed as shown when both of the following conditions are met:
- The vehicle is driven the set distance and the ignition key is turned OFF.
- The ignition key is turned ON the next time the vehicle will be driven.
To return to the previous display after the MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press the
BACK button.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays each time the key is turned ON until one of the
following conditions are met:
- "Reset" key is selected.
- "Display Maintenance Notification" is set to OFF.
- The maintenance interval is set again.
Tire pressure information
To display tire pressure information, press the TRIP button repeatedly until the MAINTENANCE
screen is displayed. Select the "Tire Pressure" key using the joystick and press the ENTER button.
Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indicates that the pressure is being measured. After a
few driving trips, the pressure for each tire will be displayed randomly.
The order of tire pressure figures displayed on the screen does not correspond with the actual
order of the tire position.
Page 4118
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 1254
Page EM-12
Page 3228
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Page 3576
3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2.
^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process
Tire:
^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area)
NOTE:
Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may
become un-balanced.
Wheel:
^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area.
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area
4. Before inflating the tire:
^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks.
Page 1525
WARNING: -
Perform the work when the exhaust and cooling system have completely cooled down.
- When removing the front and rear engine mounting through bolts and nuts, lift the engine up
slightly for safety. For engine slingers, refer to See: Engine/Service and Repair.
1. Disconnect battery. Refer to See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement. 2. Remove cowl top. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding /
Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) connector. 4. Remove
the front wheel and tires using power tool. 5. Remove the engine undercover. 6. Remove the inner
wheel well splash shields. 7. If removing only air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) do so at this time
through the wheel well opening, using Tool.
Tool number : KV991J0050 (J-44626)
8. If removing the exhaust manifold (LH bank), remove the radiator and cooling fan assembly.
Refer to See: Cooling System/Radiator/Service and
Repair.
9. Remove the front exhaust tube. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Exploded View.
10. If removing the exhaust manifold (RH), remove the front suspension member. Refer to See:
Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Suspension Member.
11. Remove the bank 1 (1) and bank 2 (2) three way catalyst manifolds support bolts in the order
as shown.
Arrow Indicates : Engine front
12. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1), heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2), air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 (bank 1) and air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
(bank 2). a. Remove harness connector of each sensor, and disconnect the harness from the
bracket and middle clamp. b. Remove both heated oxygen sensors and air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors
using Tool.
Tool numbers : KV10114400 (J-38365)
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage heated oxygen sensors or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors.
- Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new sensor.
13. Remove exhaust manifold and three way catalyst manifold heat shields using power tool. 14.
Remove the three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 1) and three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 2) by
loosening the bolts first and then removing the
nuts and through bolts using power tool.
15. Remove the RH bank (1) and LH bank (2) exhaust manifolds.
Loosen the exhaust manifold nuts in the order as shown using power tool. Arrow Indicates : Engine
front
Page 2492
ATC
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations ATC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 1454
(1.97 in)] into water pump's upper and lower bolt holes until they reach the timing chain case. Then,
alternately tighten each bolt for a half turn, and pull out the water pump.
CAUTION: Pull straight out while preventing vane from contacting socket in installation area.
- Remove water pump without causing sprocket to contact timing chain.
15. Remove M8 bolts and O-rings from water pump.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL 1. Check for badly rusted or corroded water pump body and
vane assembly.
2. Check for rough operation due to excessive end play.
INSTALLATION 1. Install new O-rings to water pump.
2. Apply engine oil and engine coolant to the O-rings as shown.
NOTE: Locate the O-ring with white paint mark to engine front side.
Page 2774
Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection
A/T INDICATOR
A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate
1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL 1. Select "METER/M&A;" on CONSULT-III. 2.
Using "DATA MONITOR", confirm each indication while operating the shift lever.
NOTE: If more than one input is ON, A/T indicator will enter fail-safe function and the display will
turn off.
OK or NG OK - Replace combination meter. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Combination Meter. NG - GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TCM Perform self-diagnosis of TCM. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool
Testing and Procedures. OK or NG OK - Replace combination meter. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Combination
Meter. NG - Perform "Diagnostic Procedure" for displayed DTC.
Page 1066
1. Remove the camshaft. Refer to See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and
Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the valve lifter that was measured as being outside
the standard specifications.
3. Measure the center thickness of the removed lifter with a micrometer as shown. 4. Use the
equation below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement.
- Thickness of new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the
cylinder).
Available thickness of valve lifter: 27 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.40 mm (0.3102 to 0.3307 in) in
steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to See: Maintenance.
CAUTION: Install identification letter at the end and top, (U) and (N), at each of proper positions.
(Be careful of mis-installation between intake and exhaust.) 5. Install the selected replacement
valve lifter. 6. Install the camshaft. Refer to See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push
Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 7. Rotate the crankshaft a few turns
by hand. 8. Confirm that the valve clearances are within specification. 9. After the engine has been
run to full operating temperature, confirm that the valve clearances are within specification.
Page 3823
- Rear air mix door motor
7. Disconnect the ducts from the rear heater and cooling unit assembly. 8. Remove the rear heater
and cooling unit assembly.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose with a new
one, and apply compressor oil to it when installing it.
- After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks.
NOTE: Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair.
- Recharge the A/C system. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service
Procedure.
Page 3101
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 143
Page 1116
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Oil
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
............. API or ILSAC Certified Energy Conserving Viscosity ............................................................
................................................................................................................................................. SAE
5W-30
Page 2174
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion -
Use a reliable straightedge and feeler gauge to check the flatness of the exhaust manifold mating
surfaces.
Limit : 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Arrow Indicates : Engine front
- Install the RH bank (1) and LH bank (2) exhaust manifold nuts in the order as shown.
CAUTION: Before installing a heated oxygen sensor or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean the exhaust manifold
threads using Tool, and apply anti-seize lubricant.
- Do not over-tighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor or heated oxygen sensors. Doing so may cause
damage.
Page 1092
OIL PUMP
OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)
Page 538
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Page 5118
- through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
- to BCM terminal 70.
With the ignition switch turned to ON or START position, power is supplied through 10A fuse [No.12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
- to rear window defogger relay terminal 1
- through 10A fuse [No.16, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
- to BCM terminal 38
- through 10A fuse [No. 2, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
- to front air control terminal 15.
Ground is supplied to BCM terminal 67
- to front air control terminal 36
- through body grounds M57, M61 and M79
- to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 60
- through body grounds E9, E15 and E24.
When front air control (rear window defogger switch) is turned to ON, ground is supplied to BCM terminal 9
- through front air control terminal 16
- through front air control terminal 36
- through body grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Then rear window defogger switch is illuminated. Then BCM recognizes that rear window defogger
switch is turned to ON. Then it sends rear window defogger switch signals to IPDM E/R and display
control unit (with color display) via CAN communication (CAN-H, CAN-L). When IPDM E/R
receives rear window defogger switch signals, ground is supplied to rear window defogger relay terminal 2
- through IPDM E/R terminal 52
- through IPDM E/R terminal 60
- through body grounds E9, E15 and E24.
Then rear window defogger relay is energized. With power and ground supplied, rear window
defogger filaments heat and defog the rear window. When rear window defogger relay is turned to
ON (with door mirror defogger), power is supplied through rear window defogger relay terminal 5
- through fuse block (J/B) terminal 2Q
- through 10A fuse [No. 8, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
- through fuse block (J/B) terminal 5N
- to door mirror defogger (LH and RH) terminal 6.
Door mirror defogger (LH and RH) terminal 5 is grounded through body grounds M57, M61 and
M79. With power and ground supplied, door mirror defogger filaments heat and defog the mirror.
Page 4438
Hood Latch: Service and Repair
HOOD
Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control
REMOVAL 1. Remove the front grille. Refer to See: Grille/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the front
fender protector (LH). Refer to See: Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair.
3. Disconnect the hood lock cable from the hood lock, and unclip it from the radiator core support
upper and hoodledge.
4. Remove the bolt and the hood opener. 5. Remove the grommet on the dash lower panel, and
pull the hood lock cable toward the passenger room.
CAUTION: While pulling, be careful not to damage the outside of the hood lock cable.
INSTALLATION 1. Pull the hood lock cable through the dash lower panel hole to the engine room.
Page 3511
Brake Control/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the brake caliper assemblies from the rear wheel hub and spindle assemblies without
disconnecting the brake lines, using power tool.
Position the brake caliper assemblies aside using suitable wire. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Rear.
- Leave the brake line connected to the brake caliper.
- Do not to depress the brake pedal, or the piston will pop out.
- Do not pull or twist the brake hose.
4. Remove the shock absorber upper end nuts using power tool. 5. Disconnect the LH and RH ABS
sensor harness connectors, and disconnect the ABS sensor harness from the rear suspension
member.
6. Remove the LH and RH member stay bolts using power tool. 7. Use a support jack or suitable
tool, to support the rear suspension member. 8. Remove the rear suspension member nuts using
power tool. Then lower the rear suspension member assembly using the support jack.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1371
Timing Cover: Service and Repair
"The content of this article/image reflects the changes identified in TSB NTB 10-046"
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
1. Front timing chain case 2. Seal ring 3. Collared O-ring 4. IVT control valve cover RH 5. Chain
tensioner cover 6. Collared O-ring 7. Seal ring 8. IVT control valve cover LH 9. RH engine
mounting bracket 10. Water pump cover 11. Water hose clamp 12. Crankshaft pulley 13. Front oil
seal 14. Idler pulley
15. Idler pulley bracket A. Refer to Installation B. To A/C compressor
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove engine under cover. 2. Drain the engine oil. 3. Drain the engine coolant from the
radiator. 4. Drain the power steering fluid. 5. Remove engine room cover. 6. Remove front air duct.
7. Remove battery tray. 8. Remove upper radiator hose. 9. Disconnect engine coolant reservoir
hose from the radiator and remove engine coolant reservoir.
Specifications
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Camshaft Sprocket
Page 4898
Courtesy Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Wiring Diagram - INT/L LT-INT/L-01
Page 707
Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline
Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline
Classification: GI99-001F
Reference: NTB99-020F
Date: August 8, 2008
LIMITATIONS ON FLAT TOWING OF NISSAN VEHICLES
This bulletin has been amended to apply to all current production models. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models
APPLIED DATES: 1992-2009
SERVICE INFORMATION
This Bulletin contains important guidelines and limitations concerning towing of Nissan vehicles
with all four wheels on the ground ("flat towing").
CAUTION:
Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission or drivetrain damage. For all
towing including "emergency towing" procedures refer to the Owners Manual.
1. 4WD/AWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT):
^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components.
^ DO NOT use a tow dolly - doing so will damage drivetrain components.
2. FWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT) and Altima Hybrid:
^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components.
^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's front wheels.
^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.
3. RWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission:
^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components.
^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's rear wheels.
^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.
4. 2WD/4WD vehicles equipped with a manual transmission:
^ Always flat tow with the manual transmission in Neutral.
^ Always flat tow a manual transmission vehicle facing forward.
^ Maximum speed while flat towing: 60 MPH.
^ After towing for 500 miles, stop. Start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two
minutes - failure to do so may cause damage to the transmission.
^ For 4WD vehicles, always flat tow with the transfer case in the 2 HI position.
Locations
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 789
9. Carefully cut the low pressure pipe (1) using a suitable tool (ratchet-type pipe cutter) (A) as
shown.
CAUTION: Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when cutting the pipe.
A small amount of refrigerant may discharge from the pipe when it is cut.
10. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum hose from the intake manifold collector to allow
removal of the cut A/C pipes.
11. Disconnect the high pressure pipe connection (1), low pressure pipe connection (2), and the
A/C pipe clamp bolt (A) located near the RH front
suspension strut tower (3) as shown.
12. Disconnect the high/low pressure pipe connector bolt (1) from the front expansion valve as
shown.
- Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube (2)
- Electric throttle control actuator (3)
- Arrow Indicates Front
13. Use a suitable tool to pry the pipe support clip (1) from the threaded stud on the dash panel as
shown.
- Arrow Indicates Front
14. Remove the top section of the high/low pressure pipe (1) as shown.
Commercial Service Tools
Axle Shaft Assembly: Tools and Equipment Commercial Service Tools
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool
Page 2614
5. Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of the cooler inlet hose.
6. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose. 7. Wrap a shop rag around the
air gun tip and end of cooler outlet hose. 8. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (71 128 psi) through the cooler outlet hose to force any remaining A/T fluid into the coffee filter. 9.
Remove the coffee filter from the end of the cooler inlet hose.
10. Perform "A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE".
A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. Inspect the coffee filter for debris.
a. If small metal debris less than 1mm (0.040 in) in size or metal powder is found in the coffee filter,
this is normal. If normal debris is found, the
A/T fluid cooler/radiator can be re-used and the procedure is ended.
b. If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1mm (0.040 in) in size and/or peeled
clutch facing material is found in the coffee filter,
the fluid cooler is not serviceable. The radiator/fluid cooler must be replaced and the inspection
procedure is ended.
A/T FLUID COOLER FINAL INSPECTION After performing all procedures, ensure that all
remaining oil is cleaned from all components.
Service and Repair
Mud Flap: Service and Repair
MUDGUARD
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove screws and pushpins from mudguard.
NOTE: For center mudguard, remove rear first. 2. Remove mudguard (front/rear).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Testing and Inspection
Fusible Link: Testing and Inspection
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Fusible Link
A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its
condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp.
CAUTION: If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying
circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of incident.
- Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape.
- Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts.
Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock
Installation/Removal
Wheel Fastener: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock
Installation/Removal
Classification: WT09-002
Reference: NTB09-056
Date: July 14, 2009
ACCESSORY WHEEL LOCKS INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
Always use hand tools when installing or removing accessory wheel lock nuts.
WARNING:
Do not use power tools to install or remove accessory wheel lock nuts.
Use of an impact wrench or other power tool may cause permanent damage to the wheel lock nut
and/or key.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Accessory wheel locks, wheel lock keys, or vehicle wheels that are damaged due to improper
installation or removal will not be considered a manufacturer defect and will not be covered under
warranty.
Accessory Wheel Lock Installation / Removal Guidelines
^ For ease of removal, the wheel lock nut should always be the first lug nut removed.
^ If needed, clean threads on lug studs with a wire brush.
^ The wheel lock nut should always be the last lug nut tightened.
^ Always use the special key supplied in the wheel lock set to install and remove the wheel locks.
^ Always tighten the wheel lock nuts using a hand torque wrench to the torque specification in the
Service Manual.
Disclaimer
Page 3844
1. Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment
gauges.
No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines.
2. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using
recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant
identifier. If NG, refer to See: Service Precautions/Precautions/Contaminated Refrigerant.
3. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and
refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to See: Service
Precautions/Precautions/Contaminated Refrigerant.
4. Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure oil discharged
into the recovery/recycling equipment. 5. Drain the oil from the "old" (removed) compressor into a
graduated container and recover the amount of oil drained. 6. Drain the oil from the "new"
compressor into a separate, clean container. 7. Measure an amount of new oil installed equal to
amount drained from "old" compressor. Add this oil to "new" compressor through the suction port
opening.
8. Measure an amount of new oil equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this oil to
"new" compressor through the suction port
opening.
9. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of
oil at this time.
CAUTION: Do not add this 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil if only replacing the compressor.
Page 1965
COLLECT DATA
Collect CONSULT-III Data Print out or save the following CONSULT-III data. SELF-DIAG RESULTS
- CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU list" included)
NOTE: Some items may not be needed depending on CAN system type of vehicle.
Page 3039
The rear wheel sensor rotor is built into the rear wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure,
refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Wheel Hub.
Component Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3104
Page 2413
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 1081
2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and
forth) movement (see Example 2):
^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm.
^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended.
Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped)
No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible.
Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the rotor.
NOTE:
The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is
removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected.
1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel.
2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front.
^ Pulley should be locked.
^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator.
3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front.
Page 2677
Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Disassembly And Assembly (Left Side)
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
Disassembly and Assembly (Left Side)
DISASSEMBLY
Transaxle Side 1. Mount front drive shaft in a vise.
CAUTION: When mounting shaft in a vise, always use copper or aluminum plates between vise
and shaft. 2. Remove boot bands and slide the boot back. 3. Remove circlip and dust shield from
slide joint housing. 4. Put matching marks on slide joint housing and shaft before separating joint
assembly.
5. Remove stopper ring with a suitable tool, then pull out slide joint housing.
Page 1657
4. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. -
Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable
pedal electric motor as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the
accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal
nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from
the pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
9. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the
adjustable accelerator pedal as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity.
10. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when
applying or releasing the accelerator pedal.
- Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding
or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward.
- Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See:
Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator
Pedal Released Position Learning.
NON-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL
Removal 1. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the upper
and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 3. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from
the pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
Page 1027
Arrow: Indicates engine front
- Position the camshafts: RH exhaust camshaft dowel pin at about 10 o'clock. LH exhaust camshaft
dowel pin at about 2 o'clock.
7. Before installing No. 1 camshaft brackets, apply sealant to mating surface of No. 1 camshaft
bracket. Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants.
Page 5157
> Window glass run rubber is replaced.
> Window is partly opened and/or closed many times without being fully closed.
Page 3494
Radius Arm: Service and Repair
RADIUS ROD
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly using power tool. Refer to See: Wheels and
Tires/Service and Repair/Pax Run Flat Tires And Wheels See:
Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel.
2. Set a transmission jack or suitable tool, to relieve the coil spring tension and support the radius
rod.
3. Disconnect the radius rod from the rear suspension member using power tool.
4. Disconnect the radius rod nut and bolt from the wheel hub and spindle assembly using power
tool, then remove the radius rod.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Suspension. After installing the radius rod, check the wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to See:
Alignment/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension.
Page 1346
Page EM-16
Page 4794
to combination meter via CAN communication line. When the combination meter receives the seat
belt warning signal, it sounds the warning chime. The BCM controls the (6 second) duration of the
seat belt warning chime.
Page 3287
Specifications
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Injector
Specifications
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Mass Air Flow Sensor
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Power Distribution Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection
1.FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK INSPECTION Check that the following fusible links or IPDM E/R
fuses are not blown.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - Replace fuse or fusible link. 2.POWER CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1.
Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E120. 3. Check voltage
between IPDM E/R harness connector E120 terminals 1, 2 and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Repair or replace IPDM E/R power circuit harness. 3.GROUND
CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E121 and E124.
2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121(A) terminal 60, E124(B) terminal
38 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG OK - Inspection End. NG - Repair or replace IPDM E/R ground circuit harness.
Page 4135
Cellular Phone: Service and Repair
TELEPHONE
Removal and Installation
BLUETOOTH CONTROL UNIT
Removal 1. Remove front passenger seat. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and
Repair/Front Seat/Removal And Installation.
2. Remove Bluetooth control unit (1) from bluetooth control unit bracket by removing screws (A)
and disconnecting harness connector (2).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: When replacing bluetooth control unit, Perform pairing procedure. Refer to Owner's Manual
Pairing Procedure.
BLUETOOTH ON INDICATOR
Removal 1. Remove front overhead console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair.
2. Release Bluetooth ON indicator tabs (A) and remove indicator (1).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
MICROPHONE
Removal 1. Remove front overhead console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair.
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... 7 7/8 qt (7.4L)
Page 3028
Page 1232
Page EM-15
Page 2899
Cylinder Body
CAUTION: Use new brake fluid to clean. Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene.
Check inner wall of cylinder for corrosion, wear, and damage. If any non-standard condition is
detected, replace cylinder body.
- Minor flaws caused by corrosion or a foreign material can be removed by polishing the surface
with a fine sandpaper. Replace the cylinder body, if necessary.
Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace
the affected part.
Piston
CAUTION: Since the piston surface is plated, do not repair using sandpaper. Check piston surface
for corrosion, wear, and damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part.
Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots Check that there is no wear, damage, or cracks in the
sliding pin bolts and sliding pin boots, and if there are, replace them.
ASSEMBLY
1. Apply a rubber grease to the piston seal and attach to cylinder body.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the piston seals.
2. Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to the piston boot, place it on the piston, and firmly insert the
piston boot cylinder-side lip into the cylinder
body groove.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the piston boot. 3. Apply a brake fluid to the piston, insert into the cylinder
body by hand and firmly attach the piston boot piston-side lip into the piston boot.
CAUTION: Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from
being rubbed.
Page 2657
IMPORTANT:
Make sure to mark the drive shaft and hub as shown in Figure 1 before removing the drive shaft.
NOTE:
Do not remove the axles from the transmission for this bulletin.
2. Apply a moderate coat of Molykote M77 Grease (P/N 44003-7S000) to the entire front wheel
drive shaft bearing surface (see Figure 2).
Page 1755
Service and Repair
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair
BRAKE FLUID
Bleeding Brake System
CAUTION: Carefully monitor brake fluid level at the sub tank during bleeding operation.
- Fill the sub tank with new brake fluid. Refer to See: . Make sure it is full at all times while bleeding
the air out of system.
- Place a container under the sub tank to avoid spilling brake fluid.
- Do not loosen the line fittings at the ABS actuator during air bleeding.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and control unit connector or negative
battery terminal. 2. Connect a transparent vinyl tube and container to air bleeder valve.
3. Fully depress brake pedal several times. 4. With brake pedal depressed, open air bleeder valve
to release air. 5. Close air bleeder valve. 6. Release brake pedal slowly. 7. Tighten air bleeder
valve to specification.
Air bleeder valve : Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake
Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front/Exploded View, See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Rear/Exploded View.
8. Repeat steps 2 through 7 until no more air bubbles come out of air bleeder valve. 9. Bleed the
brake hydraulic system air bleeder valves in the following order:
Right rear brake to Left front brake to Left rear brake to Right front brake
Diagram Information and Instructions
Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Page 2425
Spark Plug: Specifications Torque
Spark Plug
Page 4888
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Page 3293
Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Combination Switch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
COMBINATION SWITCH
Combination Switch Inspection
1.SYSTEM CHECK 1. Referring to table below, check to which system the malfunctioning switch
belongs.
- GO TO 2. 2.SYSTEM CHECK With CONSULT-III 1. Connect CONSULT-III, and select "COMB
SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR". 3. Select "START" and
confirm that other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally. Without CONSULT-III
Operate combination switch and confirm that other switches in malfunctioning system operate
normally. Example: When auto light switch is malfunctioning, confirm that "FRONT WIPER LOW"
and "FRONT WIPER INT" in System 3, to which the auto light switch belongs, operate normally.
Check results
Other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally.-Replace lighting switch or wiper switch.
Other switches in malfunctioning system do not operate normally. - GO TO 3.
3.HARNESS INSPECTION 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM and combination
switch connectors. 3. Check for continuity between BCM harness connector of the suspect system
and the corresponding combination switch connector terminals.
4. Check for continuity between each terminal of BCM harness connector in suspect malfunctioning
system and ground.
Page 150
Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Page 881
Refrigerant: Service Precautions Precaution For Leak Detection Dye
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Leak Detection Dye
- The A/C system contains a fluorescent leak detection dye used for locating refrigerant leaks. An
ultraviolet (UV) lamp is required to illuminate the dye when inspecting for leaks.
- Always wear fluorescence enhancing UV safety glasses to protect your eyes and enhance the
visibility of the fluorescent dye.
- The fluorescent dye leak detector is not a replacement for an electronic refrigerant leak detector.
The fluorescent dye leak detector should be used in conjunction with an electronic refrigerant leak
detector (J-41995).
- For your safety and the customer's satisfaction, read and follow all manufacturer's operating
instructions and precautions prior to performing work.
- A compressor shaft seal should not be repaired because of dye seepage. The compressor shaft
seal should only be repaired after confirming the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector
(J-41995).
- Always remove any dye from the leak area after repairs are complete to avoid a misdiagnosis
during a future service.
- Do not allow dye to come into contact with painted body panels or interior components. If dye is
spilled, clean immediately with the approved dye cleaner. Fluorescent dye left on a surface for an
extended period of time cannot be removed.
- Do not spray the fluorescent dye cleaning agent on hot surfaces (engine exhaust manifold, etc.).
- Do not use more than one refrigerant dye bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) per A/C system.
- Leak detection dyes for HFC-134a (R134a) and CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems are different. Do not
use HFC-134a (R134a) leak detection dye in CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems or CFC-12 (R-12) leak
detection dye in HFC-134a (R134a) A/C systems or A/C system damage may result.
- The fluorescent properties of the dye will remain for over three (3) years unless a compressor
failure occurs.
Page 3614
3. Disconnect the air mix door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the three screws and remove
the air mix door motor.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FRONT AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER)
Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly
HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Disconnect the air mix door motor electrical
connector. 3. Remove the three screws and remove the air mix door motor.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the rear air mix door motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the three screws and
remove the rear air mix door motor.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4160
Rear Vision Camera: Service and Repair
REAR VIEW MONITOR
Rear View Camera
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Remove license lamp finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Exterior Moulding /
Trim/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect rear view camera connector (1). 3. Remove rear view camera screw and remove
rear view camera.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: After installing rear view camera, perform side distance guideline correction procedure.
Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Page 2108
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Power Distribution Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection
1.FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK INSPECTION Check that the following fusible links or IPDM E/R
fuses are not blown.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - Replace fuse or fusible link. 2.POWER CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1.
Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E120. 3. Check voltage
between IPDM E/R harness connector E120 terminals 1, 2 and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Repair or replace IPDM E/R power circuit harness. 3.GROUND
CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E121 and E124.
2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121(A) terminal 60, E124(B) terminal
38 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG OK - Inspection End. NG - Repair or replace IPDM E/R ground circuit harness.
Page 1219
Page EM-2
ATC
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair ATC
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and
Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure.
2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector and remove the refrigerant pressure
sensor from the condenser.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Component.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
- Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil
to it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 3952
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Air Bag (Satellite) Sensor
SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at
least three minutes.
1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. 2.
Remove seat belt pre-tensioner. Refer to See: Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and
Repair/Front Seat Belt.
3. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor (1) nuts. 4. Disconnect the side air bag (satellite) sensor
harness connector (2).
CAUTION: Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts.
- Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it
shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one.
- Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor.
- Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to See: Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
VDC/TCS/ABS
Acceleration/Deceleration Sensor: Locations VDC/TCS/ABS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 1983
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) -
Models with TCS
- Models with VDC
TCM
NOTE: Replace the unit when "NG" is indicated on the "INITIAL DIAG".
Page 122
Page 1979
5. Fill out the diagnosis sheet based on information from step 4.
a. The ABS warning lamp turned ON and speedometer did not move: Assume that a possible cause
is no communication between M&A; and
ABS. Draw a line between M&A; and ABS. (Line 5-a in the figure below).
b. The tachometer moved normally: Put check marks between ECM and M&A.; The circuit between
ECM and M&A; is functioning properly
(check marks 5-b in the figure below).
Page 1489
ATC
HEATER CORE
Removal and Installation
FRONT HEATER CORE
Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and
Repair/Removal And Installation.
2. Remove the side cover.
Page 1827
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3265
Multiple Junction Connector: Description and Operation
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) -
The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration below. Refer to the description of the slide-locking type connector.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration below.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 2811
Repair Flow Chart
Page 1112
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-50288 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets (no picture shown).
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioners
plungers. Figure 1 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tools where shown in
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Page 2301
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly
Fuel Level Sender Unit
Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors (1) and the wire connector (4). 2. Remove the
fuel sensor (2) from the pump assembly. 3. Depress the tabs (3) and remove the floater arm
assembly (5).
Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly.
Locations
Impact Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SRS Component Parts Location
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 3998
^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times.
14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt.
Service and Repair
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
REAR VIEW MONITOR
Rear View Camera Control Unit
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the front passenger seat. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Front Seat/Removal And Installation. 3.
Disconnect the rear view camera control unit connector.
4. Remove the screws (1) and remove the rear view camera control unit (2).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Customer Interest Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation
Classification: BT07-032A
Reference: NTB07-070A
Date: September 25, 2009
SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been revised. No other changes
have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2007 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2007 - 2009
Maxima (A34, A35) 2007 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007 - 2009 Quest (V42) 2007 - 2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
Sunroof auto operation will not work or sunroof does not operate properly:
^ When the battery has been disconnected or discharged
^ When the sunroof motor has been disconnected from power
^ When the sunroof motor was changed
ACTION
Perform the following initialization procedure:
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully
closed.
3. After the sunroof has closed all the way, push and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) again for
more than 2 seconds to re-learn motor position.
4. Initialization is complete if the sunroof operates normally.
NOTE:
If the sunroof is still not operating properly after initialization, refer to ASIST and section RF of the
Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis and repair information.
Page 3565
3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2.
^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process
Tire:
^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area)
NOTE:
Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may
become un-balanced.
Wheel:
^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area.
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area
4. Before inflating the tire:
^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks.
Page 2289
- Position clips in grooves on the fuel injectors.
- Align the protrusions of the fuel tube assembly with those of the fuel injectors.
- After properly inserting the fuel injectors onto the fuel tube assembly, check that the fuel tube
protrusions are engaged with those of fuel injectors, and the flanges of the fuel tube assembly are
fully engaged with the clips.
3. Tighten fuel tube assembly bolts in the order as shown, in two steps:
CAUTION: After properly connecting fuel tube assembly to injector and fuel hose, check connection for fuel
leakage.
4. Install the quick connector as follows:
a. Make sure no foreign substances are deposited in and around the fuel tube and quick connector
and that there is no damage. b. Align the center to insert the quick connector straight onto the fuel
tube. c. Insert the fuel tube until a click is heard.
d. Install the quick connector cap.
5. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Make sure there are no fuel leaks at connections as follows:
1. Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check
for fuel leaks at connections. 2. Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at
connections.
CAUTION: Do not touch engine immediately after stopping as engine is extremely hot.
NOTE: Use mirrors for checking on connections out of the direct line of sight.
Automatic Back Door System
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Automatic Back Door System
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Service and Repair
Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. Refer to See: Wheels and
Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Without disassembling the hydraulic
lines, remove brake caliper using power tool. Reposition it aside with wire. Refer to See: Brakes
and Traction
Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Front Disc Brake.
NOTE: Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
3. Put alignment marks on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor.
4. Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock
Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed
Sensor/Service and Repair/TCS/ABS/Wheel Sensors (TCS/ABS), See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and
Repair/VDC/TCS/ABS/Wheel Sensors (VDC/TCS/ABS).
CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness. 5. Remove cotter pin, then remove lock nut from
drive shaft using power tool. 6. Remove steering outer tie-rod cotter pin at steering knuckle, then
loosen nut using power tool. Refer to See: Steering Gear/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement,
Removal
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Removal
LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Removal
1. Remove steering column cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Steering Column Cover.
2. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and disconnect from
the base.
Page 2761
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Page 1520
b. Apply a continuous bead of RTV Silicone Sealant, or equivalent, to mating surface of chain
tensioner cover and water pump cover. Refer to
See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants.
9. Install water drain plug on water pump side of cylinder block.
Water drain plug : 9.5 N.m (0.97 kg-m, 76 in-lb)
10. Tighten idler pulley bolts.
Idler pulley bolts : 34.8 N.m (3.5 kg-m, 26 ft-lb)
11. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
- Refill engine coolant. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair.
- After starting engine, let idle for three minutes, then rev engine up to 3,000 rpm under no load to
purge air from the high-pressure chamber of the chain tensioner. The engine may produce a
rattling noise. This indicates that air still remains in the chamber and is not a matter of concern.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for engine coolant leaks. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Inspection.
- Start and warm up the engine. Visually make sure that there are no engine coolant leaks or A/T
fluid leaks.
Page 2407
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 1886
Page 1452
Water Pump: Service and Repair
WATER PUMP
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from
high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator.
CAUTION: When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to get coolant on drive belt.
- Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit.
After installing water pump, connect hose and clamp securely, then check for leaks using radiator
cap tester.
REMOVAL 1. Drain engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to See: Cooling
System/Coolant/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 2. Remove engine coolant reservoir tank. Refer to
See: Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair. 3. Remove IPDM E/R bolts and position aside.
Refer to See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair. 4.
Remove RH wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and
Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 5. Remove fender protector (RH). Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair. 6. Remove drive belts. Refer
to See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 7. Remove
idler pulley and idler pulley bracket. 8. Support engine and remove front engine insulator and
bracket. Refer to See: Service and Repair.
9. Remove water drain plug on water pump side of cylinder block.
10. Remove chain tensioner cover and water pump cover.
Locations
Ambient Light Sensor: Locations
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 3807
3. Reposition the coolant reservoir tank aside. 4. Reposition the power steering fluid reservoir
aside. 5. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Procedures. 6. Remove the high-pressure pipe.
Refer to See: Locations.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Locations.
CAUTION: -
Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when
installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Removal And Installation For High/Low-Pressure Pipe
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for High/Low-Pressure Pipe
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A)
Service Procedure.
WARNING: Avoid breathing the A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate the eyes, nose and
throat.
- If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming removal.
2. Remove the cowl top cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service
and Repair. 3. Disconnect the ECM from the cowl top extension and reposition it out of the way. 4.
Remove the two heater pump clips from the cowl top extension and reposition the heater pump out
of the way. Refer to See: Heater Core/Service
and Repair/Heater Pump.
5. Disconnect the heater hose clips from the cowl top extension and reposition the heater hose out
of the way. 6. Remove the wiper motor and linkage. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer
Systems/Wiper Motor/Service and Repair/Front Wiper And Washer
System.
7. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding /
Trim/Service and Repair.
8. Carefully cut the high pressure pipe (1) using a suitable tool (ratchet-type pipe cutter) (A) as
shown.
CAUTION: Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when cutting the pipe.
A small amount of refrigerant may discharge from the pipe when it is cut.
- Do not allow debris to fall into the cut ends of the pipe.
Page 649
5. Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180° degrees (1/2 turn).
If the wheels have rotated more than 180° degrees (1/2 turn), try the above procedure again from
the beginning. Never push vehicle backward.
6. Measure distance "B" (front side).
Total toe-in : Refer to See: Specifications/Rear Suspension/Wheel Alignment.
7. Adjust toe-in by turning the adjusting bolts.
NOTE: Toe changes about 1.5 mm (0.059 in) [one side] with each graduation of the adjusting bolt.
8. Tighten the adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to See: Steering and
Suspension/Suspension/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Rear Suspension.
Page 3677
Page 2022
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 1083
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection
DRIVE BELTS
Checking Drive Belts
WARNING: Be sure to perform when the engine is not running. 1. Inspect belt for cracks, fraying,
wear or oil adhesion. If necessary, replace with a new one.
2. Inspect drive belt deflections by applying 98 N (10 kg-f, 22 lb-f) on the belt midway between
pulleys as shown. 3. Measure the belt tension using Tool at the locations as shown.
Tool number : BT-3373-F
NOTE: Inspect drive belt deflection or tension when engine is cold.
- Adjust if belt deflections exceed the limit or if belt tension is not within specifications.
CAUTION:
- When checking belt deflection or tension immediately after installation, first adjust it to the
specification value. Then, after turning the crankshaft two turns or more, readjust to the specified
value to avoid variation in deflection between pulleys.
- Tighten idler pulley lock nut by hand and measure deflection or tension without looseness.
Page 819
8. Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches of vacuum. The gauge may not
reach 28 inches in high altitude locations, use the
vacuum specifications below, based on the altitude above sea level.
9. When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20
seconds to see if the system loses any vacuum. If
the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the system and repeat steps 6 - 8 to
bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks.
10. Place the coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the
radiator. Then open the ball valve on the refill hose so
the coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling system is full when the vacuum
gauge reads zero.
CAUTION: Do not allow the coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being
drawn into the cooling system.
11. Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening. 12. Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to
the specified level, and install the radiator cap. Run the engine to warm up the cooling system and
top up
the system as necessary.
FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM 1. Fill the radiator from the filler neck above the radiator upper
hose and reservoir tank with clean water and reinstall radiator filler cap. 2. Run the engine and
warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Rev the engine two or three times under no-load. 4.
Stop the engine and wait until it cools down. 5. Drain the water from the system. Refer to See: . 6.
Repeat steps 1 through 5 until clear water begins to drain from the radiator.
Locations
Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Locations
Seat Memory Switch: Locations
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
A/C - TXV (Thermal Expansion Valve) Replacement
Expansion Valve: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - TXV (Thermal Expansion Valve) Replacement
Classification: HA10-004
Reference: NTB10-044
Date: March 17, 2010
A/C TXV (THERMAL EXPANSION VALVE) REPLACEMENT
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002-2010 Altima (L31, L32) 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier
(D40) 2004-2010 Maxima (A34, A35) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2009 Quest (V42)
2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
SERVICE INFORMATION
The A/C TXV (thermal expansion valve) is available separately as a service part for the Applied
Vehicles.
If the A/C TXV needs to be replaced for any reason AND the evaporator is operating normally:
^ Replace the TXV only. Do not replace the heater and cooling unit assembly or the evaporator
assembly.
^ Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual for TXV removal and installation instructions.
Page 1246
Page EM-4
Page 2560
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Specifications
Connecting Rod: Specifications
CONNECTING ROD
Tighten the connecting rod bolts in two steps:
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage
Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision
Damage
Classification: FA10-006
Reference: NTB10-126
Date: October 21, 2010
WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight
indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise.
NOTE:
Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a
warrantable repair
If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension
damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows:
1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle.
2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands.
3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise).
4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one.
Page 1664
Page 1296
Tool number : (J-50288)
- If the original timing chain markings are not legible, use paint or equivalent to mark the timing
chains to the sprockets.
4. If removing the timing chains (secondary), loosen camshaft sprocket bolts. 5. Compress the
timing chain tensioner (primary).
a. Pull lever down and release plunger stopper tab. Plunger stopper tab can be pushed up to
release (coaxial structure with lever).
b. Insert stopper pin into timing chain tensioner (primary) body hole to hold lever, and keep the
stopper tab released. c. Depress the plunger into the tensioner body by pressing the slack guide. d.
Keep the slack guide pressed and lock the plunger in by pushing the stopper pin through the lever
and into the chain tensioner body hole. - Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246.
6. Remove the internal chain guide.
- Slack guide does not need to be removed.
7. Remove timing chain (primary).
CAUTION:
Page 2547
12. Remove return spring.
13. Remove snap ring using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage oil pump assembly and 2nd brake piston.
14. While pushing the 2nd brake piston by hand, apply compressed air (4kg/cm2) into the oil
passage as shown and remove 2nd brake piston (With
2nd brake sleeve).
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage 2nd brake piston and 2nd brake sleeve.
15. Remove O-rings from 2nd brake piston and 2nd brake sleeve.
INSPECTION Check that the sliding surface of discs and plates is not worn or burnt. If the discs or plates is worn
or burnt, replace it
CAUTION: Replace new clutch discs by soaking them at least 2 hours in ATF.
ASSEMBLY
Page 1140
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50288 (Ring Gear Stop) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on
December 3, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account was charged $26.90 plus applicable taxes and
freight.Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins), also considered
"Essential", was shipped to each dealer November 2009.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Write down all radio station presets.
Page 954
^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps.
5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure.
Generally this is 40psi.
If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure:
a. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
c. Remount the tire.
6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area.
^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel.
NOTE:
Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated.
If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform
1. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
3. Remount the tire.
Page 2930
CAUTION: -
Since the piston surface is plated, do not repair using sandpaper.
- Check piston surface for corrosion, wear, and damage. If any non-standard condition is detected,
replace applicable part.
Sliding Pins, Sliding Pin Bolts, and Sliding Pin Boots Check sliding pins, sliding pin bolts, and
sliding pin boot for wear, damage, and cracks. If damage or deformation is present, replace the
affected part.
DISC ROTOR INSPECTION
Visual Inspection Check surface of the disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If
any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part.
Runout Inspection 1. Using wheel nuts, secure disc rotor to the wheel hub in 2 or more positions.
2. Inspect runout using a dial gauge.
CAUTION: Before measuring, make sure the axle end play is 0 mm (0 in). Refer to See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Testing and Inspection/Front Wheel Hub And Knuckle.
3. If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by shifting mounting positions of the
disc rotor and wheel hub by one hole. 4. If runout is outside the specified value after performing the
above operation, turn the disc rotor using Tool.
Tool number : 38-PFM90.5
Thickness Inspection
Using a micrometer, check thickness of the disc rotor. If thickness does not meet specification,
replace disc rotor.
Page 4787
Mechanical Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Mechanical Specifications
Oil Pump
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit
OIL PRESSURE
REGULATOR VALVE
OIL PUMP
OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)
Regulator Valve
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit
OIL PRESSURE
REGULATOR VALVE
Locations
Trailer Lighting Module: Locations
TRAILER TOW
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 2326
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when
applying or releasing the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See:
Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator
Pedal Released Position Learning.
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL ELECTRIC MOTOR
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal.
3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable
pedal electric motor as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector.
5. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the
adjustable accelerator pedal as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 6. Remove the
adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the adjustable pedal electric motor.
- Avoid damage from dropping the adjustable pedal electric motor during handling.
- Keep the adjustable pedal electric motor away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding
or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward.
- Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released
Page 3414
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following: Refer to "Removal and Installation" for tightening torques.
CAUTION: Do not reuse non-reusable parts. When installing wheel hub and bearing assembly to steering knuckle, align cutout in toner ring
cover with wheel sensor mounting hole in steering knuckle.
- When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks. (When not using
the alignment mark, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake
Caliper/Service and Repair/Front Disc Brake.)
Page 4571
Removal 1. Remove seat belt shoulder anchor and D ring. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat
Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Front Seat Belt. 2. Remove front and rear kicking
plates. 3. Remove center pillar lower finisher. Refer to "CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER". 4.
Remove cover and screws. 5. Remove center pillar upper finisher.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR CENTER PILLAR FINISHER
Removal 1. Remove rear kicking plate. 2. Remove rear kick escutcheon. 3. Remove cargo net
hook using Tool.
Tool number : J-47126
4. Remove rear lower finisher assembly. 5. Remove seat belt D rings from rear center pillar
finisher. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Second
Row Seat Belt.
6. Remove cover and screws from rear center pillar finisher. 7. Remove rear center pillar finisher.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
DASH SIDE FINISHER (UPPER, LOWER)
Removal 1. Remove front kicking plate. 2. Remove upper dash side finisher.
3. Remove lower dash side finisher.
CAUTION: Insert screw driver rolled with cloth between panel on vehicle and clip (as indicated with
arrow), and disconnect clip.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FRONT PILLAR FINISHER
Removal 1. Remove defrost grille assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Air
Duct/Service and Repair/Automatic/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove upper dash side finisher.
Refer to "DASH SIDE FINISHER (UPPER, LOWER)". 3. Release clips and remove front pillar
finisher.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR LOWER FINISHER ASSEMBLY
Page 3783
ATC
HEATER CORE
Removal and Installation
FRONT HEATER CORE
Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly
HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the side cover.
Page 2050
Page 1418
2. Remove the lock ring using a socket drive handle and Tool as shown.
Tool number : KV991J0090 (J-46214)
3. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly from the fuel tank.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Make sure the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump is free
from defects and foreign materials.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Install the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly with the fuel feed hose facing the
front of the vehicle.
- Turn the lock ring until the lock ring is fully rotated into the fuel tank lock tabs as shown.
- Connect the quick connector as follows:
- Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials.
Component Locations
Information Bus: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts Location
Page 500
Page 4373
1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio,
Stereo, and Compact Disc/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3.
Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Temporarily reconnect the power window switch to the door
harness. 5. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the door
glass bolts can be seen. 6. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 7. Remove the door glass bolts.
8. Raise the door glass up into the door frame/channel and hold in place with a suitable tool (A). 9.
Disconnect the harness connector for the regulator assembly.
10. Remove the regulator nuts, and remove the regulator assembly.
Inspection After Removal Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is
detected, replace or grease it. Wire wear
- Regulator deformation
The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION AND
SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION".
Door glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
Disassembly 1. Remove the regulator motor bolts. 2. Remove the regulator motor from the
regulator assembly.
Assembly Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
FITTING INSPECTION AND SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator nuts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position.
Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in
the motor). Removal and installation of the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the regulator motor from the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the door glass.
- Removal and installation of the door glass run.
Page 4646
^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times.
14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt.
Page 156
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 3117
Starter Motor: Service and Repair
STARTING SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. Refer to See: Battery/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement. 2. Remove the starter insulator.
3. Remove the harness bracket and harness protector from the starter engine room harness. 4.
Disconnect the starter harness connectors.
5. Remove the two starter bolts, using power tools. 6. Remove the starter.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3921
Page 3238
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams
POWER SOCKET
Wiring Diagram - P/SCKT WW-P/SCKT-01
Page 1938
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 3814
NOTE: Reposition the rear heater pipe clamp (3) for additional clearance to remove the lower
section of the high/low pressure pipe as necessary.
d. Pry off the pipe support clip (1) secured to the dash panel threaded stud, using a suitable tool.
e. Carefully remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe (1).
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the open pipe connections with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to
avoid the entry of air, moisture and contamination.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Clean all of the A/C pipe fittings and connections.
- Replace the O-rings of the high/low-pressure pipe with new ones.
- Lubricate all the O-rings with the specified A/C system oil.
NOTE: The service replacement high/low pressure pipe is a two piece pipe assembly. 1. Install and
position the new lower high/low pressure pipe without tightening the connections.
NOTE: To ease installation, first remove the A/C support clip from the lower section high/low
pressure pipe and secure it to the dash panel threaded stud. 2. Install the new upper high/low
pressure pipe through the engine compartment.
a. Install the high/low pressure pipe to the front expansion valve and only hand tighten the
connector bolt (1) as shown.
- Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube (2)
- Electric throttle control actuator (3)
- Arrow Indicates Front
Page 1306
b. Install new seal rings on the IVT control valve covers. c. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to the IVT
control valve covers.
- Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent.
- Being careful not to move the seal ring from the installation groove, align the dowel pins on the
chain case with the holes to install the IVT
control valve covers.
- Tighten the intake valve timing control valve cover bolts in the order as shown.
IVT control valve cover bolts: 11.3 N-m (1.2 kg-m, 100 in-lb)
Removal and Installation (Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the timing chains (primary) and (secondary). 2. Remove the rocker covers. 3. Remove
the camshaft brackets (No. 1). 4. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioners.
Locations
Throttle Position Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 715
Drive Belt: Service and Repair
DRIVE BELTS
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine undercover. 2. Fully loosen each belt. Refer to See: Adjustments.
Remove generator and air conditioner compressor belt and then power steering oil pump belt.
CAUTION: Grease is applied to idler pulley adjusting bolt. Be careful to keep grease away from the
belts.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Make sure belts are correctly engaged with the pulley groove.
- Clean off any oil and coolant on belts and each pulley groove.
- Adjust belt tension. Refer to See: Adjustments.
Page 3566
^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps.
5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure.
Generally this is 40psi.
If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure:
a. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
c. Remount the tire.
6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area.
^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel.
NOTE:
Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated.
If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform
1. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
3. Remount the tire.
Page 1419
- Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the tube until a click is
heard.
- After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by pulling on the tube and the
connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the quick connector.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks: 1. Turn
the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to check the connections for fuel leaks with
the electric fuel pump applying fuel
pressure to the fuel piping.
2. Start the engine and let it idle to check that there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system tube and
hose connections.
Service and Repair
Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair
CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
FRONT AIR CONTROL
Removal 1. Remove the control knobs from the front air control. 2. Remove cluster lid C,
disconnect the front air control electrical connector. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Cluster Lid C.
3. Remove the screws securing the front air control (1) to cluster lid C (2). 4. Remove the front air
control.
Installation Installation is the reverse order of removal.
REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT)
Removal 1. Remove the control knobs from the rear air control (front). 2. Remove the front roof
console assembly from the headlining, located over the rear view mirror. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair.
3. Remove the screws securing the rear air control (front) (1) to the front roof console assembly (2).
4. Remove the rear air control (front).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR)
Removal
Page 3102
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 4392
1. Remove sliding door rail cover. Refer to See: Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect slide door
cables. 3. Remove luggage lower trim. Refer to See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service
and Repair. 4. Disconnect sliding door motor electrical connector. 5. Remove sliding door link
rollers. 6. Remove sliding door cable and motor assembly. 7. Remove sliding door motor from
sliding door cable assembly. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4533
1. Move the 2nd row seat fully forward and lift the seat up. See Figure 1.
NOTE:
^ These photos are for the LH side. Repeat steps 1-4 for the RH side if needed.
2. Check to see if the inner and outer anti-rattle spring has fallen off the seat. See Figure 2.
^ Replace the springs with the ones listed in the Parts Information.
Page 836
Disclaimer
Page 3922
Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Firing Order
1-2-3-4-5-6
Page 3313
Page 3758
6. Remove the two in-cabin microfilters. 7. Remove the evaporator.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the low-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe with new ones.
Apply compressor oil to the O-rings before installing them.
- When installing the in-cabin microfilters, face the microfilters according to the air flow direction
arrow printed on the side of the filters.
Removal And Installation For Rear Evaporator
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Rear Evaporator
Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Page 3794
- Rear air mix door motor
7. Disconnect the ducts from the rear heater and cooling unit assembly. 8. Remove the rear heater
and cooling unit assembly.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high pressure flexible hose with a new
one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
NOTE: Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair.
- Recharge the A/C system. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/Procedures.
Page 1981
Past Error -- Short Circuit -- When the symptoms listed below exist, a short circuit of the CAN
communication line is a possible cause.
Page 5109
Page 1610
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 3923
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Seat Belt Inspection
SEAT BELTS
Seat Belt Inspection
AFTER A COLLISION
WARNING: Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any
collision. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced
unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly.
Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in
use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat
belt pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision
in which the air bags are deployed. Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if: The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts,
retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly).
- The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide).
- The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for
damage or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
- Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.
- The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the
collision in which the air bags are deployed.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS 1. Check the seat belt warning lamp/chime for proper operation as
follows:
a. Switch ignition ON. The seat belt warning lamp should illuminate. Also, the seat belt warning
chime should sound for about seven seconds. b. Fasten driver's seat belt. The seat belt warning
lamp should go out and the chime (if sounding) should stop.
2. If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-III, and air bag
warning lamp. Refer to See: Air Bag
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
3. Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are securely attached. 4.
Check the shoulder seat belt guide and shoulder belt height adjuster for front seats. Ensure guide
swivels freely and that belt lays flat and does not
bind in guide. Ensure height adjuster operates properly and holds securely.
5. Check retractor operation:
a. Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage. b. Allow the seat
belt to retract. Ensure that belt returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the seat belt
does not return smoothly, wipe
the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth, because dirt built up in the loops of the upper
anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly.
c. Fasten the seat belt. Check the seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the
belt does not return smoothly, the cause may be
an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the "SEAT BELT TAPE SET" and perform the following steps.
Inspect the front seat belt through-anchor: 1. Pull the seat belt out to a length of 500 mm (19.69 in)
or more. 2. Use a clip or other device to hold the seat belt at the center pillar belt opening. 3. Pass
a thin wire through the through-anchor belt opening. Hold both ends of the wire and pull taut while
moving it up and down several times
along the belt opening surface to remove dirt.
4. Any dirt that cannot be removed with the wire can be removed by cleaning the opening with a
clean cloth. 5. Apply tape at the point where the belt contacts the through-anchor belt opening.
NOTE: Apply the tape so that there is no looseness or wrinkling. 6. Remove the clip holding the
seat belt and check that the belt returns smoothly. 7. Repeat steps above as necessary to check
the other seat belts.
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK
Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
NOTE: All seat belt retractors are of the Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an
emergency (sudden stop) the retractor will lock and prevent the belt from extending any further. All
3-point type seat belt retractors except the driver's seat belt also have an Automatic Locking
Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also called child restraint mode) is used when installing
child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt is fully extended. When the belt is then
retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt in a specific position so the belt
cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat belt to fully wind back into
the retractor. Check the seat belt retractors using the following test(s) to determine if a retractor
assembly is operating properly.
Page 3518
1. When installing coil spring on strut, it must be positioned as shown.
2. Install upper spring seat with alignment mark facing the outer side of vehicle, in line with
strut-to-knuckle attachment points.
Service and Repair
Air Register: Service and Repair
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
DEFROSTER NOZZLE
NOTE: The defroster nozzle is part of the instrument panel and is replaced as an assembly.
Removal Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel .
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FRESH AIR DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel .
2. Remove the defroster nozzle. 3. Remove the fresh air duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
DEFROSTER DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater Core
Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the defroster duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
RH AND LH SIDE DEMISTER DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater Core
Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the RH or LH side demister duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
RH, LH, AND CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel.
2. Remove the RH, center, and LH ventilator duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FLOOR CONNECTOR DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater Core
Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the three clips and remove the floor
connector duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 831
5. Re-check the fluid level at fluid temperatures using the "HOT" range on the A/T fluid level gauge.
CAUTION: Firmly secure the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the
attached stopper, this will provide an accurate reading on the gauge, and will keep the gauge in
position while driving.
6. Check the fluid for the following conditions: If the fluid is very dark or smells burned, refer to the See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Procedures/Changing A/T Fluid. Flush the AT fluid
cooling system after repairing the transaxle.
- If the fluid contains frictional material (from the clutches or bands), remove the radiator and flush
the cooler lines using a cleaning solvent and compressed air after completing repairs to the
transaxle. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service
and Repair/Procedures/A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning.
Page 2017
Knock Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Service and Repair
Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair
OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal
REMOVAL 1. Remove the following parts: Engine undercover.
- Drive belts. Refer to See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Testing and
Inspection See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Adjustments.
- Radiator fan. Refer to See: Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the crankshaft pulley as follows:
a. Remove the starter motor. Refer to See: Starting and Charging/Starting System/Starter
Motor/Service and Repair.
b. Lock the ring gear using Tool attached to the starter bolt hole.
Tool number : KV10117700 (J-44716)
CAUTION: Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth behind the ring gear when
setting the Tool.
c. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt and locate bolt seating surface at 10 mm (0.39 in) from its original
position.
d. Position a pulley puller at recess hole of crankshaft pulley to remove crankshaft pulley.
CAUTION: Do not use a puller claw on crankshaft pulley periphery.
3. Remove front oil seal from front timing chain case.
CAUTION:
Service and Repair
Parking Light Bulb: Service and Repair
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
Bulb Replacement
FRONT PARKING LAMP Refer to See: Headlamp/Headlamp Bulb/Service and Repair.
LICENSE PLATE LAMP
Removal 1. Remove back door lower finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove license plate lamp socket. 3. Remove license
plate lamp.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TAIL LAMP Refer to See: Tail Lamp/Tail Light Bulb/Service and Repair.
Page 1658
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when
applying or releasing the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See:
Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator
Pedal Released Position Learning.
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL ELECTRIC MOTOR
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal.
3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable
pedal electric motor as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector.
5. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the
adjustable accelerator pedal as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 6. Remove the
adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the adjustable pedal electric motor.
- Avoid damage from dropping the adjustable pedal electric motor during handling.
- Keep the adjustable pedal electric motor away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding
or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward.
- Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released
Body - Power Liftgate Won't Open/Close/Is Noisy
Trunk / Liftgate Motor: Customer Interest Body - Power Liftgate Won't Open/Close/Is Noisy
Classification: EL09-022
Reference: NTB09-087
Date: September 10, 2009
2004 - 2009 QUEST; POWER BACK DOOR WILL NOT OPEN/CLOSE AND MAKES NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Quest (V42) with power back door.
IF YOU CONFIRM:
While operating the power back door (lift gate),
^ The power motor will not open or close the door,
and/or
^ There is a grinding and popping noise inside the rear trim panel.
ACTION:
Check for a loose or missing bolt on the back door power lift assembly. Replace if needed.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Access the power back door motor assembly.
^ Remove left side finishers as needed.
^ Refer to sections BL and EI in the Service Manual as needed.
Page 4830
Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle's operation and the
outside temperature.
In case of low tire pressure, a message is displayed on the screen: LOW PRESSURE - Check All
Tires
WARNING
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will
flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN
dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting. Replacing tires with those
not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS
HOW TO USE THE SETTING BUTTON
When the SETTING button is pressed, the SETTINGS screen will appear on the display. You can
select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle. Move
the joystick and press the ENTER button to select each item to be set.
System settings
Select the "System Settings" key by using the joystick and pressing the ENTER button. The
SYSTEM SETTINGS screen will be displayed.
Language/unit
The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when selecting the "Language/Unit" key and pressing
the ENTER button.
Language: English or French
Unit: US - mile, °F, MPG
Metric - km, °C, L/1OO km
Page 4780
DESCRIPTION
Page 1925
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed
position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition
switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve
moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Page 3879
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL
Removal and Installation
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT)
Removal 1. Remove the instrument lower panel RH and glove box. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and
Repair.
2. Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Center Stack Trim Panel.
3. Disconnect the variable blower control (front) electrical connector. 4. Remove the two screws
and remove the variable blower control (front).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR)
Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the variable blower control (rear)
electrical connector. 3. Remove the two screws and remove the variable blower control (rear).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Positive Crankcase Ventilation
Positive Crankcase Ventilation: Testing and Inspection Positive Crankcase Ventilation
Description
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold. The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV)
valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake manifold. During partial throttle
operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV valve.
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of
ventilating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this
process the air passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under
full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the
valve. The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not meet the requirement. This is
because some of the flow will go through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all
conditions.
Component Inspection
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
Component Inspection
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE With engine running at idle, remove PCV
valve from rocker cover. A properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through it. A
strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is placed over valve inlet.
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Page 181
Front Suspension
Alignment: Specifications Front Suspension
Wheel Alignment
Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)
Wheelarch Height
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)
Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 154
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 1334
Page EM-4
Page 4075
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Service and Repair
Solar Sensor: Service and Repair
OPTICAL SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the front demister grille. Refer to See: Lighting and Horns/Ambient Light
Sensor/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the optical sensor connector (2). 3. Twist the optical sensor (1) counter clockwise to
remove it from the defroster grille.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3569
Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 1350
Page 366
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Page 1544
The exhaust system may be hot. Allow to cool down before inspection/repairs.
NOTE: Exhaust system parts do not need to be removed for this inspection/repair.
1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
2. Inspect the heat shields on the front exhaust tube for the following:
^ Heat shield contact with the exhaust tube.
^ Separated / missing band clamp(s).
^ Weld separation(s).
3. If a heat shield is found contacting the exhaust tube, pry it away to allow a minimum 1 mm (.040
inch) space.
^ Road test the vehicle to verify the repair.
4. If a weld or band clamp is separated, or the band clamp is missing, install new band clamps as
needed.
^ For band clamp(s) location, refer to the pictures below that applies to your vehicle.
Page 1245
Page EM-3
Checking Fluid Level
Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Checking Fluid Level
POWER STEERING FLUID
Checking Fluid Level
Check fluid level, referring to the scale on reservoir tank. Use HOT range for fluid temperatures of
50° - 80°C (122° - 176°F). Use COLD range for fluid temperatures of 0° - 30°C (32° - 86°F).
CAUTION: Do not overfill.
- Do not reuse any used power steering fluid.
- Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Refer to See: See: .
Page 3811
a. Under the vehicle, tighten the high/low pressure pipe connection (1) bolt (A) as shown to
specification. b. Install the A/C pipe clamp (2) and tighten the A/C pipe clamp bolt (B). c. As
necessary, reposition the rear heater pipe clamp (3). d. Attach the other pipe support clip to the
dash panel threaded stud.
e. From the engine compartment, tighten the fittings between the upper and lower high pressure
pipe (A) and the low pressure pipe (B) as shown
to specification. Arrow Indicates Front
CAUTION: -
Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when tightening the
fittings.
4. Connect the power brake booster vacuum hose to the intake manifold collector. 5. Check that
there is sufficient clearance between the lower high/low pressure pipe and the front stabilizer bar.
Adjust the lower high/low pressure
pipe as necessary.
6. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and check the A/C system for leaks. Refer to See:
Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service
Procedure.
7. Install the remaining components in the reverse order of removal.
Removal And Installation For Low-Pressure Flexible Hose
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Procedures.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air. 2. Remove the engine under cover. 3. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to
See: Locations.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Locations.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Removal And Installation For High/Low-Pressure Pipe
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for High/Low-Pressure Pipe
Locations
Traction Control Switch: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 865
Engine Oil: Service and Repair
ENGINE OIL
Changing Engine Oil
WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil may be hot.
- Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct
skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
1. Park the vehicle on a flat and level surface, then start the engine to warm up the oil. 2. Check for
oil leaks from the engine. 3. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes.
4. Remove the oil drain plug and oil filler cap. 5. Drain the engine oil. 6. Install the oil pan drain
plug.
Oil pan drain plug : Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Engine Lubrication/Oil
Pan/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: Clean the oil pan drain plug and install using a new washer.
7. Refill the engine with new engine oil. Refer to See: See: .
CAUTION: The refill oil capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for
reference only.
- Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine.
8. Warm up the engine and check the oil pan drain plug and oil filter for oil leaks. 9. Stop engine
and wait at least 10 minutes.
10. Check engine oil level. Refer to See: .
Locations
Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Locations
Starter Relay: Locations
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
ATC
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations ATC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Page 1435
- Do not drop or shock spark plug.
If spark plug tip is covered with carbon, a spark plug cleaner may be used.
Checking and adjusting spark plug gap is not required between change intervals.
Spark plug gap (nominal) : 1.1 mm (0.043 in)
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Use standard type spark plug for normal driving conditions. Refer to See: Maintenance.
- The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under
conditions such as: Frequent engine starts
- Low ambient temperatures
- The cold type spark plug is suitable when engine spark knock occurs with the standard type spark
plug under conditions such as: Extended highway driving
- Frequent high engine revolution.
Page 155
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 2932
6. Attach the pad retainer to the torque member.
CAUTION: When attaching the pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it does not float up higher than
the torque member, as shown. 7. After assembling the shims and the shim covers to the pad,
install it to the torque member. 8. Install cylinder body and tighten sliding pin to the specification.
Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Front/Exploded View.
Page 3730
1. Remove the rear air control (rear) (1) from the headlining, located over the sliding door, RH. 2.
Disconnect the rear air control (rear) electrical connector and remove the rear air control (rear).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1996
Page 3351
> Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels
> Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and
inspections.
4. Check the target mounts.
^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before
performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11).
NOTE:
The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines.
Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment.
Page 1697
Oxygen Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Locations
Hose/Line HVAC: Locations
REFRIGERANT LINES
Component
Front A/C Compressor and Condenser
Page 641
Alignment: Specifications Rear Suspension
Wheel Alignment
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)
Wheelarch Height
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)
Page 3377
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 1260
Page EM-18
Page 1387
a. Install the crankshaft sprocket.
- Make sure the mating marks on the crankshaft sprocket face front of engine.
4. Install the timing chain (primary).
- Water pump (G). - Install timing chain (primary) so the mating mark (punched) (B) on camshaft
sprocket (C) is aligned with the copper link (A) on the timing
chain, while the mating mark (notched) (E) on the crankshaft sprocket (D) is aligned with the yellow
one (F) on the timing chain, as shown.
- When it is difficult to align mating marks of the timing chain (primary) with each sprocket,
gradually turn the camshaft to align it with the
mating marks.
- During alignment, be careful to prevent dislocation of mating mark alignments of the secondary
timing chains.
Page 115
Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1117
Engine Oil: Testing and Inspection
ENGINE OIL
Inspection
OIL LEVEL Before starting the engine make sure the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface, then check
the oil level. If the engine is already running, turn it off and allow five minutes before checking.
- Check that the oil level is within the low (L) and high (H) range as indicated on the dipstick.
- If the engine oil level is out of range, add oil as necessary.
OIL APPEARANCE Check engine oil for white milky or excessive contamination.
- If engine oil becomes milky, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant.
Repair or replace damaged parts.
OIL LEAKAGE Check for oil leakage around the following areas: Upper and lower oil pan
- Oil pan drain plug
- Oil pressure switch
- Oil filter
- Oil cooler
- Water pump cover
- Timing chain tensioner cover
- Intake valve timing (IVT) control cover and intake valve timing (IVT) control solenoid valve
- Front cover
- Mating surface between cylinder block and cylinder head
- Mating surface between cylinder head and rocker cover
- Mating surface between the front timing chain case and rear timing chain case
- Crankshaft oil seal (front and rear)
OIL PRESSURE CHECK
WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.
- Put the selector lever in the Park "P" position.
1. Check the oil level. 2. Disconnect the oil pressure switch harness connector. 3. Remove the oil
pressure switch.
CAUTION: Do not drop or shock oil pressure switch.
ATC
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair ATC
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
Removal and Installation
FUNCTION The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin microfilters when
the heater or A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin
microfilters are located in the front heater and cooling unit assembly. The rear heater and cooling
unit assembly only draws in air from the passenger compartment to recirculate into the passenger
compartment, so the rear heater and cooling unit assembly is not equipped with in-cabin
microfilters.
REPLACEMENT TIMING Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a
regular interval depending on the driving conditions. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance.
It may also be necessary to replace the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component
replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are damaged.
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the three screws and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. 3. Remove the in-cabin
microfilters from the front heater and cooling unit assembly. 4. Install the in-cabin microfilters,
replacing the two in-cabin microfilters with new filters, into the front heater and cooling unit
assembly.
CAUTION: When installing the two new in-cabin microfilters make sure that the filters are facing in
the direction indicated by the direction arrow for the air flow. The direction arrow is printed on the
side of the in-cabin microfilters. 5. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover. 6. Install the glove box
assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and
Repair.
Page 3552
Always replace the seal after every disassembly.
3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification.
NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel.
Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb)
4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side
of tire as normal.
Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim.
6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel
position on vehicle. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel.
NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to
See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter
Wake Up Operation. 8. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor, if equipped. Refer to See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area
Timing Chain: Customer Interest Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area
Classification: EM07-001D
Reference: NTB07-042D
Date: May 25, 2010
MAXIMA / ALTIMA / QUEST; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA
This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been
amended. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35 engine ONLY
2004-2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM:
There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system.
^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM).
^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause.
Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis.
ACTION:
1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with
the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin.
2. Change the engine oil and filter.
3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST
closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 321
REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the screws (A) and the center lower trim.
Page 4860
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Locations
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 435
3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees.
4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees.
^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily.
6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the
sensor will not unscrew any further.
7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed.
Page 2485
Page 4773
Cruise Control: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
ASCD Brake Switch
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Specification data are reference values.
ASCD Indicator
ASCD INDICATOR
CONSULT-III Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Specification data are reference value.
Page 4793
Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation
WARNING CHIME
System Description
FUNCTION Power is supplied at all times through 50A fuse (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
- to BCM terminal 70, and
- through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
- to key switch terminal 1.
With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
- to BCM terminal 38.
Ground is supplied to BCM terminal 67
- through body grounds M57, M61, and M79.
NOTE: When ignition key warning chime, light warning chime, and seat belt warning chime are
required at the same time, the priorities for each chime are the following. 1. Light warning chime 2.
Ignition key warning chime 3. Seat belt warning chime
IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME With the key inserted in the ignition switch, the ignition switch in
OFF position, and the driver's door open, the warning chime will sound. Power is supplied through key switch terminal 2
- to BCM terminal 37.
Ground is supplied to BCM terminal 47
- through front door switch LH terminal 1.
Front door switch LH is case grounded. BCM detects key inserted into the ignition switch, and
sends key warning signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. When combination
meter receives key warning signal, it sounds warning chime.
LIGHT WARNING CHIME With the key removed from the ignition switch, the driver's door open,
and the lighting switch (part of the combination switch) in 1st or 2nd position, the warning chime will
sound. [This is the operation of the light warning chime, except when headlamp battery saver
control operates (for 5 minutes after ignition switch is turned to OFF or ACC position) and
headlamps do not illuminate.] Signal is supplied from combination switch (lighting switch) terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10
- to BCM terminals 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 32, 33, 34, 35 and 36.
NOTE: BCM detected lighting switch in 1st or 2nd position. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body
Control Systems/Description and Operation/BCM (Body Control Module) System. Ground is
supplied -
to BCM terminal 47
- through front door switch LH terminal 1.
Front door switch LH is case grounded. BCM detects headlamps are illuminated, and sends light
warning signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. When combination meter
receives light warning signal, it sounds warning chime.
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME When the ignition switch is turned ON with the seat belt
unfastened (seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened), warning chime will sound for approximately 6
seconds. Ground is supplied to combination meter terminal 24
- through seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 1.
Seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 2 is grounded through body grounds B7 and B19. Combination
meter sends seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened signal to BCM via CAN communication line.
BCM receives seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened signal from combination meter via CAN
communication line, and sends seat belt warning signal
Service and Repair
Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag
Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the screws (A) and release clips (B) to remove the steering angle sensor (1) from spiral
cable (2).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: In the case that the ABS actuator and electronic unit (control unit) is replaced, make
sure to adjust position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock
Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Page 1325
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-50288 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets (no picture shown).
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioners
plungers. Figure 1 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tools where shown in
Page 1182
Be careful not to damage front timing chain case or crankshaft.
INSTALLATION 1. Install the front oil seal on the front timing chain case using a suitable tool.
Apply clean engine oil to the oil seal edges.
- Install it so that each seal lip is oriented as shown.
CAUTION: Press fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting the oil seal.
- Press-fit oil seal until it becomes flush with timing chain case end face, using a suitable drift.
- Make sure the garter spring in the oil seal is in position and seal lip is not inverted.
2. Install crankshaft pulley and tighten the bolt in two steps. Lubricate thread and seat surface of the bolt with new engine oil.
- For the second step of angle tightening use Tool.
3. Remove Tool attached to the starter bolt hole.
Tool number : KV10117700 (J-44716)
Page 2509
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 2054
Page 3151
Fuse: Locations Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B)
FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX (J/B)
Terminal Arrangement
Page 921
The ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION maintenance intervals can be reset to 0 miles (kilometers).
Select the "Reset" key using the joystick and press the ENTER button.
Displaying the maintenance notice reminder
Select the "Display Maintenance Notification" key and press the ENTER button to display the
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automatically at the set maintenance interval.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen (ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION) will be automatically
displayed as shown when both of the following conditions are met:
- The vehicle is driven the set distance and the ignition key is turned OFF
- The ignition key is turned ON the next time the vehicle will be driven.
To return to the previous display after the MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press the
BACK button.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays each time the key is turned ON until one of the
following conditions are met:
- "Reset" key is selected.
- "Display Maintenance Notification" is set OFF.
- The maintenance interval is set again.
HOW TO USE THE SETTING BUTTON
When the SETTING button is pressed, the SETTINGS screen will appear on the display. You can
select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle. Move
the joystick and press the ENTER button to select each item to be set.
System settings
Select the "System Settings" key by using the joystick and pressing the ENTER button. The
SYSTEM SETTINGS menu will be displayed.
Page 2240
4. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. -
Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable
pedal electric motor as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the
accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal
nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from
the pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
9. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the
adjustable accelerator pedal as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity.
10. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when
applying or releasing the accelerator pedal.
- Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding
or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward.
- Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See:
Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator
Pedal Released Position Learning.
NON-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL
Removal 1. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the upper
and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 3. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from
the pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
Page 1169
WARNING: -
To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the coolant when the engine is hot.
- The gasket for intake manifold collector (upper) is secured together with intake manifold collector
(lower) bolt. Thus, when replacing only the upper gasket the lower gasket must also be replaced.
1. Remove the cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl
Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the engine cover using power tool. 3. Remove air
cleaner case, (upper) mass air flow sensor, and air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube
as an assembly. Refer to See:
Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair.
4. Partially drain the coolant when the engine is cool. Refer to See: Cooling
System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 5. Disconnect the following: Power brake booster vacuum hose
- Coolant hoses from the intake manifold collector (upper)
- Vacuum lines from the intake manifold collector (lower) and power valve
- Fuel injector electrical connectors
- PCV hose
- Electric throttle control actuator electrical connectors
- EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve hose
- EGR temperature sensor electrical connector
CAUTION: Cover any engine openings to avoid the entry of any foreign material.
6. Remove the EGR tube [to intake manifold collector, (lower)] nuts. 7. Disconnect the power
steering hose bracket from the back of the intake manifold collector (upper). 8. Remove the EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve bracket bolt. Position the valve aside. 9. Remove the
VIAS control solenoid valve bracket bolt. Position the valve aside.
10. Remove the vacuum tank. 11. Remove the intake manifold collector (upper) support bracket
from the back of the intake manifold collector (upper) using power tool.
12. Loosen the intake manifold collector (lower) bolts in the order as shown using power tool, and
remove the intake manifold collector (upper and
lower) and gasket.
Page 2504
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 2531
Disclaimer
Page 1936
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
Page 626
^ Apply the brakes as shown.
^ Start the engine to allow brake boost.
^ Turn the engine OFF,
^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates".
^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate.
Put the bridge plate in the down position.
^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle.
Page 637
SPECIAL TOOLS
Page 1498
2. Align the radiator upper clip with the radiator core connector, then insert the radiator upper clip
straight into the radiator core connections until a
click is heard.
3. After connecting the radiator upper clip, use the following method to make sure it is fully
connected. Visually confirm that the two radiator upper clips are connected to the radiator core connections.
- Move the radiator upper clip and the radiator core forward and backward to make sure they are
securely connected.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for engine coolant leaks. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Inspection.
- Start and warm up the engine. Visually make sure that there are no engine coolant leaks or A/T
fluid leaks.
Page 1811
- Using a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the valve lifter and camshaft.
- Record any valve clearance measurements which are out of specification. They will be used later
to determine the required replacement lifter size.
6. Turn crankshaft 240°. 7. Set No.3 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. 8. Check only
those valves as shown.
Page 3251
Fuse: Locations Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B)
FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX (J/B)
Terminal Arrangement
Locations
Number One Cylinder: Locations
Firing Order
1-2-3-4-5-6
Page 1988
Malfunction Area Chart
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Malfunction Area Chart
MAIN LINE
BRANCH LINE
Headlamp (For USA)
Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair Headlamp (For USA)
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Bulb Replacement
CAUTION: Do not touch bulb by hand right after being turned off. Burning may result.
- Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily substances away from
it.
- Do not leave bulb out of front combination lamp assembly for a long time because dust, moisture,
smoke, etc. may affect the performance of the lamp. When replacing headlamp bulb, be sure to
replace it with a new one.
- After installing the bulb, be sure to install the bulb socket securely to ensure watertightness.
HEADLAMP (OUTER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM
Removal 1. Turn headlamp switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Turn bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove bulb.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
HEADLAMP (INNER SIDE), FOR HIGH BEAM
Removal 1. Turn headlamp switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Turn bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove bulb.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP
Removal 1. Turn the front turn signal/parking lamp bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock it. 2. Pull
bulb to remove it from socket.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 1747
DESCRIPTION
Page 2770
Page 3966
Connectors.
- After replacement of side curtain air bag module, perform self-diagnosis to check that no
malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic
Trouble Codes.
Page 312
Specifications
Brake Pad: Specifications
Disc Brake
Pads
AD35VB (Front) Standard thickness ...................................................................................................
................................................................................... 10 mm (0.394 in) Wear limit ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... 2.0 mm (0.079 in)
AD14VE (Rear) Standard thickness ....................................................................................................
.................................................................................. 8.5 mm (0.335 in) Wear limit ............................
..............................................................................................................................................................
......... 2.0 mm (0.079 in)
Page 2191
Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >>GO TO 3. No >>GO TO 5.
3.REPLACE EVAP CANISTER Replace EVAP canister with a new one. >>GO TO 4.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle
frame for clogging or poor connection. >>Repair or replace EVAP hose.
5.CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and
refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG
OK >>GO TO 6. NG >>Repair or replace hoses and tubes.
6.CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE Check recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks. OK or NG
OK >>GO TO 7. NG >>Replace filler neck tube.
7.CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to See: Component Inspection. OK or
NG OK >>GO TO 8. NG >>Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
8.CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for
clogging, dents and cracks. OK or NG OK >>GO TO 9. NG >>Replace fuel filler tube.
9.CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I Check one-way valve for clogging. OK or NG OK >>GO TO
10. NG >>Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank.
10.CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II 1. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank. 2. Remove
fuel filler tube and hose.
Specifications
Water Pump: Specifications
Water Pump
Insert water pump by tightening bolts alternately and evenly.
Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Seat Belt Retractor: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Classification: RS01-001B
Reference: NTB01-005B
Date: November 12, 2009
"D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION
This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s).
ACTION
Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to:
^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings.
^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
Locations
Overdrive Switch: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
TCS/ABS
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair TCS/ABS
Wheel Sensors
WHEEL SENSORS
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
- When removing the front or rear wheel hub assembly, first remove the wheel sensor from the
assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires, making the sensor
inoperative.
- Pull out the sensor, be careful to turn it as little as possible. Do not pull on the sensor harness.
- Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following, and then tighten the
wheel sensor bolt to the specified torque.
- Before installing the wheel sensor, make sure there are no foreign materials (such as iron
fragments) adhered to the pick-up part of the wheel sensor, to the inside of the wheel sensor
mounting hole or on the rotor mounting surface.
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR
Removal 1. Remove the front wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service
and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Partially remove the front wheel fender protector.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair. 3.
Remove the wheel sensor bolt and wheel sensor. 4. Remove the harness wire from mounts and
disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR WHEEL SENSOR
Removal 1. Remove the wheel sensor bolt and wheel sensor from the rear wheel hub and bearing
assemblies. 2. Remove the harness wire from mounts and harness wire clips from the rear
suspension member. 3. Disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Sensor Rotor
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation
The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub. For removal and installation
procedure, refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear
Wheel Hub.
Page 790
- Arrow Indicates Front
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the open pipe connections with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to
avoid the entry of air, moisture and contamination.
15. Remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe.
a. Access the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe from under the vehicle. b. Remove the
high/low pressure pipe connection (1) bolt (A). c. Remove the A/C pipe clamp bolt (B) to release
the A/C pipe clamp (2).
NOTE: Reposition the rear heater pipe clamp (3) for additional clearance to remove the lower
section of the high/low pressure pipe as necessary.
d. Pry off the pipe support clip (1) secured to the dash panel threaded stud, using a suitable tool.
e. Carefully remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe (1).
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the open pipe connections with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to
avoid the entry of air, moisture and contamination.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Clean all of the A/C pipe fittings and connections.
- Replace the O-rings of the high/low-pressure pipe with new ones.
- Lubricate all the O-rings with the specified A/C system oil.
NOTE: The service replacement high/low pressure pipe is a two piece pipe assembly. 1. Install and
position the new lower high/low pressure pipe without tightening the connections.
Page 1601
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 1921
Locations
Number One Cylinder: Locations
Firing Order
1-2-3-4-5-6
Page 2683
1. Use new damper bands for installation. 2. Install damper from stationary-joint side while holding
it securely.
Page 3618
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
PASSENGER SIDE
Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater Core
Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Disconnect the intake door motor electrical
connector. 3. Remove the three screws and remove the intake door motor.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Mode Door Motor
MODE DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
Mode Door Motor - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
REMOVAL 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater Core
Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation.
Page 4549
Console: Service and Repair Removal
CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY
Removal
1. Remove storage bin insert (1) and console mat (2).
2. Remove top cover assembly.
3. Open the front bin (1), remove the bolts (A), and center console (2).
Page 3668
DESCRIPTION
Page 3888
3. Remove the center stack lower trim RH. 4. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. 5.
Twist and pull the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the front heater and cooling unit
assembly.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2212
OK or NG OK >>GO TO 5. NG >>Repair or replace ground connections.
5.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I 1. Disconnect ECM harness
connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >>GO TO 7. NG >>GO TO 6.
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors F14, E5
- Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
>>Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
7.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. Reconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Turn
ignition switch ON.
Page 404
Position Learning". Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released
Position Learning.
Specifications
Oil Pan: Specifications
Oil Pan
Tighten upper oil pan bolts in the order as shown.
Tighten the lower oil pan bolts in order as shown.
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Calculated Load Value
Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Calculated Load Value
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Calculated Load Value
Component Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2682
6. Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by * marks) as shown.
CAUTION: If there is grease on boot mounting surfaces (indicated by * marks) of shaft and
housing, boot may come off. Remove all grease from surfaces.
7. Make sure boot installation length "L" is the specified length indicated below. Insert a flat-bladed
screwdriver or similar tool into the large end of
boot. Bleed air from boot to prevent boot deformation.
Boot installation length "L" : 163 mm (6.42 in)
CAUTION: Boot may break if boot installation length is less than standard value.
- Be careful that screwdriver tip does not contact inside surface of boot.
8. Install new large and small boot bands securely using Tool.
Tool number : KV40107300 ( - )
NOTE: Do not reuse boot bands.
CAUTION:
- Secure boot band so that dimension "M" meets specification as shown.
Dimension "M" : 1.0 - 4.0 mm (0.039 - 0.157 in)
9. After installing housing and shaft, rotate boot to check whether or not the actual position is
correct. If boot position is not correct, remove old boot
bands then reposition the boot and secure with new boot bands.
Damper
Page 2055
Intake Manifold Collector
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Intake Manifold Collector
INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
Page 371
Page 3628
The defroster nozzle is part of the instrument panel and is replaced as an assembly.
Removal Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Fresh Air Duct
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
FRESH AIR DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel.
2. Remove the defroster nozzle. 3. Remove the fresh air duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Defroster Duct
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
DEFROSTER DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly
HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the defroster duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
RH and LH Side Demister Duct
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
RH AND LH SIDE DEMISTER DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly
HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the RH or LH side demister duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
RH, LH, and Center Ventilator Duct
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
RH, LH, AND CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT
Page 2129
Service and Repair
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair
HYDRAULIC LINE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL Refer to the illustration for hydraulic tube and hose routing. Remove any components
necessary to access the lines.
CAUTION: Be careful not to kink or bend the tubes.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Steering Gear/Service and Repair/Procedures/On-Vehicle Service and See: Power
Steering Pump/Service and Repair/Procedures See: Power Steering Pump/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal and Installation for tightening torques.
NOTE: Do not reuse non-reusable parts. Ensure that hose is properly installed on tube to specification.
CAUTION: Do not apply power steering fluid to surface between tube and hose. To install the eye joint on the power steering pump, align the projection of the eye joint into the
notch of the power steering pump. Make sure the eye joint is properly installed on the power
steering pump, then tighten the eye bolt to specification.
- Connect the harness connector into the power steering pressure switch securely.
Specifications
Fuel Injector: Specifications
Fuel Injector
Diagram Information and Instructions
Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Page 624
5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly.
^ Mount the top claws first.
^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13.
^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14.
^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level.
IMPORTANT:
Page 3340
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 4901
LT-INT/L-04
Body - Windshield Cracking Information
Windshield: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Windshield Cracking Information
Classification: BT09-052
Reference: NTB09-091
Date: August 25, 2009
WINDSHIELD CRACKING
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Purpose of this bulletin is to give Nissan dealers guidelines to help determine if windshield
breakage is covered under warranty or is the customer's responsibility. Nissan North America
(NNA) is not responsible for damage to glass that is a result of objects striking or scratching the
glass. However, NNA is responsible for manufacturing issues such as distorted glass and cracks
that are due to improper installation or damage to the glass during vehicle assembly. NNA typically
does not find any type of cracks in the windshield due to stress in vehicles with over 5000 miles.
Glass damage can be categorized in 3 general areas:
1. Cracks due to objects striking the glass.
2. Cracks due to scratch in glass surface.
3. Distortion or cracks due to manufacturing issues.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Part Return Process Reminder
Refer to WB/07-010: Nissan is announcing a new requirement in the process for parts return to
assist engineers in analyzing part issues. Dealers are now required to mark glass and other
components returned that have "visible issues" using a grease pencil or similar instrument to
highlight the area damaged.
1) How to determine if glass damage is due to objects striking the glass.
Cracks from objects striking the glass
Page 403
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when
applying or releasing the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See:
Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning.
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL ELECTRIC MOTOR
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal.
3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable
pedal electric motor as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector.
5. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the
adjustable accelerator pedal as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 6. Remove the
adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the adjustable pedal electric motor.
- Avoid damage from dropping the adjustable pedal electric motor during handling.
- Keep the adjustable pedal electric motor away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding
or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward.
- Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released
Page 2109
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
Adjustable and Non-adjustable Accelerator Pedal
CAUTION: Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position.
This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only).
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only).
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the heater and cooling unit
assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and
Repair/Removal
And Installation.
Locations
Door Switch: Locations
WARNING CHIME
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Front
Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Front
FRONT DISC BRAKE
Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to See: Hydraulic
System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid.
3. Remove union bolt and torque member bolts using power tool, then remove cylinder body. 4.
Remove disc rotor.
CAUTION: Put matching marks on both disc rotor and wheel hub when removing disc rotor.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Install disc rotor.
CAUTION: Align matching marks made during removal when reusing disc rotor.
2. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, and tighten torque member bolts to specification. Refer to
See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Front/Exploded View.
CAUTION: Before installing the cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe any oil off the knuckle spindle
washers and cylinder body attachment surfaces. 3. Install brake hose to the cylinder body, and
tighten union bolt to the specification. Refer to See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Front/Exploded View.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper washer for union bolts.
- Attach the brake hose to the protrusion on the cylinder body attachment part.
4. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. 5. Install
wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire
And Wheel.
CAUTION:
Locations
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations
SUNROOF
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 4906
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
System Description
When lamps on demand switch is in DOOR position, room/map lamp and personal lamp ON/OFF
is controlled by timer according to signals from switches including key switch, door switches, unlock
signal from keyfob, door lock and unlock switch, key cylinder switch, and ignition switch. When
room/map lamp and personal lamp turns ON, there is a gradual brightening over 1 second. When
room/map lamp and personal lamp turns OFF, there is a gradual dimming over 1 second. The
room/map lamp and personal lamp timer is controlled by the BCM (body control module).
Room/map lamp and personal lamp timer control settings can be changed with CONSULT-III.
Ignition keyhole illumination turns ON when front door LH is opened (door switch ON) or key is
removed from key cylinder. Illumination turns OFF when front door LH is closed (door switch OFF).
Step and foot lamp turns ON when any door is opened (door switch ON). Lamp turns OFF when all
doors are closed (all door switches OFF).
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND Power is supplied at all times through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
Page 4029
5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5).
^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit.
6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure
6A.
NOTE:
^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle.
^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle.
Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8:
^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned.
^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring.
^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no
wrinkles or ridges are present.
^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D"
ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece.
7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B).
Locations
Power Door Lock Switch: Locations
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 3315
Page 4274
Disclaimer
Page 3631
Removal and Installation
GRILLES
Removal 1. Remove the interior trim panel(s) as necessary that contains the grille to be removed.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim
Panel/Service and Repair or See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and
Repair.
2. Remove the grille from the interior trim panel.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3074
^ Batteries installed in vehicles produced in Japan have a JIS number embossed in the plastic on
top of the battery.
^ These vehicles have a VIN that begins with the letter "J".
Batteries with CCA (Cold Cranking Amps) Number
^ Batteries installed in vehicles produced in North America have a CCA number displayed on the
label attached to the top of the battery.
^ These vehicles have a VIN that begins with a number: 1, 3, or 5.
Selecting CCA or JIS in the GR-8 Battery Tester
Vehicles with JIS Battery
^ Select JIS, then choose the option that matches the first five (5) characters of the JIS number on
the battery.
NOTE:
DO NOT select CCA when testing a JIS battery.
Vehicles with CCA Battery
^ Select CCA, then choose the option that matches the number following "Cold Cranking Amps" on
the battery.
Reference Material
The following information can be printed and attached to the GR-8, if needed.
Page 107
Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction
- When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned
OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction.
- When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch
signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay.
NOTE: When the ignition switch is turned ON, the tail lamps are OFF.
Locations
Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 1085
- For specified belt deflection and tension, refer to See: Testing and Inspection.
NOTE: Adjusting bolt (E) is loosened with counterclockwise rotation. 5. Tighten adjusting bolt (C).
Adjusting bolt (C) : 28.0 N.m (2.9 kg-m, 21 ft-lb)
6. Tighten power steering oil pump bolt (D).
Power steering pump bolt (D) : 43.2 N.m (4.4 kg-m, 32 ft-lb)
Page 3413
7. Disconnect the outer tie-rod end from steering knuckle using Tool. Be careful not to damage ball
joint boot.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off suddenly,
temporarily tighten mounting nut.
Tool number : HT72520000 (J-25730-A)
8. Remove transverse link and steering knuckle pinch bolt and nut using power tool. Refer to See:
Suspension/Control Arm/Service and Repair/Front
Suspension.
9. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly from drive shaft using a puller or suitable tool.
CAUTION: When removing wheel hub and bearing assembly, do not apply an excessive angle to drive shaft
joint. Also be careful not to excessively extend slide joint.
- Support drive shaft when removing.
10. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool. 11. Remove splash guard
and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle.
12. Remove the lower strut bolts and nuts using power tool. Refer to See: Suspension/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Suspension
.
13. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if
necessary.
Ball Joint Inspection Check for boot breakage, axial looseness, and torque of transverse link ball joint. Refer to See:
Suspension/Control Arm/Service and Repair/Front Suspension.
INSTALLATION
Page 3220
Page 3138
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams
POWER SOCKET
Wiring Diagram - P/SCKT WW-P/SCKT-01
Page 1677
Locations
Combination Switch: Locations
CORNERING LAMP
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 4999
NOTE:
^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not
replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control
unit using the old starter.
^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is:
^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb)
Page 3519
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Rear Lower Link And Coil Spring
REAR LOWER LINK AND COIL SPRING
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly using power tool. Refer to See: Wheels and
Tires/Service and Repair/Pax Run Flat Tires And Wheels See:
Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel.
2. Set a transmission jack or suitable tool, to relieve the coil spring tension and support the rear
lower link.
3. Loosen the rear lower link adjusting bolt and nut connected to the rear suspension member,
using power tool.
4. Remove the rear lower link bolt and nut from the wheel hub and spindle assembly using power
tool. 5. Slowly lower the transmission jack to release the coil spring tension. Then remove upper
rubber seat, coil spring and lower rubber seat from the
rear lower link.
6. Remove the rear lower link adjusting bolt and nut from the rear suspension member using power
tool, then remove the rear lower link.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Suspension.
Page 3652
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair MTC
AMBIENT SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the ambient sensor connector.
NOTE: The ambient sensor is located behind the front bumper opening, in front of the condenser.
2. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1490
3. Remove the front heater core.
NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core,
replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new front heater core.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR HEATER CORE
Removal 1. Partially drain the engine cooling system. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair. 2.
Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair.
3. Disconnect the rear heater core hoses from the rear heater core. 4. Remove the rear heater core
bracket.
5. Remove the rear heater core.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
MTC
HEATER CORE
Removal and Installation
FRONT HEATER CORE
Removal
Page 4355
^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise.
^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise.
2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator.
3. Install the regulator assembly into the door.
4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to
regulator.
5. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top.
Page 1221
Page EM-4
Page 3752
REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the screws (A) and the center lower trim.
Page 5188
^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise.
^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise.
2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator.
3. Install the regulator assembly into the door.
4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to
regulator.
5. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top.
Page 3833
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
Automatic Air Conditioner
REFRIGERANT
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
................................................... HFC-134a (R-134a)
Manual Air Conditioner
REFRIGERANT
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
................................................... HFC-134a (R-134a)
Locations
Seat Occupant Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SRS Component Parts Location
TCS/ABS
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair TCS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid.
Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid. 4.
Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). 5.
Disconnect the brake tubes.
CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
6. Remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket bolts and remove the ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit) with the
bracket.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Hydraulic Circuit for torque
specifications when connecting the brake tubes.
- After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with
new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the brake hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brake
Bleeding/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: To install the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool).
Page 1907
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 3286
Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Headlamp Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Classification: EL10-021A
Reference: NTB10-061A
Date: June 29, 2010
XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE
This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous
versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps
IF YOU CONFIRM
A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an
internal issue),
ACTION
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon
headlamps.
NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident.
^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available
to solve the incident, if one should occur.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the
repair performed.
^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA.
PARTS INFORMATION
Service and Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
COWL TOP
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove RH/LH wiper arms. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Service and
Repair/Front Wiper And Washer System. 2. Remove cowl top cover.
a. Release fastener covers and clips. b. Remove cowl top seal by releasing ends from tabs on cowl
top cover, then releasing plastic clips. c. Remove cowl top weatherstrip. d. Remove windshield
washer nozzles and hoses from cowl top cover. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer
Systems/Windshield Washer
Hose/Diagrams
3. Remove cowl top extension.
a. Remove heater pump from cowl top extension. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Cooling System/Heater Core/Service and
Repair/Heater Pump.
b. Disconnect clip attaching coolant control valve hose to cowl top extension.
Page 2084
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 3407
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
CAUTION: Servicing PAX run flat tires and wheels requires special tire equipment and training. DO NOT
service PAX Run Flat tires and wheels with conventional tire servicing equipment or damage to the
tire and wheel will result.
- If a PAX run flat tire and wheel [or transmitter (pressure sensor)] requires service, and the proper
servicing equipment is not available, then replace the complete PAX tire and wheel assembly.
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter
retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
3. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire.
Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the
transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead.
4. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
5. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
6. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then
install seal on transmitter. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance.
NOTE:
Page 557
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 1462
^ Blue LLC one quart concentrate:
P/N 999MP - L255QTP
> The one quart concentrate containers are intended for extreme cold weather application.
> Use the concentrate without mixing (do not add water).
> Add directly to the cooling system in specific amounts as directed on the container label.
Additional Information for using Blue LLC
Blue LLC and Green-colored Nissan LLC (P/N 999MP-AF000P) are compatible with each other:
^ Blue can be mixed/added with Green
^ Green can be mixed/added with Blue
CAUTION:
^ Adding Green LLC to Blue LLC will reduce/shorten the life expectancy of the Blue LLC to that of
the Green LLC (4 years / 60,000 miles).
^ LLC must always be used with demineralized or distilled water, otherwise the life expectancy of
the LLC (Blue or Green) will be degraded and
cooling system damage may occur.
Page 3956
Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
The occupant classification system control unit, occupant classification system sensor, and bladder
are an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Front Seat/Seat Cushion/Disassembly and
Assembly to remove the seat, and See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Front
Seat/Seat Cushion to replace the seat cushion assembly.
Page 4310
5. Remove screws and rear bumper fascia. 6. Remove rear bumper side brackets RH/LH. 7.
Remove rear bumper reinforcement. -
Separate rear bumper energy absorber from rear bumper reinforcement.
8. Remove rear bumper step pad from rear bumper fascia. 9. Remove sonar sensors and retainers
from rear bumper fascia, if equipped. Separate sonar sensors and retainers.
10. Remove sonar sensor harness from rear bumper fascia. 11. Remove drafter duct from rear
bumper area.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1993
- Models with VDC
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch
line.
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground
circuit of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to the following. Models with TCS: See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Description and Operation/TCS/ABS Schematic
- Models with VDC: See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Description and Operation/VDC/TCS/ABS Schematic
OK or NG OK - Present error: Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to the following.
- Models with TCS: See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/TCS/ABS
- Models with VDC: See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/VDC/TCS/ABS
- Past error: Error was detected in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line.
NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
BCM Branch Line Circuit
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
BCM Branch Line Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the
negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose
connection (unit side and connector side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal
and connector.
2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of BCM. 2. Check the
resistance between the BCM harness connector terminals.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the BCM branch line.
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground
circuit of the BCM. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. OK or NG
Page 1588
Page 1134
Figure 2.
NOTE
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (See Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION
Tighten the bolt no more then necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Page 269
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Power Door Lock System
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 3637
2. Remove the RH, center, and LH ventilator duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Floor Connector Duct
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
FLOOR CONNECTOR DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater Core
Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the three clips and remove the floor
connector duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Floor Distribution Duct
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
FLOOR DISTRIBUTION DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the center lower trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel.
2. Remove the clip and remove the floor distribution duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Floor Junction Duct
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
FLOOR JUNCTION DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the center lower trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel.
2. Remove the clip and remove the floor distribution duct. 3. Remove the floor junction duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Floor Junction Duct Extension
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
FLOOR JUNCTION DUCT EXTENSION
Removal 1. Remove the center lower trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel.
Page 304
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations MTC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Page 696
- Using a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the valve lifter and camshaft.
- Record any valve clearance measurements which are out of specification. They will be used later
to determine the required replacement lifter size.
6. Turn crankshaft 240°. 7. Set No.3 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. 8. Check only
those valves as shown.
Page 2085
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 3020
Locations
Seat Memory Switch: Locations
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Specifications
Water Pump: Specifications
Water Pump
Insert water pump by tightening bolts alternately and evenly.
Locations
Courtesy Lamp: Locations
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 1637
Fuel Pump Relay: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Service and Repair
Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag
Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the screws (A) and release clips (B) to remove the steering angle sensor (1) from spiral
cable (2).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: In the case that the ABS actuator and electronic unit (control unit) is replaced, make
sure to adjust position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock
Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Page 1894
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Power Distribution Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection
1.FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK INSPECTION Check that the following fusible links or IPDM E/R
fuses are not blown.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - Replace fuse or fusible link. 2.POWER CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1.
Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E120. 3. Check voltage
between IPDM E/R harness connector E120 terminals 1, 2 and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Repair or replace IPDM E/R power circuit harness. 3.GROUND
CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E121 and E124.
2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121(A) terminal 60, E124(B) terminal
38 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG OK - Inspection End. NG - Repair or replace IPDM E/R ground circuit harness.
Page 2884
CAUTION: Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is located inside the clevis as
shown.
3. Turn input rod to adjust the brake pedal to the specified height.
When the brake pedal is adjusted to specification, tighten the lock nut to specification. Refer to
See: Power Brake Assist/Vacuum Brake Booster/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Brake Booster.
Tool number : - (J-46532)
4. With the pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp switch and the ASCD cancel
switch in until the threaded ends contact the rubber
stops.
5. With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch contacting the rubber
stops, turn the switches 45° clockwise to lock them
in place.
CAUTION: Make sure that the gap "C1" and "C2" between the rubber stops and switch ends are
within specification. 6. Check the pedal play "A".
CAUTION: Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the pedal is released. 7. Start the engine
and check the height of the brake pedal when depressing it.
Page 4181
AV-DVD-02
MODELS WITHOUT REAR ROOF CONSOLE ASSEMBLY
Page 4889
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Specifications
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Mass Air Flow Sensor
Page 5034
OK or NG OK - GO TO 4. NG - Check harness between BCM and combination switch for open or
short circuit. 4.BCM OUTPUT TERMINAL INSPECTION 1. Turn lighting switch and wiper switch to
OFF. 2. Set wiper dial to position 4. 3. Connect BCM and combination switch connectors. 4. Turn
ignition switch ON, and check combination switch input (BCM output) terminal voltage waveform of
suspect malfunctioning system.
OK or NG OK - Open circuit in combination switch, GO TO 5. NG - Replace BCM. Refer to See:
Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body Control Module/Service and Repair.
5.COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION Referring to table below, perform combination switch
inspection.
Page 1347
Page EM-17
Page 2081
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Suspension Arm
Control Arm: Testing and Inspection Suspension Arm
SUSPENSION ARM
Inspection
- Check suspension arm for damage, cracks, deformation and replace if necessary.
- Check rubber bushing for damage, cracks and deformation. Replace suspension arm assembly if
necessary.
- Check ball joint. Replace suspension arm assembly if any of the following exists:
- Ball stud is worn.
- Joint is hard to swing.
- Play in axial direction is excessive.
- Before checking, turn ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that ball joint is properly broken in.
Locations
Remote Switch: Locations
REAR VIEW MONITOR
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 1951
Information Bus: Description and Operation
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Schematic
Page 368
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattles
Heat Shield: All Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattles
Classification: EM10-003
Reference: NTB10-097
Date: August 23, 2010
EXHAUST HEAT SHIELD NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002 - 2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35DE (V6) engine only 2007 - 2010 Altima
Sedan (L32) 2008 - 2010 Altima Coupe (CL32) 2007 - 2010 Altima Hybrid (L32HV) 2004-2008
Maxima (A34) 2009 - 2010 Maxima (A35) 2004- 2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A noise is coming from the front exhaust tube heat shield(s) due to rattle.
ACTION:
Secure the heat shield(s) with new band clamps (see PARTS INFORMATION).
^ Refer to REPAIR PROCEDURE.
Do not replace the front exhaust tube for this incident, if it should occur.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
WARNING:
Page 466
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
Adjustable and Non-adjustable Accelerator Pedal
CAUTION: Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position.
This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only).
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only).
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the heater and cooling unit
assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and
Repair/Removal
And Installation.
Page 149
Attachment General Procedure
Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area
Engine Oil: Customer Interest Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area
Classification: EM07-001D
Reference: NTB07-042D
Date: May 25, 2010
MAXIMA / ALTIMA / QUEST; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA
This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been
amended. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35 engine ONLY
2004-2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM:
There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system.
^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM).
^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause.
Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis.
ACTION:
1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with
the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin.
2. Change the engine oil and filter.
3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST
closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 2201
EGR Temperature Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 212
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both terminals and wait at least
three minutes.
1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. 2.
Disconnect the harness connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 3.
Remove center console lower cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel.
4. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors. 5. Remove bolts from the diagnosis
sensor unit.
CAUTION: Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts.
- Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to make sure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If
it shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one.
- Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing
Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
CAUTION: The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark pointing toward the front of
the vehicle for proper operation.
ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis
sensor unit identification is correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air
Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/CONSULT-III Function
(Air Bag).
Page 2230
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Fuel Pressure Check
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in
"WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or
three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
Without CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn
ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out.
The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because V42 models never have fuel return
system.
Method A
CAUTION: The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for other
purposes.
- Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick
connector maintains seal ability with O-rings inside.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Prepare fuel hose for
fuel pressure check, and connect fuel pressure gauge. -
Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine NISSAN fuel hose without quick
connector).
- To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moderately long fuel hose for fuel pressure
check.
- Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with damage or cracks on it.
- Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service
and Repair/Intake Manifold. Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
- Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
- Keep the original fuel hose to be free from intrusion of dust or foreign substances with a suitable
cover.
Specifications
Intake Manifold: Specifications
Intake Manifold Collector
Page 5102
DESCRIPTION
Page 3314
Service and Repair
Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair
Maintenance Information
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS (With and Without Navigation System)
COLOR SCREEN WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped)
If you use the system with the engine not running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will use up
all the battery power, and the engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
ENTER button - This is a button on the control panel. By pressing this button you can select the
item or perform this action.
"Display" key - This is a select key on the screen. By selecting this key you can proceed to the next
function.
HOW TO USE THE JOYSTICK AND ENTER BUTTON
Use the joystick to choose an item on the display screen. Move the joystick up, down, left or right to
highlight an item. Then press the ENTER button to select the item or perform the action.
HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON
This button has two functions.
- Go back to the previous display (cancel). If you press the BACK button during setup, the setup
will be canceled and/or the display will return to the previous screen.
- Finish setup.
In some screens pressing the BACK button accepts the changes made during setup.
HOW TO USE THE TRIP BUTTON
Page 2952
3. Refill until new brake fluid comes out of each air bleeder valve. 4. Bleed air from the brake
system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair.
Page 1828
Page 1295
1. Timing chain tensioner (secondary)(LH) 2. Internal chain guide 3. Timing chain tensioner
(secondary)(RH) 4. Camshaft sprocket RH (EXH) 5. Timing chain (secondary) 6. Timing chain
(primary) 7. Camshaft sprocket RH (INT) 8. Camshaft sprocket LH (INT) 9. Timing chain
(secondary) 10. Camshaft sprocket LH (EXH) 11. Slack guide 12. Crankshaft sprocket 13. Tension
guide
CAUTION: - After removing timing chains, do not turn the crankshaft and camshaft separately, or
the valves will strike the pistons. - When installing camshafts, chain tensioners, oil seals, or other
sliding parts, lubricate contacting surfaces with new engine oil. - Apply new engine oil to bolt
threads and seat surfaces when installing camshaft sprockets, camshaft brackets, and crankshaft
pulley. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the rocker covers or intake manifold collector to
remove or install the timing chain(s).
Removal
1. Set No. 1 cylinder to TDC.
- Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved line without color) with timing
indicator.
2. Remove front timing chain case. 3. Check timing chain markings to confirm No. 1 cylinder is at
TDC of its compression stroke.
- If not, remove Ring Gear Stopper Tool and turn crankshaft clockwise 360° (one revolution). Re-install Ring Gear Stopper Tool.
Locations
Overdrive Switch: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B)
Fuse Block: Diagrams Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B)
FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX (J/B)
Terminal Arrangement
Page 3615
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair MTC
Defroster Door Motor
DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
Defroster Door Motor - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
REMOVAL 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater Core
Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the steering member from the front
heater and cooling unit assembly. 3. Disconnect the defroster door motor electrical connector. 4.
Remove the two screws and remove the defroster door motor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Component
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
Component
Page 1977
3. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (without PAST): Check the CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (without
PAST) of units indicating "U1000" or
"U1001" on SELF-DIAG RESULTS. Draw a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the possible
error circuit.
NOTE: While an error occurred in the past according to SELF-DIAG RESULTS, it is unclear which signal is
not received. Assume that errors were detected from all reception items.
- Draw a single line among the unit and all reception items. (Work flow differs from CAN DIAG
SUPPORT MNTR (with PAST).) a. Reception item of "EPS": Assume that the unit could not receive
the signals from ECM, ABS, and M&A.;
Draw a line among EPS, ECM, ABS, and M&A; (line 3-a in the figure below).
b. Reception item of "ABS": Assume that the unit could not receive the signal from ECM. Draw a
line between ABS and ECM (line 3-b in the
figure below).
Page 162
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 774
4. After warming up the engine, check for engine oil leaks. 5. Install the RH splash shield.
6. Check engine oil level and add engine oil as necessary. Refer to See: Fluids/Engine Oil/Service
and Repair.
Page 1143
Oil Filter: Service and Repair
OIL FILTER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the RH splash shield.
2. Remove the oil filter using Tool.
Tool number : KV10115801 (J-38956)
WARNING: Be careful not to get burned, the engine and engine oil may be hot.
CAUTION: The oil filter is equipped with a relief valve. Use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent.
- When removing the oil filter, use a shop cloth to absorb any oil leaks or spills.
- Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts.
- Completely wipe off any oil that adheres to the engine and the vehicle.
INSTALLATION 1. Remove any foreign material adhering to the oil filter installation surface.
2. Apply engine oil to the oil seal contact surface of the new oil filter as shown. 3. Screw the oil filter
manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by turning another 2/3 turn as
shown. Or tighten to specification
using Tool.
Service and Repair
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair
BRAKE FLUID
Bleeding Brake System
CAUTION: Carefully monitor brake fluid level at the sub tank during bleeding operation.
- Fill the sub tank with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance. Make sure it is full at all times
while bleeding the air out of system.
- Place a container under the sub tank to avoid spilling brake fluid.
- Do not loosen the line fittings at the ABS actuator during air bleeding.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and control unit connector or negative
battery terminal. 2. Connect a transparent vinyl tube and container to air bleeder valve.
3. Fully depress brake pedal several times. 4. With brake pedal depressed, open air bleeder valve
to release air. 5. Close air bleeder valve. 6. Release brake pedal slowly. 7. Tighten air bleeder
valve to specification.
Air bleeder valve : Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Front/Exploded View, See: Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear/Exploded View.
8. Repeat steps 2 through 7 until no more air bubbles come out of air bleeder valve. 9. Bleed the
brake hydraulic system air bleeder valves in the following order:
Right rear brake to Left front brake to Left rear brake to Right front brake
Page 4039
5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5).
^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit.
6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure
6A.
NOTE:
^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle.
^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle.
Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8:
^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned.
^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring.
^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no
wrinkles or ridges are present.
^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D"
ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece.
7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B).
Service and Repair
Door Locks: Service and Repair
SLIDE DOOR LOCK
Removal and Installation
OUTSIDE HANDLE 1. Remove the sliding door finisher. Refer to See: Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the grommet, and the outside handle escutcheon bolt (TORX T30) from grommet hole.
3. While pulling the outside handle (1), remove outside handle escutcheon (2).
4. While pulling outside handle (1), slide toward rear of vehicle to remove (2).
5. Remove the front gasket and rear gasket.
Page 3620
Removal and Installation
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT)
Removal 1. Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Lower Panel LH.
2. Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Center Stack Trim Panel.
3. Disconnect the air mix door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the three screws and remove
the air mix door motor.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (REAR)
Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the rear air mix door motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the three screws and
remove the rear air mix door motor.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1617
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 2551
Piston stroke :0.76 - 1.44mm (0.0299 - 0.0567in)
21. Install thrust washer facing the flat surface up.
CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.
22. Install oil seal into oil pump assembly until it is flush using Tool.
Tool number : ST30720000 (J-25405)
CAUTION: Do not reuse oil seal.
- Apply ATF to oil seal.
Page 877
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
Automatic Air Conditioner
REFRIGERANT
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
................................................... HFC-134a (R-134a)
Manual Air Conditioner
REFRIGERANT
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
................................................... HFC-134a (R-134a)
Page 2135
Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis
Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis
Classification: EM09-013
Reference: NTB10-002
Date: January 12, 2010
DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS
APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s),
ACTION
Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any
repairs performed.
Component Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3341
Page 5036
Combination Switch: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
COMBINATION SWITCH
CONSULT-III Function (BCM)
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure 1. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "DATA
MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION
FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen.
4. Touch "START". 5. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored.
When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the signals will be
monitored.
6. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To
stop recording, touch "STOP".
Display Item List
Page 147
Page 732
- Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the tube until a click is
heard.
- After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by pulling on the tube and the
connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the quick connector.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks: 1. Turn
the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to check the connections for fuel leaks with
the electric fuel pump applying fuel
pressure to the fuel piping.
2. Start the engine and let it idle to check that there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system tube and
hose connections.
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Classification: WT04-004C
Reference: NTB04-054C
Date: April 6, 2011
WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION
This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION.
No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the
following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
General Information and Recommendations
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions
supplied with your alignment equipment.
^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions.
^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment.
General Information and Recommendations
1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed.
^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles.
^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure
proper "centering" of the steering wheel.
2. Use the right alignment machine.
^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing
alignment checks.
^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment
equipment.
^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be
checked to ensure that it is level.
3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated.
^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings.
^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should
be checked immediately.
^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended
service/calibration schedule.
NOTE:
In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached
to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
Page 1326
Figure 2.
NOTE
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (See Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION
Tighten the bolt no more then necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3
minutes.
Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it.
Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward.
Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has
been dropped or sustained an impact.
After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function
and delete the memory by CONSULT-III.
If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair
malfunctions. Refer to
Page 2557
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Page 2426
Spark Plug: Application and ID
SPARK PLUG
Page 5124
Check continuity between rear window defogger relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 4. NG - Replace rear window defogger relay. 4.CHECK REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Install rear window defogger relay. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between IPDM
E/R connector E121 terminal 52 and ground.
OK or NG OK - Rear window defogger power supply circuit check is OK. NG - GO TO 5. 5.CHECK
IPDM E/R HARNESS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R and rear window defogger relay. 3. Check
continuity between IPDM E/R connector E121 (A) terminal 52 and rear window defogger relay
connector B4 (B) terminal 2.
52 - 2 : Continuity should exist.
OK or NG OK - Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power
Distribution Module/Service and Repair.
Page 375
Combination Switch: Electrical Diagrams
COMBINATION SWITCH
Wiring Diagram - COMBSW LT-COMBSW-01
Page 3302
- CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.
- Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.
- When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status.
2. Sleep waiting status Process to stop CAN communication is activated.
- All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN
communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status.
3. Sleep status IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode.
- CAN communication is stopped.
- When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
- When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
Page 1235
Page EM-18
Page 770
5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5).
^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit.
6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure
6A.
NOTE:
^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle.
^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle.
Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8:
^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned.
^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring.
^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no
wrinkles or ridges are present.
^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D"
ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece.
7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B).
Page 1271
9. Install upper oil pan bolts as shown.
Upper oil pan bolts : 22.0 N-m (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft-lb)
10. Install lower oil pan.
11. Install IVT control valve covers as follows:
a. Install new collared O-rings in front cover oil hole (LH and RH sides).
b. Install new seal rings on the IVT control valve covers. c. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to the IVT
control valve covers. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent.
- Being careful not to move the seal ring from the installation groove, align the dowel pins on the
chain case with the holes to install the IVT
control valve covers.
- Tighten the intake valve timing control valve cover bolts in the order as shown. - A: Bank 1
(Conventional RH bank) - B: Bank 2 (Conventional LH bank)
Page 4541
3. Using needle nose pliers, install the anti-rattle spring as shown in Figure 3.
4. Check to make sure both ends of the anti-rattle spring are correctly installed and fully seated as
shown in Figure 4.
5. Check to make sure the seat is operating properly and the anti-rattle spring stays in place.
Page 1659
Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning.
Page 4128
functions will be disabled based on driving conditions.
Bluetooth ON Indicator The Bluetooth ON indicator is located in the overhead console. The
indicator will flash during power up while the Bluetooth control unit is initializing. This process may
take up to 10 seconds. After initialization, the indicator will remain on to indicate that the system is
ready for voice commands.
Audio Unit The audio unit receives signals from the Bluetooth control unit and sends audio signals
to the speakers.
Page 3379
SPECIAL TOOLS
Page 494
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Page 3027
Acceleration/Deceleration Sensor: Locations Electrical Units Location
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 1546
Be careful of sharp edges after cutting off the excess band clamp.
7. After band clamp(s) installation, road test the vehicle to verify the repair.
Page 2764
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Page 3649
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations MTC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Parking Brake Control
Parking Brake Control: Specifications Parking Brake Control
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Parking Brake Control
Page 1234
Page EM-17
Page 2772
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 559
Always replace the seal after every disassembly.
3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification.
NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel.
Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb)
4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side
of tire as normal.
Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim.
6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and
Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And
Wheel.
7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. Refer to See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and
Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel.
NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to
See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter Wake Up Operation. 8. Adjust neutral position
of steering angle sensor, if equipped. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes /
Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Page 1338
Page EM-8
Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area
Oil Filter: Customer Interest Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area
Classification: EM07-001D
Reference: NTB07-042D
Date: May 25, 2010
MAXIMA / ALTIMA / QUEST; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA
This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been
amended. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35 engine ONLY
2004-2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM:
There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system.
^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM).
^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause.
Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis.
ACTION:
1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with
the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin.
2. Change the engine oil and filter.
3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST
closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 3578
7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem
(see Figure 6).
^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7).
Tire to Rim Slippage:
^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire
may become un-balanced.
^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage.
^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry.
^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced.
WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION
Page 1974
Present Error -- Short Circuit -- When the symptoms listed below exist, a short circuit of the CAN
communication line is a possible cause.
Error symptom Most the units connected to the CAN communication system go into fail-safe mode or are
deactivated.
Inspection procedure -
Refer to See: Trouble Diagnosis/Malfunction Area Chart.
Page 1063
Valve Clearance: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT
Valve Clearance
CHECKING Perform inspection as follows after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or
valve related parts, or if there is unusual engine conditions regarding valve clearance.
NOTE: Check valve clearance while engine is cold and not running. 1. Remove the intake manifold
collectors. Refer to See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Collector. 2. Remove
the ignition coils. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and
Repair/Removal And Installation LH
(LH) and See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal
And Installation RH (RH).
3. Remove the rocker covers. See: Valve Cover/Service and Repair.
4. Set No.1 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. Align pointer (A) with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley.
- Check that the valve lifters on No.1 cylinder are loose and valve lifters on No.4 are tight. If not,
turn the crankshaft one full revolution (360°) and align as shown.
- RH cylinder head (1)
- White Arrow Indicates Engine front
5. Check only the valves as shown.
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 23.6 Nm, 17 ft lb
Capacity Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Engine Coolant Capacity
With Reservoir .....................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 2-3/4 gal(10.5L)
Page 1280
a. Install the crankshaft sprocket.
- Make sure the mating marks on the crankshaft sprocket face front of engine.
4. Install the timing chain (primary).
- Water pump (G). - Install timing chain (primary) so the mating mark (punched) (B) on camshaft
sprocket (C) is aligned with the copper link (A) on the timing
chain, while the mating mark (notched) (E) on the crankshaft sprocket (D) is aligned with the yellow
one (F) on the timing chain, as shown.
- When it is difficult to align mating marks of the timing chain (primary) with each sprocket,
gradually turn the camshaft to align it with the
mating marks.
- During alignment, be careful to prevent dislocation of mating mark alignments of the secondary
timing chains.
Page 3784
3. Remove the front heater core.
NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core,
replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new front heater core.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR HEATER CORE
Removal 1. Partially drain the engine cooling system. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair.
3. Disconnect the rear heater core hoses from the rear heater core. 4. Remove the rear heater core
bracket.
5. Remove the rear heater core.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
MTC
HEATER CORE
Removal and Installation
FRONT HEATER CORE
Removal
Page 4180
Entertainment Systems: Electrical Diagrams
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram - DVD AV-DVD-01
Page 1318
Figure 2.
NOTE
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (See Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION
Tighten the bolt no more then necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Page 4177
Page 784
Hose/Line HVAC: Removal and Replacement
Component
REFRIGERANT LINES
Component
Front A/C Compressor and Condenser
Locations
Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location
Page 4540
1. Move the 2nd row seat fully forward and lift the seat up. See Figure 1.
NOTE:
^ These photos are for the LH side. Repeat steps 1-4 for the RH side if needed.
2. Check to see if the inner and outer anti-rattle spring has fallen off the seat. See Figure 2.
^ Replace the springs with the ones listed in the Parts Information.
Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure
Page 5025
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
ATC
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations ATC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Page 1935
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Page 4761
ASCD Indicator
ASCD INDICATOR
Wiring Diagram
Page 3941
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both terminals and wait at least
three minutes.
1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. 2.
Disconnect the harness connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 3.
Remove center console lower cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel.
4. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors. 5. Remove bolts from the diagnosis
sensor unit.
CAUTION: Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts.
- Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to make sure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If
it shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one.
- Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to See: Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
CAUTION: The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark pointing toward the front of
the vehicle for proper operation.
ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis
sensor unit identification is correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/CONSULT-III Function (Air Bag).
Page 4643
3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see
Figure 3).
^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information.
4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring.
^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt
NOTE:
^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring.
^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Page 3316
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove coolant reservoir fasteners. 3. Move
coolant reservoir aside.
4. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover.
5. Remove IPDM E/R harness cover.
6. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 7. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and
remove the IPDM E/R.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1298
- When handling camshaft sprocket (INT), be careful of the following: CAUTION: - Handle carefully
to avoid any shock to camshaft sprocket. - Do not disassemble. (Do not loosen bolts (A) as shown).
NOTE: For removal of timing chain tensioner (secondary), refer to Removal and Installation
(Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner). [Removing camshaft bracket (No. 1) is required.]
Inspection
Locations
Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location
Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic
Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic
Classification: EL10-028
Reference: NTB10-106
Date: September 10, 2010
NATS SECURITY - VBC LOGIC
APPLIED VEHICLE: 2009 - 2011 All Nissan with NATS / Immobilizer System
SERVICE INFORMATION
All model year 2009 - 2011 Nissan vehicles equipped with NATS/Immobilizer system have the new
VBC (Validate Before Crank) starter relay logic.
VBC (Validate Before Crank) Logic:
^ The BCM will make sure that a valid (registered) key is being used before engaging the starter
relay. If the key is not authenticated the starter will not
operate.
^ If the engine cranks, the issue is not related to NATS. Do not replace NATS components (BCM,
I-Key, FOB Reader or RF Receiver). Refer to ASIST
for further diagnostic information as needed.
Procedures
Hose/Line HVAC: Procedures
REFRIGERANT LINES
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure
SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Discharging Refrigerant
WARNING: Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose
and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified service
equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or SAE
J2201 HFC-134a (R-134a) recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate
the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained
from the refrigerant and oil manufacturers.
Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant
Page 1967
CREATE DIAGNOSIS SHEET
NOTE: Be sure to use the diagnosis sheet for the correct CAN system type.
Print Diagnosis Sheet Print the diagnosis sheet for the applicable CAN system type.
Check Collected Data Make sure that all ECUs are received, referring to "ECU list". For abbreviations, refer to See: CAN/Abbreviation List.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Classification: RS01-001B
Reference: NTB01-005B
Date: November 12, 2009
"D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION
This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s).
ACTION
Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to:
^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings.
^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
Page 1299
Check for cracks and any excessive wear at link plates. Replace chain if necessary.
- Inspect all timing chains and associated parts for wear or damage, replace as necessary.
Installation
Page 1854
DESCRIPTION
Page 4439
Be careful not to bend the cable too much, keeping the radius 100mm (3.94 in) or more.
2. Make sure the cable is not offset from the positioning grommet, and push the grommet into the
panel hole securely. 3. Apply the sealant around the grommet at * mark.
4. Install the cable securely to the lock. 5. After installing, check the hood lock adjustment and hood
opener operation. Refer to See: Adjustments.
Page 3472
Ball Joint: Specifications Rear Suspension
Ball Joint
Page 2471
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment
1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Remove cable from range lever. 3. Set range lever in neutral
position.
4. Remove range lever and install Tool.
Tool number : KV911J0060 (J-45404)
5. Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts. 6. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns
with neutral base line on PNP switch body.
7. Tighten PNP switch bolts. 8. Reinstall range lever and cable. 9. Adjust control cable. Refer to
See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Adjustments.
10. Reinstall battery and bracket. 11. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to See: Computers
and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and
Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0705.
Page 4828
select the item or perform the action.
HOW TO USE THE TRIP BUTTON
When the TRIP button is pressed, the following modes will display on the screen.
Warning message (if any) -- TRIP 1 -- TRIP 2 -- FUEL ECONOMY -- MAINTENANCE -- Audio or
OFF -- TRIP 1
Maintenance items
Press the TRIP button to display maintenance information or set maintenance intervals for the
following:
- Engine Oil
- Tire Rotation
- Tire Pressure (if so equipped)
For setting the Tire Pressure display1 refer to "Tire pressure information" later in this section.
Changing the maintenance interval
Select the "Engine Oil" or "Tire Rotation" key using the joystick and press the ENTER button to
display the screen to change the maintenance interval.
Select the "Maintenance Schedule" key using the joystick and move the joystick to right or left to
set the maintenance interval.
Resetting the maintenance interval
Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Combination Switch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
COMBINATION SWITCH
Combination Switch Inspection
1.SYSTEM CHECK 1. Referring to table below, check to which system the malfunctioning switch
belongs.
- GO TO 2. 2.SYSTEM CHECK With CONSULT-III 1. Connect CONSULT-III, and select "COMB
SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR". 3. Select "START" and
confirm that other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally. Without CONSULT-III
Operate combination switch and confirm that other switches in malfunctioning system operate
normally. Example: When auto light switch is malfunctioning, confirm that "FRONT WIPER LOW"
and "FRONT WIPER INT" in System 3, to which the auto light switch belongs, operate normally.
Check results
Other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally.-Replace lighting switch or wiper switch.
Other switches in malfunctioning system do not operate normally. - GO TO 3.
3.HARNESS INSPECTION 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM and combination
switch connectors. 3. Check for continuity between BCM harness connector of the suspect system
and the corresponding combination switch connector terminals.
4. Check for continuity between each terminal of BCM harness connector in suspect malfunctioning
system and ground.
Page 3708
Compressor Clutch: Specifications Manual Air Conditioner
Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance (B)
....................................................................................................................................... 0.3 - 0.6 mm
(0.012 - 0.024 in)
Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Classification: EL09-042
Reference: NTB09-118
Date: October 28, 2009
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR
RESET
APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below.
IF YOU CONFIRM
^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side.
And
^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery.
2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display.
NOTES:
^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage
the printed circuit board (PCB).
^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver.
Testing and Inspection
Radius Arm: Testing and Inspection
RADIUS ROD
Inspection
- Check radius rod for any deformation, cracks, or damage and replace if necessary.
Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R)
Battery Replacement
Classification: EL09-042
Reference: NTB09-118
Date: October 28, 2009
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR
RESET
APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below.
IF YOU CONFIRM
^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side.
And
^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery.
2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display.
NOTES:
^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage
the printed circuit board (PCB).
^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver.
Page 2765
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
Page 4912
Courtesy Lamp: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
CONSULT-III Function (BCM)
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
WORK SUPPORT
Operation Procedure 1. Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "WORK
SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch "SET I/L D-UNLCK INTCON" on
"SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. Touch "CHANGE SETT". 6. The setting will
be changed and "CUSTOMIZING COMPLETED" will be displayed. 7. Touch "END".
Display Item List
Reference between "MODE" and "TIME" for "TURN ON/OFF".
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure 1. Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "DATA
MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION
FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen.
4. Touch "START".
Page 1577
Page 2148
Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater
Component Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2382
Knock Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 850
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-50288 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets (no picture shown).
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioners
plungers. Figure 1 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tools where shown in
Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Headlamp Bulb: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Classification: EL10-021A
Reference: NTB10-061A
Date: June 29, 2010
XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE
This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous
versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps
IF YOU CONFIRM
A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an
internal issue),
ACTION
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon
headlamps.
NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident.
^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available
to solve the incident, if one should occur.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the
repair performed.
^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 1348
Page EM-18
Page 1456
b. Apply a continuous bead of RTV Silicone Sealant, or equivalent, to mating surface of chain
tensioner cover and water pump cover. Refer to
See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants.
9. Install water drain plug on water pump side of cylinder block.
Water drain plug : 9.5 N.m (0.97 kg-m, 76 in-lb)
10. Tighten idler pulley bolts.
Idler pulley bolts : 34.8 N.m (3.5 kg-m, 26 ft-lb)
11. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
- Refill engine coolant. Refer to See: Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair.
- After starting engine, let idle for three minutes, then rev engine up to 3,000 rpm under no load to
purge air from the high-pressure chamber of the chain tensioner. The engine may produce a
rattling noise. This indicates that air still remains in the chamber and is not a matter of concern.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for engine coolant leaks. Refer to See: Cooling System/Service and Repair/Inspection.
- Start and warm up the engine. Visually make sure that there are no engine coolant leaks or A/T
fluid leaks.
Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Classification: WT11-003
Reference: NTB11-029
Date: March 21, 2011
TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration.
^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care
to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin.
Tire Mounting Tips:
NOTE:
These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to
read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment
1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid.
^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process.
2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and
corrosion.
Page 5022
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Page 1386
- Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246.
b. Before installing timing chains (secondary) and camshaft sprockets, confirm mating marks are
visible. If necessary, use paint or equivalent to
re-mark the camshaft sprockets at each mating mark.
c. Install timing chains (secondary) (8) and camshaft sprockets [INT (1) and EXH (9)].
- Left bank mating marks (6) - Align the timing chain mating marks (secondary) (2) (yellow color
link) with the ones on camshaft sprockets (INT and EXH)(4), (5), (7) and
(10)(punched), and install them.
NOTE:
- Mating marks for camshaft sprocket (INT) are on the back side of camshaft sprocket (secondary).
- There are two types of mating marks, circle (7), (10) and oval (4), (5) types. They should be used
for the right and left banks, respectively.
Right bank : Use circle type (7) and (10). Left bank : Use oval type (4) and (5).
- Align dowel pin (3) and pin hole on camshafts with the groove (11) and dowel pin on sprockets,
and install them. - On the intake side, align pin hole on the small diameter side of the camshaft
front end with dowel pin (3) on the back side of camshaft
sprocket, and install them.
- On the exhaust side, align dowel pin on camshaft front end with pin groove (11) on camshaft
sprocket, and install them. - In case that positions of each mating mark and each dowel pin do not
fit on mating parts, make fine adjustment to the position by slightly
turning camshaft(s).
- Bolts for camshaft sprockets must be tightened in the next step. Tightening them by hand is
enough to prevent the dislocation of dowel pins.
d. Confirm the mating marks are aligned, then finger tighten camshaft sprocket bolts. Final
tightening will be done with all timing chains installed. e. Remove stopper pins out from timing
chain tensioners (secondary).
3. Install timing chain (primary) as follows:
Page 1631
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 2002
CAN System Specification Chart
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CAN System Specification Chart
Determine CAN system type from the following specification chart. Then choose the correct
diagnosis sheet.
NOTE: Refer to See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis Work
Flow/Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for how to use CAN system specification chart.
Service and Repair
Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair
FENDER PROTECTOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove splash guard. Refer to See: Bumper/Front Bumper/Service and Repair. 2.
Remove pushpin clips. 3. Remove screws. 4. Remove front fender protector. 5. Remove metal
clips.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the fresh air duct. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from the mass air
flow sensor. 3. Disconnect the tube clamp at the electric throttle control actuator. 4. Disconnect the
PCV hose. 5. Remove air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube, air cleaner case (upper)
with the mass air flow sensor attached. 6. Remove mass air flow sensor from air cleaner case
(upper), as necessary.
CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. Do not shock it.
- Do not disassemble it.
- Do not touch the sensor.
7. Remove the air cleaner case (lower). 8. Remove resonator in the fender, lifting left fender
protector, as necessary.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CHANGING AIR CLEANER FILTER
NOTE:
Page 4015
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF OUTBOARD SEAT BELT RETRACTOR
Removal 1. Remove the upper anchor bolt cover. 2. Remove the D-ring anchor bolt cover and
D-ring anchor bolt. 3. Remove the seat belt lower anchor. 4. Remove the upper luggage area trim.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 5. Remove
the seat belt retractor anchor bolt and retractor assembly.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CENTER SEAT BELT RETRACTOR
Removal 1. Remove the upper luggage area trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding
/ Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Lower the rear portion of the headliner. 3. Remove the
seat belt retractor anchor bolts and retractor assembly.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE
Removal 1. Rotate third row seat assembly rearward to expose underside. 2. Release seat cushion
trim cover locking strip. 3. Remove the seat belt buckle anchor bolt and seat belt buckle.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Seat belt buckle anchor bolt : 49 N.m (5.0 kg-m, 36 ft-lb)
Page 5094
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Installation
LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2493
Page 2567
Page 1113
Figure 2.
NOTE
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (See Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION
Tighten the bolt no more then necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Page 2173
WARNING: -
Perform the work when the exhaust and cooling system have completely cooled down.
- When removing the front and rear engine mounting through bolts and nuts, lift the engine up
slightly for safety. For engine slingers, refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service
and Repair.
1. Disconnect battery. Refer to See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement. 2. Remove cowl top. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding /
Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) connector. 4. Remove
the front wheel and tires using power tool. 5. Remove the engine undercover. 6. Remove the inner
wheel well splash shields. 7. If removing only air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) do so at this time
through the wheel well opening, using Tool.
Tool number : KV991J0050 (J-44626)
8. If removing the exhaust manifold (LH bank), remove the radiator and cooling fan assembly.
Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling
System/Radiator/Service and Repair.
9. Remove the front exhaust tube. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust
System/Service and Repair/Exploded View.
10. If removing the exhaust manifold (RH), remove the front suspension member. Refer to See:
Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Suspension Member.
11. Remove the bank 1 (1) and bank 2 (2) three way catalyst manifolds support bolts in the order
as shown.
Arrow Indicates : Engine front
12. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1), heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2), air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 (bank 1) and air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
(bank 2). a. Remove harness connector of each sensor, and disconnect the harness from the
bracket and middle clamp. b. Remove both heated oxygen sensors and air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors
using Tool.
Tool numbers : KV10114400 (J-38365)
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage heated oxygen sensors or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors.
- Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new sensor.
13. Remove exhaust manifold and three way catalyst manifold heat shields using power tool. 14.
Remove the three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 1) and three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 2) by
loosening the bolts first and then removing the
nuts and through bolts using power tool.
15. Remove the RH bank (1) and LH bank (2) exhaust manifolds.
Loosen the exhaust manifold nuts in the order as shown using power tool. Arrow Indicates : Engine
front
Page 2894
CAUTION: -
Since the piston surface is plated, do not repair using sandpaper.
- Check piston surface for corrosion, wear, and damage. If any non-standard condition is detected,
replace applicable part.
Sliding Pins, Sliding Pin Bolts, and Sliding Pin Boots Check sliding pins, sliding pin bolts, and
sliding pin boot for wear, damage, and cracks. If damage or deformation is present, replace the
affected part.
DISC ROTOR INSPECTION
Visual Inspection Check surface of the disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If
any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part.
Runout Inspection 1. Using wheel nuts, secure disc rotor to the wheel hub in 2 or more positions.
2. Inspect runout using a dial gauge.
CAUTION: Before measuring, make sure the axle end play is 0 mm (0 in). Refer to See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Testing and Inspection/Front Wheel Hub And Knuckle.
3. If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by shifting mounting positions of the
disc rotor and wheel hub by one hole. 4. If runout is outside the specified value after performing the
above operation, turn the disc rotor using Tool.
Tool number : 38-PFM90.5
Thickness Inspection
Using a micrometer, check thickness of the disc rotor. If thickness does not meet specification,
replace disc rotor.
Page 5132
OK or NG OK - Rear window defogger switch check is OK. NG - GO TO 2. 2.CHECK REAR
WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM and front air control. 3. Check continuity between
BCM connector M18 (A) terminal 9 and front air control connector M49 (B) terminal 16.
9 - 16 : Continuity should exist.
4. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 9 and ground
9 - Ground : Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1. Connect BCM. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Check voltage between BCM connector M18
terminal 9 and ground.
9 - Ground : Approx. 5V
OK or NG OK - Replace front air control. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Control
Assembly/Service and Repair. NG - Replace BCM. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control
Systems/Body Control Module/Service and Repair.
Page 4757
Page 491
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Page 1093
Engine Oil Pressure: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit
OIL PRESSURE
REGULATOR VALVE
OIL PUMP
OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)
Service and Repair
Headliner: Service and Repair
HEADLINING
Removal and Installation
Without Sunroof
With Sunroof
Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing
Page 294
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair
G SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove center console lower cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel.
2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts.
CAUTION: Do not use power tools to remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
- Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts to specification.
CAUTION: Do not use power tools to install the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
- Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
Page 4951
NOTE:
^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not
replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control
unit using the old starter.
^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is:
^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb)
Page 2486
Page 714
- For specified belt deflection and tension, refer to See: Testing and Inspection.
NOTE: Adjusting bolt (E) is loosened with counterclockwise rotation. 5. Tighten adjusting bolt (C).
Adjusting bolt (C) : 28.0 N.m (2.9 kg-m, 21 ft-lb)
6. Tighten power steering oil pump bolt (D).
Power steering pump bolt (D) : 43.2 N.m (4.4 kg-m, 32 ft-lb)
Page 612
^ Apply the brakes as shown.
^ Start the engine to allow brake boost.
^ Turn the engine OFF,
^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates".
^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate.
Put the bridge plate in the down position.
^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle.
Page 536
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 3306
Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Auto Active Test
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Auto Active Test
DESCRIPTION In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive
signal to the following systems:
- Rear window defogger - Front wipers - Tail, license and parking lamps - Cornering lamps - Front
fog lamps - Headlamps (High, Low) - A/C compressor (magnet clutch) - Cooling fan
OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from
windshield (to prevent glass damage by wiper operation).
NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield
beforehand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press
front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10
seconds after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6.
After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF.
CAUTION: Be sure to perform See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Door Lock System/Door Switch
Check (With Automatic Back Door System) or See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Door Lock System/Door Switch
Check (Without Automatic Back Door System) when the auto active test cannot be performed.
INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE When auto active test mode is actuated, the
following nine steps are repeated three times.
(A): Oil pressure warning lamp is blinking when the auto active test is operating.
Locations
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 1531
Install the RH bank (1) and LH bank (2) exhaust manifold nuts in the order as shown.
Page 3237
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 1583
Electrical Units Location
Wiper Motor: Locations Electrical Units Location
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Page 671
Fuel Filter: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly
Fuel Level Sender Unit
Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors (1) and the wire connector (4). 2. Remove the
fuel sensor (2) from the pump assembly. 3. Depress the tabs (3) and remove the floater arm
assembly (5).
Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly.
Specifications
Crankshaft: Specifications
CRANKSHAFT
Page 3331
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Service and Repair
Sliding Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
SLIDE DOOR GLASS
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Apply protective tape around the slide door glass to protect the painted surface from
damage. 2. Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag.
WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves
to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION: When a slide door glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool.
Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
- Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the
instructions furnished with it.
- While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a window. This will prevent the glass from being
forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
- The rubber seal must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap.
- Inform customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
WARNING: Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesives are flammable.
- The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
- Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if
inhaled.
if affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to area with fresh air. Driving the vehicle before urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of
the slide door glass in case of an accident.
CAUTION: Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture.
Page 1493
REMOVAL 1. Remove the cowl top. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding /
Trim/Service and Repair. 2. Partially drain the engine cooling system. Refer to See:
Coolant/Service and Repair. 3. Unclip the heater pump from the cowl top extension. 4. Disconnect
the heater pump electrical connector and the two heater hoses, then remove the heater pump.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the heater pump, replace the heater pump as an assembly.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3267
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) -
SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag
modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 4887
DESCRIPTION
Page 2489
Page 1439
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
CYLINDER HEAD
On-Vehicle Service
CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating
temperature. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. Release fuel pressure and leave the fuel pump
electrically disconnected. Refer to See: Fuel Pressure/Testing and Inspection. 4. Remove all six
spark plugs. Refer to See: Spark Plug/Service and Repair.
5. Attach a compression tester to No. 1 cylinder. 6. Depress accelerator pedal fully to keep the
electric throttle control actuator butterfly-valve wide open to maximize air intake flow. 7. Crank the
engine and record the highest gauge indication. 8. Repeat the measurement on each cylinder
(steps 5 - 7).
NOTE: Always use a fully-charged battery to obtain specified engine speed.
9. If compression in one or more cylinders is low:
a. Pour a small amount of engine oil into cylinders through the spark plug holes. b. Retest
compression (steps 5 - 8).
- If adding oil helps raise compression pressure, then the piston rings may be worn or damaged. If
so, replace piston rings after checking piston.
- If the pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or is seating improperly. Inspect and repair the
valve and/or valve seat. Refer to See: Maintenance. If the valve and/or valve seat is damaged
excessively, replace as necessary.
- If compression stays low in two or more cylinders that are next to each other:
- The cylinder head gasket may be leaking. - Both cylinders may have valve component damage.
Inspect and repair as necessary.
10. After inspection is complete, install removed components. 11. Start engine and confirm that
engine runs smoothly. 12. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to See:
Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis Introduction.
Page 2149
Oxygen Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Component
Console: Service and Repair Component
CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY
Component
Page 3551
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
CAUTION: Servicing PAX run flat tires and wheels requires special tire equipment and training. DO NOT
service PAX Run Flat tires and wheels with conventional tire servicing equipment or damage to the
tire and wheel will result.
- If a PAX run flat tire and wheel [or transmitter (pressure sensor)] requires service, and the proper
servicing equipment is not available, then replace the complete PAX tire and wheel assembly.
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter
retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
3. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire.
Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the
transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead.
4. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
5. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
6. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then
install seal on transmitter. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance.
NOTE:
Page 2059
Locations
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Locations
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 2960
- Always tighten the brake tubes to the specified torque when installing.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Locations
Hose/Line HVAC: Locations
REFRIGERANT LINES
Component
Front A/C Compressor and Condenser
Navigation Sysetm - Various Garmin Nuvi(R) Issues
Global Positioning System: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Sysetm - Various Garmin
Nuvi(R) Issues
Classification: EL09-017
Reference: NTB09-047
Date: June 17, 2009
NISSAN (GARMIN) PORTABLE NAVIGATION UNIT ISSUES
APPLIED VEHICLES: Any equipped with the Nissan (Garmin) Nuvi 750 unit.
SERVICE INFORMATION
If there is any incident with the function of the Nuvi 750 Portable Navigation Unit
BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY REPAIRS:
Perform a System Reset of the Unit by sliding the "Power Key" to the left and hold for eight (8)
seconds, then return it to the normal position.
If a System Reset resolves the incident inform the customer that this System Reset can be
performed by them at any time such an incident may occur.
NOTE:
^ DO NOT REPLACE the Unit when a System Reset will resolve an incident, if one should occur.
^ This action will perform a "Soft Reset" (i.e. "reboot") of the Unit.
^ This action will not affect stored user data such as "Favorites", "Recently Found", etc.
^ This System Reset instruction is in the Unit Owner's Manual and referenced in NNA CLAIMS
BULLETIN WB/09-014* "Replacement Procedures
for Nissan (Garmin) Portable Navigation Unit".
*This CLAIMS BULLETIN can be found at NNAnet.com. Go to:
Applications > My Documents
Click on Advanced in the Search area
Under Advanced Search select the Include archives box
Type GARMIN in the Keywords box and click on SEARCH
Disclaimer
Page 2453
Shift Indicator: Electrical Diagrams
A/T INDICATOR
Wiring Diagram - AT/IND DI-AT/IND-01
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 23.6 Nm, 17 ft lb
Page 1895
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 2009
3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) Check the continuity between the harness
connector and the data link connector.
OK or NG OK >> Present error: Check the following items again.
- Decision of CAN system type.
- Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU
list" included)].
- Not copied from on-board diagnosis.
- Procedure for detecting root cause.
- Past error: Error was detected in the main line between the TCM and the data link connector.
NG >> Repair the main line between the harness connector M91 and the data link connector.
Steering Angle Sensor Branch Line Circuit
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Steering Angle Sensor Branch Line Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the
negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the steering angle sensor for damage,
bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >>
Repair the terminal and connector.
2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of steering angle sensor.
2. Check the resistance between the steering angle sensor harness connector terminals.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the steering angle sensor branch line.
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground
circuit of the steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes /
Traction Control Systems/Description and Operation/VDC/TCS/ABS Schematic. OK or NG OK >>.
Present error: Replace the steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Sensors and Switches/Sensors
and Switches - Steering and Suspension/Sensors and Switches - Steering/Steering Angle
Sensor/Service and Repair.
- Past error: Error was detected in the steering angle sensor branch line.
NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
TCM Branch Line Circuit
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TCM Branch Line Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Page 2875
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 2306
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Locations
Remote Control Module: Locations
AUDIO
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 497
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting
Front Door Window Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit
Switch Resetting
EL08-031A
Reference: NTB09-027A
Date: July 15, 2010
FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET
This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other
changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If any of the following work has been done:
^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly
^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator
^ installation of a new glass window
^ installation of a new glass run
....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following:
^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B
NOTE:
The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror.
If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in
this bulletin.
NOTE:
Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will
not reset the Limit Switch.
SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH
1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in
the glass raising (up) direction.
Page 2767
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 2324
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
Adjustable and Non-adjustable Accelerator Pedal
CAUTION: Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position.
This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only).
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only).
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the heater and cooling unit
assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and
Repair/Removal
And Installation.
Page 4175
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Page 108
Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Auto Active Test
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Auto Active Test
DESCRIPTION In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive
signal to the following systems:
- Rear window defogger - Front wipers - Tail, license and parking lamps - Cornering lamps - Front
fog lamps - Headlamps (High, Low) - A/C compressor (magnet clutch) - Cooling fan
OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from
windshield (to prevent glass damage by wiper operation).
NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield
beforehand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press
front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10
seconds after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6.
After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF.
CAUTION: Be sure to perform See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Door Lock System/Door Switch
Check (With Automatic Back Door System) or See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Door Lock System/Door Switch
Check (Without Automatic Back Door System) when the auto active test cannot be performed.
INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE When auto active test mode is actuated, the
following nine steps are repeated three times.
(A): Oil pressure warning lamp is blinking when the auto active test is operating.
Front Power Socket - 1 (LH) And Rear Power Socket
(Cargo)
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Power Socket - 1 (LH) And Rear Power Socket
(Cargo)
POWER SOCKET
Front Power Socket - 1 (LH) and Rear Power Socket (Cargo)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect battery negative terminal.
2. Remove inner socket from ring, while pressing the hook on the ring out from square hole. 3.
Disconnect power socket electrical connector. 4. Remove ring from power socket finisher while
pressing pawls.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2001
CAN System (Type 3)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CAN System (Type 3)
DIAGNOSIS SHEET
Service and Repair
Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair
CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
FRONT AIR CONTROL
Removal 1. Remove the control knobs from the front air control. 2. Remove cluster lid C,
disconnect the front air control electrical connector. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Cluster Lid C.
3. Remove the screws securing the front air control (1) to cluster lid C (2). 4. Remove the front air
control.
Installation Installation is the reverse order of removal.
REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT)
Removal 1. Remove the control knobs from the rear air control (front). 2. Remove the front roof
console assembly from the headlining, located over the rear view mirror. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair.
3. Remove the screws securing the rear air control (front) (1) to the front roof console assembly (2).
4. Remove the rear air control (front).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR)
Removal
Electrical - Starting/Charging/Battery Testing
Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Starting/Charging/Battery Testing
Classification: EL99-016V
Reference: NTB99-048V
Date: March 11, 2010
BATTERY / STARTING / CHARGING SYSTEM TESTING
This bulletin has been amended. The Service Information has been updated. Please discard all
earlier versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissans including Altima Hybrid HEV* 12 volt battery
*For information on using this tool with Altima Hybrid 12 volt batteries, refer to NTB07-007.
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Midtronics GR-8 - Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station is the factory-approved battery,
starter, and alternator tester.
^ For warranty documentation purposes, as of September 30, 2008 the GR-8 is the only approved
diagnostic tool for batteries, starters, and alternators.
^ Print-outs from this tester are required for claim reimbursements related to batteries, starters,
and/or alternators.
^ For additional information regarding claims reimbursements, refer to the current Nissan
Assurance Products Resource Manual.
^ For the complete GR-8 User Guide, refer to ASIST - TOOLS & EQUIPMENT.
^ Additional tools and replacement parts can be ordered from TECH-MATE.
^ This essential tool was shipped to your dealership and invoiced to your Nissan Non-Vehicle
account in three equal installments of $641.00 (plus
applicable taxes) in accordance with your dealer agreement with Nissan North America, Inc. This
price includes both the GR8-1200-NI and the EXP-800-NI shipped in April 2008.
Nissan vehicles equipped with standard lead/acid batteries use one of two different types with
unique battery rating specifications: JIS & CCA.
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area
Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area
Classification: EM07-001D
Reference: NTB07-042D
Date: May 25, 2010
MAXIMA / ALTIMA / QUEST; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA
This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been
amended. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35 engine ONLY
2004-2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM:
There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system.
^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM).
^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause.
Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis.
ACTION:
1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with
the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin.
2. Change the engine oil and filter.
3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST
closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 114
Power Distribution Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R
Removal and Installation (Right Side)
Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Removal and Installation (Right Side)
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
Removal and Installation (Right Side)
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and
Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Remove wheel sensor from steering
knuckle. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Wheel Speed
Sensor/Service and Repair/TCS/ABS/Wheel Sensors (TCS/ABS) See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and
Repair/VDC/TCS/ABS/Wheel Sensors (VDC/TCS/ABS).
3. Remove cotter pin. Then remove lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. 4. Remove brake
hose lock plate. Then remove brake hose from strut. 5. Remove the lower ball joint pinch bolt using
power tool, then separate lower ball joint from steering knuckle. Refer to See: Wheel Hub/Service
and Repair/Front Wheel Hub And Knuckle.
6. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly, using a puller or suitable tool.
CAUTION: When removing drive shaft, do not apply an excessive angle to drive shaft joint. Also be careful not
to excessively extend slide joint.
Page 378
OK or NG OK - GO TO 4. NG - Check harness between BCM and combination switch for open or
short circuit. 4.BCM OUTPUT TERMINAL INSPECTION 1. Turn lighting switch and wiper switch to
OFF. 2. Set wiper dial to position 4. 3. Connect BCM and combination switch connectors. 4. Turn
ignition switch ON, and check combination switch input (BCM output) terminal voltage waveform of
suspect malfunctioning system.
OK or NG OK - Open circuit in combination switch, GO TO 5. NG - Replace BCM. Refer to See:
Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body Control Module/Service and Repair.
5.COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION Referring to table below, perform combination switch
inspection.
Mechanical Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Mechanical Specifications
Oil Pump
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit
OIL PRESSURE
REGULATOR VALVE
OIL PUMP
OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)
Regulator Valve
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit
OIL PRESSURE
REGULATOR VALVE
Page 1944
Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Wiring Diagram - CAN LAN-CAN-01
Page 5123
3. If a filament is burned out, circuit tester registers 0 or battery voltage. 4. To locate burned out
point, move probe to left and right along filament. Test needle will swing abruptly when probe
passes the point.
Rear Window Defogger Power Supply Circuit Inspection
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Rear Window Defogger Power Supply Circuit Inspection
1.CHECK FUSES Check if any of the following fuses in fuse block (J/B) and IPDM E/R are blown.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before
installing new fuse, refer to See: Power and Ground Distribution/Description and Operation.
2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect rear window defogger relay. 3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between rear window defogger relay connector and ground.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER RELAY
Page 1989
SHORT CIRCUIT
Front Wiper And Washer System
Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair Front Wiper And Washer System
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Washer Fluid Reservoir
REMOVAL 1. Remove fender protector. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front
Fender Liner/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the washer fluid reservoir (2) from the vehicle. Twist and pull out washer fluid reservoir inlet (1).
- Remove front and rear washer motor electrical connector (3) and washer fluid level sensor
electrical connector.
- Remove washer fluid reservoir screws (A).
- Remove front and rear washer hoses.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Washer fluid reservoir screws : 5.5 N.m (0.56 kg-m, 49 in-lb)
CAUTION: After installation, add water up to the upper level of the washer fluid reservoir inlet, and
check for water leaks.
Page 5075
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
Page 2966
Brake Master Cylinder: Overhaul
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
Disassembly and Assembly
WITHOUT VDC MODELS
Disassembly
1. Lift up the tabs on the stopper cap and remove it from the master cylinder using a suitable tool
as shown. The piston inside the master cylinder
might pop out when this is done, so hold the stopper cap down at the same time.
Cooling System - Long Life Coolant Information
Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Long Life Coolant Information
Classification: EM09-001A
Reference: NTB09-040A
Date: May 14, 2010
NEW BLUE NISSAN LONG LIFE ANTIFREEZE/COOLANT
This bulletin has been amended. The Service Information has been updated. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
SERVICE INFORMATION
In calendar year 2009, Nissan began filling some vehicles at the factory with a NEW Nissan Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (LLC) that is blue in color.
NOTE: LLC = Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
The transition to this new Blue LLC continued though MY 2010. Beginning with MY 2011, all
Nissan vehicles are filled at the factory with the Blue LLC.
^ MY 2009 and 2010: Some vehicles are filled at the factory with Blue LLC.
^ MY 2011: All vehicles are filled at the factory with Blue LLC.
Blue LLC is designed to have a service life of 7 years/105,000 miles for the factory fill, and 5
years/75,000 miles for subsequent replacement fills.
Nissan Blue Super LLC is available through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product
Program, Website order link via dealer portal www.NNAnet.com or order direct
www.NissanChemicals.com.
^ Blue LLC one gallon pre-diluted:
P/N 999MP - LP25500P
> The one gallon containers are pre-diluted with 50% antifreeze and 50% distilled water.
> Do not add additional water when using pre-diluted Blue LLC.
Locations
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SRS Component Parts Location
Page 3289
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove coolant reservoir fasteners. 3. Move
coolant reservoir aside.
4. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover.
5. Remove IPDM E/R harness cover.
6. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 7. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and
remove the IPDM E/R.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2242
Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning.
Page 1226
Page EM-9
Locations
Number One Cylinder: Locations
Firing Order
1-2-3-4-5-6
Page 50
- To install the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool).
- Always tighten the brake tubes to the specified torque when installing.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Page 948
Always replace the seal after every disassembly.
3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification.
NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel.
Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb)
4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side
of tire as normal.
Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim.
6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel
position on vehicle. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel.
NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to
See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter Wake Up Operation. 8.
Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor, if equipped. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Page 4431
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Locations
Overdrive Switch: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 3141
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Power Socket - 2 (RH) And Rear Power Socket
(2nd Row)
POWER SOCKET
Front Power Socket - 2 (RH) and Rear Power Socket (2nd Row)
REMOVAL and INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Remove inner socket from ring, while pressing the hook on the ring out from square
hole.
2. Disconnect power socket electrical connector. 3. Remove ring from power socket finisher while
pressing pawls.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
In-Vehicle Sensor
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair In-Vehicle Sensor
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding
/ Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Center Stack Trim Panel.
2. Remove the two screws and remove the in-vehicle sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2550
14. Install 2nd coast brake flange, 2nd coast brake discs and 2nd coast brake plates.
15. Place clutch spring compressor on 2nd coast brake flange, and compress return spring with a
press.
Tool number : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87)
16. Install snap ring using suitable tool.
17. Set a dial indicator as shown. 18. When applying compressed air (4Kg/cm2) into the oil
passage as shown, measure 2nd brake piston stroke and check 2nd brake piston moves
smoothly.
Piston stroke :1.10 - 1.50mm (0.0433 - 0.0591in)
If 2nd brake piston stroke is out standards, select another flange. Refer to See:
Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Clutch, Gear And Brakes.
19. Set a dial indicator as shown. 20. When applying compressed air (4Kg/cm2) into the oil
passage as shown, measure 2nd coast brake piston stroke and check 2nd coast brake piston
moves smoothly.
Page 888
1. Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment
gauges.
No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines.
2. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using
recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant
identifier. If NG, refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service
Precautions/Precautions/Contaminated Refrigerant.
3. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and
refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to See: Heating and
Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Precautions/Contaminated Refrigerant.
4. Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure oil discharged
into the recovery/recycling equipment. 5. Drain the oil from the "old" (removed) compressor into a
graduated container and recover the amount of oil drained. 6. Drain the oil from the "new"
compressor into a separate, clean container. 7. Measure an amount of new oil installed equal to
amount drained from "old" compressor. Add this oil to "new" compressor through the suction port
opening.
8. Measure an amount of new oil equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this oil to
"new" compressor through the suction port
opening.
9. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of
oil at this time.
CAUTION: Do not add this 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil if only replacing the compressor.
Page 782
Page 4223
Pedal Positioning Motor: Locations Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model)
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM
Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model)
COMPONENT PARTS AND HARNESS CONNECTOR LOCATION
Page 964
3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2.
^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process
Tire:
^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area)
NOTE:
Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may
become un-balanced.
Wheel:
^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area.
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area
4. Before inflating the tire:
^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks.
Page 1801
- Do not drop or shock spark plug.
If spark plug tip is covered with carbon, a spark plug cleaner may be used.
Checking and adjusting spark plug gap is not required between change intervals.
Spark plug gap (nominal) : 1.1 mm (0.043 in)
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Use standard type spark plug for normal driving conditions. Refer to See: Maintenance.
- The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under
conditions such as: Frequent engine starts
- Low ambient temperatures
- The cold type spark plug is suitable when engine spark knock occurs with the standard type spark
plug under conditions such as: Extended highway driving
- Frequent high engine revolution.
Page 3166
HARNESS CONNECTOR (LEVER LOCKING TYPE) Lever locking type harness connectors are used on certain control units and control modules such
as ECM, ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), etc.
- Lever locking type harness connectors are also used on super multiple junction (SMJ)
connectors.
- Always confirm the lever is fully locked in place by moving the lever as far as it will go to ensure
full connection.
CAUTION: Always confirm the lever is fully released (loosened) before attempting to disconnect or
connect these connectors to avoid damage to the connector housing or terminals.
Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing
Page 3131
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Locations
Heated Glass Element: Locations
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
ATC
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair ATC
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A)
Service Procedure.
2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector and remove the refrigerant pressure
sensor from the condenser.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hose/Line
HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Component.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
- Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil
to it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 152
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 5044
Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair
HAZARD SWITCH
Removal and Installation
Removal 1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Cluster Lid C.
2. Press tabs and remove hazard switch (1).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2452
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 574
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement
1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove bolt, and turbine
revolution sensor from A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Do not reuse seal bolt.
Page 1065
9. Turn the crankshaft 240° and align as above.
10. Set No.5 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. 11. Check only those valves as shown.
12. If all valve clearances are within specification, installation of the remaining components is in the
reverse order of removal. If the valve clearances
are out of specification, adjust the valve clearances.
VALVE ADJUSTING
CAUTION: Adjust valve clearance while engine is cold.
NOTE: Perform adjustment by selecting the correct head thickness of the valve lifter (adjusting shims are
not used).
- The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional
differences caused by temperature. Use specifications for hot engine condition to confirm valve
clearances.
Front Suspension
Control Arm: Service and Repair Front Suspension
TRANSVERSE LINK
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool.
2. Remove lower ball joint pinch bolt and nut using power tool, then separate transverse link from
the wheel hub and steering knuckle assembly. 3. Remove the two transverse link pivot bolts and
transverse link bolt using power tool. 4. Remove the transverse link.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Visual Check Check the transverse link for damage, cracks or deformation. Replace it if necessary.
- Check the bushing for damage, cracks and deformation. Replace the transverse link if necessary.
Lower Ball Joint Check the ball joint for excessive play. Replace the transverse link assembly if any of the following
exists:
- Lower ball joint stud is worn.
- Lower ball joint is hard to swing.
- Lower ball joint play in axial directions or end play is excessive.
Swinging Force Check ball joint swinging force.
NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10
revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in.
Swinging force "A" (measuring at groove of ball stud) : 7.8 - 54.9 N (0.8 - 5.6 kg-f, 1.8 - 12.3 lb-f)
Turning Force Check ball joint turning force.
NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10
revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in.
Page 5128
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check continuity between door mirror LH connector D13 terminal 5
and ground.
5 - Ground : Continuity should exist.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR
DEFOGGER
Check continuity between door mirror LH terminals 5 and 6.
6 - 5 : Continuity should exist.
OK or NG OK - Repair or replace harness. NG - Replace door mirror LH. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Mirrors/Service and Repair/Door Mirror/Door Mirror Assembly.
Door Mirror RH Defogger Circuit Inspection
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Door Mirror RH Defogger Circuit Inspection
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect door mirror RH. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check
voltage between door mirror RH connector and ground.
Interior - Anti-Rattle Spring Falls Off 2nd Row Seats
Seat Latch: Customer Interest Interior - Anti-Rattle Spring Falls Off 2nd Row Seats
Classification: BT09-003
Reference: NTB09-034
Date: April 24, 2009
ANTI-RATTLE SPRING HAS FALLEN OFF THE LEFT AND / OR RIGHT 2ND ROW SEAT
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The inner and/or outer anti-rattle spring has fallen off from the left and/or right 2nd row seat.
AND
The seat continues to latch and otherwise operate normally.
ACTION
Install a new anti-rattle spring.
NOTE:
Do not replace the seat assembly for this incident if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
WARNING:
Make sure to wear safety glasses when performing this Service Procedure.
Page 2180
Page 3387
2. If the camber, caster or kingpin inclination is not within specification, inspect the front suspension
parts. Replace any damaged or worn out parts.
TOE-IN
WARNING: Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface.
- Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it.
1. Bounce the front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture). 2. Push the
vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft).
3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both front tires at the same height as hub
center as shown. These marks are measuring points.
4. Measure the distance "A" on the rear side of the front tires as shown. 5. Push the vehicle slowly
ahead to rotate the wheels 180° degrees (1/2 a turn).
CAUTION: If the wheels have rotated more than 180° degrees (1/2 turn), start this procedure again
from the beginning. Never push the vehicle backward. 6. Measure the distance "B" on the front side
of the front tires at the same marks as shown.
Total toe-in : Refer to See: Specifications.
7. Adjust the toe-in by varying the length of the steering outer tie-rods.
a. Loosen the outer tie-rod lock nuts. b. Adjust the toe-in by screwing the outer tie-rods in or out.
Standard length "L" : Refer to See: Steering/Steering Shaft/Specifications/Steering Gear And
Linkage.
c. Tighten the outer tie-rod lock nuts to specified torque.
Page 3375
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
Page 816
Coolant: Service and Repair
ENGINE COOLANT
Changing Engine Coolant
WARNING: To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
- Wrap a thick cloth around cap and carefully remove the cap. First, turn the cap a quarter of a turn
to release built-up pressure. Then push down and turn the cap all the way to remove.
DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Remove engine undercover.
2. Open radiator drain plug at the bottom of radiator and remove the radiator filler cap. This is the
only step required for a partial cooling system
drain (radiator only).
3. For a complete cooling system drain, remove the reservoir tank and drain the coolant, and then
clean the reservoir tank before installation.
CAUTION: Do not allow coolant to spill on the drive belts.
4. When performing a complete cooling system drain (to remove the engine or for engine repair),
remove the cylinder block front drain plug and the
cylinder block RH and LH drain plugs.
CAUTION: If the vehicle is equipped with an engine block heater in place of the cylinder block LH
drain plug, do not remove the engine block heater.
Page 3849
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations MTC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Page 779
Rear A/C
CAUTION: The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not
confuse Orings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will
leak at or around the connection.
Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil Capacity
With oil filter change ............................................................................................................................
........................................................... 4-1/4 qt (4.0L)
Without oil filter change .......................................................................................................................
......................................................... 3-7/8 qt (3.7L)
Front Suspension
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Front Suspension
Removal and Installation
COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service
and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Remove cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the wheel
sensor wire and front brake hose from the brackets on the front shock absorber (strut). 4.
Disconnect the connecting rod upper link using power tool. 5. Support the wheel hub and steering
knuckle assembly with a suitable wire.
6. Remove the shock absorber (strut) lower bolts and nuts using power tool. 7. Remove the three
upper strut mounting nuts using power tool.
CAUTION: Do not remove piston rod lock nut on vehicle. 8. Remove the coil spring and shock
absorber (strut) assembly.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After installation, check that the front wheel alignment is within specification. Refer to See:
Alignment/Service and Repair/Front Suspension.
- When installing the strut spacer, it must be positioned as shown.
- Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Front Suspension.
WARNING: Always replace the shock absorber (strut) lower mounting nuts.
- When installing shock absorber (strut) to steering knuckle, be sure to hold bolts when tightening
nuts.
- Install wheel and tire. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And
Wheel.
Disassembly and Assembly
COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER
Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY
Specifications
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Page 2508
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 3717
Check the clearance (B) all the way around between the clutch disc (1) and pulley (2) using a
suitable tool (A) as shown.
Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance (B) : 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in)
If the specified clearance (B) is not obtained, replace the adjusting shim(s) and recheck the
clearance (B) as shown.
BREAK-IN OPERATION When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always conduct the
break-in operation. This is done by engaging and disengaging the clutch about 30 times. Break-in
operation raises the level of transmitted torque.
Page 2083
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 3568
Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment
Locations
Impact Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SRS Component Parts Location
Page 1810
Valve Clearance: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT
Valve Clearance
CHECKING Perform inspection as follows after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or
valve related parts, or if there is unusual engine conditions regarding valve clearance.
NOTE: Check valve clearance while engine is cold and not running. 1. Remove the intake manifold
collectors. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and
Repair/Intake Manifold
Collector.
2. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to See: Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and
Repair/Removal And Installation LH (LH) and See: Ignition
System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation RH (RH).
3. Remove the rocker covers. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head
Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair.
4. Set No.1 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. Align pointer (A) with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley.
- Check that the valve lifters on No.1 cylinder are loose and valve lifters on No.4 are tight. If not,
turn the crankshaft one full revolution (360°) and align as shown.
- RH cylinder head (1)
- White Arrow Indicates Engine front
5. Check only the valves as shown.
Locations
Power Door Lock Switch: Locations
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 4483
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Power Door Lock System
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 449
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment
1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Remove cable from range lever. 3. Set range lever in neutral
position.
4. Remove range lever and install Tool.
Tool number : KV911J0060 (J-45404)
5. Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts. 6. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns
with neutral base line on PNP switch body.
7. Tighten PNP switch bolts. 8. Reinstall range lever and cable. 9. Adjust control cable. Refer to
See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Adjustments.
10. Reinstall battery and bracket. 11. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic
Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0705.
Page 2444
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Page 1865
Data Link Connector: Electrical Diagrams
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
Wiring Diagram
EC-MIL/DL-01
Page 3619
2. Disconnect the mode door motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the three screws and remove
the mode door motor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Component
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
Component
Air Mix Door Motor (Front) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Removal And Installation
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
Page 3061
Page 228
Control Module: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 622
^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates.
^ Chock the left rear wheel.
Preliminary Checks:
3. Perform pre-alignment checks.
^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.)
^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation)
^ Tire pressure
^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components
^ Wheel bearing axial play
^ Ball joints of suspension arms
^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage
^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack)
^ Vehicle weight
> Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers
> Fuel level is full
Page 2675
2. Cover serrated part of shaft with tape. Install new boot and boot band onto shaft. Be careful not
to damage boot.
CAUTION: Discard old boot and boot band; replace with new ones.
3. Remove protective tape wound around serrated part of shaft.
4. Attach new circlip to shaft. The circlip must fit securely into shaft groove. Attach nut to joint
sub-assembly.
Use a suitable tool to press-fit.
CAUTION: Discard old circlip; replace with new ones.
5. Insert the amount of new grease (Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent) listed below into
housing from large end of boot.
Grease amount : 170 - 190 g (6.00 - 6.70 oz)
6. Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by * marks) as shown.
CAUTION: If there is grease on boot mounting surfaces (indicated by * marks) of shaft and
housing, boot may come off. Remove all grease from surfaces.
7. Make sure boot installation length "L" is the specified length. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver or
similar tool into the large end of boot. Bleed air
from boot to prevent boot deformation.
Boot installation length "L" : 163 mm (6.42 in)
CAUTION: Boot may break if boot installation length is less than standard value.
- Be careful that screwdriver tip does not contact inside surface of boot.
Page 1590
Attachment General Procedure
Page 3613
Removal And Installation
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
FRONT AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER)
Removal 1. Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Lower Panel LH.
2. Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Center Stack Trim Panel.
Page 743
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-50288 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets (no picture shown).
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioners
plungers. Figure 1 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tools where shown in
Page 4753
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 3002
Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Specifications Disc Brake
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Disc Brake
Service and Repair
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Wiper and Washer Switch
REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column covers. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Steering Column Cover.
2. Remove wiper washer switch electrical connector. 3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch
base and slide switch away from steering column to remove.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 104
- CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.
- Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.
- When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status.
2. Sleep waiting status Process to stop CAN communication is activated.
- All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN
communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status.
3. Sleep status IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode.
- CAN communication is stopped.
- When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
- When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
Page 647
Alignment: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
Rear Wheel Alignment
Before checking rear wheel alignment, be sure to make a preliminary inspection.
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION Check tires for wear and for improper inflation.
- Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check
wheel runout. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Wheels/Testing and Inspection.
- Check rear wheel bearings for looseness.
- Check rear suspension for looseness.
- Check that rear shock absorber works properly.
- Check wheelarch height (unladen*). Refer to See: Specifications/Rear Suspension/Wheelarch
Height.
GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 1. A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should
be performed. This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN vehicle.
- The four-wheel "thrust" process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering
wheel is centered.
- The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN vehicle.
- The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level.
2. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information.
- Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended
Service/Calibration Schedule.
THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed. Refer to
See: Specifications/Rear Suspension/Wheel Alignment. 1. When displaying the alignment settings,
many alignment machines use "indicators": (Green/red, plus or minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use
these indicators.
- The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these
indicators may not be correct.
- This may result in an ERROR.
2. Some newer alignment machines are equipped with an optional "Rolling Compensation" method
to "compensate" the sensors (alignment
targets or head units). Do NOT use this "Rolling Compensation" method.
- Use the "Jacking Compensation" method. After installing the alignment targets or head units,
raise the vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways.
- See Instructions in the alignment machine you are using for more information.
CAMBER Measure camber of both right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge and adjust in
accordance with the following procedures.
Camber : Refer to See: Specifications/Rear Suspension/Wheel Alignment.
- If camber is not within specification, adjust by turning the adjusting bolts in the same direction.
Page 731
2. Remove the lock ring using a socket drive handle and Tool as shown.
Tool number : KV991J0090 (J-46214)
3. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly from the fuel tank.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Make sure the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump is free
from defects and foreign materials.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Install the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly with the fuel feed hose facing the
front of the vehicle.
- Turn the lock ring until the lock ring is fully rotated into the fuel tank lock tabs as shown.
- Connect the quick connector as follows:
- Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials.
Front Side Air Bag
Side Air Bag: Description and Operation Front Side Air Bag
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Front Side Air Bag
Front side air bag modules are built into the front seatback assemblies.
Vehicles with side air bags are equipped with labels as shown.
Page 3384
Page 2824
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid.
Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid. 4.
Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). 5.
Disconnect the brake tubes.
CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
6. Remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket bolts and remove the ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit) with the
bracket.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Hydraulic Circuit for torque
specifications when connecting the brake tubes.
- After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with
new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the brake hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brake
Bleeding/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: To install the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool).
Page 2986
Parking Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
PARKING BRAKE SHOE
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Clean dust on the disc and back plate with a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow with
compressed air.
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove the disc rotor with the parking
brake pedal completely in the released position. 3. If disc rotor cannot be removed, remove as
follows:
a. Secure the disc rotor in place with wheel nuts and remove disc rotor plug.
b. Rotate adjuster in direction "B" to retract and loosen brake shoes, using a suitable tool.
4. Remove the anti-rattle pins, retainers, and anti-rattle springs, then return springs. 5. Remove the
parking brake shoes, adjuster assembly, and toggle lever.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Lining Thickness Inspection Check thickness of lining.
Drum Inner Diameter Inspection Check drum inner diameter.
Page 3212
Power Distribution Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R
Page 2848
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3
minutes.
Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it.
Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward.
Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has
been dropped or sustained an impact.
After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function
and delete the memory by CONSULT-III.
If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair
malfunctions. Refer to
Service and Repair
Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag
Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the screws (A) and release clips (B) to remove the steering angle sensor (1) from spiral
cable (2).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: In the case that the ABS actuator and electronic unit (control unit) is replaced, make
sure to adjust position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock
Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Page 2634
Valve Body: Service and Repair
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Control Valve Assembly
REMOVAL 1. Remove side cover. Refer to See: Fluid Pan/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect
solenoid valve connectors.
3. Disconnect control valve assembly bolts and remove control valve assembly.
INSTALLATION Installation is the reverse order of removal.
- Install bolts in sequence as shown. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Automatic
Transmission/Component for specified torque.
Page 1278
1. Internal chain guide 2. Camshaft sprocket (INT) 3. Mating mark (copper link) 4. Mating mark
(punched) 5. Timing chain tensioner (secondary) 6. Mating mark (yellow link) 7. Timing chain
(secondary) 8. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 9. Tension guide 10. Water pump
11. Crankshaft sprocket 12. Mating mark (notched) 13. Timing chain (primary) 14. Slack guide 15.
Timing chain tensioner (primary) 16. Mating mark (back side) 17. Crankshaft key
NOTE: The figure above shows the relationship between the mating mark on each timing chain and
that on the corresponding sprocket, with the components installed.
1. Make sure that dowel pin hole, dowel pin of camshaft and crankshaft key are located as shown.
(No. 1 cylinder at compression TDC)
NOTE: - Though camshaft does not stop at the position as shown, for the placement of cam nose,
it is generally accepted camshaft is placed for the same
direction of the figure.
Camshaft dowel pin hole (intake side)
: At cylinder head upper face side in each bank.
Camshaft dowel pin (exhaust side)
: At cylinder head upper face side in each bank.
Crankshaft key
: At cylinder head side of right bank.
2. Install the timing chains (secondary) and camshaft sprockets as follows:
CAUTION: Mating marks between timing chain and sprockets slip easily. Confirm all mating mark
positions repeatedly during the installation process.
a. Push plunger of timing chain tensioner (secondary) and keep it pressed in with stopper pin.
Page 1890
Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Page 2707
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative
Front Door Window Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature
Inoperative
Classification: EL09-033A
Reference: NTB09-095A
Date: May 5, 2010
POWER WINDOW "AUTO UP" INITIALIZATION
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been revised. No other changes have
been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 350Z Coupe & Roadster (Z33) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60)
2007-2008 Maxima (A34) 2007 Murano (Z50) 2007-2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007-2009 Quest (V42)
2007-2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
A power window "Auto Up" will not work.
ACTION
Reset the limit switch.
1. Raise the door glass to the top position.
2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position.
3. Release the reset switch.
4. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then raises the door glass to the
top position.
NOTES:
> If the window is still not operating correctly, refer to ASIST and the Service Manual for further
diagnosis and repair information.
> The above initialization procedure must be performed if any of the following occur:
> Battery cable is disconnected.
> Power window switch connector is disconnected.
> Power window regulator is replaced.
> Power window motor is replaced.
> Window glass is removed.
Page 2873
2. Inspect the right side (inboard side) of the brake pedal pivot pin (see Figure 2). ^ See Figure 3
below for photos of OK and NG, conditions.
Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic
Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic
Classification: EL10-028
Reference: NTB10-106
Date: September 10, 2010
NATS SECURITY - VBC LOGIC
APPLIED VEHICLE: 2009 - 2011 All Nissan with NATS / Immobilizer System
SERVICE INFORMATION
All model year 2009 - 2011 Nissan vehicles equipped with NATS/Immobilizer system have the new
VBC (Validate Before Crank) starter relay logic.
VBC (Validate Before Crank) Logic:
^ The BCM will make sure that a valid (registered) key is being used before engaging the starter
relay. If the key is not authenticated the starter will not
operate.
^ If the engine cranks, the issue is not related to NATS. Do not replace NATS components (BCM,
I-Key, FOB Reader or RF Receiver). Refer to ASIST
for further diagnostic information as needed.
Page 1900
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Locations
Remote Control Module: Locations
AUDIO
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 2901
CAUTION: Before measuring, make sure the axle end play is 0 mm (0 in). Refer to See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Testing and Inspection/Rear Wheel Hub. 3. If runout is
outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by shifting mounting positions of the disc rotor and
wheel hub by one hole. 4. If runout is outside the specified value after performing the above
operation, turn the disc rotor using Tool.
Tool number : 38-PFM90.5
Thickness Inspection
Using a micrometer, check thickness of the disc rotor. If thickness is not within specification,
replace disc rotor.
Page 1980
6. The circuit which has the most amount of lines are the possible cause. Error is detected from
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch
line (shaded in the figure below).
NOTE: For abbreviations, refer to See: CAN/Abbreviation List. 7. Perform the inspection procedure
for the possible cause. Refer to See: Trouble Diagnosis/Malfunction Area Chart.
Page 4768
NG>> GO TO 3. 2.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II With CONSULT-III Check "BRAKE SW2"
indication in "DATA MONITOR" mode.
Without CONSULT-III Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following
conditions.
OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG>> GO TO 7. 3.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER
SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
Page 3373
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 1904
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing
Page 827
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
........................................ Genuine Nissan Matic "K"
NOTE:Using Automatic Transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan ATF will cause deterioration
in driveability and automatic transmission
durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new
vehicle limited warranty.
Page 953
3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2.
^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process
Tire:
^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area)
NOTE:
Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may
become un-balanced.
Wheel:
^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area.
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area
4. Before inflating the tire:
^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks.
Specifications
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications
Crankshaft Pulley
Install crankshaft pulley and tighten the bolt in two steps.
- Lubricate thread and seat surface of the bolt with new engine oil.
- For the second step of angle tightening. Using Tool.
Service and Repair
Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair
Maintenance Information
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS (With and Without Navigation System)
COLOR SCREEN WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped)
If you use the system with the engine not running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will use up
all the battery power, and the engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
ENTER button - This is a button on the control panel. By pressing this button you can select the
item or perform this action.
"Display" key - This is a select key on the screen. By selecting this key you can proceed to the next
function.
HOW TO USE THE JOYSTICK AND ENTER BUTTON
Use the joystick to choose an item on the display screen. Move the joystick up, down, left or right to
highlight an item. Then press the ENTER button to select the item or perform the action.
HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON
This button has two functions.
- Go back to the previous display (cancel). If you press the BACK button during setup, the setup
will be canceled and/or the display will return to the previous screen.
- Finish setup.
In some screens pressing the BACK button accepts the changes made during setup.
HOW TO USE THE TRIP BUTTON
Page 1344
Page EM-14
Page 4113
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Page 3802
Page 3215
Page 4896
Rear Combination Lamp
Tail Light Bulb: Service and Repair Rear Combination Lamp
REAR COMBINATION LAMP
Bulb Replacement
REMOVAL 1. Remove rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Turn rear combination lamp socket
counterclockwise and remove from rear combination lamp. 3. Remove bulb from rear combination
lamp socket.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3054
DESCRIPTION
Page 327
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations MTC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 1086
Drive Belt: Service and Repair
DRIVE BELTS
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine undercover. 2. Fully loosen each belt. Refer to See: Adjustments.
Remove generator and air conditioner compressor belt and then power steering oil pump belt.
CAUTION: Grease is applied to idler pulley adjusting bolt. Be careful to keep grease away from the
belts.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Make sure belts are correctly engaged with the pulley groove.
- Clean off any oil and coolant on belts and each pulley groove.
- Adjust belt tension. Refer to See: Adjustments.
Page 4577
6. Remove the TORX bolts (T30), remove the door lock assembly.
7. Remove the TORX bolt (T30), and remove the outside handle bracket.
8. While pulling outside handle, slide toward rear of vehicle to remove outside handle and door lock
assembly.
9. Disconnect the door lock actuator connector.
10. Separate outside handle cable from the outside handle bracket. Installation is in the reverse
order of removal.
SLIDING DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY
Page 4520
5. Install the new insert into the armrest.
^ Use the insert listed in the Parts Information.
6. Apply Permatex(R) Threadlocker Blue or equivalent to the threads on the bolt.
^ See the Parts Information for Threadlocker details.
7. Reinstall the armrest on the seat.
^ Bolt torque: 28 Nm (2.85 kg-m, 20.6 lb-ft)
Page 4084
Antenna: Service and Repair
AUDIO ANTENNA
Window Antenna Repair
ELEMENT CHECK
1. Attach probe circuit tester (ohm setting) to antenna terminal on each side.
- When measuring continuity, wrap tin foil around the top of probe. Then, press the foil against the
wire with your finger.
2. If an element is broken, no continuity will exist.
Heater Core
Heater Core: Service and Repair Heater Core
ATC
HEATER CORE
Component
Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Page 5049
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Installation
LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1959
How To Use CAN Communication Signal Chart
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WORK FLOW
How to Use CAN Communication Signal Chart
The CAN communication signal chart lists the signals needed for trouble diagnosis. It is useful for
detecting the root cause by finding a signal related to the symptom, and by checking transmission
and reception unit.
Information Needed For Trouble Diagnosis
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WORK FLOW
Information Needed for Trouble Diagnosis
CAN communication system performs trouble diagnosis with the following tools.
Page 4749
DESCRIPTION
Page 2742
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment
1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Remove cable from range lever. 3. Set range lever in neutral
position.
4. Remove range lever and install Tool.
Tool number : KV911J0060 (J-45404)
5. Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts. 6. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns
with neutral base line on PNP switch body.
7. Tighten PNP switch bolts. 8. Reinstall range lever and cable. 9. Adjust control cable. Refer to
See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Adjustments.
10. Reinstall battery and bracket. 11. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic
Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0705.
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 23.6 Nm, 17 ft lb
Page 130
Page 1961
Trouble Diagnosis Procedure
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WORK FLOW
Trouble Diagnosis Procedure
INTERVIEW WITH CUSTOMER Interview with the customer is important to detect the root cause
of CAN communication system errors and to understand vehicle condition and symptoms for
proper trouble diagnosis.
Points in interview What: Parts name, system name
- When: Date, Frequency
- Where: Road condition, Place
- In what condition: Driving condition/environment
- Result: Symptom
NOTE: Check normal units as well as error symptoms.
- Example: Circuit between ECM and the combination meter is judged normal if the customer
indicates tachometer functions normally.
- When a CAN communication system error is present, multiple control units may malfunction or go
into fail-safe mode.
Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic
Operation
Classification: BT07-032A
Reference: NTB07-070A
Date: September 25, 2009
SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been revised. No other changes
have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2007 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2007 - 2009
Maxima (A34, A35) 2007 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007 - 2009 Quest (V42) 2007 - 2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
Sunroof auto operation will not work or sunroof does not operate properly:
^ When the battery has been disconnected or discharged
^ When the sunroof motor has been disconnected from power
^ When the sunroof motor was changed
ACTION
Perform the following initialization procedure:
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully
closed.
3. After the sunroof has closed all the way, push and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) again for
more than 2 seconds to re-learn motor position.
4. Initialization is complete if the sunroof operates normally.
NOTE:
If the sunroof is still not operating properly after initialization, refer to ASIST and section RF of the
Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis and repair information.
Page 636
Page 1946
LAN-CAN-03
Page 3712
3. Install the pulley assembly using Tool and a wrench, and then install the snap ring using snap
ring pliers.
Tool number : - (J-38873-A)
4. Install the clutch disc (1) on the drive shaft, together with the original shim(s) (2) using a suitable
tool (A). Press the clutch disc down using Tool.
Tool number : - (J-38873-A)
5. Install the center bolt using suitable tool (A).
Center bolt : 12 N.m (1.2 kg-m, 9 ft-lb)
- After tightening the center bolt to specification, check that the pulley rotates smoothly.
6. Install the compressor. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal
And Installation For Compressor.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Page 516
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Air Bag (Satellite) Sensor
SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at
least three minutes.
1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. 2.
Remove seat belt pre-tensioner. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat
Belt/Service and Repair/Front Seat Belt.
3. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor (1) nuts. 4. Disconnect the side air bag (satellite) sensor
harness connector (2).
CAUTION: Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts.
- Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it
shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one.
- Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor.
- Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing
Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
Page 2317
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 3181
CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Display Item List
Page 3060
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Automatic Air Conditioner
Compressor Clutch: Specifications Automatic Air Conditioner
Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance (B)
....................................................................................................................................... 0.3 - 0.6 mm
(0.012 - 0.024 in)
Page 4174
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 1305
4. Remove the Bank 1 (RH) IVT control valve cover.
- Loosen the IVT control valve cover bolts in the order as shown. CAUTION: The shaft in the IVT
control valve cover is inserted into the center hole of the intake camshaft sprocket. Remove the IVT
control valve cover by pulling straight out until the IVT control valve cover disengages from the
camshaft sprocket.
5. Remove the primary timing chain tensioner as follows:
a. Pull the lever (C) down to release the plunger stopper tab (B). b. Insert the stopper pin A into the
tensioner body hole to hold the lever (C) and keep the plunger stopper tab (B) released. c.
Compress the plunger (D) into the tensioner body (1) by pressing the slack guide (2). d. Keep the
slack guide (2) pressed and lock the plunger (D) in by pushing the stopper pin A through the lever
(C) and into the chain tensioner
body hole. - Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246.
e. Remove timing chain tensioner bolts and then remove the timing chain tensioner.
CAUTION: Be careful not to drop timing chain tensioner bolts inside timing chain case.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing primary timing chain tensioner, push
in plunger and keep it pressed in with stopper pin. Remove any dirt and foreign materials completely from the back and the mounting surfaces of
primary timing chain tensioner.
- After installation, pull out stopper pin.
- When installing the IVT control valve covers perform the following steps.
1. Install IVT control valve covers as follows:
a. Install new collared O-rings in front cover oil hole (LH and RH sides).
Page 2566
Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the fresh air duct. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from the mass air
flow sensor. 3. Disconnect the tube clamp at the electric throttle control actuator. 4. Disconnect the
PCV hose. 5. Remove air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube, air cleaner case (upper)
with the mass air flow sensor attached. 6. Remove mass air flow sensor from air cleaner case
(upper), as necessary.
CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. Do not shock it.
- Do not disassemble it.
- Do not touch the sensor.
7. Remove the air cleaner case (lower). 8. Remove resonator in the fender, lifting left fender
protector, as necessary.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CHANGING AIR CLEANER FILTER
NOTE:
Diagram Information and Instructions
Courtesy Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Page 4191
OK or NG OK - Inspection End. NG - - Check connector housings for disconnected or loose
terminals. -
Repair harness or connector.
Page 1845
Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Classification: EM09-015
Reference: NTB10-009
Date: January 19, 2010
REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure
described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the
exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are
made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
NOTE:
The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads
may not be considered a warrantable expense.
This procedure can be performed by two methods:
Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed
^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle.
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed.
Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle.
^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice.
Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is
performed on the vehicle.
Service Procedure
Rust Penetrant
Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure:
Page 2782
Control Module: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 2909
2. Install pad retainers and pad assemblies to the torque member.
CAUTION: When attaching the pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it does not float up higher than
the torque member, as shown. 3. Push the piston in so that the pad is firmly attached, and install
the cylinder body to the torque member.
CAUTION: By pushing in the piston, the brake fluid returns to the master cylinder reservoir tank
and sub tank. Watch the level of the fluid in the sub tank.
NOTE: Using a disc brake piston tool (commercial service tool), makes it easier to push in the
piston. 4. Install the sliding pin and tighten to specification. Refer to See: Front/Exploded View. 5.
Check brake for drag. 6. Install wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and
Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel.
CAUTION: Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after
replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Front Brake Burnishing Procedure.
Exploded View
REAR DISC BRAKE
Component
Page 4116
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Page 534
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Page 744
Figure 2.
NOTE
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (See Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION
Tighten the bolt no more then necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Precaution For Working With HFC-134a (R-134a)
Refrigerant: Service Precautions Precaution For Working With HFC-134a (R-134a)
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a)
WARNING:
CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant are not compatible. If the
refrigerants are mixed compressor failure is likely to occur. Refer to See: Service
Precautions/Contaminated Refrigerant. To determine the purity of HFC-134a (R-134a) in the
vehicle and recovery tank, use refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier.
Use only specified oil for the HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system and HFC-134a (R-134a)
components. If oil other than that specified is used, compressor failure is likely to occur.
The specified HFC-134a (R-134a) oil rapidly absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. The following
handling precautions must be observed:
- When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to
minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere.
- When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just
before connecting the components. Connect all refrigerant loop components as quickly as possible
to minimize the entry of moisture into system.
- Only use the specified oil from a sealed container. Immediately reseal containers of oil. Without
proper sealing, oil will become moisture saturated and should not be used.
- Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat.
Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting
requirements of SAE J2210 [HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment] or J2209 [HFC-134a
(R-134a) recycling equipment]. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before
resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and oil
manufacturers.
- Do not allow refrigerant oil to come in contact with styrofoam parts. Damage may result.
VIN Registration
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair VIN Registration
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
VIN Registration
DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed
each time ECM is replaced.
NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M).
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-III 1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to See: Application and
ID/Model Variation. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. 3. Select "VIN
REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III display.
Page 1342
Page EM-12
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Traction Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Page 709
Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped)
1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side)
movement (see Example 1):
^ See above table for maximum movement specification.
^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended.
Page 3310
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/System Description/CAN Communication System.
ACTIVE TEST
Page 4170
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
System Description
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation System Description
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
System Description
- IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse
block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM
E/R control circuits.
- IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication
control, oil pressure switch signal reception, etc.
- It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines.
CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R 1. Lamp control Using CAN communication lines, it
receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps: Headlamps (High, Low)
- Parking lamps
- Tail and license plate lamps
- Cornering lamps
- Front fog lamps
2. Wiper control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the
front wipers. 3. Rear window defogger relay control Using CAN communication lines, it receives
signals from the BCM and controls the rear window defogger relay. 4. A/C compressor control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C
compressor (magnet clutch). 5. Starter control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals
from the BCM and controls the starter relay. 6. Cooling fan control Using CAN communication
lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays. 7. Horn control Using
CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay.
CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL With CAN communication, by connecting each control
unit using two communication lines (CAN L-line, CAN H-line), it is possible to transmit a maximum
amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and
reads necessary information only. 1. Fail-safe control When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe
control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control.
- Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as follows:
IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based
on each operating condition. 1. CAN communication status
Page 1822
4. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. -
Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable
pedal electric motor as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the
accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal
nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from
the pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
9. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the
adjustable accelerator pedal as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity.
10. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when
applying or releasing the accelerator pedal.
- Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding
or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward.
- Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning.
NON-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL
Removal 1. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the upper
and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 3. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from
the pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Page 750
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50288 (Ring Gear Stop) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on
December 3, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account was charged $26.90 plus applicable taxes and
freight.Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins), also considered
"Essential", was shipped to each dealer November 2009.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Write down all radio station presets.
Page 1285
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation (Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoe)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the timing chains (secondary). 2. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioner shoe by
evenly prying at base of shoe with suitable tool as shown.
INSTALLATION
1. Install new secondary timing chain tensioner shoe using Tool (A) as shown.
- Tighten the bolt until the secondary timing chain tensioner shoe is fully seated on the secondary
timing chain tensioner. CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolt.
Tool number : (J-50246)
2. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1532
Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
Automatic Back Door System
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Automatic Back Door System
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
ATC
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations ATC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Page 2056
Page 1277
Check for cracks and any excessive wear at link plates. Replace chain if necessary.
- Inspect all timing chains and associated parts for wear or damage, replace as necessary.
Installation
Page 4827
Language/unit
The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when selecting the "Language/Unit" key and pressing
the ENTER button.
Language: English or French
Unit: US - mile, °F, MPG
Metric - km, °C, L/1OO km
You can select the language and unit using the joystick or pressing the ENTER button.
The settings are automatically saved when you exit the menu by pressing the BACK button or any
other mode button.
COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if So equipped)
Note:
For Navigation system control buttons, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner1s Manual.
If you use the system with the engine not running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will use up
all the battery power, and the engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
ENTER button - This is a button on the control panel. By pressing this button you can select the
item or perform the action.
"Display" key - This is a select key on the screen. By selecting this key you can proceed to the next
function.
HOW TO USE THE JOYSTICK AND ENTER BUTTON
Use the joystick to choose an item on the display screen. Move the joystick up, down, left or right to
highlight an item. Then press the ENTER button to
Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline
Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline
Classification: GI99-001F
Reference: NTB99-020F
Date: August 8, 2008
LIMITATIONS ON FLAT TOWING OF NISSAN VEHICLES
This bulletin has been amended to apply to all current production models. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models
APPLIED DATES: 1992-2009
SERVICE INFORMATION
This Bulletin contains important guidelines and limitations concerning towing of Nissan vehicles
with all four wheels on the ground ("flat towing").
CAUTION:
Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission or drivetrain damage. For all
towing including "emergency towing" procedures refer to the Owners Manual.
1. 4WD/AWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT):
^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components.
^ DO NOT use a tow dolly - doing so will damage drivetrain components.
2. FWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT) and Altima Hybrid:
^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components.
^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's front wheels.
^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.
3. RWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission:
^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components.
^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's rear wheels.
^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.
4. 2WD/4WD vehicles equipped with a manual transmission:
^ Always flat tow with the manual transmission in Neutral.
^ Always flat tow a manual transmission vehicle facing forward.
^ Maximum speed while flat towing: 60 MPH.
^ After towing for 500 miles, stop. Start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two
minutes - failure to do so may cause damage to the transmission.
^ For 4WD vehicles, always flat tow with the transfer case in the 2 HI position.
Page 4447
4. For power doors, disconnect the cinch motor electrical connector. 5. Remove the back door latch
assembly (power door) or the back door lock assembly (manual door).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Align the back door latch. Refer to See: Doors/Front Door/Adjustments.
Page 3776
Expansion Valve: Service and Repair MTC
Removal And Installation For Front Expansion Valve
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Front Expansion Valve
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and
Repair/Procedures. 2. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater
Core Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the cooler grommet. 4. Remove the expansion valve.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them
when installing them.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks
Removal And Installation For Rear Expansion Valve
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Rear Expansion Valve
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and
Repair/Procedures. 2. Remove the rear RH interior side trim panel. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the A/C refrigerant
pipes from the expansion valve.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the A/C refrigerant pipe ends with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to
avoid the entry of air and contaminants. 4. Remove the expansion valve.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them
when installing them.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks
Page 113
Inspection With CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis)
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Inspection with CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis)
1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK 1. Connect CONSULT-III and select "IPDM E/R" on the
"SELECT SYSTEM" screen. 2. Select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE"
screen. 3. Check display content in self-diagnosis results.
NOTE: The Details for Display for the Period are as follows: CRNT: Error currently detected by IPDM E/R.
- PAST: Error detected in the past and stored in IPDM E/R memory.
Contents displayed NO DTC DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE
REQUIRED.-INSPECTION END. CAN COMM CIRC-Print out the self-diagnosis result and refer to
See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/System Description/CAN Communication
System.
Diagnosis Procedure
Refueling Vapor Recovery System: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis Procedure
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
Diagnosis Procedure
SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG. 1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER 1.
Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure
sensor attached. 2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP
control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). OK or NG
OK >>GO TO 2. NG >>GO TO 3.
2.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >>GO TO 3. No >>GO TO 5.
3.REPLACE EVAP CANISTER Replace EVAP canister with a new one. >>GO TO 4.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle
frame for clogging or poor connection. >>Repair or replace EVAP hose.
5.CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to See: Component Inspection. OK or
NG OK >>INSPECTION END NG >>Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG
WHILE REFUELING.
1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and
EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister
vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less
than 2.1 kg (4.6 lb). OK or NG OK >>GO TO 2. NG >>GO TO 3.
2.CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER
Page 4797
Audible Warning Device: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
Combination Meter Harness Connector Terminal Layout
WARNING CHIME
Combination Meter Harness Connector Terminal Layout
Terminal And Reference Value For Combination Meter
WARNING CHIME
Terminal and Reference Value for Combination Meter
Terminal And Reference Value For BCM
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Pinout Values and
Diagnostic Parameters/Terminal And Reference Value For BCM.
Page 3611
3. Disconnect the intake door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the three screws and remove
the intake door motor.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
PASSENGER SIDE
Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly
HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Disconnect the intake door motor electrical
connector. 3. Remove the three screws and remove the intake door motor.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Mode Door Motor
MODE DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
Mode Door Motor - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
REMOVAL 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly
HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation.
Page 1599
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM)
Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM)
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM)
For example, when current is 30A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20 seconds. A circuit breaker is
used for the following systems: Power windows
- Power sunroof
Page 3617
Removal And Installation
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
DRIVER SIDE
Removal 1. Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Lower Panel LH.
2. Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Center Stack Trim Panel.
3. Disconnect the intake door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the three screws and remove
the intake door motor.
Navigation System
Navigation Module: Locations Navigation System
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Component Parts Location
Page 3209
NOTE: The details for display of the period are as follows: CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R.
- PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory.
DATA MONITOR
All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu
Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Seat Belt: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Classification: RS01-001B
Reference: NTB01-005B
Date: November 12, 2009
"D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION
This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s).
ACTION
Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to:
^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings.
^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
Page 1252
Page EM-10
A/C - Compressor Clutch Replacement Information
Compressor Clutch: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Compressor Clutch Replacement Information
Classification: HA10-006
Reference: NTB10-043
Date: March 17, 2010
A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002-2008 Altima (L31, L32) 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier
(D40) 2004-2010 Maxima (A34, A35) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2009 Quest (V42)
2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
SERVICE INFORMATION
The A/C compressor clutch is available separately as a service part for the Applied Vehicles.
If the compressor clutch needs to be replaced for any reason AND the compressor is operating
normally:
^ Replace the compressor clutch only. Do not replace the compressor assembly.
^ Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual for compressor clutch removal and installation
instructions.
Page 1029
9. Measure difference in levels between front end faces of No.1 camshaft bracket and cylinder
head.
Standard : - 0.14 ( - 0.0055 in)
- If measurement is outside the specified range, re-install camshaft and camshaft bracket.
10. Install the IVT control solenoid valves with new gaskets. 11. If necessary, install camshaft
position sensor (PHASE) (RH and LH bank.) 12. Install the timing chains. Refer to See: Timing
Components/Timing Chain/Service and Repair.
Page 157
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 4895
Front Wiper And Washer System
Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Front Wiper And Washer System
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Wiper Motor and Linkage
COMPONENTS
REMOVAL 1. Operate the front wiper motor, and stop it at the OFF (auto stop) position. 2. Remove
the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and
Repair. 3. Disconnect front wiper motor electrical connector.
4. Remove wiper frame assembly bolts, and remove wiper frame assembly. 5. Remove front wiper
motor from wiper frame assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Do not drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts.
- Check the grease conditions of the motor arm and wiper link joint(s). Apply grease if necessary.
1. Connect front wiper motor to electrical connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate front
wiper motor, then turn the wiper switch OFF (auto
stop).
2. Disconnect front wiper motor electrical connector. 3. Install front wiper motor to wiper frame
assembly, and install assembly into the vehicle. 4. Connect front wiper motor electrical connector.
Turn the wiper switch ON to operate the front wiper motor, then turn wiper switch OFF (auto
stop).
5. Install cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service
and Repair. 6. Install wiper arms. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Front Wiper And Washer
System.
Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Cellular Phone: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
TELEPHONE
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection for Bluetooth Control Unit
1.CHECK FUSES Make sure the following fuses for the Bluetooth control unit are not blown.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before
installing new fuse. Refer to See: Power and Ground Distribution/Description and Operation.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect Bluetooth control unit connector B506.
2. Check voltage between connector terminals and ground as follows.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Check harness for open between Bluetooth control unit and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUITS 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
Page 2771
Service and Repair
Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR GLASS
Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the hole cover over
rear glass bolt. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Temporarily reconnect the power window
switch to the door harness. 5. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass
until the door glass bolts can be seen. 6. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 7. Remove the
inside seal. 8. Remove the door glass bolts.
9. While holding the door window, raise it at the rear end to pull the glass out of the sash toward
the outside of the door.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR
Removal
Page 611
Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process.
6. Begin the alignment procedure.
^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment.
^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications.
If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips:
^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body.
IMPORTANT:
After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position.
When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips:
Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area
Oil Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area
Classification: EM07-001D
Reference: NTB07-042D
Date: May 25, 2010
MAXIMA / ALTIMA / QUEST; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA
This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been
amended. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35 engine ONLY
2004-2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM:
There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system.
^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM).
^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause.
Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis.
ACTION:
1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with
the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin.
2. Change the engine oil and filter.
3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST
closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 1728
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1079
DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART
Page 1154
11. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Start the engine and check for leaks. Refer to .
- Inspect the engine oil level. Refer to .
CAUTION: Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling the engine with oil.
Locations
Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Locations
Collision Avoidance System Switch: Locations
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 3077
Battery: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Battery
Page 2078
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 3308
CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Display Item List
Page 1174
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. -
If removed, install the stud bolts.
Stud bolts : 10.8 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 96 in-lb)
- Install intake manifold nuts and bolts in the order in two steps as shown.
Page 1720
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2825
- Always tighten the brake tubes to the specified torque when installing.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Page 1922
Engine Control Module: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3975
Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
The occupant classification system control unit, occupant classification system sensor, and bladder
are an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Front Seat/Seat Cushion/Disassembly and
Assembly to remove the seat, and See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Front
Seat/Seat Cushion to replace the seat cushion assembly.
Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Cruise Control: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Component Description
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Description
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is
turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and
Operation/Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD)/System Description for the ASCD function.
Diagnosis Procedure
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select
"BRAKE SW1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Check "BRAKE SW1" indication
under the following conditions.
Without CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions.
OK or NG OK>> GO TO 2.
Page 1492
Heater Core: Service and Repair Heater Pump
ATC
HEATER PUMP
Removal and Installation
Heater Pump
REMOVAL 1. Remove the cowl top. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding /
Trim/Service and Repair. 2. Partially drain the engine cooling system. Refer to See:
Coolant/Service and Repair. 3. Unclip the heater pump from the cowl top extension. 4. Disconnect
the heater pump electrical connector and the two heater hoses, then remove the heater pump.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the heater pump, replace the heater pump as an assembly.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
MTC
HEATER PUMP
Removal and Installation
Heater Pump
Page 5071
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Body - Power Liftgate Won't Open/Close/Is Noisy
Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: Customer Interest Body - Power Liftgate Won't Open/Close/Is
Noisy
Classification: EL09-022
Reference: NTB09-087
Date: September 10, 2009
2004 - 2009 QUEST; POWER BACK DOOR WILL NOT OPEN/CLOSE AND MAKES NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Quest (V42) with power back door.
IF YOU CONFIRM:
While operating the power back door (lift gate),
^ The power motor will not open or close the door,
and/or
^ There is a grinding and popping noise inside the rear trim panel.
ACTION:
Check for a loose or missing bolt on the back door power lift assembly. Replace if needed.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Access the power back door motor assembly.
^ Remove left side finishers as needed.
^ Refer to sections BL and EI in the Service Manual as needed.
Page 623
> Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels
> Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and
inspections.
4. Check the target mounts.
^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before
performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11).
NOTE:
The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines.
Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment.
Page 1616
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 3013
- Always tighten the brake tubes to the specified torque when installing.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Antenna: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Page 1964
CREATE INTERVIEW SHEET Fill out the symptom described by the customer, vehicle condition,
and CAN system type on the interview sheet.
Interview Sheet (Example)
Variable Blower Control
Blower Motor: Service and Repair Variable Blower Control
Component
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL
Component
Variable Blower Control (Front)
Variable Blower Control (Rear)
Page 5105
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
Page 3167
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) -
SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag
modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Firing Order
1-2-3-4-5-6
Page 357
Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
OPTICAL SENSOR
Removal 1. Remove defrost grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel
.
2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Turn the optical sensor counterclockwise to remove it from
defroster grille.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Locations
Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
ATC
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair ATC
AMBIENT SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the ambient sensor connector.
NOTE: The ambient sensor is located behind the front bumper opening, in front of the condenser.
2. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1287
9. Disconnect engine coolant reservoir hose from the radiator and remove engine coolant reservoir.
10. Remove cooling fan assembly. 11. Disconnect lower radiator hose from engine. 12. Disconnect
the power steering fluid reservoir tank hose from the power steering pump and fluid cooler and
remove the power steering fluid
reservoir tank.
13. Remove the front RH wheel and tire. 14. Remove the fender protector side cover RH. 15.
Remove the drive belt. 16. Remove the power steering pump.
17. Remove the lower oil pan. Loosen the lower oil pan bolts using power tool in order as shown.
a. Cut the sealant using Tool and remove the lower oil pan.
Tool number : (J-37228)
CAUTION: - Be careful not to damage the mating surface. - Do not insert a screwdriver, this will
damage the mating surfaces.
b. Slide the Tool by tapping its side with a hammer to remove the lower oil pan.
18. Remove upper oil pan bolts in reverse order as shown. 19. Remove the generator. 20. Remove
the A/C compressor bolts and position the A/C compressor aside. 21. Remove the generator
bracket. 22. Support the engine with suitable jack and remove the RH engine, mount and bracket.
23. Remove the crankshaft pulley as follows:
a. Remove access plate and install Ring Gear Stopper Tool.
Page 4756
Page 4300
Page 51
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid.
Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and
Repair/Changing Brake Fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit). 5. Disconnect the brake tubes.
CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
6. Remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket bolts and remove the ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit) with the
bracket.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and
Repair/Hydraulic Circuit for torque specifications when connecting the brake tubes.
- After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with
new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the brake hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair.
CAUTION:
Page 4430
Page 4122
Page 590
Locations
Power Sliding Door Release Actuator: Locations
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 4331
Front Door Latch: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
FRONT DOOR LOCK
Disassembly and Assembly
DOOR KEY CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
Remove the key cylinder escutcheon pawl and remove the door key cylinder.
Page 4854
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 2943
Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Changing Brake Fluid
BRAKE FLUID
Changing Brake Fluid
CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance.
- Always keep fluid level higher than "MIN" line on sub tank.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
1. Connect a vinyl tube and container to the air bleeder. 2. Depressing the brake pedal, drain the
brake fluid gradually from the air bleeder of each wheel. 3. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
Disconnect the ABS actuator and control unit connector or negative battery terminal. 4. Clean the
inside of the sub tank, and refill the sub tank with new brake fluid. 5. Bleed the brake system
refilling the system with new fluid. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair.
Removal and Installation
Fuel Filter: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: Read "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See: Service
Precautions. 1. Remove the fuel tank. Refer to See: Fuel Tank/Service and Repair.
Page 1111
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50288 (Ring Gear Stop) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on
December 3, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account was charged $26.90 plus applicable taxes and
freight.Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins), also considered
"Essential", was shipped to each dealer November 2009.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Write down all radio station presets.
Page 3885
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Intake Sensor
ATC
INTAKE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
Intake Sensor
REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair.
Removal and Installation
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR LOCK
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door window regulator assembly. Refer to See: Front Door Window
Glass/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the front door window rear glass run.
3. Remove the grommet, and remove door key cylinder assembly (driver side) or outside handle
escutcheon (passenger side) bolts (TORX T30) from grommet hole.
4. While pulling the outside handle (1), remove door key cylinder assembly or escutcheon (2). 5.
Separate the key cylinder rod from the door key cylinder assembly (if equipped).
6. While pulling outside handle (2), slide toward rear of vehicle to remove (1).
7. Remove the front and rear gaskets.
Testing and Inspection
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Testing and Inspection
SHOCK ABSORBER
Inspection
- Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension.
- Check for oil leakage on welded or gland packing portions.
- Check piston rod for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary.
Electrical - IPDM Serviceability
Power Distribution Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - IPDM Serviceability
Classification: EL09-014
Reference: NTB09-036
Date: April 27, 2009
IPDM SERVICE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Nissan Models with IPDM
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) is ONLY serviceable as an assembly.
The ONLY serviceable parts of an IPDM are the fuses.
^ Some IPDM designs have sections that Relays Relays appear to be serviceable relays.
^ These "relays" are NEVER to be removed.
^ These "relays" may have markings indicating they are similar. They are not "swappable".
CAUTION:
NEVER REMOVE relays from an IPDM.
Tampering with the relays of an IPDM may cause additional incidents with the vehicle.
Such incidents may include:
^ Headlights inoperative.
^ Radiator fan inoperative
^ Fog lamps inoperative
^ Wiper inoperative
Page 2580
Control Module: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 1997
NOTE: CAN data of the air bag diagnosis sensor unit is not used by usual service work, thus it is
omitted.
TYPE 3
NOTE: Refer to See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/CAN/Abbreviation List for the
abbreviations of the connecting units.
Page 5072
DESCRIPTION
Page 1009
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
CYLINDER HEAD
On-Vehicle Service
CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating
temperature. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. Release fuel pressure and leave the fuel pump
electrically disconnected. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Fuel
Pressure/Testing and Inspection.
4. Remove all six spark plugs. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Spark
Plug/Service and Repair.
5. Attach a compression tester to No. 1 cylinder. 6. Depress accelerator pedal fully to keep the
electric throttle control actuator butterfly-valve wide open to maximize air intake flow. 7. Crank the
engine and record the highest gauge indication. 8. Repeat the measurement on each cylinder
(steps 5 - 7).
NOTE: Always use a fully-charged battery to obtain specified engine speed.
9. If compression in one or more cylinders is low:
a. Pour a small amount of engine oil into cylinders through the spark plug holes. b. Retest
compression (steps 5 - 8).
- If adding oil helps raise compression pressure, then the piston rings may be worn or damaged. If
so, replace piston rings after checking piston.
- If the pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or is seating improperly. Inspect and repair the
valve and/or valve seat. Refer to See: Maintenance. If the valve and/or valve seat is damaged
excessively, replace as necessary.
- If compression stays low in two or more cylinders that are next to each other:
- The cylinder head gasket may be leaking. - Both cylinders may have valve component damage.
Inspect and repair as necessary.
10. After inspection is complete, install removed components. 11. Start engine and confirm that
engine runs smoothly. 12. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to See:
Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis Introduction.
Page 2830
Page 1289
29. Remove the front timing chain case.
a. Loosen the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown.
b. Insert the appropriate size tool into the notch (1) at the top of the front timing chain case as
shown. c. Pry off the case by moving the suitable tool (2) as shown. - Cut liquid gasket for removal
using Tool.
CAUTION: - Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool. - After removal, handle carefully so it does not
bend, or warp under a load.
30. Remove O-rings from rear timing chain case.
CAUTION: Use new O-rings for installation.
31. Remove the front oil seal from the front timing chain case using a suitable tool.
CAUTION: Do not damage the front cover.
Page 3288
Page 3625
Ducts - Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Page 3870
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations MTC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Page 625
Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process.
6. Begin the alignment procedure.
^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment.
^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications.
If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips:
^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body.
IMPORTANT:
After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position.
When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips:
Page 2097
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed
position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition
switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve
moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Page 633
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
Page 1863
Component Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2250
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when
applying or releasing the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See:
Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator
Pedal Released Position Learning.
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL ELECTRIC MOTOR
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal.
3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable
pedal electric motor as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector.
5. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the
adjustable accelerator pedal as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 6. Remove the
adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the adjustable pedal electric motor.
- Avoid damage from dropping the adjustable pedal electric motor during handling.
- Keep the adjustable pedal electric motor away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding
or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward.
- Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released
Page 313
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL
Removal and Installation
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT)
Removal 1. Remove the instrument lower panel RH and glove box. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and
Repair.
2. Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Center Stack Trim Panel.
3. Disconnect the variable blower control (front) electrical connector. 4. Remove the two screws
and remove the variable blower control (front).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR)
Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the variable blower control (rear)
electrical connector. 3. Remove the two screws and remove the variable blower control (rear).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4553
Console: Service and Repair Installation
CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1025
- Measure the outer diameter of the valve lifter. Refer to See: Maintenance.
- If out of the specified range, replace the valve lifter.
Valve Lifter Bore Diameter
- Using inside micrometer, measure diameter of valve lifter bore of cylinder head. Refer to See:
Maintenance.
- If out of the specified range, replace the cylinder head assembly.
Calculation of Valve Lifter Clearance (Valve lifter clearance) = (hole diameter for valve lifter) - (outer diameter of valve lifter). Refer to
See: Maintenance.
- If out of specified range, replace either or both valve lifter and cylinder head assembly.
INSTALLATION
1. Before installation, remove any old Silicone RTV Sealant from component mating surfaces using
suitable tool.
CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces.
NOTE: Remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the bolt holes and threads.
Page 3674
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Page 3421
Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Checking Fluid Leakage
POWER STEERING FLUID
Checking Fluid Leakage
Check the lines for improper attachment and for leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing
and deterioration. 1. Run engine between idle speed and 1,000 rpm.
Make sure temperature of fluid in oil tank rises to 60° - 80°C (140° - 176°F).
2. Turn steering wheel right-to-left several times. 3. Hold steering wheel at each lock position for
five seconds and carefully check for fluid leakage.
CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more than 15 seconds. 4. If fluid
leakage at connectors is noticed, loosen flare nut and then retighten.
Do not overtighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer and connector.
5. If fluid leakage from power steering oil pump is noticed, check the power steering oil pump.
Refer to See: Power Steering Pump/Service and
Repair/Procedures.
6. Check steering gear boots for accumulation of power steering fluid, indicating a steering gear
leak.
Page 5101
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Page 1257
Page EM-15
Interior - Sliding Door Rubber Welt Is Loose
Sliding Door Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Sliding Door Rubber Welt Is
Loose
Classification: BT09-006
Reference: NTB09-014
Date: March 4, 2009
SLIDING DOOR WELT HAS LOOSENED FROM THE DOOR PANEL
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006 - 2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The door welt (rubber trim) is coming loose from the sliding door panel (clips have detached).
ACTION
Check to see if the clips are missing from the door welt:
^ If the clips are missing, replace the door welt, apply adhesion promoter and double-sided tape.
^ If the clips are not missing, reinstall the clips into the door welt, apply adhesion promoter and
double-sided tape.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 1954
MONITOR ITEM (ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS)
NOTE: For some models, CAN communication diagnosis result is received from the vehicle monitor.
(CONSULT-III is not available.)
- Refer to See: Trouble Diagnosis/CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor for the details.
Condition Of Error Detection
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Condition of Error Detection
"U1000" or "U1001" is indicated on SELF-DIAG RESULTS on CONSULT-III if CAN communication
signal is not transmitted or received between units for 2 seconds or more.
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ERROR CAN communication line open (CAN-H, CAN-L, or both)
- CAN communication line short (ground, between CAN communication lines, other harnesses)
- Error of CAN communication control circuit of the unit connected to CAN communication line
WHEN "U1000" OR "U1001" IS INDICATED EVEN THOUGH CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
IS NORMAL Removal/installation of parts: Error may be detected when removing and installing CAN
communication unit and related parts while turning the ignition switch ON. (A DTC except for CAN
communication may be detected.)
- Fuse blown out (removed): CAN communication of the unit may cease.
- Voltage drop: Error may be detected if voltage drops due to discharged battery when turning the
ignition switch ON (Depending on the control unit which carries out CAN communication).
- Error may be detected if the power supply circuit of the control unit, which carries out CAN
communication, malfunctions (Depending on the
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3
minutes.
Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it.
Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward.
Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has
been dropped or sustained an impact.
After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function
and delete the memory by CONSULT-III.
If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair
malfunctions. Refer to
Lifting Points
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Lifting Points
Garage Jack And Safety Stand
LIFTING POINT
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
WARNING:
Park the vehicle on a level surface when using the jack. Make sure to avoid damaging pipes, tubes,
etc. under the vehicle.
Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands when
you have to get under the vehicle.
Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.
-
Lift at reinforced area of front suspension member where lower control arm attaches, staying in
center line of wheels.
2-Pole Lift
LIFTING POINT
2-Pole Lift
WARNING: When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the
front and rear of the vehicle are well balanced. When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to
contact the brake tubes, brake cable, fuel lines and sill spoiler.
Page 4754
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 4853
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
Page 1618
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 2499
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 4123
Page 190
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 4374
Resetting After installing each component to the vehicle, perform the following procedure to reset
the limit switch. 1. Raise the door glass to the top position.
2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position. 3.
Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then
raises the door glass to the top position.
CAUTION: Do not operate the door glass automatically to raise the door glass to the top position.
Page 1118
4. Install Tools.
5. Start the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 6. Check oil pressure with
engine running under no-load. Refer to See: Engine Oil Pressure/Specifications/Mechanical
Specifications.
CAUTION: If the difference is extreme, check the oil passages and oil pump for leaks and
blockages. 7. After the inspections, install the oil pressure switch as follows:
a. Remove the old sealant adhering to oil pressure switch and engine. b. Apply thread sealant and
tighten the oil pressure switch to specification.
- Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid
Type Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants.
Oil pressure switch : 14.8 N.m (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft-lb)
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Power Distribution Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection
1.FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK INSPECTION Check that the following fusible links or IPDM E/R
fuses are not blown.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - Replace fuse or fusible link. 2.POWER CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1.
Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E120. 3. Check voltage
between IPDM E/R harness connector E120 terminals 1, 2 and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Repair or replace IPDM E/R power circuit harness. 3.GROUND
CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E121 and E124.
2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121(A) terminal 60, E124(B) terminal
38 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG OK - Inspection End. NG - Repair or replace IPDM E/R ground circuit harness.
Page 2411
Page 2284
Fuel Pump Relay: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 4792
DI-CHIME-02
Page 824
Disclaimer
Locations
Traction Control Switch: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 185
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed
position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition
switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve
moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Page 2143
9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads.
^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12.
Page 5122
Heated Glass Element: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
BCM Power Supply And Ground Circuit Inspection
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics.
Filament Check
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Filament Check
1. When measuring voltage, wrap tin foil around the top of the negative probe. Then press the foil
against the wire with your finger. 2. Attach probe circuit tester (in Volt range) to middle portion of
each filament.
Page 2404
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Page 3236
Page 3761
Evaporator Core: Service and Repair MTC
Removal And Installation For Front Evaporator
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Front Evaporator
Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
REMOVAL 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater Core
Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the blower motor side cover. 3.
Remove the front blower motor.
4. Remove the heater core and evaporator case bottom cover. 5. Remove the blower motor case.
Testing and Inspection
Stabilizer Bar: Testing and Inspection
STABILIZER BAR
Inspection
- Check stabilizer bar for any deformation, cracks, or damage and replace if necessary.
- Check rubber bushings for deterioration, or cracks and replace if necessary.
Page 1072
- Apply sealant to the areas on the front corners. Refer to See: Compression Check/Testing and
Inspection.
- Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants.
- Tighten the rocker cover bolts in two steps in the order as shown.
Page 4930
Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if
the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement.
Page 3639
Panel/Service and Repair or See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and
Repair.
2. Remove the grille from the interior trim panel.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4593
Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Service and Repair
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Keyfob Battery Replacement
Page 2885
Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair
BRAKE PEDAL
Removal and Installation
Non-adjustable Pedal
Adjustable Pedal
Page 5024
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 496
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Locations
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 12
Navigation Module: Locations Electrical Units Location
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 4572
Removal 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove rear kicking plate. 3. Remove rear
kick escutcheon. 4. Remove 3rd row seat spring escutcheon. 5. Remove cargo net hooks using
Tool.
Tool number : J-47126
6. Release clips and remove rear lower finisher assembly. For LH, disconnect harness connectors.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR PILLAR UPPER FINISHER
Removal 1. Remove rear kicking plate. 2. Remove rear kick escutcheon. 3. Remove cargo net
hooks using Tool.
Tool number : J-47126
4. Remove seat belt D rings from rear pillar upper finisher. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat
Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Third
Row Seat Belt.
5. Remove rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to "REAR LOWER FINISHER ASSEMBLY". 6.
Remove screw covers and screws, then remove rear pillar upper finisher. For LH, disconnect harness connectors.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
BACK DOOR LOWER FINISHER
Removal 1. Remove pull handle covers. 2. Remove screws and remove back door pull handle. 3.
Release clips and remove back door lower finisher.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
BACK DOOR UPPER FINISHER
Removal 1. Remove back door lower finisher. Refer to "BACK DOOR LOWER FINISHER". 2.
Disconnect top of door open/close link. Refer to See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front
Door/Adjustments. 3. Release clips and remove back door upper finisher.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Service and Repair
Front Door Panel: Service and Repair
DOOR FINISHER
Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR
Removal 1. Release clip and remove front corner cover. 2. Remove screw cover then screw from
cup of power window and door lock/unlock switch assembly. 3. Remove power window and door
lock/unlock switch assembly. Release clip and disconnect harness connectors.
4. Remove memory seat/fuel door release switch assembly. Release clip and disconnect harness connectors.
5. Remove step light. Release tab and disconnect harness connectors.
6. Remove door finisher and disconnect lock cable and handle cable from door handle assembly. Release clips and remove door lock cable and door handle cable. Refer to See: Locations See:
Front Door Latch/Service and Repair.
7. Remove screws and front door release handle from front door finisher.
Installation
Page 1905
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Specifications
Thermostat: Specifications
THERMOSTAT
Locations
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations
SUNROOF
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 1078
Locations
Hazard Warning Switch: Locations
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 539
Page 1614
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 1103
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50288 (Ring Gear Stop) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on
December 3, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account was charged $26.90 plus applicable taxes and
freight.Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins), also considered
"Essential", was shipped to each dealer November 2009.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Write down all radio station presets.
Heater Core
Heater Core: Service and Repair Heater Core
ATC
HEATER CORE
Component
Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Page 182
Engine Control Module: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Locations
Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SRS Component Parts Location
Service and Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
COWL TOP
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove RH/LH wiper arms. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Service and
Repair/Front Wiper And Washer System. 2. Remove cowl top cover.
a. Release fastener covers and clips. b. Remove cowl top seal by releasing ends from tabs on cowl
top cover, then releasing plastic clips. c. Remove cowl top weatherstrip. d. Remove windshield
washer nozzles and hoses from cowl top cover. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer
Systems/Windshield Washer
Hose/Diagrams
3. Remove cowl top extension.
a. Remove heater pump from cowl top extension. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Cooling System/Heater Core/Service and
Repair/Heater Pump.
b. Disconnect clip attaching coolant control valve hose to cowl top extension.
Page 3526
Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel.
2. Set a transmission jack or suitable tool, under the rear lower link to relieve the coil spring
tension, then remove the shock absorber lower end bolt
using power tool.
NOTE: The rear brake rotor has been removed for clarity only. 3. Remove the transmission jack
supporting the rear lower link.
4. Remove the shock absorber upper end nuts using power tool.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Suspension.
Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area
Timing Chain: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area
Classification: EM07-001D
Reference: NTB07-042D
Date: May 25, 2010
MAXIMA / ALTIMA / QUEST; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA
This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been
amended. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35 engine ONLY
2004-2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM:
There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system.
^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM).
^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause.
Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis.
ACTION:
1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with
the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin.
2. Change the engine oil and filter.
3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST
closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Locations
Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 2293
8110 - 10-Pc. Line Disconnect Set
Page 2128
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1267
29. Remove the front timing chain case.
a. Loosen the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown.
b. Insert the appropriate size tool into the notch (1) at the top of the front timing chain case as
shown. c. Pry off the case by moving the suitable tool (2) as shown. - Cut liquid gasket for removal
using Tool.
CAUTION: - Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool. - After removal, handle carefully so it does not
bend, or warp under a load.
30. Remove O-rings from rear timing chain case.
CAUTION: Use new O-rings for installation.
31. Remove the front oil seal from the front timing chain case using a suitable tool.
CAUTION: Do not damage the front cover.
Page 1021
2. If necessary, remove camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (right and left bank) from cylinder head
back side.
CAUTION: Handle carefully to avoid dropping and shocks.
- Do not disassemble.
- Do not allow any metal particles to adhere to magnetic part at sensor tip.
- Do not place sensors in a location where they are exposed to magnetism.
3. Remove the IVT control solenoid valves. Discard the IVT control solenoid valve gaskets and use new gaskets for installation.
4. Remove the intake and exhaust camshaft brackets and the camshafts. Mark the camshafts, camshaft brackets, and bolts so they are placed in the same position and
direction for installation.
- Equally loosen the camshaft bracket bolts in several steps in the order as shown.
5. Remove valve lifters.
NOTE: Identify installation positions to ensure proper installation.
Page 365
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Page 364
DESCRIPTION
Page 4762
EC-ASCIND-01
Page 3815
b. Hand tighten the fittings between the upper and lower high pressure pipe (A) and the low
pressure pipe (B) as shown.
- Arrow Indicates Front
c. Hand tighten the high pressure pipe connection (1) and low pressure pipe connection (2) located
near the RH front suspension strut tower (3)
as shown.
d. Install the A/C pipe clamp bolt (A) to the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown. e. Attach
the high/low pressure pipe to the A/C support clip (secured to the dash panel threaded stud). f.
Tighten the high pressure pipe connection (1) and low pressure pipe connection (2) located near
the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown to specification.
3. Complete the installation of the lower high/low pressure pipe.
CAUTION: Clean all of the A/C pipe fittings and connections.
- Replace the O-rings of the high/low-pressure pipe with new ones.
- Lubricate all the O-rings with the specified A/C system oil.
a. Under the vehicle, tighten the high/low pressure pipe connection (1) bolt (A) as shown to
specification. b. Install the A/C pipe clamp (2) and tighten the A/C pipe clamp bolt (B). c. As
necessary, reposition the rear heater pipe clamp (3). d. Attach the other pipe support clip to the
dash panel threaded stud.
Page 2241
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when
applying or releasing the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See:
Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator
Pedal Released Position Learning.
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL ELECTRIC MOTOR
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal.
3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable
pedal electric motor as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector.
5. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the
adjustable accelerator pedal as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 6. Remove the
adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the adjustable pedal electric motor.
- Avoid damage from dropping the adjustable pedal electric motor during handling.
- Keep the adjustable pedal electric motor away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding
or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward.
- Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released
Page 1998
Page 110
CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Display Item List
Page 196
Fuel Pump Relay: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 1335
Page EM-5
Page 4579
1. Remove sliding door rail cover. Refer to See: Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect slide door
cables. 3. Remove luggage lower trim. Refer to See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service
and Repair. 4. Disconnect sliding door motor electrical connector. 5. Remove sliding door link
rollers. 6. Remove sliding door cable and motor assembly. 7. Remove sliding door motor from
sliding door cable assembly. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Valve Body: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Page 1753
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Page 2111
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when
applying or releasing the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning.
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL ELECTRIC MOTOR
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal.
3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable
pedal electric motor as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector.
5. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the
adjustable accelerator pedal as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 6. Remove the
adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the adjustable pedal electric motor.
- Avoid damage from dropping the adjustable pedal electric motor during handling.
- Keep the adjustable pedal electric motor away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding
or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward.
- Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning.
Page 4289
^ When splicing into the vehicle electrical system, a power-type module/converter must be used to
provide power for all trailer lighting. A power-type
module/converter uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using
the vehicle taillight, stoplight, and turn signal circuits only as a signal source. (See the illustration
above.) The module/converter must draw no more than 5 milliamps from the vehicle turn signal
circuits and no more than 15 milliamps from the stop and tail light circuits.
CAUTION:
Using a module/converter that exceeds these power requirements listed above may negatively
affect the performance and function of the vehicle's electrical system.
See a professional trailer dealer or trailer rental agency for installation of the proper equipment.
Customers who inquire about towing should be reminded of the following:
^ Always check for correct operation of the turn signals, stoplights, and taillights every time a trailer
is hitched up for towing.
^ The towing capacity for 350Z (Coupe Only), Altima, Maxima, and Sentra is 1,000 lbs.
For more information, refer customers to the Owner's Manual as well as the Nissan Towing Guide,
available online at NissanUSA.com.
Page 1812
9. Turn the crankshaft 240° and align as above.
10. Set No.5 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. 11. Check only those valves as shown.
12. If all valve clearances are within specification, installation of the remaining components is in the
reverse order of removal. If the valve clearances
are out of specification, adjust the valve clearances.
VALVE ADJUSTING
CAUTION: Adjust valve clearance while engine is cold.
NOTE: Perform adjustment by selecting the correct head thickness of the valve lifter (adjusting shims are
not used).
- The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional
differences caused by temperature. Use specifications for hot engine condition to confirm valve
clearances.
Page 2496
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 3134
Page 632
SPECIAL TOOLS
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
Page 2075
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 3997
8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D"
ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7).
9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A).
10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make
sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B).
11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is
firmly applied (see Figure 9).
12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt.
13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring.
Page 925
Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle's operation and the
outside temperature.
In case of low tire pressure, a message is displayed on the screen: LOW PRESSURE - Check All
Tires
WARNING
When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will
flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN
dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting. Replacing tires with those
not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS
HOW TO USE THE SETTING BUTTON
When the SETTING button is pressed, the SETTINGS screen will appear on the display. You can
select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle. Move
the joystick and press the ENTER button to select each item to be set.
System settings
Select the "System Settings" key by using the joystick and pressing the ENTER button. The
SYSTEM SETTINGS screen will be displayed.
Language/unit
The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when selecting the "Language/Unit" key and pressing
the ENTER button.
Language: English or French
Unit: US - mile, °F, MPG
Metric - km, °C, L/1OO km
Specifications
Camshaft Bearing: Specifications
Camshaft Bearing Cap
Tighten the camshaft brackets in the four steps, as shown.
Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Seat Belt Retractor: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Classification: RS01-001B
Reference: NTB01-005B
Date: November 12, 2009
"D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION
This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s).
ACTION
Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to:
^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings.
^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
Page 1290
32. Remove all old Silicone RTV Sealant from all the bolt holes and bolts.
CAUTION: Do not damage the threads or mating surfaces.
33. Use a scraper to remove all of the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the front timing chain case
and opposite mating surfaces.
CAUTION: Do not damage the mating surfaces.
INSTALLATION
1. Install dowel pins (right and left) into front timing chain case up to a point close to taper in order
to shorten protrusion length.
2. Install the new front oil seal on the front timing chain case. Apply new engine oil to the oil seal
edges.
NOTE: Install it so that each seal lip is oriented as shown.
a. Install the new front oil seal so that it becomes flush with the face with front timing chain case
using suitable drift.
Page 3673
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 1858
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 1870
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Procedures
Vacuum Brake Booster: Procedures
BRAKE BOOSTER
On-Vehicle Service
OPERATING CHECK
With the engine stopped, change the vacuum to the atmospheric pressure by depressing the brake
pedal several times. Then with brake pedal fully depressed, start the engine and when the vacuum
pressure reaches the standard, check that the clearance between the brake pedal and floor panel
decreases.
CAUTION: Depressing pedal interval is approximately 5 seconds.
AIRTIGHT CHECK
- Run the engine at idle for approximately 1 minute, and stop it after applying vacuum to the
booster. Depress the brake pedal normally to change the vacuum to the atmospheric pressure.
Check that distance between the brake pedal and floor panel gradually increases.
- Depress the brake pedal while the engine is running, then stop the engine with the pedal
depressed. The pedal stroke should not change after holding pedal down for 30 seconds.
CAUTION: Depressing pedal interval is approximately 5 seconds.
Page 3606
Page 3078
Battery: Testing and Inspection
BATTERY
Trouble Diagnosis with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester
Refer to diagnostic station instruction manual.
Page 880
Refrigerant: Service Precautions General Refrigerant Precaution
PRECAUTIONS
General Refrigerant Precaution
WARNING:
Do not release refrigerant into the air. Use approved recovery/recycling equipment to capture the
refrigerant every time an air conditioning system is discharged.
Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air
conditioning system.
Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 52°C (125°F).
Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the
bottom of the container in a warm pail of water.
Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers.
Keep refrigerant away from open flames: poisonous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns.
Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent
suffocation.
Do not pressure test or leak test HFC-134a (R-134a) service equipment and/or vehicle air
conditioning systems with compressed air during repair. Some mixtures of air and HFC-134a
(R-134a) have been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures, if ignited,
may cause injury or property damage. Additional health and safety information may be obtained
from refrigerant manufacturers.
Page 1453
11. Remove the timing chain tensioner assembly.
a. Pull the lever down and release the plunger stopper tab. b. Insert the stopper pin into the
tensioner body hole to hold the lever and keep the stopper tab released.
NOTE: An allen wrench [2.5 mm (0.098 in)] is used for a stopper pin as an example.
c. Insert the plunger into the tensioner body by pressing the timing chain slack guide. d. Keep the
slack guide pressed and hold the plunger stopper tab in by pushing the stopper pin deeper through
the lever and into the timing chain
tensioner body hole.
e. Make a gap between water pump gear and timing chain by turning the crankshaft pulley
approximately 20° clockwise.
12. Remove timing chain tensioner.
CAUTION: Be careful not to drop timing chain tensioner bolts inside front timing chain case.
13. Remove the three water pump bolts. Make a maximum gap between water pump gear and
timing chain by turning crankshaft pulley
counterclockwise until timing chain loosens on water pump sprocket.
14. Screw M8 bolts [pitch: 1.25 mm (0.49 in) length: approx. 50 mm
Page 5198
condition.
A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify wiper scratches as a start point of
cracks in the glass.
^ Inspect the wiper paths (may be a single scratch of a group of scratches)
^ Small scratches can cause a small rupture in the outer glass surface, which can lead to a crack
from thermal conditions, vehicle vibration during
driving, or wind pressure.
A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify metal object scratches as a start
point of cracks in the glass.
^ Scratches can occur from metal objects such as keys and metal buttons.
^ These scratches are typically sharp and can be found anywhere on the glass surface.
^ Thoroughly examine the entire length of the crack to identify any scratch as a start point.
^ Small scratches can cause a small rupture in the outer glass surface, which can lead to a crack
from thermal conditions, vehicle vibration during
driving, or wind pressure.
A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify scratches caused by a
contaminated towel as a start point of cracks in the glass.
^ Scratches can occur from wiping the glass with a towel that has sand particles or dirt on it.
Lifting Points
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Lifting Points
Garage Jack And Safety Stand
LIFTING POINT
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
WARNING:
Park the vehicle on a level surface when using the jack. Make sure to avoid damaging pipes, tubes,
etc. under the vehicle.
Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands when
you have to get under the vehicle.
Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.
-
Lift at reinforced area of front suspension member where lower control arm attaches, staying in
center line of wheels.
2-Pole Lift
LIFTING POINT
2-Pole Lift
WARNING: When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the
front and rear of the vehicle are well balanced. When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to
contact the brake tubes, brake cable, fuel lines and sill spoiler.
Page 2970
2. Remove pin on the reservoir tank, using a suitable tool [commercial service tool: diameter
approx. 4 mm (0.16 in)]. 3. Remove master cylinder assembly from the vise. 4. Remove reservoir
tank and grommets from cylinder body. 5. Remove brake fluid level switch from reservoir tank, if
necessary.
6. Push in the primary piston and remove the piston stopper from the cylinder body.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the inner wall of the cylinder.
7. Carefully pull the primary piston assembly straight out to prevent cylinder inner wall from being
damaged using a suitable tool. 8. Holding the rod of the primary piston, remove the primary piston
assembly, the plate and the guide.
CAUTION: Pull components straight out to prevent cylinder inner wall from being damaged. 9.
Remove the plate and guide from the primary piston.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the rod on the inner wall of the plate.
Inspection After Disassembly Master cylinder Check that there is no damage, friction, rusting, or
pinholes on the cylinder inner wall, and replace if there are any non-standard conditions. Piston
Check cup for damage. Replace the piston if damage is found.
Assembly
CAUTION: Never use mineral oils such as kerosene, gasoline during the cleaning and assembly process.
- Make sure there is no foreign matter such as dirt or dust attached to the inner cylinder walls, the
piston, or the cap seal, and use care to
Page 4073
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Page 3630
Removal 1. Remove the center lower trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel.
2. Remove the clip and remove the floor junction duct extension.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Floor Duct
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
FLOOR DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the floor carpet. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the floor duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Rear Overhead Duct
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
REAR OVERHEAD DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the headliner. Refer to .
NOTE: The rear headliner duct connected to the rear overhead duct is part of the headlining trim
panel and is replaced as an assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the bolt and two clips, and remove the rear
overhead duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Rear Floor Duct
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
REAR FLOOR DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Reposition the floor carpet out of the way. 3.
Remove the screw and clip, then remove the rear floor duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Grilles
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Page 2082
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 2633
Valve Body: Adjustments
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Control Cable Adjustment
Move selector lever from the P position to the D position. You should be able to feel the detent in
each position. If the detent cannot be felt or the pointer indicating the position is improperly aligned,
the control cable needs adjustment.
1. Place selector lever in the P position.
CAUTION: Turn wheels more than 1/4 turn and apply the parking brake.
2. Loosen control cable lock nut. 3. Using the specified force, push control cable in the direction of
the arrow shown.
Specified force : 9.8 N (1.0 kg, 2.2 lb)
4. Tighten control cable lock nut. 5. Move selector lever from P to D position. Make sure that
selector lever moves smoothly. Make sure that the starter operates when the selector lever is placed in the N or P position.
- Make sure that the transmission is locked properly when the selector lever is placed in the P
position.
Page 2116
Page 4427
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Page 631
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 4183
AV-DVD-04
MODELS WITH REAR ROOF CONSOLE ASSEMBLY (DUAL MONITOR)
Page 3099
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
Page 3095
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Page 4891
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 178
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Gap
SPARK PLUG
VDC/TCS/ABS
Yaw Rate Sensor: Locations VDC/TCS/ABS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 959
Tires: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Tire
Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
System Description
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation System Description
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
System Description
- IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse
block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM
E/R control circuits.
- IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication
control, oil pressure switch signal reception, etc.
- It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines.
CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R 1. Lamp control Using CAN communication lines, it
receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps: Headlamps (High, Low)
- Parking lamps
- Tail and license plate lamps
- Cornering lamps
- Front fog lamps
2. Wiper control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the
front wipers. 3. Rear window defogger relay control Using CAN communication lines, it receives
signals from the BCM and controls the rear window defogger relay. 4. A/C compressor control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C
compressor (magnet clutch). 5. Starter control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals
from the BCM and controls the starter relay. 6. Cooling fan control Using CAN communication
lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays. 7. Horn control Using
CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay.
CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL With CAN communication, by connecting each control
unit using two communication lines (CAN L-line, CAN H-line), it is possible to transmit a maximum
amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and
reads necessary information only. 1. Fail-safe control When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe
control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control.
- Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as follows:
IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based
on each operating condition. 1. CAN communication status
Page 1985
Combination Meter
IPDM E/R
Page 3580
Wheels: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Road Wheel
Page 3332
Page 2381
Page 684
Spark Plug: Application and ID
SPARK PLUG
Page 4099
3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1.
4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2).
5. Replace the battery.
^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece.
6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together.
7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated
in the dot matrix display.
8. If the indicator is still illuminated:
a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door.
b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off.
Page 1611
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 3083
Required Procedures After Battery Disconnection
BATTERY
Required Procedures After Battery Disconnection
Removal and Installation
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: Read "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See: Service
Precautions. 1. Remove the fuel tank. Refer to See: Service and Repair.
Page 1809
Page 3382
Page 4825
When the TRIP button is pressed, the followin9 modes will display on the screen.
Warning message (if any) -- TRIP 1 -- TRIP 2 -- FUEL ECONOMY -- MAINTENANCE -- Audio or
OFF -- TRIP 1
Maintenance items
Press the TRIP button to display maintenance information or set maintenance intervals for the
following:
- Engine Oil
- Tire Rotation
- Tire Pressure (if so equipped)
For setting the Tire Pressure display, refer to "Tire pressure information" later in this article.
Changing the maintenance interval
Select the "Engine Oil" or "Tire Rotation" key using the joystick and press the ENTER button to
display the screen to change the maintenance interval.
Select the "Maintenance Schedule" key using the joystick and move the joystick to right or left to
set the maintenance interval.
Resetting the maintenance interval
Page 1005
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3581
Wheels: Testing and Inspection
ROAD WHEEL
Inspection
1. Check tires for wear and improper inflation. 2. Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other
damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout.
a. Remove tire from aluminum wheel and mount on a tire balance machine.
b. Set dial indicator as shown.
Wheel runout (Dial indicator value) : Refer to See: Specifications.
3. Check front wheel bearings for looseness. Refer to See: Wheel Hub/Testing and
Inspection/Front Wheel Hub And Knuckle. 4. Check front suspension for looseness. Refer to See:
Suspension/Service and Repair/Procedures/Front Suspension Assembly.
Page 1561
Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic
Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic
Classification: EL10-028
Reference: NTB10-106
Date: September 10, 2010
NATS SECURITY - VBC LOGIC
APPLIED VEHICLE: 2009 - 2011 All Nissan with NATS / Immobilizer System
SERVICE INFORMATION
All model year 2009 - 2011 Nissan vehicles equipped with NATS/Immobilizer system have the new
VBC (Validate Before Crank) starter relay logic.
VBC (Validate Before Crank) Logic:
^ The BCM will make sure that a valid (registered) key is being used before engaging the starter
relay. If the key is not authenticated the starter will not
operate.
^ If the engine cranks, the issue is not related to NATS. Do not replace NATS components (BCM,
I-Key, FOB Reader or RF Receiver). Refer to ASIST
for further diagnostic information as needed.
Page 1466
Coolant: Service and Repair
ENGINE COOLANT
Changing Engine Coolant
WARNING: To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
- Wrap a thick cloth around cap and carefully remove the cap. First, turn the cap a quarter of a turn
to release built-up pressure. Then push down and turn the cap all the way to remove.
DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Remove engine undercover.
2. Open radiator drain plug at the bottom of radiator and remove the radiator filler cap. This is the
only step required for a partial cooling system
drain (radiator only).
3. For a complete cooling system drain, remove the reservoir tank and drain the coolant, and then
clean the reservoir tank before installation.
CAUTION: Do not allow coolant to spill on the drive belts.
4. When performing a complete cooling system drain (to remove the engine or for engine repair),
remove the cylinder block front drain plug and the
cylinder block RH and LH drain plugs.
CAUTION: If the vehicle is equipped with an engine block heater in place of the cylinder block LH
drain plug, do not remove the engine block heater.
Page 2505
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 5133
Heated Glass Element: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
CONSULT-III Function (BCM)
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
DATA MONITOR
Display Item List
ACTIVE TEST
Display Item List
Page 5228
3. Remove cowl top. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and
Repair. 4. Disconnect washer tube from nozzle and remove washer nozzle from cowl top. 5. Cut off
upper portion of spring legs (2) from washer nozzle (1) as shown.
6. Install the selected size washer nozzle shim (2) onto washer nozzle (1) as shown.
7. Install washer spray nozzle (1) into cowl top cover (2), then install spring clip (A) between spring
legs (3) as shown.
Page 3567
7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem
(see Figure 6).
^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7).
Tire to Rim Slippage:
^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire
may become un-balanced.
^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage.
^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry.
^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced.
WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION
Page 4071
DESCRIPTION
Page 1144
4. After warming up the engine, check for engine oil leaks. 5. Install the RH splash shield.
6. Check engine oil level and add engine oil as necessary. Refer to See: Engine Oil/Service and
Repair.
Page 1763
Page 1028
- Before installation, wipe off any protruding sealant.
- Refer to See: Service Precautions/Precaution For Liquid Gasket.
- Install remaining camshaft brackets in their original positions and direction. Align the stamp marks
as shown.
- If checking and adjusting any part of valve assembly or camshaft, check valve clearance
according to the reference data. Refer to .
8. Tighten the camshaft brackets in the four steps, as shown.
Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM)
Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM)
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM)
For example, when current is 30A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20 seconds. A circuit breaker is
used for the following systems: Power windows
- Power sunroof
Front Suspension
Alignment: Service and Repair Front Suspension
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
Front Wheel Alignment
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Before checking the front wheel alignment, be sure to make a preliminary inspection
(Unladen*). *: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in
designated positions.
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION Check the tires for wear and improper inflation. Refer to See: Wheels and
Tires/Tires/Specifications.
- Check the wheel runout. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Wheels/Testing and Inspection.
- Check the front wheel bearings for looseness. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Testing
and Inspection/Front Wheel Hub And Knuckle.
- Check the front suspension for looseness. Refer to See: Steering and
Suspension/Suspension/Service and Repair/Procedures/Front Suspension Assembly.
- Check the steering linkage for looseness. Refer to See: Steering and
Suspension/Steering/Steering Gear/Service and Repair/Procedures/On-Vehicle Service.
- Check that the front shock absorbers work properly.
- Check the vehicle height (posture) in the unladen condition. Refer to See: Steering and
Suspension/Suspension/Service and Repair/Procedures/Front Suspension Assembly.
GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 1. A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should
be performed. This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN vehicle.
- The four-wheel "thrust" process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering
wheel is centered.
- The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN vehicle.
- The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level.
2. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information.
- Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended
Service/Calibration Schedule.
THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in this.
Refer to See: Specifications. 1. When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines
use "indicators": (Green/red, plus or minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use
these indicators.
- The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these
indicators may not be correct.
- This may result in an ERROR.
2. Some newer alignment machines are equipped with an optional "Rolling Compensation" method
to "compensate" the sensors (alignment
targets or head units). Do NOT use this "Rolling Compensation" method.
- Use the "Jacking Compensation" method. After installing the alignment targets or head units,
raise the vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways.
- See Instructions in the alignment machine you are using for more information.
CAMBER, CASTER AND KINGPIN INCLINATION
NOTE: Camber, caster and kingpin inclination are preset at factory and cannot be adjusted.
1. Measure the camber, caster and kingpin inclination of both the right and left wheels using
attachment Tool and a suitable alignment gauge.
Page 1595
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 1183
4. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to confirm it
turns smoothly. 5. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal.
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 23.6 Nm, 17 ft lb
Page 3910
- When connecting tubes, always use a torque wrench and a back-up wrench.
- After disconnecting tubes, immediately plug all openings to prevent entry of dirt and moisture.
- When installing an air conditioner in the vehicle, connect the pipes as the final stage of the
operation. Do not remove the seal caps of pipes and other components until just before required for
connection.
- Allow components stored in cool areas to warm to working area temperature before removing
seal caps. This prevents condensation from forming inside A/C components.
- Thoroughly remove moisture from the refrigeration system before charging the refrigerant.
- Always replace used O-rings.
- When connecting tube, apply oil to circle of the O-rings shown in illustration. Be careful not to
apply oil to threaded portion.
- O-ring must be closely attached to dented portion of tube.
- When replacing the O-ring, be careful not to damage O-ring and tube.
- Connect tube until you hear it click, then tighten the nut or bolt by hand until snug. Make sure that
the O-ring is installed to tube correctly.
- After connecting line, conduct leak test and make sure that there is no leakage from connections.
When the gas leaking point is found, disconnect that line and replace the O-ring. Then tighten
connections of seal seat to the specified torque.
Service and Repair
Shifter A/T: Service and Repair
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
CONTROL DEVICE
SELECTOR KNOB
Removal 1. Slide the selector knob cover (1) downwards with fingers to reveal the selector knob
clip (2).
- Arrow Indicates: Front of Vehicle.
2. Gently pry the selector knob clip (2) outward to remove it using suitable tool. 3. Lift the selector
knob up to remove.
Installation 1. Set the selector knob in place on the selector lever and push the selector knob
downward. 2. Install the selector knob clip into the groove on the selector knob. 3. Slide the
selector knob cover upwards to conceal the selector knob clip.
TCS/ABS
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair TCS/ABS
Wheel Sensors
WHEEL SENSORS
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
- When removing the front or rear wheel hub assembly, first remove the wheel sensor from the
assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires, making the sensor
inoperative.
- Pull out the sensor, be careful to turn it as little as possible. Do not pull on the sensor harness.
- Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following, and then tighten the
wheel sensor bolt to the specified torque.
- Before installing the wheel sensor, make sure there are no foreign materials (such as iron
fragments) adhered to the pick-up part of the wheel sensor, to the inside of the wheel sensor
mounting hole or on the rotor mounting surface.
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR
Removal 1. Remove the front wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service
and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Partially remove the front wheel fender protector.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair. 3.
Remove the wheel sensor bolt and wheel sensor. 4. Remove the harness wire from mounts and
disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR WHEEL SENSOR
Removal 1. Remove the wheel sensor bolt and wheel sensor from the rear wheel hub and bearing
assemblies. 2. Remove the harness wire from mounts and harness wire clips from the rear
suspension member. 3. Disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Sensor Rotor
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation
The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub. For removal and installation
procedure, refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear
Wheel Hub.
Automatic Back Door System
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Automatic Back Door System
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 851
Figure 2.
NOTE
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (See Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION
Tighten the bolt no more then necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Page 2482
Page 160
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Audible Warning Device: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Page 2981
Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove instrument lower panel LH and knee protector using power tool. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Lower Panel LH.
2. Disconnect parking brake switch electrical connector.
3. Remove adjusting nut from threaded end of front cable and discard the adjusting nut.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the adjusting nut. 4. Remove parking brake pedal assembly nuts. 5.
Disconnect front cable from parking brake pedal assembly while compressing legs of spring clip. 6.
Remove parking brake pedal assembly. 7. Remove center console. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument
Panel.
8. Remove front cable bolts, then remove front cable. 9. Remove rear disc rotors. Refer to See:
Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Rear.
10. Remove rear cables from toggle levers. 11. Remove right and left rear cables nuts and bolts,
then remove right and left cable assemblies.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten the nuts and bolts to specification.
- Adjust the parking brake. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the adjusting nut.
For Frontal Collision
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair For Frontal Collision
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
For Frontal Collision
Check the SRS components using the following table. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION)
Page 46
Repair Flow Chart
Page 2277
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Fuel Pressure Check
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in
"WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or
three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
Without CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn
ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out.
The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because V42 models never have fuel return
system.
Method A
CAUTION: The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for other
purposes.
- Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick
connector maintains seal ability with O-rings inside.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Prepare fuel hose for
fuel pressure check, and connect fuel pressure gauge. -
Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine NISSAN fuel hose without quick
connector).
- To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moderately long fuel hose for fuel pressure
check.
- Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with damage or cracks on it.
- Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service
and Repair/Intake Manifold. Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
- Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
- Keep the original fuel hose to be free from intrusion of dust or foreign substances with a suitable
cover.
Page 2058
Service and Repair
Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service and Repair
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
EVAP CANISTER Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure.
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE 1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve
counterclockwise.
2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve. Always replace O-ring with a new one.
Page 2086
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 2028
3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees.
4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees.
^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily.
6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the
sensor will not unscrew any further.
7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed.
Page 1024
2. Install dial gauge in thrust direction on front end of camshaft. Measure end play when camshaft
is moved forward/backward (in direction to axis) as shown.
- If out of the specified range, replace with new camshaft and measure again.
- If out of the specified range again, replace with new cylinder head.
Camshaft Sprocket Runout
1. Put V-block on precise flat bed and support No. 2 and No. 4 journal of camshaft as shown. 2.
Install camshaft sprocket on camshaft. 3. Measure camshaft sprocket runout.
Limit : 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
4. If sprocket runout exceeds the limit, replace camshaft sprocket.
Valve Lifter
- Check if the surface of the valve lifter has any excessive wear or cracks, replace as necessary.
Valve Lifter Clearance Outer Diameter of Valve Lifter
Page 2700
Flex Plate: Specifications Torque
Drive Plate
Tighten the drive plate bolts crosswise several times using a suitable tool.
Component Locations
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 4551
6. Remove screws and split RH from LH case.
Page 2323
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 4909
Key is in ignition key cylinder (key switch ON), power is supplied -
through key switch terminal 2
- to BCM terminal 37.
When key is removed from key switch (key switch OFF), power supply to BCM terminal 37 is
terminated. BCM detects that key has been removed, determines that interior room/map lamp timer
conditions are met, and turns the interior room/map lamp ON for 30 seconds. When front door LH
opens to closes and the key is not inserted in the key switch (key switch OFF), BCM terminal 47
changes between 0V (door open) to 12V (door closed). The BCM determines that conditions for
interior room/map lamp operation are met and turns the interior room/map lamp ON for 30
seconds. Timer control is canceled under the following conditions. Front door LH is locked [when locked with keyfob, main power window and door lock/unlock switch
or front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch)]
- Front door LH is opened (front door switch LH turns ON)
- Ignition switch ON.
INTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL If interior lamp is left "ON", it will not be turned out
even when door is closed. BCM turns off interior lamp automatically to save battery 30 minutes
after ignition switch is turned OFF. BCM controls interior lamps listed below: Vanity lamp (if equipped)
- Room/map lamp
- Cargo lamp
- Personal lamp
- Step lamps
- Foot lamps
- Ignition keyhole illumination
After lamps turn OFF by the battery saver system, the lamps illuminate again when signal received from keyfob, or main power window and door lock/unlock switch or front door lock
assembly LH (key cylinder switch) is locked or unlocked
- door is opened or closed
- key is removed from or inserted in ignition key cylinder.
Interior lamp battery saver control period can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-III
and through the display (with color display).
Page 2842
The rear wheel sensor rotor is built into the rear wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure,
refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Wheel Hub.
Page 1603
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Electrical - Trailer Light Wiring Info.
Trailer Adapter Kit: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Trailer Light Wiring Info.
Classification: EL03-043H
Reference: NTB04-049H
Date: April 13, 2011
TRAILER LIGHT WIRING
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard
previous versions of this is bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
SERVICE INFORMATION
NOTE:
This bulletin provides information to be shared with all affected customers.
^ This TSB contains the appropriate hookup points for connecting a trailer light wiring harness to
the towing vehicle's electrical system.
^ The wiring diagrams contained in this bulletin are for Nissan vehicles that have trailer towing
capability (see the owners manual) but do not have a
Genuine Nissan accessory towing kit (with wiring) available.
Service and Repair
Carpet: Service and Repair
FLOOR TRIM
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair.
2. Remove front seats. Refer to See: Seats/Service and Repair/Front Seat/Removal And
Installation. 3. Remove rear seats. Refer to See: Seats/Service and Repair/Rear Seat. 4. Remove
3rd row rear seat assembly. Refer to See: Seats/Service and Repair/Rear Seat. 5. Remove kicking
plates. Refer to See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 6. Remove center console. Refer to See:
Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel. 7. Remove lower seat belt
anchors. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Front
Seat Belt. 8. Remove rear seat striker covers. 9. Remove tailgate kicking plate.
10. Remove front carpet. 11. Remove floor mat hooks from front carpet. 12. Remove rear carpet.
13. Remove front floor spacer. 14. Remove cargo organizer cover.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 111
NOTE: The details for display of the period are as follows: CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R.
- PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory.
DATA MONITOR
All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu
Page 3129
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Page 1339
Page EM-9
Page 1261
Page EM-19
Page 635
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 3456
Boot -
Check condition of boot. If cracked, replace it.
- Check boots for accumulation of power steering fluid indicating a steering gear leak. If found,
replace the steering gear as an assembly.
Gear Thoroughly examine steering gear. If damaged, cracked, leaking, or worn, replace it.
Inner and Outer Tie-rods Check ball joints for swinging force:
Outer tie-rod outer and inner ball joints swinging force "A". Refer to See: Steering
Shaft/Specifications/Steering Gear And Linkage.
- Check ball joint for rotating torque: Outer tie-rod outer ball joint rotating torque "B". Refer to See:
Steering Shaft/Specifications/Steering Gear And Linkage.
- Check ball joints for axial end play: Outer tie-rod outer and inner ball joints axial end play "C".
Refer to See: Steering Shaft/Specifications/Steering Gear And Linkage.
- Check condition of dust cover. If cracked, replace outer tie-rod.
ASSEMBLY 1. Install the inner tie-rods.
2. Install the outer tie-rods to the specified length and tighten the outer tie-rod lock nut to
specification. Refer to See: Steering
Shaft/Specifications/Steering Gear And Linkage. Use Genuine High Temperature, High Strength
Thread Locking Sealant (Red) or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants.
3. Measure rack stroke. Refer to See: Steering Shaft/Specifications/Steering Gear And Linkage.
Page 1669
Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Locations
Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SRS Component Parts Location
Recall 10V072000: Inspect Replace Brake Pedal
Assembly
Brake Pedal Assy: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V072000: Inspect Replace Brake Pedal
Assembly
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2008-2010 Nissan/Armada 2008-2010
Nissan/Quest 2008-2009 Nissan/Titan 2008-2010 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V072000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Pedals and Linkages
Potential Number of Units Affected: 179383
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2008-2010 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56,
and model year 2008-2009 Nissan Quest vehicles. The brake pedal pivot pin end was not
spin-formed to specification during the manufacturing process of the brake pedal assembly. The
pivot pin could slide and cause the brake pedal to partially disengage from the brake pedal bracket.
CONSEQUENCE: The driver will experience unusual and noticeable looseness in the pedal and a
reduction in braking force increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will inspect to see if the pivot pin had been formed properly and will replace the
brake pedal assembly if necessary free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or
before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 3462
Steering Shaft: Specifications Steering Gear And Linkage
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Steering Gear and Linkage
Page 4012
Seat Belt: Service and Repair Second Row Seat Belt
SEAT BELTS
Second Row Seat Belt
COMPONENTS
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR
Removal 1. Remove seat belt lower anchor bolt. 2. Remove the D-ring anchor bolt cover and
D-ring anchor bolt. 3. Remove the upper luggage area trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 4. Remove the seat belt guide bolt. 5. Remove
seat belt retractor anchor bolt and the assembly. 6. Remove the height adjuster assembly.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: Read "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See:
Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions. 1. Remove the fuel
tank. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and
Repair.
Page 3014
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid.
Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid. 4.
Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). 5.
Disconnect the brake tubes.
CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
6. Remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket bolts and remove the ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit) with the
bracket.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Hydraulic Circuit for torque
specifications when connecting the brake tubes.
- After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with
new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the brake hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brake
Bleeding/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: To install the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool).
Page 4040
8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D"
ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7).
9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A).
10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make
sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B).
11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is
firmly applied (see Figure 9).
12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt.
13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring.
Page 1596
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 2072
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 4178
Service and Repair
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Rear Wiper Arm
REMOVAL 1. Operate rear wiper motor one full cycle, then turn OFF (auto stop). 2. Remove wiper
arm cover, remove wiper arm nut, then remove rear wiper arm.
INSTALLATION 1. Prior to rear wiper arm installation, operate wiper motor one full cycle then turn
OFF (auto stop). Operate wiper motor one full cycle, then turn OFF (auto stop).
- Using a suitable brush, clean pivot area as shown. This will reduce the possibility of wiper arm
looseness.
2. Install rear wiper arm onto pivot and ensure wiper blade is parallel to the ground. 3. Tighten
wiper arm nut to specification, install wiper arm cover.
Wiper arm nut : 15.5 N.m (1.6 kg-m, 11 ft-lb)
Page 1133
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-50288 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets (no picture shown).
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioners
plungers. Figure 1 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tools where shown in
Locations
Exterior View Display Monitor: Locations
REAR VIEW MONITOR
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 1253
Page EM-11
Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM)
Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM)
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM)
For example, when current is 30A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20 seconds. A circuit breaker is
used for the following systems: Power windows
- Power sunroof
Page 5214
Windshield Washer Motor: Locations Rear Wiper And Washer System
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 1448
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Before starting engine, check the levels of engine coolant, engine oil and working fluid. If less than
required quantity, fill to the specified level.
- Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage.
- Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for
fuel leakage at connection points.
- Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
- Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
- Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of engine coolant, engine oil,
working fluid, fuel and exhaust gas.
- Bleed air from passages in pipes and tubes of applicable lines, such as in cooling system.
- After cooling down engine, again check amounts of engine coolant, engine oil and working fluid.
Refill to specified level, if necessary.
- Summary of the inspection items:
Page 169
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 2041
Body Control Module: Locations
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 2949
Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Front Brake Piping And Hose
BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE
Front Brake Piping and Hose
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
- All hoses must be free from excessive bending, twisting and pulling.
- Cover the open end of lines and hoses when disconnecting to prevent entrance of dirt.
1. Connect vinyl tube and container to air bleeder valve.
2. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing brake pedal.
3. Remove the flare nut connecting the brake tube and hose, then withdraw the lock spring. 4.
Remove the connecting bolt and disconnect the brake hose from the caliper assembly. 5. Remove
lock springs from the mounting portion of the brake tube and the mounting portion of the strut.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Attach the brake hose to the caliper assembly, then temporarily tighten the connecting bolt by
hand.
CAUTION: Correctly attach the brake hose to the cylinder body.
- The copper washers of the connecting bolt have to be replaced with new ones every time the
fitting is disconnected.
2. Attach the brake hose to the strut, then secure it with a lock spring. 3. Attach the brake hose to
the brake tube and temporarily tighten the flare nut as much as possible by hand, then secure it
with a lock spring.
Page 698
1. Remove the camshaft. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and
Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal
And Installation.
2. Remove the valve lifter that was measured as being outside the standard specifications.
3. Measure the center thickness of the removed lifter with a micrometer as shown. 4. Use the
equation below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement.
- Thickness of new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the
cylinder).
Available thickness of valve lifter: 27 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.40 mm (0.3102 to 0.3307 in) in
steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to See: .
CAUTION: Install identification letter at the end and top, (U) and (N), at each of proper positions.
(Be careful of mis-installation between intake and exhaust.) 5. Install the selected replacement
valve lifter. 6. Install the camshaft. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft,
Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal
And Installation.
7. Rotate the crankshaft a few turns by hand. 8. Confirm that the valve clearances are within
specification. 9. After the engine has been run to full operating temperature, confirm that the valve
clearances are within specification.
Page 3406
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 669
2. Remove the lock ring using a socket drive handle and Tool as shown.
Tool number : KV991J0090 (J-46214)
3. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly from the fuel tank.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Make sure the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump is free
from defects and foreign materials.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Install the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly with the fuel feed hose facing the
front of the vehicle.
- Turn the lock ring until the lock ring is fully rotated into the fuel tank lock tabs as shown.
- Connect the quick connector as follows:
- Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials.
Page 558
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
CAUTION: Servicing PAX run flat tires and wheels requires special tire equipment and training. DO NOT
service PAX Run Flat tires and wheels with conventional tire servicing equipment or damage to the
tire and wheel will result.
- If a PAX run flat tire and wheel [or transmitter (pressure sensor)] requires service, and the proper
servicing equipment is not available, then replace the complete PAX tire and wheel assembly.
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter
retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
3. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire.
Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the
transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead.
4. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
5. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
6. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then
install seal on transmitter. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance.
NOTE:
Page 3367
Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process.
6. Begin the alignment procedure.
^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment.
^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications.
If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips:
^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body.
IMPORTANT:
After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position.
When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips:
Page 2288
a. Remove quick connector cap. b. With the sleeve side of Tool facing quick connector, install Tool
onto fuel tube.
c. Insert Tool into quick connector until sleeve contacts and goes no further. Hold the Tool on that
position.
CAUTION: Inserting the Tool hard will not disconnect quick connector. Hold Tool where it contacts
and goes no further.
d. Pull the quick connector straight out from the fuel tube.
CAUTION: Pull quick connector holding it at the (A) position, as shown.
- Do not pull with lateral force applied. O-ring inside quick connector may be damaged.
- Prepare container and cloth beforehand as fuel will leak out.
- Avoid fire and sparks.
- Be sure to cover openings of disconnected pipes with plug or plastic bag to avoid fuel leakage
and entry of foreign materials.
4. Remove the fuel rail with the fuel injectors attached, from the intake manifold. Remove the fuel
injector O-rings and use new O-rings for
installation.
5. If necessary, remove fuel damper bolts and the fuel dampers. Remove fuel damper O-rings and
use new O-rings for installation.
INSTALLATION 1. If necessary, install fuel dampers and fuel damper bolts. Use new O-rings for
installation. 2. Install the fuel rails with fuel injectors attached.
NOTE: Carefully install O-ring.
- Lubricate O-rings by lightly coating with new engine oil.
- Be careful not to damage the O-rings and surfaces for O-ring sealing surfaces. Do not expand or
twist O-rings.
- Discard old clips; replace with new ones.
- Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned with cutouts of clips after installation.
Page 1357
1. Check to see if the 2 clips have come unattached from the sliding door welt.
^ If the clips are missing replace the door welt and proceed to step 2.
^ If the clips are not missing, reinstall the clips into the door welt by inserting the clips into the 2
holes located on the door welt, then proceed to step 2.
2. Prepare the surface by applying 3M(TM) Automotive Adhesion Promoter or equivalent on the
door welt and sliding door panel.
3. Apply 3M(TM) Acrylic Plus Tape or equivalent to the area as shown in Figure 2.
^ Tape size 5 mm x 20 mm x 1 mm (0.19 in x 0.78 in x 0.039 in)
4. Firmly press the door welt onto the sliding door panel.
^ Make sure the clips are securely inserted into the 2 holes located on the sliding door panel.
5. Check to make sure this issue has been resolved.
Page 1820
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 4858
Page 141
Page 4306
3. Remove engine under cover. 4. Remove engine under cover seal. 5. Remove front grille. Refer
to See: Grille/Service and Repair. 6. Disconnect fog lamps, if equipped. 7. Remove clips from top
and screws from side of front bumper fascia. 8. Remove front bumper fascia. 9. Remove energy
absorbing foam.
10. Remove front bumper reinforcement. 11. Remove front bumper stay assemblies. 12. Remove
fog lamp assembly brackets RH/LH, if equipped. 13. Remove fog lamp assemblies RH/LH, if
equipped. 14. Remove side front bumper brackets RH/LH.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Locations
Collision Avoidance Module: Locations
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 1966
Create On-board Diagnosis Copy Sheet Display the trouble diagnosis result of CAN
communication with the on-board diagnosis function on the vehicle monitor, etc. Copy them on the
on-board diagnosis copy sheet.
NOTE: -
For some models, CAN communication diagnosis result is received from the vehicle monitor.
(CONSULT-III is not available.)
- For the details, refer to See: Trouble Diagnosis/Data Sheet.
Engine - Revised Timing Chain Service Procedure
Timing Chain: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Revised Timing Chain Service Procedure
Classification: EM10-001
Reference: NTB10-046
Date: March 19, 2010
ALTIMA, MAXIMA, AND QUEST; REVISED VQ35 ENGINE TIMING CHAIN PROCEDURES
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Altima (L31) - VQ35DE engine ONLY 2004-2008 Maxima (A34)
2004-2009 Quest (V42)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Removal and installation procedures for the VQ35 engine front timing chain case and timing chains
(primary and secondary) have been updated to no longer require removal of the rocker covers and
intake collector.
In addition, new removal and installation procedures have been added for the timing chain
tensioners (primary and secondary) and secondary timing chain tensioner shoe. The updated
procedures are available via hyperlink in this bulletin (see below).
Nissan Service Manuals for 2004-2006 Altima, 2004-2008 Maxima, and 2004-2009 Quest vehicles
will be updated with these new procedures. Updated Service Manuals will be distributed to the field
as quickly as possible.
Until the updated Service Manuals are made available, please use the procedures shown below for
any VQ35 engine front timing chain case, timing chain, or timing chain tensioner-related repairs on
an Applied Vehicle.
Page 3178
Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction
- When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned
OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction.
- When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch
signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay.
NOTE: When the ignition switch is turned ON, the tail lamps are OFF.
Page 3136
Page 4681
1. Move the 2nd row seat fully forward and lift the seat up. See Figure 1.
NOTE:
^ These photos are for the LH side. Repeat steps 1-4 for the RH side if needed.
2. Check to see if the inner and outer anti-rattle spring has fallen off the seat. See Figure 2.
^ Replace the springs with the ones listed in the Parts Information.
Page 872
Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Air Bleeding Hydraulic System
POWER STEERING FLUID
Bleeding Hydraulic System
1. Raise the front end of vehicle until the wheels are clear of the ground.
2. Add Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent into the steering fluid reservoir tank to the specified
level. Refer to See: See: . Then quickly turn the
steering wheel fully to right and left and lightly touch steering stoppers. Repeat steering wheel
operation until the fluid level no longer decreases.
3. Start the engine then repeat step 2 above. Incomplete air bleeding will cause the following
symptoms: Air bubbles in reservoir tank
- Clicking noise in oil pump
- Excessive buzzing in oil pump
If this happens, bleed out the air repeating step 2 above. Fluid noise may occur in the valve or oil
pump. This is common when the vehicle is stationary or while turning the steering wheel slowly.
This does not affect the performance or durability of the system.
Page 1602
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 1030
Camshaft: Service and Repair Inspection
CAMSHAFT
Inspection After Installation
INSPECTION OF CAMSHAFT SPROCKET (INT) OIL GROOVE
WARNING: Check when engine is cold so as to prevent burns from any splashing engine oil.
CAUTION: Perform this inspection only when DTC P0011 or P0021 are detected in self-diagnostic results of
CONSULT-III and it is directed according to inspection procedure of Engine Control System. Refer
to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Scan
Tool Testing and Procedures/CONSULT-III Function.
1. Check the engine oil level. Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Engine Oil/Service and Repair. 2.
Perform the following procedure so as to prevent the engine from being unintentionally started
while checking.
a. Release fuel pressure. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Fuel
Pressure/Testing and Inspection. b. Disconnect ignition coil and injector harness connectors.
3. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to See: Removal And Installation.
4. Crank the engine, and then make sure that engine oil comes out from camshaft bracket (No. 1)
oil hole. End cranking after checking.
WARNING: Be careful not to touch rotating parts (drive belts, idler pulley, and crankshaft pulley,
etc.).
CAUTION: Engine oil may squirt from intake valve timing control solenoid valve installation hole during
cranking. Use a shop cloth to protect the engine components and the vehicle.
- Do not allow engine oil to get on rubber components such as drive belt or engine mount
insulators. Immediately wipe off any splashed engine oil.
- Clean oil groove between oil strainer and intake valve timing control solenoid valve if engine oil
does not come out from camshaft bracket (No. 1) oil hole. Refer to See: Engine
Lubrication/Diagrams/Lubrication Circuit.
5. Remove components between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and camshaft sprocket
(INT), and then check each oil groove for
clogging.
- Clean oil groove if necessary. Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Diagrams/Lubrication Circuit.
6. After inspection, install removed parts.
Page 3369
^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep.
7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and
adjustments.
NOTE:
If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not
necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster
and easier.
^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system.
If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a
centered steering wheel.
^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right.
This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall
mounted rack and pinion units.
IMPORTANT:
If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to
jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct.
After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment
8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order.
9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight
flat road.
Page 4750
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Page 4784
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Locations
Ignition Coil: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 374
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 2669
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Move joint up/down, left/right, and in axial direction. Check for any rough movement or significant
looseness.
- Check boot for cracks or other damage, and for grease leakage.
- If damaged, disassemble drive shaft to verify damage, and repair or replace as necessary.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following: Refer to "Removal and Installation (Left Side)" for tightening torque.
CAUTION: Do not reuse non-reusable parts.
- In order to prevent damage to differential side oil seal, place Tool "A" onto oil seal before inserting
drive shaft as shown. Slide drive shaft into slide joint and tap with a hammer to install securely.
Tool number : KV38106700 (J-34296)
- Install new circlip on drive shaft in the circular clip groove on transaxle side. Refer to See:
Disassembly And Assembly (Left Side).
CAUTION: Make sure the new circlip on the drive shaft is securely fastened. After its insertion, try to pull the flange out of the slide joint by hand. If it pulls out, the circlip is not
properly meshed with the transaxle side gear.
Page 1220
Page EM-3
Page 4852
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Page 1916
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Component Locations
EGR Temperature Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3281
CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Display Item List
Page 3284
Inspection With CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis)
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Inspection with CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis)
1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK 1. Connect CONSULT-III and select "IPDM E/R" on the
"SELECT SYSTEM" screen. 2. Select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE"
screen. 3. Check display content in self-diagnosis results.
NOTE: The Details for Display for the Period are as follows: CRNT: Error currently detected by IPDM E/R.
- PAST: Error detected in the past and stored in IPDM E/R memory.
Contents displayed NO DTC DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE
REQUIRED.-INSPECTION END. CAN COMM CIRC-Print out the self-diagnosis result and refer to
See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/System Description/CAN Communication
System.
Page 4110
Cellular Phone: Locations Telephone
TELEPHONE
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 5225
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Adjustments
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Rear Washer Nozzle Adjustment
Adjust washer nozzle with suitable tool as shown.
Adjustable range : ±15° (In any direction)
Tow Truck Towing
Towing Information: Service and Repair Tow Truck Towing
TOW TRUCK TOWING
Tow Truck Towing
CAUTION: Never tow an automatic transaxle model with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the
ground. This may cause serious and expensive damage to the transaxle. If it is necessary to tow
the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, always use towing dollies under the front wheels.
- Never tow an automatic transaxle model from the rear (that is backward) with four wheels on the
ground. This may cause serious and expensive damage to the transaxle.
NISSAN recommends that the vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground as
shown.
CAUTION: Always release the parking brake when towing the vehicle with the front wheels raised with the rear
wheels on the ground.
Page 1889
Attachment General Procedure
Page 140
Page 1465
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Coolant
Type ............................................................ 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or
equivalent, 50% Distilled or Demineralized Water.
Page 2494
Page 3339
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Page 654
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Fuel Pressure Check
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in
"WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or
three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
Without CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn
ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out.
The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because V42 models never have fuel return
system.
Method A
CAUTION: The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for other
purposes.
- Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick
connector maintains seal ability with O-rings inside.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Prepare fuel hose for
fuel pressure check, and connect fuel pressure gauge. -
Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine NISSAN fuel hose without quick
connector).
- To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moderately long fuel hose for fuel pressure
check.
- Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with damage or cracks on it.
- Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service
and Repair/Intake Manifold. Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
- Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
- Keep the original fuel hose to be free from intrusion of dust or foreign substances with a suitable
cover.
Page 4499
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before removing the rear suspension assembly, disconnect the ABS wheel sensors
from the assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires and the sensors
becoming inoperative. 1. Remove the center exhaust tube with mufflers using power tool. Refer to
See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
2. Disconnect the parking brake cable assemblies from the front cable. Refer to See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking
Page 4184
AV-DVD-05
Page 3878
Page 5023
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
Changing A/T Fluid
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Changing A/T Fluid
A/T FLUID
Changing A/T Fluid
1. Run the engine to warm up the transaxle until the fluid is at full operating temperature "HOT".
2. Stop the engine. 3. Remove the engine undercover.
4. Drain the A/T fluid by removing the drain plug. Reinstall the drain plug to the specified tightness
using a new drain washer.
Drain plug : 39 N.m (4.0 kg-m, 29 ft-lb)
5. Refill the transaxle with new specified A/T fluid through the A/T fluid charging pipe. Always refill
the transaxle with the same volume amount that
was drained out.
Fluid grade and capacity : Refer to See: Maintenance.
CAUTION: Do not overfill the transaxle. 6. Run the engine at idle speed for five minutes. 7. Check
fluid level and condition. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Checking A/T Fluid. If the
fluid is still contaminated, repeat step 2
through 5.
Page 965
^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps.
5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure.
Generally this is 40psi.
If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure:
a. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
c. Remount the tire.
6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area.
^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel.
NOTE:
Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated.
If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform
1. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
3. Remount the tire.
Page 3751
2. Remove the screws (A) and the center lower trim.
3. Remove the center stack lower trim RH. 4. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. 5.
Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the front heater and cooling unit
assembly.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
MTC
INTAKE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
Intake Sensor
Locations
Throttle Position Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3227
DESCRIPTION
Page 2136
Knock Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 818
2. If disconnected, reattach the upper radiator hose at the engine side.
3. Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition
ON with the engine OFF as necessary to activate
the heater mode.
4. Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the radiator neck opening. Then attach
the gauge body assembly with the refill tube and
the venturi assembly to the radiator cap adapter.
Tool number : KV991J0070 (J-45695)
5. Insert the refill hose into the coolant mixture container that is placed at floor level. Make sure the
ball valve is in the closed position. Use Specified engine coolant or equivalent. Refer to See: .
6. Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must be within specification.
Compressed air supply pressure : 5.7 - 8.5 kPa (5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm2, 80 - 120 psi)
CAUTION: The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air dryer. 7. The vacuum gauge
will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this process open the ball valve
on the refill hose slightly.
Coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill hose is full of coolant, close the ball
valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose.
Page 1535
Tool numbers : KV10114400 (J-38365)
- Install the bank 1 (1) and bank 2 (2) three way catalyst support bolts in the order as shown.
Arrow Indicates : Engine front
Three way catalyst support bolts : 22.0 N.m (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft-lb)
- Install the exhaust manifold heat shield bolts.
- Install the three way catalyst manifolds heat shield bolts.
Three way catalyst manifold heat shield bolts : 8.3 N.m (0.85 kg-m, 73 in-lb)
Page 4929
If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly
may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example.
If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 1915
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 2231
4. Install the fuel pressure gauge as shown in the figure. Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth moistened with gasoline.
- Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel tube and No.1 spool.
- Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches the No.1 spool on fuel tube.
- Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439 N4710 or 16439 40U00).
- When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
- When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality.
- Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
- Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 -0.08in).
Tightening torque: 1 - 1.5 Nm (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m, 9 - 13in-lb)
- Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts.
5. After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose with a force of approximately 98
N (10 kg, 22lb) to confirm fuel tube does not
come off.
6. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage. 7. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 8.
Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false
readings.
- During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
9. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
10. Check the following.
- Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
- Fuel filter for clogging
- Fuel pump
- Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or
replace.
Method B
CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick
connector O-ring maintains seal ability.
- Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel
pressure.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove fuel hose
using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to See: Fuel Rail/Service and Repair. Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
- Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting
Front Door Window Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit
Switch Resetting
EL08-031A
Reference: NTB09-027A
Date: July 15, 2010
FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET
This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other
changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If any of the following work has been done:
^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly
^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator
^ installation of a new glass window
^ installation of a new glass run
....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following:
^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B
NOTE:
The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror.
If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in
this bulletin.
NOTE:
Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will
not reset the Limit Switch.
SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH
1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in
the glass raising (up) direction.
Page 4360
> Window glass run rubber is replaced.
> Window is partly opened and/or closed many times without being fully closed.
Component Locations
Engine Control Module: Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Electrical Units Location
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Page 4527
5. Install the new insert into the armrest.
^ Use the insert listed in the Parts Information.
6. Apply Permatex(R) Threadlocker Blue or equivalent to the threads on the bolt.
^ See the Parts Information for Threadlocker details.
7. Reinstall the armrest on the seat.
^ Bolt torque: 28 Nm (2.85 kg-m, 20.6 lb-ft)
Page 1148
Oil Pan: Service and Repair
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: You should not remove the oil pan until the exhaust system and cooling system have completely
cooled off.
- When removing the front and rear engine mounting through bolts and nuts, lift the engine up
slightly for safety.
CAUTION: When removing the upper oil pan from the engine, first remove the crankshaft position
sensor (POS). Be careful not to damage sensor edges or signal plate teeth. 1. Remove the front
RH wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional
Tire And Wheel. 2. Drain engine oil. Refer to . 3. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to See: Cooling
System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 4. Remove the oil dipstick. 5. Remove the engine undercover.
6. Remove the RH inner fender splash shield. 7. Remove the A/C drive belt. Refer to See: Drive
Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 8. Remove the front
exhaust tube. Refer to See: Exhaust System/Service and Repair/Exploded View. 9. Remove
coolant pipe bolts.
10. Discharge and recover the A/C refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service
and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service
Procedure.
11. Remove the A/C compressor using power tools. Refer to See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Compressor HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Removal And Installation For Compressor.
12. Remove oil cooler from the upper oil pan. Refer to See: Oil Cooler/Service and Repair. 13.
Remove the oil pressure switch, and the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from the upper oil pan.
Page 3602
Rear Passenger Compartment
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
REAR PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Diagram Information and Instructions
Data Link Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Page 2102
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 1518
(1.97 in)] into water pump's upper and lower bolt holes until they reach the timing chain case. Then,
alternately tighten each bolt for a half turn, and pull out the water pump.
CAUTION: Pull straight out while preventing vane from contacting socket in installation area.
- Remove water pump without causing sprocket to contact timing chain.
15. Remove M8 bolts and O-rings from water pump.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL 1. Check for badly rusted or corroded water pump body and
vane assembly.
2. Check for rough operation due to excessive end play.
INSTALLATION 1. Install new O-rings to water pump.
2. Apply engine oil and engine coolant to the O-rings as shown.
NOTE: Locate the O-ring with white paint mark to engine front side.
Page 645
Camber, caster and kingpin inclination : Refer to See: Specifications.
2. If the camber, caster or kingpin inclination is not within specification, inspect the front suspension
parts. Replace any damaged or worn out parts.
TOE-IN
WARNING: Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface.
- Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it.
1. Bounce the front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture). 2. Push the
vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft).
3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both front tires at the same height as hub
center as shown. These marks are measuring points.
4. Measure the distance "A" on the rear side of the front tires as shown. 5. Push the vehicle slowly
ahead to rotate the wheels 180° degrees (1/2 a turn).
CAUTION: If the wheels have rotated more than 180° degrees (1/2 turn), start this procedure again
from the beginning. Never push the vehicle backward. 6. Measure the distance "B" on the front side
of the front tires at the same marks as shown.
Total toe-in : Refer to See: Specifications.
7. Adjust the toe-in by varying the length of the steering outer tie-rods.
a. Loosen the outer tie-rod lock nuts. b. Adjust the toe-in by screwing the outer tie-rods in or out.
Standard length "L" : Refer to See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Steering
Shaft/Steering Gear And Linkage.
Page 4004
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor
mechanism (see Figure 2).
2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor
mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip.
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 23.6 Nm, 17 ft lb
Page 4187
- to DVD player terminal 15.
Power is also supplied from DVD player terminals 31 and 32
- to video monitor terminals 11 and 12.
Ground is supplied to DVD player terminal 22
- through grounds M57, M61, and M79.
Audio signals are supplied through DVD player terminals 1, 2, 3 and 4
- to audio unit terminals 34, 35, 36 and 37.
Video signals are supplied through DVD player terminals 23, 24, 28 and 29
- to front video monitor terminals 5, 6, 7 and 8 and rear video monitor (models with dual monitor
system) terminals 5 and 8.
On dual monitor DVD entertainment systems, video signals are also supplied through DVD player terminals 25 and 30
- to rear video monitor terminals 6 and 7.
Capacity Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Engine Coolant Capacity
With Reservoir .....................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 2-3/4 gal(10.5L)
Page 4192
Entertainment Systems: Service and Repair
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
DVD PLAYER
Removal 1. Remove center stack trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Center
Stack Trim Panel.
2. Disconnect electrical connectors. 3. Remove DVD player screws, using power tool. 4. Pull out
DVD player and disconnect DVD player connectors.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
VIDEO MONITOR (WITHOUT REAR ROOF CONSOLE ASSEMBLY)
Removal 1. Remove video monitor screws.
2. Disconnect connector. 3. Remove video monitor housing.
4. Remove the video monitor hinge screws. 5. Remove the video monitor from video monitor
housing.
Installation Installation is in reverse order of removal.
VIDEO MONITOR (WITH REAR ROOF CONSOLE ASSEMBLY)
Removal 1. Remove rear roof console assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the video monitor connector. 3. Remove the
video monitor screws.
Page 1853
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Page 3633
Ducts - Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Page 4390
6. Remove the TORX bolts (T30), remove the door lock assembly.
7. Remove the TORX bolt (T30), and remove the outside handle bracket.
8. While pulling outside handle, slide toward rear of vehicle to remove outside handle and door lock
assembly.
9. Disconnect the door lock actuator connector.
10. Separate outside handle cable from the outside handle bracket. Installation is in the reverse
order of removal.
SLIDING DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY
Page 4372
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR GLASS
Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the hole cover over
rear glass bolt. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Temporarily reconnect the power window
switch to the door harness. 5. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass
until the door glass bolts can be seen. 6. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 7. Remove the
inside seal. 8. Remove the door glass bolts.
9. While holding the door window, raise it at the rear end to pull the glass out of the sash toward
the outside of the door.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR
Removal
Page 4031
^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times.
14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt.
Page 4569
RIGHT SIDE AND REAR
CAUTION: Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing metal clips from garnishes.
- When removing or installing body side welts, do not allow butyl seal to come in contact with pillar
garnish.
Page 3675
Page 421
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3781
MTC
HEATER CORE
Component
Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Page 900
Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection Power Supply Routing Circuit
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Circuit Breaker (PTC)
The PTC thermistor generates heat in response to current flow. The temperature (and resistance)
of the thermistor element varies with current flow. Excessive current flow will cause the element's
temperature to rise. When the temperature reaches a specified level, the electrical resistance will
rise sharply to reduce the circuit current. This reduced current flow will cause the element to cool
lowering the resistance accordingly. Once resistance falls to a specified level normal circuit current
flow is allowed to resume.
Interior - Anti-Rattle Spring Falls Off 2nd Row Seats
Seat Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Anti-Rattle Spring Falls Off 2nd Row Seats
Classification: BT09-003
Reference: NTB09-034
Date: April 24, 2009
ANTI-RATTLE SPRING HAS FALLEN OFF THE LEFT AND / OR RIGHT 2ND ROW SEAT
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The inner and/or outer anti-rattle spring has fallen off from the left and/or right 2nd row seat.
AND
The seat continues to latch and otherwise operate normally.
ACTION
Install a new anti-rattle spring.
NOTE:
Do not replace the seat assembly for this incident if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
WARNING:
Make sure to wear safety glasses when performing this Service Procedure.
Page 388
Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair
HAZARD SWITCH
Removal and Installation
Removal 1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Cluster Lid C.
2. Press tabs and remove hazard switch (1).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 400
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Classification: WT04-004C
Reference: NTB04-054C
Date: April 6, 2011
WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION
This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION.
No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the
following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
General Information and Recommendations
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions
supplied with your alignment equipment.
^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions.
^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment.
General Information and Recommendations
1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed.
^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles.
^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure
proper "centering" of the steering wheel.
2. Use the right alignment machine.
^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing
alignment checks.
^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment
equipment.
^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be
checked to ensure that it is level.
3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated.
^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings.
^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should
be checked immediately.
^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended
service/calibration schedule.
NOTE:
In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached
to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
Page 2672
- If joint sub-assembly cannot be removed after five or more unsuccessful attempts, replace the
entire drive shaft assembly.
4. Remove boot from shaft. 5. Remove circlip from shaft. 6. While rotating ball cage, clean the old
grease off of the joint sub-assembly.
Support Bearing
1. Remove dust shield from slide joint assembly using a suitable tool.
2. Remove snap ring using a suitable tool.
3. Press support bearing assembly off slide joint assembly using a suitable tool.
4. Separate support bearing from bracket using a suitable tool.
Damper Remove damper bands, then remove damper from shaft.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Page 1580
Page 5125
NG - Repair or replace harness.
Door Mirror Defogger Power Supply Circuit Inspection
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Door Mirror Defogger Power Supply Circuit Inspection
1.CHECK FUSE Check if the following fuse in fuse block (J/B) is blown.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before
installing new fuse. Refer to See: Power and Ground Distribution/Description and Operation.
2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1
1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) connector and ground.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR
DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 2
Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) connector and ground.
Page 3716
3. Install the pulley assembly using Tool and a wrench, and then install the snap ring using snap
ring pliers.
Tool number : - (J-38873-A)
4. Install the clutch disc (1) on the drive shaft, together with the original shim(s) (2) using a suitable
tool (A). Press the clutch disc down using Tool.
Tool number : - (J-38873-A)
5. Install the center bolt using suitable tool (A).
Center bolt : 12 N.m (1.2 kg-m, 9 ft-lb)
- After tightening the center bolt to specification, check that the pulley rotates smoothly.
6. Install the compressor. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Refrigerant
Lines.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Page 1893
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 3299
Power Distribution Module: Diagrams
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 3305
Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction
- When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned
OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction.
- When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch
signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay.
NOTE: When the ignition switch is turned ON, the tail lamps are OFF.
Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative
Front Door Window Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature
Inoperative
Classification: EL09-033A
Reference: NTB09-095A
Date: May 5, 2010
POWER WINDOW "AUTO UP" INITIALIZATION
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been revised. No other changes have
been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 350Z Coupe & Roadster (Z33) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60)
2007-2008 Maxima (A34) 2007 Murano (Z50) 2007-2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007-2009 Quest (V42)
2007-2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
A power window "Auto Up" will not work.
ACTION
Reset the limit switch.
1. Raise the door glass to the top position.
2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position.
3. Release the reset switch.
4. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then raises the door glass to the
top position.
NOTES:
> If the window is still not operating correctly, refer to ASIST and the Service Manual for further
diagnosis and repair information.
> The above initialization procedure must be performed if any of the following occur:
> Battery cable is disconnected.
> Power window switch connector is disconnected.
> Power window regulator is replaced.
> Power window motor is replaced.
> Window glass is removed.
Page 752
Figure 2.
NOTE
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (See Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION
Tighten the bolt no more then necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Page 4759
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 1392
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation (Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoe)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the timing chains (secondary). 2. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioner shoe by
evenly prying at base of shoe with suitable tool as shown.
INSTALLATION
1. Install new secondary timing chain tensioner shoe using Tool (A) as shown.
- Tighten the bolt until the secondary timing chain tensioner shoe is fully seated on the secondary
timing chain tensioner. CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolt.
Tool number : (J-50246)
2. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2003
VEHICLE EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
NOTE: Check CAN system type from the vehicle shape and equipment.
Combination Meter Branch Line Circuit
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Combination Meter Branch Line Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the
negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the combination meter for damage,
bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >>
Repair the terminal and connector.
2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of combination meter. 2.
Check the resistance between the combination meter harness connector terminals.
Page 3919
Page 1391
b. Install new seal rings on the IVT control valve covers. c. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to the IVT
control valve covers.
- Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent.
- Being careful not to move the seal ring from the installation groove, align the dowel pins on the
chain case with the holes to install the IVT
control valve covers.
- Tighten the intake valve timing control valve cover bolts in the order as shown.
IVT control valve cover bolts: 11.3 N-m (1.2 kg-m, 100 in-lb)
Removal and Installation (Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the timing chains (primary) and (secondary). 2. Remove the rocker covers. 3. Remove
the camshaft brackets (No. 1). 4. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioners.
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Traction Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Page 2549
7. Install snap ring using suitable tool.
8. Install O-rings in 2nd coast brake piston.
CAUTION: Do not reuse O-rings.
- Apply ATF to O-rings.
9. Coat the inner surfaces of oil pump assembly with ATF.
10. Press 2nd coast brake piston into oil pump assembly.
11. Install return spring.
12. Place Tool on return spring, and compress return spring with a press.
Tool number : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87)
13. Install snap ring using suitable tool.
Removal and Installation
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: Read "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See:
Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions. 1. Remove the fuel
tank. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and
Repair.
Page 3432
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
Disassembly and Assembly
INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY If the following conditions are found, replace as
necessary. Oil leakage from oil pump
- Deformed or damaged pulley
- Poor performance
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION: Do not disassemble pump body. Replace as an assembly.
NOTE: Mount the oil pump in a soft jawed vise as necessary. 1. Remove nut, washer and pulley
from drive shaft. 2. Remove the following from the power steering oil pump: Union bolt, washers, and joint.
- Bolts and bracket.
- Bolts and suction pipe.
- Suction pipe O-ring.
ASSEMBLY
NOTE: Mount oil pump in soft jawed vise as required. 1. Check if drive shaft assembly turns
smoothly. 2. Install bracket to power steering oil pump, and tighten the two bracket bolts to
specification. 3. Install pulley to drive shaft assembly, then tighten lock nut to specification. 4. Install
washers and joint to power steering oil pump, then tighten union bolt to specification.
NOTE: Do not reuse washers. 5. Apply a coat of NISSAN PSF or equivalent to O-ring and install
O-ring to suction pipe. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance. 6. Install suction pipe to
power steering oil pump and tighten bolts to the specification.
Page 3330
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Page 4106
^ Refer to Table A shown above for Speaker Adaptation applicability.
b. Use Table A to determine the correct Speaker Adaptation instructions to be used.
c. Have the customer perform Speaker Adaptation.
NOTE:
This will enhance the recognition rate of commands spoken by the customer.
Phone "Re-Pairing"
1. An incident or incidents may occur after a phone has been updated, or settings have been
changed.
2. A given incident or incidents may be resolved by pairing a phone a second time.
3. For "re-pairing" procedure, the steps below can be followed:
a. Turn off the phone, and then remove its battery.
b. Delete the phone from the current paired phone list on the vehicle Bluetooth(R) phone system.
c. Reinstall the phone battery, and then turn on the phone.
d. Follow the phone pairing instructions found in the device page of the
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth webpage.
e. Test the phone.
f. If the incident(s) still occurs, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual
(ESM) for further diagnosis.
Customer Information
Inform the customer of the website www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/ for future reference.
Locations
Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SRS Component Parts Location
Page 3945
8. Remove the screws, release the tab, and remove the spiral cable.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble spiral cable.
- Do not apply lubricant to the spiral cable.
9. Disconnect the spiral cable connectors.
CAUTION: With the steering linkage disconnected, the spiral cable may snap by turning the
steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned
counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from the neutral position.
10. Remove the steering angle sensor from the spiral cable, if equipped. Refer to See: Sensors
and Switches/Sensors and Switches - Steering and
Suspension/Sensors and Switches - Steering/Steering Angle Sensor/Service and Repair.
11. Inspect the steering wheel near the puller holes for damage. If damaged, replace the steering
wheel.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Align spiral cable correctly when installing steering wheel. Make sure that the spiral cable is in the
neutral position. The neutral position is detected by turning left 2.5 revolutions from the right end
position and ending with the knob at the top.
Page 5055
Tail Light Bulb: Service and Repair Parking, License Plate And Tail Lamps
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
Bulb Replacement
FRONT PARKING LAMP Refer to See: Headlamp/Headlamp Bulb/Service and Repair.
LICENSE PLATE LAMP
Removal 1. Remove back door lower finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove license plate lamp socket. 3. Remove license
plate lamp.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TAIL LAMP Refer to See: .
Page 3520
- Check that the projecting part inside the upper seat and the flange part of bracket are attached as
shown.
- Check that the projection part outside the upper seat directs to vehicle front.
- Position the hollow of the rubber seat with the groove part of rear lower link to install.
- Install coil spring with the side of two paint markers directing to lower side.
- After installing the rear lower link and coil spring, check the wheel alignment and adjust if
necessary. Refer to See: Alignment/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension.
Page 167
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 4870
Always replace the seal after every disassembly.
3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification.
NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel.
Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb)
4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side
of tire as normal.
Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim.
6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and
Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And
Wheel.
7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. Refer to See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and
Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel.
NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to
See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter Wake Up Operation. 8.
Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor, if equipped. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Page 690
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
CYLINDER HEAD
On-Vehicle Service
CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating
temperature. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. Release fuel pressure and leave the fuel pump
electrically disconnected. Refer to See: Fuel Pressure/Testing and Inspection. 4. Remove all six
spark plugs. Refer to See: Spark Plug/Service and Repair.
5. Attach a compression tester to No. 1 cylinder. 6. Depress accelerator pedal fully to keep the
electric throttle control actuator butterfly-valve wide open to maximize air intake flow. 7. Crank the
engine and record the highest gauge indication. 8. Repeat the measurement on each cylinder
(steps 5 - 7).
NOTE: Always use a fully-charged battery to obtain specified engine speed.
9. If compression in one or more cylinders is low:
a. Pour a small amount of engine oil into cylinders through the spark plug holes. b. Retest
compression (steps 5 - 8).
- If adding oil helps raise compression pressure, then the piston rings may be worn or damaged. If
so, replace piston rings after checking piston.
- If the pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or is seating improperly. Inspect and repair the
valve and/or valve seat. Refer to See: . If the valve and/or valve seat is damaged excessively,
replace as necessary.
- If compression stays low in two or more cylinders that are next to each other:
- The cylinder head gasket may be leaking. - Both cylinders may have valve component damage.
Inspect and repair as necessary.
10. After inspection is complete, install removed components. 11. Start engine and confirm that
engine runs smoothly. 12. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to See:
Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis Introduction.
System Description
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation System Description
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
System Description
- IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse
block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM
E/R control circuits.
- IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication
control, oil pressure switch signal reception, etc.
- It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines.
CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R 1. Lamp control Using CAN communication lines, it
receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps: Headlamps (High, Low)
- Parking lamps
- Tail and license plate lamps
- Cornering lamps
- Front fog lamps
2. Wiper control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the
front wipers. 3. Rear window defogger relay control Using CAN communication lines, it receives
signals from the BCM and controls the rear window defogger relay. 4. A/C compressor control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C
compressor (magnet clutch). 5. Starter control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals
from the BCM and controls the starter relay. 6. Cooling fan control Using CAN communication
lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays. 7. Horn control Using
CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay.
CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL With CAN communication, by connecting each control
unit using two communication lines (CAN L-line, CAN H-line), it is possible to transmit a maximum
amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and
reads necessary information only. 1. Fail-safe control When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe
control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control.
- Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as follows:
IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based
on each operating condition. 1. CAN communication status
Removal and Installation
Fuel Filter: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: Read "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See:
Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions. 1. Remove the fuel
tank. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and
Repair.
Page 1721
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
Adjustable and Non-adjustable Accelerator Pedal
CAUTION: Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position.
This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only).
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only).
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the heater and cooling unit
assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and
Repair/Removal
And Installation.
Page 3229
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Page 3965
Side Air Bag: Service and Repair
SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect SRS component connectors. If a direct
connect harness connector is damaged, the harness must be replaced.
- Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals and wait
at least three minutes.
- When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
1. Remove headlining. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service
and Repair. 2. Disconnect front and rear side curtain air bag module connectors. For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Description and
Operation/Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors,
3. Remove the bolts in order starting at the front or rear, and remove the front and rear side curtain
air bag modules.
CAUTION: When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
- Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors.
- Do not disassemble air bag module.
- Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F).
- Replace side curtain air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
- Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Description and
Operation/Direct-connect SRS Component
Page 4432
Fuel Door: Electrical Diagrams
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
Wiring Diagram - F/LID BL-F/LID-01
Page 1248
Page EM-6
Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 4041
^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times.
14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt.
Page 3045
Page 2375
Ignition Relay: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 3924
ELR Function Stationary Check Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor
should lock and prevent the belt from extending further.
ALR Function Stationary Check 1. Pull out entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is
heard. 2. Retract the belt partially. A clicking noise should be heard as the belt retracts indicating
that the retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) mode.
3. Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The belt must lock and not extend any
further. If necessary replace the retractor assembly. 4. Allow the entire length of the belt to retract
to cancel the automatic locking mode.
ELR Function Moving Check
WARNING: Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions
(for example, a large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. DO NOT perform
the following test on wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an
accident and serious personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace
themselves in the event the retractor does not lock. 1. Fasten driver's seat belt. Buckle a
passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested. 2. Proceed to the designated safe area. 3.
Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden
stop.
The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does
not lock. Apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop.
During stop, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does
not lock, perform the retractor off-vehicle check.
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK 1. Remove the seat belt retractor assembly. 2.
Slowly pull out belt while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position without
twisting the retractor assembly as shown in the
illustration.
If retractor does not operate within specifications, replace the retractor assembly.
Page 1695
Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater
Page 2881
Brake Pedal Assy: Testing and Inspection
BRAKE PEDAL
Inspection and Adjustment
INSPECTION 1. If equipped with adjustable pedals, move the brake pedal to the forward most
position (closest to the floor).
2. Inspect the brake pedal height, play, and switch clearance from the dash lower panel as shown.
CAUTION: When equipped with adjustable pedals, the brake pedal must be set in the forward most
position (closest to the floor) for checking the brake pedal specifications.
Tool number : - (J-46532)
3. Adjust the brake pedal as necessary.
ADJUSTMENT 1. Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch by turning 45°
counterclockwise.
2. Loosen the lock nut on the input rod.
Page 1405
- Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
- Keep fuel hose connections clean.
3. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown
in figure. Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter.
- When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality.
4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 5. Start engine and
check for fuel leakage. 6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 8. Check the following. Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
- Fuel filter for clogging
- Fuel pump
- Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or
replace.
9. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel
pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE
RELEASE".
Page 1969
indicate an error between DLC and TCM (line 1-a in the figure below).
NOTE: Diag on CAN units are not indicated on the "ECU list" when the CAN line between Diag on CAN
unit and the data link connector is open.
- For a description of Diag on CAN, refer to See: Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/System Description/Diag On CAN.
2. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR: Check each item on "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR". Draw a line
on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the error
circuit. a. Reception item of "ECM": On "TCM", "UNKWN" is indicated. This means ECM cannot
receive the signal from TCM. Draw a line to indicate
an error between ECM and TCM (line 2-a in the figure below).
NOTE: If "UNKWN" is indicated on "TRANSMIT DIAG", then the control unit cannot transmit CAN
communication signal to each unit. Draw a line between the control unit and the splice.
b. Reception item of "AFS": On "TCM", "UNKWN" is indicated. This means AFS cannot receive the
signal from TCM. Draw a line to indicate
an error between AFS and TCM (line 2-b in the figure below).
c. Reception item of "AV": "UNKWN" is not indicated. This indicates normal communication
between AV and its receiving units. Do not draw
any line.
Locations
Door Switch: Locations
WARNING CHIME
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 5074
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Page 2057
Page 3485
Control Arm: Service and Repair Suspension Arm
SUSPENSION ARM
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear suspension member assembly using power tool. Refer to See:
Subframe/Rear Subframe/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the connecting rod upper joint from
the suspension arm using power tool. 3. Remove the suspension arm nuts and bolts on the
suspension member side using power tool. 4. Remove the suspension arm cotter pin and lock nut
on the wheel hub and spindle assembly side using power tool. 5. Disconnect the suspension arm
from the wheel hub and spindle assembly using Tool.
Tool number : HT72520000 (J-25730-A)
CAUTION: Do not damage ball joint with Tool.
While using Tool, temporarily tighten the lock nut so as not to damage the ball joint stud threads.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Suspension. After installing the suspension arm, check the wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to
See: Alignment/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension.
Page 509
Knock Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 168
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 3937
NOTE: The wiring harness modification is to be performed only if the vehicle is equipped with the
original passenger air bag which uses direct-connect harness connectors. If the passenger air bag
is to be replaced in a vehicle that has already had the service replacement passenger air bag
installed, the wiring harness modification is not required. 1. Locate the yellow and orange
direct-connect passenger air bag module harness connectors. 2. Use wire cutters to cut back both
previously used direct-connect passenger air bag module harness connectors from the vehicle
wiring harness
approximately 50 mm (1.9 in) from the connectors.
3. Remove approximately 150 mm (5.9 in) of the vehicle harness covering from the cut end.
4. Slide a piece of dual-wall heat shrink tubing (provided in the passenger air bag service kit) onto
each wire of the previously used vehicle wiring
harness.
5. Fold each wire back and insert into the end of the heat shrink tubing so that the end of the wire is
approximately centered in the heat shrink tubing. 6. Use a heat gun to shrink the heat shrink tubing
and seal the wire. 7. Use electrical tape to secure the modified circuits to the outside of the wiring
harness.
8. Locate the front passenger air bag module service replacement harness connector (1) that is
taped back to the main harness.
Unwrap the tape to access the yellow service replacement connector and remove the dust cover
from the connector.
Page 161
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 4789
Page 2773
Shift Indicator: Electrical Diagrams
A/T INDICATOR
Wiring Diagram - AT/IND DI-AT/IND-01
Page 3362
^ Make sure the rear slide plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place.
NOTE:
Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep.
The Alignment Process
The Alignment Process
IMPORTANT:
Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the
alignment.
1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack.
^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in
Figure 4.
^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5).
^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then
re-enter the rack.
^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front
wheels straight.
Page 332
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations MTC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Page 1444
Valve Clearance: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT
Valve Clearance
CHECKING Perform inspection as follows after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or
valve related parts, or if there is unusual engine conditions regarding valve clearance.
NOTE: Check valve clearance while engine is cold and not running. 1. Remove the intake manifold
collectors. Refer to See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Collector. 2. Remove
the ignition coils. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and
Repair/Removal And Installation LH
(LH) and See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal
And Installation RH (RH).
3. Remove the rocker covers. See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair.
4. Set No.1 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. Align pointer (A) with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley.
- Check that the valve lifters on No.1 cylinder are loose and valve lifters on No.4 are tight. If not,
turn the crankshaft one full revolution (360°) and align as shown.
- RH cylinder head (1)
- White Arrow Indicates Engine front
5. Check only the valves as shown.
Locations
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations
SUNROOF
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 3762
6. Remove the two in-cabin microfilters. 7. Remove the evaporator.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the low-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe with new ones.
Apply compressor oil to the O-rings before installing them.
- When installing the in-cabin microfilters, face the microfilters according to the air flow direction
arrow printed on the side of the filters.
Removal And Installation For Rear Evaporator
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Rear Evaporator
Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Locations
Hazard Warning Switch: Locations
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 1123
6. Remove the oil filter. Refer to See: Oil Filter/Service and Repair. 7. Remove the oil cooler from
the upper oil pan.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Oil Cooler Check the oil cooler for cracks. Check the oil cooler for clogging by blowing through the
coolant inlet. If necessary, replace the oil cooler.
Relief Valve Inspect the relief valve for movement, cracks, and breaks by pushing the ball. If
replacement is necessary, remove the relief valve by prying it out with a suitable tool. Install a new
relief valve by tapping it into place with a suitable tool.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: When installing the oil cooler, align the stopper slot with the stopper on the upper oil
pan.
- Install the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and
Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel for torque specification.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check level and add engine oil and engine coolant. Refer
to See: Engine Oil/Service and Repair and See: Cooling System/Service and
Repair/Inspection.
2. Start the engine and check that there are no leaks of engine oil or engine coolant. 3. Stop engine
and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Check engine oil level and engine coolant level.
Page 5107
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 3528
ASSEMBLY
1. When installing coil spring on strut, it must be positioned as shown.
2. Install upper spring seat with alignment mark facing the outer side of vehicle, in line with
strut-to-knuckle attachment points.
Page 1380
1. Timing chain tensioner (secondary)(LH) 2. Internal chain guide 3. Timing chain tensioner
(secondary)(RH) 4. Camshaft sprocket RH (EXH) 5. Timing chain (secondary) 6. Timing chain
(primary) 7. Camshaft sprocket RH (INT) 8. Camshaft sprocket LH (INT) 9. Timing chain
(secondary) 10. Camshaft sprocket LH (EXH) 11. Slack guide 12. Crankshaft sprocket 13. Tension
guide
CAUTION: - After removing timing chains, do not turn the crankshaft and camshaft separately, or
the valves will strike the pistons. - When installing camshafts, chain tensioners, oil seals, or other
sliding parts, lubricate contacting surfaces with new engine oil. - Apply new engine oil to bolt
threads and seat surfaces when installing camshaft sprockets, camshaft brackets, and crankshaft
pulley. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the rocker covers or intake manifold collector to
remove or install the timing chain(s).
Removal
1. Set No. 1 cylinder to TDC.
- Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved line without color) with timing
indicator.
2. Remove front timing chain case. 3. Check timing chain markings to confirm No. 1 cylinder is at
TDC of its compression stroke.
- If not, remove Ring Gear Stopper Tool and turn crankshaft clockwise 360° (one revolution). Re-install Ring Gear Stopper Tool.
Page 3676
Page 2817
- Always tighten the brake tubes to the specified torque when installing.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair
BACK DOOR LOCK
Back Door Latch
REMOVAL 1. Remove the back door lower finisher. Refer to See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim
Panel/Service and Repair 2. Remove the weather seal. 3. On manual doors, disconnect the back
door latch release cable.
Page 2674
8. Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by * marks) as shown.
CAUTION: If there is grease on boot mounting surfaces (indicated by * marks) of shaft and
housing, boot may come off. Remove all grease from surfaces.
9. Make sure boot installation length "L" is the length indicated below. Insert a flat-bladed
screwdriver or similar tool into the large end of boot.
Bleed air from boot to prevent boot deformation.
Boot installation length "L" : 189.30 mm (7.45 in)
CAUTION: Boot may break if boot installation length is less than standard value.
- Be careful that screwdriver tip does not contact inside surface of boot.
10. Secure big and small ends of boot with new boot bands as shown.
CAUTION: Discard old boot bands; replace with new ones.
11. Install new dust shield to slide joint housing. 12. After installing housing and shaft, rotate boot to
check whether or not the actual position is correct. If boot position is not correct, remove old boot
bands then reposition the boot and secure with new boot bands.
Wheel Side
1. Insert the amount of grease (Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent) into joint sub-assembly
serration hole until grease begins to ooze from ball
groove and serration hole. After inserting grease, use a shop cloth to wipe off old grease that has
oozed out.
System Description
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation System Description
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
System Description
- IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse
block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM
E/R control circuits.
- IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication
control, oil pressure switch signal reception, etc.
- It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines.
CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R 1. Lamp control Using CAN communication lines, it
receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps: Headlamps (High, Low)
- Parking lamps
- Tail and license plate lamps
- Cornering lamps
- Front fog lamps
2. Wiper control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the
front wipers. 3. Rear window defogger relay control Using CAN communication lines, it receives
signals from the BCM and controls the rear window defogger relay. 4. A/C compressor control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C
compressor (magnet clutch). 5. Starter control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals
from the BCM and controls the starter relay. 6. Cooling fan control Using CAN communication
lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays. 7. Horn control Using
CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay.
CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL With CAN communication, by connecting each control
unit using two communication lines (CAN L-line, CAN H-line), it is possible to transmit a maximum
amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and
reads necessary information only. 1. Fail-safe control When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe
control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control.
- Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as follows:
IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based
on each operating condition. 1. CAN communication status
Component
Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair Component
HEATER and COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
Component
Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Removal
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Removal
LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Removal
1. Remove steering column cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Steering Column Cover.
2. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and disconnect from
the base.
Page 1786
Fuel Filter: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly
Fuel Level Sender Unit
Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors (1) and the wire connector (4). 2. Remove the
fuel sensor (2) from the pump assembly. 3. Depress the tabs (3) and remove the floater arm
assembly (5).
Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly.
Page 589
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 1151
25. If re-installing the original oil pan, remove the old sealant from the mating surfaces using a
scraper.
- Also remove the old sealant from mating surface of the cylinder block.
- Remove the old sealant from the bolt holes and threads.
CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off the old sealant.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Clean oil strainer of any foreign material.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Wait at least 30 minutes after completing installation before refilling the engine with oil.
1. Install oil strainer.
2. Apply Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent, to the front cover gasket and the rear oil seal
retainer gasket as shown. Refer to See:
Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants.
3. Install a new front cover gasket and rear oil seal retainer gasket.
Page 3353
Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process.
6. Begin the alignment procedure.
^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment.
^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications.
If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips:
^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body.
IMPORTANT:
After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position.
When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips:
Page 4159
Rear Vision Camera: Locations Rear View Monitor
REAR VIEW MONITOR
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 3130
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
Page 3669
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Page 5078
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Page 1570
Body Control Module: Locations
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 2222
EGR Temperature Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting
Front Door Window Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit
Switch Resetting
EL08-031A
Reference: NTB09-027A
Date: July 15, 2010
FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET
This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other
changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If any of the following work has been done:
^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly
^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator
^ installation of a new glass window
^ installation of a new glass run
....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following:
^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B
NOTE:
The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror.
If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in
this bulletin.
NOTE:
Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will
not reset the Limit Switch.
SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH
1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in
the glass raising (up) direction.
Page 2526
Control Module: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 1971
f. Reception item of "M&A;": On "TCM", "UNKWN" is indicated. This means M&A; cannot receive
the signal from TCM. Draw a line to indicate an error between M&A; and TCM (line 2-f in the figure
below).
g. Reception item of "ADP": On "TCM", "UNKWN" is indicated. This means ADP cannot receive the
signal from TCM. Draw a line to indicate
an error between ADP and TCM (line 2-g in the figure below).
h. Reception item of "ABS": "UNKWN" is not indicated. This indicates normal communication
between ABS and its receiving units. Do not
draw any line.
Page 1279
- Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246.
b. Before installing timing chains (secondary) and camshaft sprockets, confirm mating marks are
visible. If necessary, use paint or equivalent to
re-mark the camshaft sprockets at each mating mark.
c. Install timing chains (secondary) (8) and camshaft sprockets [INT (1) and EXH (9)].
- Left bank mating marks (6) - Align the timing chain mating marks (secondary) (2) (yellow color
link) with the ones on camshaft sprockets (INT and EXH)(4), (5), (7) and
(10)(punched), and install them.
NOTE:
- Mating marks for camshaft sprocket (INT) are on the back side of camshaft sprocket (secondary).
- There are two types of mating marks, circle (7), (10) and oval (4), (5) types. They should be used
for the right and left banks, respectively.
Right bank : Use circle type (7) and (10). Left bank : Use oval type (4) and (5).
- Align dowel pin (3) and pin hole on camshafts with the groove (11) and dowel pin on sprockets,
and install them. - On the intake side, align pin hole on the small diameter side of the camshaft
front end with dowel pin (3) on the back side of camshaft
sprocket, and install them.
- On the exhaust side, align dowel pin on camshaft front end with pin groove (11) on camshaft
sprocket, and install them. - In case that positions of each mating mark and each dowel pin do not
fit on mating parts, make fine adjustment to the position by slightly
turning camshaft(s).
- Bolts for camshaft sprockets must be tightened in the next step. Tightening them by hand is
enough to prevent the dislocation of dowel pins.
d. Confirm the mating marks are aligned, then finger tighten camshaft sprocket bolts. Final
tightening will be done with all timing chains installed. e. Remove stopper pins out from timing
chain tensioners (secondary).
3. Install timing chain (primary) as follows:
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
........................................................... 7 7/8 qt (7.4L)
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD)
Cruise Control: Description and Operation Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD)
System Description
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
System Description
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
BASIC ASCD SYSTEM Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions. Automatic
Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed
without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between
approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH). ECM controls throttle angle of electric
throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed. Operation status of ASCD is indicated by
CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any malfunction occurs in ASCD
system, it automatically deactivates control.
NOTE: Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.
SET OPERATION Press MAIN switch. (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144
km/h (89 MPH), press SET/COAST switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
ACCELERATOR OPERATION If the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is depressed during cruise
control driving, increase the vehicle speed until the switch is released or vehicle speed reaches
maximum speed controlled by the system. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
CANCEL OPERATION When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled. CANCEL switch is depressed
- More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are depressed at the same time (Set speed will be
cleared)
- Brake pedal is depressed
- Shift lever is changed to N, P, R position
- Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed
- VDC/TCS system is operated
When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation
and inform the driver by blinking indicator lamp. Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp
may blink slowly.
When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE
lamp will stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by depressing SET/COAST
switch or RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. Malfunction for some self-diagnosis regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly. If MAIN
switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and
vehicle speed memory will be erased.
COAST OPERATION
Page 4769
OK or NG OK>> GO TO 5. NG>> GO TO 4. 4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the
following. Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
- 10 A fuse
- Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5.CHECK
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch
OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal
108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK>> GO TO 6. NG>>
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6.CHECK ASCD
BRAKE SWITCH Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/ASCD Brake Switch/Component
Inspection. OK or NG OK>> GO TO 11. NG>> Replace ASCD brake switch. 7.CHECK STOP
LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. 3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch
terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT -II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK>> GO TO 9. NG>> GO TO 8. 8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the
following. Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
- 10 A fuse
- Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery
Page 1582
Page 2053
Page 1798
Spark Plug: Specifications Torque
Spark Plug
Page 1955
control unit which carries out CAN communication).
- Error may be detected if reprogramming is not completed normally.
NOTE: CAN communication system is normal if "U1000" or "U1001" is indicated on SELF-DIAG
RESULTS of CONSULT-III under the above conditions. Erase the memory of the self-diagnosis of
each unit.
Self-Diagnosis
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Self-Diagnosis
Symptom When Error Occurs In CAN Communication System
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Symptom When Error Occurs in CAN Communication System
In CAN communication system, multiple units mutually transmit and receive signals. Each unit
cannot transmit and receive signals if any error occurs on CAN communication line. Under this
condition, multiple control units related to the root cause malfunction or go into fail-safe mode.
ERROR EXAMPLE
NOTE: Each vehicle differs in symptom of each unit under fail-safe mode and CAN communication line
wiring.
- Refer to See: CAN/Abbreviation List for the unit abbreviation.
Example: TCM branch line open circuit
Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model)
Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model)
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM
Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model)
COMPONENT PARTS AND HARNESS CONNECTOR LOCATION
Page 5060
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 23.6 Nm, 17 ft lb
Page 1913
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 13
Page 786
CAUTION: The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not
confuse O-rings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will
leak at or around the connection.
Removal And Installation For Low-Pressure Flexible Hose
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose
REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine under cover. 2. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating
and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air. 3. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to See: Component.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Component.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
ATC
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose
REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine under cover.
Page 4905
Courtesy Lamp: Description and Operation
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Schematic
Page 4770
- Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
9.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1.
Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and
stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK>> GO TO 10. NG>>
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 10.CHECK
STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P
Code Charts/P1805. OK or NG OK>> GO TO 11. NG>> Replace stop lamp switch. 11.CHECK
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis For
Intermittent Incident/Description See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis For
Intermittent Incident/Diagnosis Procedure. - INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Inspection
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness
connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following
conditions.
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake
Pedal Assy/Testing and Inspection, and perform step 3 again.
STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness
connector.
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 4054
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Air Bag (Satellite) Sensor
SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at
least three minutes.
1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. 2.
Remove seat belt pre-tensioner. Refer to See: Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and
Repair/Front Seat Belt.
3. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor (1) nuts. 4. Disconnect the side air bag (satellite) sensor
harness connector (2).
CAUTION: Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts.
- Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it
shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one.
- Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor.
- Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
Page 2579
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Calculated Load Value
Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Calculated Load Value
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Calculated Load Value
Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Locations
Power Sliding Door Module: Locations
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 2490
Page 4855
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 3232
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 3837
Refrigerant: Service Precautions Precaution For Leak Detection Dye
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Leak Detection Dye
- The A/C system contains a fluorescent leak detection dye used for locating refrigerant leaks. An
ultraviolet (UV) lamp is required to illuminate the dye when inspecting for leaks.
- Always wear fluorescence enhancing UV safety glasses to protect your eyes and enhance the
visibility of the fluorescent dye.
- The fluorescent dye leak detector is not a replacement for an electronic refrigerant leak detector.
The fluorescent dye leak detector should be used in conjunction with an electronic refrigerant leak
detector (J-41995).
- For your safety and the customer's satisfaction, read and follow all manufacturer's operating
instructions and precautions prior to performing work.
- A compressor shaft seal should not be repaired because of dye seepage. The compressor shaft
seal should only be repaired after confirming the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector
(J-41995).
- Always remove any dye from the leak area after repairs are complete to avoid a misdiagnosis
during a future service.
- Do not allow dye to come into contact with painted body panels or interior components. If dye is
spilled, clean immediately with the approved dye cleaner. Fluorescent dye left on a surface for an
extended period of time cannot be removed.
- Do not spray the fluorescent dye cleaning agent on hot surfaces (engine exhaust manifold, etc.).
- Do not use more than one refrigerant dye bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) per A/C system.
- Leak detection dyes for HFC-134a (R134a) and CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems are different. Do not
use HFC-134a (R134a) leak detection dye in CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems or CFC-12 (R-12) leak
detection dye in HFC-134a (R134a) A/C systems or A/C system damage may result.
- The fluorescent properties of the dye will remain for over three (3) years unless a compressor
failure occurs.
Page 3935
Air Bag: Service and Repair Front Passenger Air Bag Module
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
Removal and Installation
The passenger air bag module originally installed in the vehicle uses direct-connect style harness
connectors. Service replacement passenger air bag modules use tab-locking style harness
connectors. If the passenger air bag module is replaced or if the direct-connect harness connectors
are damaged, the vehicle wiring harness must be modified to allow connection of the service
replacement passenger air bag module. Follow the WIRING HARNESS MODIFICATION procedure
for necessary wiring harness alterations.
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect front passenger air bag module
connectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the front passenger air bag must be
replaced and the wiring harness modified.
- Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at
least three minutes.
- Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module.
1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. 2.
Remove the glove box. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove
Compartment/Service and Repair.
3. Remove 2 nuts (through glove box opening) retaining front passenger air bag module to
instrument panel crossmember. 4. Disconnect the front passenger air bag module electrical
connectors. For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Description and
Operation/Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors.
5. Remove the instrument panel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument
Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel.
6. Remove front passenger air bag module nuts and remove from the instrument panel assembly.
CAUTION:
- When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
Always place front passenger air bag module with caution label side facing upward.
- Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors.
- Do not disassemble air bag module.
- Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts.
- Do not expose the front passenger air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F).
Exploded View
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Exploded View
IGNITION COIL
Exploded View
Service and Repair
Control Assembly: Service and Repair
CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
FRONT AIR CONTROL
Removal 1. Remove the control knobs from the front air control. 2. Remove cluster lid C,
disconnect the front air control electrical connector. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Cluster Lid C.
3. Remove the screws securing the front air control (1) to cluster lid C (2). 4. Remove the front air
control.
Installation Installation is the reverse order of removal.
REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT)
Removal 1. Remove the control knobs from the rear air control (front). 2. Remove the front roof
console assembly from the headlining, located over the rear view mirror. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair.
3. Remove the screws securing the rear air control (front) (1) to the front roof console assembly (2).
4. Remove the rear air control (front).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR)
Removal 1. Remove the rear air control (rear) (1) from the headlining, located over the sliding door,
RH.
Page 769
3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see
Figure 3).
^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information.
4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring.
^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt
NOTE:
^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring.
^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly.
Page 1876
Page 3391
If the wheels have rotated more than 180° degrees (1/2 turn), try the above procedure again from
the beginning. Never push vehicle backward.
6. Measure distance "B" (front side).
Total toe-in : Refer to See: Specifications/Rear Suspension/Wheel Alignment.
7. Adjust toe-in by turning the adjusting bolts.
NOTE: Toe changes about 1.5 mm (0.059 in) [one side] with each graduation of the adjusting bolt.
8. Tighten the adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to See: Suspension/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Suspension.
Page 2268
Fuel Filter: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly
Fuel Level Sender Unit
Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors (1) and the wire connector (4). 2. Remove the
fuel sensor (2) from the pump assembly. 3. Depress the tabs (3) and remove the floater arm
assembly (5).
Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly.
Page 4011
- On RH side, disconnect the seat belt tension sensor.
5. Disconnect the seat belt pre-tensioner connector.
CAUTION: For installing/removing seat belt pre-tensioner connector, insert a thin screwdriver wrapped in tape
into the notch, lift the lock and remove the connector.
- Install the connector with the lock raised, and push the lock into the connector.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE
Removal 1. Remove the front seat. Refer to "Front Seat Belt".
2. Remove the screws and seat cushion inner finisher. 3. Remove the anchor bolt and buckle.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Component Locations
Knock Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Checking Brake Fluid Level
Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Checking Brake Fluid Level
BRAKE FLUID
Checking Brake Fluid Level
- Check fluid level in the sub tank. It should be between "MAX" and "MIN" lines on the sub tank.
- Visually check around the reservoir tank and sub tank for leaks.
- If fluid level is extremely low, check brake system for leaks.
- Release parking brake lever and see if brake warning lamp goes off. If not, check brake system
for leaks.
Page 1839
Page 4070
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Page 1374
a. Loosen the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown.
b. Insert the appropriate size tool into the notch (1) at the top of the front timing chain case as
shown. c. Pry off the case by moving the suitable tool (2) as shown. - Cut liquid gasket for removal
using Tool.
CAUTION: - Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool. - After removal, handle carefully so it does not
bend, or warp under a load.
30. Remove O-rings from rear timing chain case.
CAUTION: Use new O-rings for installation.
31. Remove the front oil seal from the front timing chain case using a suitable tool.
CAUTION: Do not damage the front cover.
32. Remove all old Silicone RTV Sealant from all the bolt holes and bolts.
CAUTION: Do not damage the threads or mating surfaces.
Page 1534
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion -
Use a reliable straightedge and feeler gauge to check the flatness of the exhaust manifold mating
surfaces.
Limit : 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Arrow Indicates : Engine front
- Install the RH bank (1) and LH bank (2) exhaust manifold nuts in the order as shown.
CAUTION: Before installing a heated oxygen sensor or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean the exhaust manifold
threads using Tool, and apply anti-seize lubricant.
- Do not over-tighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor or heated oxygen sensors. Doing so may cause
damage.
Page 1166
If removed, tighten the intake manifold collector (upper) bolts in the order as shown.
Intake manifold collector (upper) bolts
..................................................................................................................................... 19.6 N.m (2.0
kg-m, 14 ft-lb)
Install the intake manifold collector (lower) bolts in the order as shown.
Intake manifold collector (lower) bolts
..................................................................................................................................... 19.6 N.m (2.0
kg-m, 14 ft-lb)
Intake Manifold
Stud bolts : 10.8 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 96 in-lb)
- Install intake manifold nuts and bolts in the order in two steps as shown.
Page 3246
Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection Power Supply Routing Circuit
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Circuit Breaker (PTC)
The PTC thermistor generates heat in response to current flow. The temperature (and resistance)
of the thermistor element varies with current flow. Excessive current flow will cause the element's
temperature to rise. When the temperature reaches a specified level, the electrical resistance will
rise sharply to reduce the circuit current. This reduced current flow will cause the element to cool
lowering the resistance accordingly. Once resistance falls to a specified level normal circuit current
flow is allowed to resume.
Page 2088
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 1945
LAN-CAN-02
Page 3452
Steering Gear: Removal and Replacement
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: -
The rotation of the driver air bag spiral cable is limited. If the steering gear must be removed, set
the front wheels in the straight-ahead direction. Do not rotate the steering column while the steering
gear is removed.
- Remove the steering wheel and spiral cable before removing the steering lower joint to avoid
damaging the SRS spiral cable.
1. Remove the two front wheels and tires using power tool.
2. Remove cotter pins and nuts, then disconnect the outer tie-rods using Tool.
Tool number : HT72520000 (J-25730-A)
3. Disconnect the outer stabilizer bar ends from connecting rods using power tool. Refer to See:
Suspension/Stabilizer Bar/Service and Repair/Front
Suspension.
Page 4688
1. Move the 2nd row seat fully forward and lift the seat up. See Figure 1.
NOTE:
^ These photos are for the LH side. Repeat steps 1-4 for the RH side if needed.
2. Check to see if the inner and outer anti-rattle spring has fallen off the seat. See Figure 2.
^ Replace the springs with the ones listed in the Parts Information.
Page 2248
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
Adjustable and Non-adjustable Accelerator Pedal
CAUTION: Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position.
This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only).
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only).
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the heater and cooling unit
assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and
Repair/Removal
And Installation.
Page 3408
Always replace the seal after every disassembly.
3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification.
NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel.
Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb)
4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side
of tire as normal.
Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim.
6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service
and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel
position on vehicle. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire
And Wheel.
NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to
See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Transmitter Wake Up Operation. 8. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor, if
equipped. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Page 473
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 5021
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Page 3132
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 1153
7. Install the four upper oil pan to transaxle bolts. Refer to See: Service and Repair. 8. Apply a
continuous bead of sealant to the lower oil pan.
- Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants.
- Be sure the sealant is 4.5 - 5.5 mm (0.177 - 0.217 in) wide.
- Installation must be done within 5 minutes after applying sealant.
9. Install the lower oil pan. Tighten the lower oil pan bolts in order as shown.
CAUTION: Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling the engine with oil.
10. Install rear plate cover.
Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 4578
1. Remove sliding door finisher. Refer to See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door
Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove exterior door handle. 3. Disconnect sliding door lock
assembly electrical connectors. 4. Remove sliding door lock assembly. Remove screws from front and rear latches.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
SLIDING DOOR CABLE ASSEMBLY AND MOTOR
Page 2487
Page 2461
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Page 5080
Page 1230
Page EM-13
Component Locations
EGR Temperature Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Fuse: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
TCS/ABS
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair TCS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid.
Refer to See: Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator
harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). 5. Disconnect the brake tubes.
CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
6. Remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket bolts and remove the ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit) with the
bracket.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Hydraulic Circuit for torque specifications when
connecting the brake tubes.
- After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with
new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the brake hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brake
Bleeding/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: To install the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool).
Page 2205
5. If necessary, remove the EGR temperature sensor. 6. Disconnect the EGR volume control valve
electrical connector. 7. Remove the EGR tube [to intake manifold collector (lower) bolts at the
intake manifold collector (lower). 8. Remove the EGR tube (to intake manifold collector (lower)
bolts at the EGR volume control valve and remove the tube. 9. Loosen the EGR tube (to exhaust
manifold) to EGR volume control valve.
10. If necessary remove the EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) as follows:
a. Remove the cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl
Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. b. Disconnect the EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) to EGR
volume control valve fitting. c. Disconnect the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1). d. Remove the
RH heat shield. e. Remove the EGR tube (to exhaust manifold) to exhaust manifold fitting.
11. Disconnect the coolant lines at the EGR volume control valve. 12. Remove the EGR volume
control valve bolts and the valve.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Tighten the RH heat shield bolts to specification.
ATC
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations ATC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Service and Repair
Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair
CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
FRONT AIR CONTROL
Removal 1. Remove the control knobs from the front air control. 2. Remove cluster lid C,
disconnect the front air control electrical connector. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Cluster Lid C.
3. Remove the screws securing the front air control (1) to cluster lid C (2). 4. Remove the front air
control.
Installation Installation is the reverse order of removal.
REAR AIR CONTROL (FRONT)
Removal 1. Remove the control knobs from the rear air control (front). 2. Remove the front roof
console assembly from the headlining, located over the rear view mirror. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair.
3. Remove the screws securing the rear air control (front) (1) to the front roof console assembly (2).
4. Remove the rear air control (front).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR AIR CONTROL (REAR)
Removal
Page 1170
13. If necessary, remove the electric throttle control actuator bolts in the reverse order as shown
and remove the electric throttle control actuator.
CAUTION: Handle carefully to avoid any shock to the electric throttle control actuator.
- Do not disassemble.
14. If necessary, remove the intake manifold collector (upper) bolts in the reverse order as shown,
using power tool and remove the intake manifold
collector (upper).
CAUTION: Handle carefully to avoid any shock to the electric throttle control actuator, if installed.
15. If necessary, remove power valve bolts in the reverse order as shown and remove the power
valve. 16. If necessary remove the following components:
- Vacuum tank
- VIAS control solenoid valve
- EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Surface Distortion Using straightedge and feeler gauge, inspect the surface distortion of intake manifold collector
(lower).
Page 3559
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
CAUTION: Servicing PAX run flat tires and wheels requires special tire equipment and training. DO NOT
service PAX Run Flat tires and wheels with conventional tire servicing equipment or damage to the
tire and wheel will result.
- If a PAX run flat tire and wheel [or transmitter (pressure sensor)] requires service, and the proper
servicing equipment is not available, then replace the complete PAX tire and wheel assembly.
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter
retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
3. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire.
Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the
transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead.
4. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
5. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
6. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then
install seal on transmitter. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance.
NOTE:
Page 1906
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Page 293
Page 1864
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 3822
Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
HEATER and COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
FRONT HEATER AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
Removal 1. Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. 2. Drain the coolant from the engine cooling
system. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair.
3. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding /
Trim/Service and Repair. 4. Disconnect the front heater hoses from the front heater core. 5.
Disconnect the high/low pressure pipe from the front expansion valve. 6. Move the two front seats
to the rearmost position on the seat track. 7. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel.
8. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness at the RH and LH in-line connector brackets, and
the fuse block (J/B) electrical connectors. Refer to
See: Locations/Harness Locations.
9. Disconnect the steering member from each side of the vehicle body.
10. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member,
from the vehicle.
CAUTION: Use care not to damage the seats and interior trim panels when removing the front
heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member.
11. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly from the steering member.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: -
Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose with a new
one, and apply compressor oil to it when installing it.
- After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks.
NOTE: Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair.
- Recharge the A/C system. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service
Procedure.
REAR HEATER AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
Removal 1. Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. 2. Drain the coolant from the engine cooling
system. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair.
3. Remove the rear RH interior trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair.
4. Disconnect the rear heater core hoses from the rear heater core. 5. Disconnect the rear A/C
pipes from the rear expansion valve. 6. Disconnect the following electrical connectors: Rear blower motor
- Rear blower motor resistor
Removal and Installation
Fuel Filter: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: Read "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See:
Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions. 1. Remove the fuel
tank. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and
Repair.
Page 1375
33. Use a scraper to remove all of the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the front timing chain case
and opposite mating surfaces.
CAUTION: Do not damage the mating surfaces.
INSTALLATION
1. Install dowel pins (right and left) into front timing chain case up to a point close to taper in order
to shorten protrusion length.
2. Install the new front oil seal on the front timing chain case. Apply new engine oil to the oil seal
edges.
NOTE: Install it so that each seal lip is oriented as shown.
a. Install the new front oil seal so that it becomes flush with the face with front timing chain case
using suitable drift.
CAUTION: Press fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting the oil seal. NOTE: Make sure the
garter spring is in position and seal lip is not inverted.
Page 4182
AV-DVD-03
MODELS WITH REAR ROOF CONSOLE ASSEMBLY (SINGLE MONITOR)
Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil Capacity
With oil filter change ............................................................................................................................
........................................................... 4-1/4 qt (4.0L)
Without oil filter change .......................................................................................................................
......................................................... 3-7/8 qt (3.7L)
Page 1547
Page 3753
3. Remove the center stack lower trim RH. 4. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. 5.
Twist and pull the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the front heater and cooling unit
assembly.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 938
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 2403
DESCRIPTION
VIN Registration
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair VIN Registration
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
VIN Registration
DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed
each time ECM is replaced.
NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M).
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-III 1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to See: Application and
ID/Model Variation. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. 3. Select "VIN
REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III display.
Page 498
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Page 2823
- Always tighten the brake tubes to the specified torque when installing.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Diagrams
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams
SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)
Terminal Arrangement
Page 2010
1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the
negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the TCM for damage, bend and loose
connection (unit side and connector side). OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - Repair the terminal and
connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of TCM. 2.
Check the resistance between the TCM harness connector terminals.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Repair the TCM branch line. 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND
GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the TCM. Refer to See:
Transmission Control Systems/Description and Operation/A/T Control System/Circuit Diagram. OK
or NG OK - Present error: Replace the TCM. Refer to See: Transmission Control Systems/Locations.
- Past error: Error was detected in the TCM branch line.
NG - Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
Page 2194
Page 2841
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
Wheel Sensors
WHEEL SENSORS
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
- When removing the front or rear wheel hub assembly, first remove the wheel sensor from the
assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires, making the sensor
inoperative.
- Pull out the sensor, be careful to turn it as little as possible. Do not pull on the sensor harness.
- Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following, and then tighten the
wheel sensor bolt to the specified torque.
- Before installing the wheel sensor, make sure there are no foreign materials (such as iron
fragments) adhered to the pick-up part of the wheel sensor, to the inside of the wheel sensor
mounting hole or on the rotor mounting surface.
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR
Removal 1. Remove the front wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service
and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Partially remove the front wheel fender protector.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair. 3.
Remove the wheel sensor bolt and wheel sensor. 4. Remove the harness wire from mounts and
disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR WHEEL SENSOR
Removal 1. Remove the wheel sensor bolt and wheel sensor from the rear wheel hub and bearing
assemblies. 2. Remove the harness wire from mounts and harness wire clips from the rear
suspension member. 3. Disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Sensor Rotor
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation
The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub. For removal and installation
procedure, refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear
Wheel Hub.
Page 1487
MTC
HEATER CORE
Component
Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Page 4433
Fuel Door: Service and Repair
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
REMOVAL
1. Remove LH rear lower finisher. Refer to See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and
Repair. 2. Open fuel filler lid. 3. Disconnect fuel filler lid opener actuator electrical connector. 4.
Remove lock ring and fuel filler lid opener actuator. Turn lock ring 1/4 turn counter-clockwise to remove.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3126
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Service and Repair
Rear Bumper: Service and Repair
REAR BUMPER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove rear combination lamps RH/LH. Refer to See: Lighting and Horns/Tail
Lamp/Tail Light Bulb/Service and Repair See: Lighting and
Horns/Tail Lamp/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect sonar sensor connectors, if equipped. 3. Remove C205 clips from rear bumper
fascia. 4. Remove side retainers RH/LH. Rotate clip 1/4 turn to release retainer.
Page 542
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 4426
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 1604
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Marker Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Classification: EL03-030E
Reference: NTB03-074E
Date: January 4, 2010
EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been
revised. Please discard all previous versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models
SERVICE INFORMATION
Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT
due to a defect.
The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an
incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not.
All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed).
^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations"
(warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp.
^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents.
^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense.
^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions
or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1.
NOTE:
This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location.
Page 177
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Interior - Sliding Door Rubber Welt Is Loose
Sliding Door Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Sliding Door Rubber Welt Is
Loose
Classification: BT09-006
Reference: NTB09-014
Date: March 4, 2009
SLIDING DOOR WELT HAS LOOSENED FROM THE DOOR PANEL
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006 - 2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The door welt (rubber trim) is coming loose from the sliding door panel (clips have detached).
ACTION
Check to see if the clips are missing from the door welt:
^ If the clips are missing, replace the door welt, apply adhesion promoter and double-sided tape.
^ If the clips are not missing, reinstall the clips into the door welt, apply adhesion promoter and
double-sided tape.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 3936
- Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module.
- For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Description and
Operation/Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors.
INSTALLATION
Original Passenger Air Bag Module Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Description and
Operation/Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors.
CAUTION: Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to See: Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
Service Replacement Passenger Air Bag Module 1. Install the front passenger air bag module to
the instrument panel pad assembly.
2. Install the instrument panel assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel.
3. Connect the front passenger air bag module harness connector to yellow 4-pin service
replacement air bag connector and fasten connector to
mounting bracket.
CAUTION: Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to See: Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
WIRING HARNESS MODIFICATION The passenger air bag module originally installed in the
vehicle uses direct-connect style harness connectors. Service replacement passenger air bag
modules use tab-locking style harness connectors. If the passenger air bag module is replaced or if
the direct-connect harness connectors are damaged, the vehicle wiring harness must be modified
to allow connection of the service replacement passenger air bag module.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect front passenger air bag module
connectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the front passenger air bag must be
replaced and the wiring harness modified.
- Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at
least three minutes.
- Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to See: Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
Page 3711
7. Remove the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver. 8. Remove the three magnet coil
screws (B) and remove the magnet coil (5).
- Shim (1)
- Snap ring (2)
- Clutch disc (3)
- Pulley (4)
- Center bolt (A)
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Clutch Disc If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat, replace clutch
disc and pulley.
Pulley Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If the contact surface of the pulley shows
signs of excessive grooving, replace the clutch disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley
assembly should be cleaned with a suitable solvent before installation.
Coil Check the magnet coil for a loose connection or cracked insulation.
INSTALLATION 1. Install the magnet coil.
CAUTION: Be sure to align the magnet coil pin with the hole in the compressor front head. 2. Install
the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver.
Page 3662
Blower Motor: Locations MTC
Front Passenger Compartment
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 4028
3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see
Figure 3).
^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information.
4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring.
^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt
NOTE:
^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring.
^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly.
Service and Repair
Front Bumper: Service and Repair
FRONT BUMPER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove splash guards RH/LH. 2. Partially remove front fender protectors RH/LH at
front bumper fascia. Refer to See: Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair.
Page 967
Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment
Service and Repair
Solar Sensor: Service and Repair
OPTICAL SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the front demister grille. Refer to See: Lighting and Horns/Ambient Light
Sensor/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the optical sensor connector (2). 3. Twist the optical sensor (1) counter clockwise to
remove it from the defroster grille.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Service and Repair
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair
SPIRAL CABLE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at
least three minutes.
- When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. 2. Set
the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 3. Remove driver air bag module. Refer to See: Air
Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module. 4. Remove the steering wheel. Refer to See:
Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Wheel/Service and Repair. 5. Remove the column
cover upper and lower.
6. Remove wiper/washer switch connector, then pinch the tabs at wiper/washer switch base and
slide switch away from steering column to remove. 7. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn
signal switch toward driver door and disconnect from base.
Page 1622
Engine - Revised Timing Chain Service Procedure
Timing Chain Tensioner: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Revised Timing Chain Service
Procedure
Classification: EM10-001
Reference: NTB10-046
Date: March 19, 2010
ALTIMA, MAXIMA, AND QUEST; REVISED VQ35 ENGINE TIMING CHAIN PROCEDURES
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Altima (L31) - VQ35DE engine ONLY 2004-2008 Maxima (A34)
2004-2009 Quest (V42)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Removal and installation procedures for the VQ35 engine front timing chain case and timing chains
(primary and secondary) have been updated to no longer require removal of the rocker covers and
intake collector.
In addition, new removal and installation procedures have been added for the timing chain
tensioners (primary and secondary) and secondary timing chain tensioner shoe. The updated
procedures are available via hyperlink in this bulletin (see below).
Nissan Service Manuals for 2004-2006 Altima, 2004-2008 Maxima, and 2004-2009 Quest vehicles
will be updated with these new procedures. Updated Service Manuals will be distributed to the field
as quickly as possible.
Until the updated Service Manuals are made available, please use the procedures shown below for
any VQ35 engine front timing chain case, timing chain, or timing chain tensioner-related repairs on
an Applied Vehicle.
Locations
Ambient Light Sensor: Locations
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 501
Removal And Installation For Compressor Clutch
Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair Removal And Installation For Compressor Clutch
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch
REMOVAL 1. Remove the compressor. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Removal And Installation For Compressor.
2. Remove the center bolt by holding the clutch disc steady using a suitable tool (A). 3. Remove the
clutch disc.
4. Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers. 5. Remove the pulley assembly using
Tool.
- Use a pulley puller with a small adapter. Position the small adapter on the end of the compressor
shaft and the center of the puller on the small adapter as shown.
Tool number : KV99233130 (J-29884)
CAUTION: To prevent deformation of the pulley groove, the puller claws should be hooked under
(not into) the pulley groove. 6. Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers.
Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting
Front Door Window Regulator: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit
Switch Resetting
EL08-031A
Reference: NTB09-027A
Date: July 15, 2010
FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET
This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other
changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If any of the following work has been done:
^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly
^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator
^ installation of a new glass window
^ installation of a new glass run
....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following:
^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B
NOTE:
The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror.
If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in
this bulletin.
NOTE:
Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will
not reset the Limit Switch.
SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH
1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in
the glass raising (up) direction.
Page 7
Collision Avoidance Module: Service and Repair
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
Sonar Control Unit
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair to gain
access to sonar control unit.
2. Disconnect electrical connector then remove sonar control unit.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3309
NOTE: The details for display of the period are as follows: CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R.
- PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory.
DATA MONITOR
All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu
Page 4714
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations Power Door Lock System
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
ATC
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations ATC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Page 607
2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows:
^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates.
^ Center the turn plates to the tires.
^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel.
DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body.
Locations
Door Switch: Locations
WARNING CHIME
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 3361
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order:
^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface.
If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the front turn plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
Page 1857
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
Page 3663
Rear Passenger Compartment
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
REAR PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Headlamp Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Classification: EL10-021A
Reference: NTB10-061A
Date: June 29, 2010
XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE
This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous
versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps
IF YOU CONFIRM
A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an
internal issue),
ACTION
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon
headlamps.
NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident.
^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available
to solve the incident, if one should occur.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the
repair performed.
^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 3684
ATC
BLOWER MOTOR
Removal and Installation
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR
Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel.
2. Remove the center ventilator duct. Refer to See: Air Duct/Service and
Repair/Automatic/Removal And Installation. 3. Remove the front blower motor.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR BLOWER MOTOR
Removal 1. Remove the rear heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly
HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the three screws and remove the
blower motor.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
MTC
BLOWER MOTOR
Removal and Installation
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR
Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel.
2. Remove the center ventilator duct. Refer to See: Air Duct/Service and Repair/Manual/Removal
And Installation. 3. Remove the front blower motor.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR BLOWER MOTOR
Page 2063
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 2369
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Removal And Installation LH
IGNITION COIL
Removal and Installation LH
REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine cover. 2. Disconnect ignition coil connector. 3. Remove the
ignition coil.
CAUTION: Do not shock ignition coil.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 373
Page 1222
Page EM-5
Page 2847
Yaw Rate Sensor: Locations Electrical Units Location
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 2732
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Page 3062
Page 1908
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 508
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Page 5112
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 3231
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 2214
OK >>GO TO 16. NG >>Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or
connectors.
11.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI 1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E121. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM
terminal 111 and IPDM E/R terminal 46. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >>GO TO 12. NG
>>Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
12.CHECK 15 A FUSE 1. Disconnect 15 A fuse from IPDM E/R. 2. Check 15 A fuse. OK or NG OK
>>GO TO 16. NG >>Replace 15 A fuse.
13.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body.
Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/Power Supply And Ground Circuit.
OK or NG OK >>GO TO 14. NG >>Repair or replace ground connections.
14.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II 1. Disconnect ECM harness
connector. 2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
Page 5129
OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - Repair or replace harness. 2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR
DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check continuity between door mirror RH connector D113 terminal 5
and ground.
5 - Ground : Continuity should exist.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR
DEFOGGER
Check continuity between each door mirror RH connector D113 terminals 5 and 6.
6 - 5 : Continuity should exist.
OK or NG OK - Repair or replace harness. NG - Replace door mirror RH. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Mirrors/Service and Repair/Door Mirror/Door Mirror Assembly.
Rear Window Defogger Signal Inspection
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Rear Window Defogger Signal Inspection
1.CHECK AV COMMUNICATION LINE AV communication line check is executed. Refer to See:
Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Integrated Display System/CAN
Communication Line Check (With Color Display).
Is rear window defogger displayed on the display?
Page 1943
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 117
Locations
Variable Induction Control Actuator: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2713
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 4850
DESCRIPTION
Page 1748
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Page 5127
Check continuity between each door mirror terminals 5 and 6.
6 - 5 : Continuity should exist.
OK or NG OK - Repair or replace harness. NG - Replace malfunctioning door mirror LH or RH.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and Repair/Door Mirror/Door Mirror Assembly.
Door Mirror LH Defogger Circuit Inspection
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Door Mirror LH Defogger Circuit Inspection
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect door mirror LH. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Check
voltage between door mirror LH connector and ground.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - Repair or replace harness. 2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR
DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT
Component
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair Component
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL
Component
Variable Blower Control (Front)
Variable Blower Control (Rear)
Page 3681
Removal And Installation
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL
Removal and Installation
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT)
Removal 1. Remove the instrument lower panel RH and glove box. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and
Repair.
2. Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Center Stack Trim Panel.
3. Disconnect the variable blower control (front) electrical connector. 4. Remove the two screws
and remove the variable blower control (front).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR)
Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the two variable blower control (rear)
screws. 3. Remove the variable blower control (rear).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2239
Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
Adjustable and Non-adjustable Accelerator Pedal
CAUTION: Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position.
This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only).
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only).
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the heater and cooling unit
assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and
Repair/Removal
And Installation.
Page 3063
Service and Repair
Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair
OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal
REMOVAL 1. Rotate crankshaft, and set piston whose oil seal is to removed to top dead center.
This prevents valve from dropping inside cylinder.
CAUTION: When rotating crankshaft, be careful to avoid scarring the front timing chain case with
the timing chain. 2. Remove camshaft and valve lifter relating to valve oil seal to be removed. Refer
to See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and
Repair/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove valve collet, valve spring retainer and valve spring using Tool.
CAUTION: When working, take care not to damage valve lifter holes.
4. Remove valve oil seal using Tool.
Tool number : KV10107902 (J-38959)
INSTALLATION 1. Apply new engine oil to new valve oil seal joint surface and seal lip.
In-Vehicle Sensor
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair In-Vehicle Sensor
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding
/ Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Center Stack Trim Panel.
2. Remove the two screws and remove the in-vehicle sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2141
NOTES:
^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply.
^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product
Program, Website order via link on dealer portal.
^ WD-40 is available from various local sources.
Removal Tool
^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to
accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and
strip the sensor.
^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box
end wrench or 6-point deep well socket.
1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice.
2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the
threads.
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Fuse: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Specifications
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Mass Air Flow Sensor
Page 920
When the TRIP button is pressed, the followin9 modes will display on the screen.
Warning message (if any) -- TRIP 1 -- TRIP 2 -- FUEL ECONOMY -- MAINTENANCE -- Audio or
OFF -- TRIP 1
Maintenance items
Press the TRIP button to display maintenance information or set maintenance intervals for the
following:
- Engine Oil
- Tire Rotation
- Tire Pressure (if so equipped)
For setting the Tire Pressure display, refer to "Tire pressure information" later in this article.
Changing the maintenance interval
Select the "Engine Oil" or "Tire Rotation" key using the joystick and press the ENTER button to
display the screen to change the maintenance interval.
Select the "Maintenance Schedule" key using the joystick and move the joystick to right or left to
set the maintenance interval.
Resetting the maintenance interval
Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Firing Order
1-2-3-4-5-6
Page 1084
Drive Belt: Adjustments
DRIVE BELTS
Tension Adjustment
CAUTION: When belt is replaced with a new one, adjust it to value for "New belt" to accommodate for
insufficient adaptability with pulley grooves.
- When deflection or tension of belt being used exceeds "Used belt limit" adjust it to value for "After
adjustment" of "Used belt".
- When checking belt deflection or tension immediately after installation, first adjust it to the
specification value. Then, after turning the crankshaft two turns or more, readjust to the specified
value to avoid variation in deflection between pulleys.
- When installing belt, make sure that it is correctly engaged with pulley groove.
- Keep oil and water away from belt.
- Do not twist or bend belt excessively.
GENERATOR AND AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR BELT 1. Remove engine undercover. 2.
Loosen idler pulley lock nut (A) and adjust the belt by turning adjusting bolt (B). For specified belt deflection and tension, refer to See: Testing and Inspection.
3. Tighten lock nut (A).
Lock nut (A) : 34.8 N.m (3.5 kg-m, 26 ft-lb)
4. Tighten adjusting bolt (B).
Adjusting bolt (B) : 5.4 N.m (0.55 kg-m, 48 in-lb)
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP BELT 1. Remove engine undercover. 2. Loosen adjusting bolt (C).
3. Loosen power steering oil pump bolt (D).
NOTE: Bolt head (D) is at the engine rear side. 4. Adjust the belt by turning the adjusting bolt (E).
Locations
Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 849
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50288 (Ring Gear Stop) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on
December 3, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account was charged $26.90 plus applicable taxes and
freight.Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins), also considered
"Essential", was shipped to each dealer November 2009.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Write down all radio station presets.
Page 640
Page 2895
ASSEMBLY
1. Apply rubber grease or brake fluid to the piston seals and install them into cylinder body.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the piston seals.
2. Apply rubber grease to the piston boot, place it on the piston, and firmly insert the piston boot
cylinder-side lip into the cylinder body groove.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the piston boot.
3. Apply brake fluid to the piston, insert into the cylinder body by hand and firmly attach the piston
boot piston-side lip into the piston groove.
CAUTION: Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from
being rubbed. 4. Install sliding pins and sliding pin boots to torque member. 5. Apply PBC (Poly
Butyl Cuprysil) or equivalent, to the pad back plate and inner shim sides. Install inner shims and
outer shim covers to inner and
outer pads.
Page 4013
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE
Removal 1. Remove the seat back recliner handle.
2. Remove the screws and seat cushion finisher. 3. Remove the seat belt buckle anchor bolt and
seat belt buckle.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 864
4. Install Tools.
5. Start the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 6. Check oil pressure with
engine running under no-load. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Engine
Lubrication/Engine Oil
Pressure/Specifications/Mechanical Specifications.
CAUTION: If the difference is extreme, check the oil passages and oil pump for leaks and
blockages. 7. After the inspections, install the oil pressure switch as follows:
a. Remove the old sealant adhering to oil pressure switch and engine. b. Apply thread sealant and
tighten the oil pressure switch to specification.
- Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid
Type Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants.
Oil pressure switch : 14.8 N.m (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft-lb)
Page 4125
Cellular Phone: Electrical Diagrams
TELEPHONE
Wiring Diagram - H/PHON AV-H/PHON-01
Service and Repair
Glove Compartment: Service and Repair
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
Glove Box
REMOVAL
CAUTION: To prevent damage, place shop cloths onto surrounding parts. 1. Place the door
weatherstrip by the glove box aside.
2. Remove glove box screws using power tool. 3. Carefully remove the clips by prying loose. 4.
Disconnect glove box lamp harness.
CAUTION: To prevent damage, do not let the glove box hang from glove box lamp harness.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 174
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 4945
Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair
HAZARD SWITCH
Removal and Installation
Removal 1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Cluster Lid C.
2. Press tabs and remove hazard switch (1).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4429
Page 2343
Page 4083
Antenna: Description and Operation
AUDIO ANTENNA
System Description
With the ignition switch in ACC or ON, power is supplied through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
- to audio unit terminal 10.
Ground is supplied through the case of the antenna amp. When the radio switch is turned ON,
antenna signal is supplied through audio unit terminal 5
- to the antenna amp. terminal 1.
Then the antenna amp. is activated. The amplified radio signals are supplied to the audio unit
through the antenna amp.
Page 4299
Body Control Module: Locations
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 4456
^ Bolt A (shown in Figure 1 above) will need to be removed.
NOTE:
You may not need to completely remove the lower finisher. Unclipping the top and pulling it back
may give you enough access.
2. Check bolt "B" (see Figure 1).
^ If bolt B is loose or missing, replace it with a new one.
^ New bolt is listed in the parts information.
^ Apply Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE (or equivalent) to the threads of the
new bolt and torque bolt to 5.7 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 51
in-lb)
NOTE:
If bolt B is missing, make sure to find the missing bolt and remove it from the vehicle. The missing
bolt, if left loose in the passenger compartment, could cause a rattle.
4. Reassemble all parts in reverse order.
^ Apply Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE (or equivalent) to the threads of bolt A
and torque bolt to 15.2 N·m (1.6 kg-m, 11 ft-lb).
5. Make sure the power back door motor works correctly with no abnormal noise.
^ Cycle the power back door (open and close) 5 times.
Page 5178
Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair Removal And Installation (With Rear Power Vent
Windows)
SIDE WINDOW GLASS
Removal and Installation (with Rear Power Vent Windows)
REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear pillar upper finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the antenna. 3. Disconnect the rear
side window motor harness. 4. Remove the rear side window motor bolts. 5. Remove the side
window front bolts and glass.
CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
- Do set or stand glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
INSTALLATION 1. Install the glass from outside to insure that it is even with the top and bottom of
the opening. Tighten side window front bolts to the specified
torque.
2. Install rear side window motor bolts. 3. Connect the rear side window motor harness. 4. Connect
the antenna. 5. Install rear pillar upper finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair.
Page 5152
^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise.
^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise.
2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator.
3. Install the regulator assembly into the door.
4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to
regulator.
5. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top.
Page 1447
1. Remove the camshaft. Refer to See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and
Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the valve lifter that was measured as being outside
the standard specifications.
3. Measure the center thickness of the removed lifter with a micrometer as shown. 4. Use the
equation below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement.
- Thickness of new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the
cylinder).
Available thickness of valve lifter: 27 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.40 mm (0.3102 to 0.3307 in) in
steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to See: Maintenance.
CAUTION: Install identification letter at the end and top, (U) and (N), at each of proper positions.
(Be careful of mis-installation between intake and exhaust.) 5. Install the selected replacement
valve lifter. 6. Install the camshaft. Refer to See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push
Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 7. Rotate the crankshaft a few turns
by hand. 8. Confirm that the valve clearances are within specification. 9. After the engine has been
run to full operating temperature, confirm that the valve clearances are within specification.
Page 4636
^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times.
14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt.
Page 1609
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 4136
2. Release microphone tabs (A) and remove microphone (1).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4755
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Body - Power Liftgate Won't Open/Close/Is Noisy
Trunk / Liftgate Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Liftgate Won't Open/Close/Is
Noisy
Classification: EL09-022
Reference: NTB09-087
Date: September 10, 2009
2004 - 2009 QUEST; POWER BACK DOOR WILL NOT OPEN/CLOSE AND MAKES NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Quest (V42) with power back door.
IF YOU CONFIRM:
While operating the power back door (lift gate),
^ The power motor will not open or close the door,
and/or
^ There is a grinding and popping noise inside the rear trim panel.
ACTION:
Check for a loose or missing bolt on the back door power lift assembly. Replace if needed.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Access the power back door motor assembly.
^ Remove left side finishers as needed.
^ Refer to sections BL and EI in the Service Manual as needed.
Page 3722
Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Condenser
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and
Repair/Procedures. 2. Remove the radiator. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling
System/Radiator/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator.
3. Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe from the condenser.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air. 4. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector. 5. Remove the refrigerant
pressure sensor. 6. Carefully release retaining clips located on top driver side of condenser and
rotate the condenser out of its mounts as shown.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hose/Line
HVAC/Locations.
CAUTION: Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure pipe, refrigerant pressure sensor, and high-pressure
flexible hose with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 1094
Engine Oil Pressure: Capacity Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit
OIL PRESSURE
REGULATOR VALVE
OIL PUMP
OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)
Electrical - IPDM Serviceability
Power Distribution Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - IPDM Serviceability
Classification: EL09-014
Reference: NTB09-036
Date: April 27, 2009
IPDM SERVICE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Nissan Models with IPDM
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) is ONLY serviceable as an assembly.
The ONLY serviceable parts of an IPDM are the fuses.
^ Some IPDM designs have sections that Relays Relays appear to be serviceable relays.
^ These "relays" are NEVER to be removed.
^ These "relays" may have markings indicating they are similar. They are not "swappable".
CAUTION:
NEVER REMOVE relays from an IPDM.
Tampering with the relays of an IPDM may cause additional incidents with the vehicle.
Such incidents may include:
^ Headlights inoperative.
^ Radiator fan inoperative
^ Fog lamps inoperative
^ Wiper inoperative
Page 73
Page 5229
8. Install cowl top. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair.
9. Install wiper arms. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Front Wiper And Washer System.
10. Recheck washer nozzle spray for correct spray pattern.
Locations
Collision Avoidance Module: Locations
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 591
SPECIAL TOOLS
VDC/TCS/ABS
Yaw Rate Sensor: Locations VDC/TCS/ABS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 922
Language/unit
The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when selecting the "Language/Unit" key and pressing
the ENTER button.
Language: English or French
Unit: US - mile, °F, MPG
Metric - km, °C, L/1OO km
You can select the language and unit using the joystick or pressing the ENTER button.
The settings are automatically saved when you exit the menu by pressing the BACK button or any
other mode button.
COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if So equipped)
Note:
For Navigation system control buttons, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner1s Manual.
If you use the system with the engine not running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will use up
all the battery power, and the engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
ENTER button - This is a button on the control panel. By pressing this button you can select the
item or perform the action.
"Display" key - This is a select key on the screen. By selecting this key you can proceed to the next
function.
HOW TO USE THE JOYSTICK AND ENTER BUTTON
Use the joystick to choose an item on the display screen. Move the joystick up, down, left or right to
highlight an item. Then press the ENTER button to
Page 4277
Towing Information: Service and Repair Vehicle Recovery
TOW TRUCK TOWING
Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle)
Front Use the towing hook only, not other parts of the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle body will be
damaged.
- Use the towing hook only to free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle
for a long distance using only the towing hook.
- The towing hook is under tremendous force when used to free a stuck vehicle. Always pull the
cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the hook at an angle.
- Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
Rear Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle.
- Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake
or cooling systems.
- Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the vehicle at
an angle.
- Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or
recovery.
Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R)
Battery Replacement
Classification: EL09-042
Reference: NTB09-118
Date: October 28, 2009
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR
RESET
APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below.
IF YOU CONFIRM
^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side.
And
^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery.
2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display.
NOTES:
^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage
the printed circuit board (PCB).
^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver.
Page 1247
Page EM-5
Page 4519
1. Adjust the seat so you have access to the armrest bolt cover.
2. Remove the armrest bolt cover.
^ Use a plastic trim tool.
3. Remove bolt and armrest.
4. Push the insert out of the armrest as shown in Figure 3 and 4 using a suitable tool.
Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Front Wiper And Washer System
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair Front Wiper And Washer System
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Washer Nozzle
INSPECTION
CAUTION: Do not use needle pin to adjust washer nozzle.
- If not satisfied with washer fluid spray coverage, confirm that the washer nozzle is installed
correctly.
- If the washer nozzle is installed correctly, and the washer fluid spray coverage is not satisfactory
adjust washer nozzles. Refer to "ADJUSTMENT".
ADJUSTMENT
1. Remove the front wiper arms. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Front Wiper And Washer
System. 2. Measure the distance from rear edge of cowl to lowest point of washer fluid spray
coverage (distance A). Determine recommended washer nozzle shim (refer to chart).
NOTE: If distance A is in the middle range then no adjustment is required.
Page 2791
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment
1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Remove cable from range lever. 3. Set range lever in neutral
position.
4. Remove range lever and install Tool.
Tool number : KV911J0060 (J-45404)
5. Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts. 6. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns
with neutral base line on PNP switch body.
7. Tighten PNP switch bolts. 8. Reinstall range lever and cable. 9. Adjust control cable. Refer to
See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Adjustments.
10. Reinstall battery and bracket. 11. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic
Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0705.
Service and Repair
Oil Cooler: Service and Repair
OIL COOLER
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Be careful not to get burned, engine coolant and engine oil may be hot.
CAUTION: -
When removing oil cooler, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any engine oil leakage or spillage.
- Completely wipe off any engine oil that adheres to the engine and the vehicle.
REMOVAL 1. Drain the engine oil. Refer to . 2. Drain the engine coolant. Refer to See: Cooling
System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the wheel and tire assembly using power tool. 4.
Remove the splash shield. 5. Disconnect the coolant hoses from the oil cooler.
CAUTION: Do not spill coolant on the drive belt.
Locations
Door Switch: Locations
WARNING CHIME
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 2763
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Page 1336
Page EM-6
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3
minutes.
Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it.
Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward.
Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has
been dropped or sustained an impact.
After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function
and delete the memory by CONSULT-III.
If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair
malfunctions. Refer to
Page 3272
Power Distribution Module: Diagrams
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 1958
Caution
HOW TO USE THIS SECTION
Caution
- This section describes information peculiar to a vehicle, sheets for trouble diagnosis, and
inspection procedures.
- For trouble diagnosis procedure, refer to See: Trouble Diagnosis Work Flow/Trouble Diagnosis
Procedure.
Abbreviation List
HOW TO USE THIS SECTION
Abbreviation List
Abbreviations in CAN communication signal chart, and the diagnosis sheet are as per the following
list.
Page 2446
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Automatic Drive Positioner
Pedal Positioning Motor: Locations Automatic Drive Positioner
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 3015
- Always tighten the brake tubes to the specified torque when installing.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Page 347
2. Remove the lock ring using a socket drive handle and Tool as shown.
Tool number : KV991J0090 (J-46214)
3. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly from the fuel tank.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Make sure the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump is free
from defects and foreign materials.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Install the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly with the fuel feed hose facing the
front of the vehicle.
- Turn the lock ring until the lock ring is fully rotated into the fuel tank lock tabs as shown.
- Connect the quick connector as follows:
- Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials.
Page 957
Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 173
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 3374
SPECIAL TOOLS
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
Page 2762
DESCRIPTION
Page 1956
Example: Data link connector branch line open circuit
NOTE: When data link connector branch line is open, transmission and reception of CAN communication
signals are not affected. Therefore, no symptoms occur. However, be sure to repair malfunctioning
circuit.
Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Gap
SPARK PLUG
Diagram Information and Instructions
Combination Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Page 2502
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Service and Repair
Trim Panel: Service and Repair
BODY SIDE TRIM
Removal and Installation
LEFT SIDE
CAUTION: Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing metal clips from finishers.
- When removing or installing body side welts, do not allow butyl seal to come in contact with pillar
finisher.
Page 1562
Page 5201
- Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the
performance of the windshield in case of an accident.
CAUTION: Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date
printed on the box.
- Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
- Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
- The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidities. The curing time
will increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities.
Repairing Water Leaks for Windshield Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling
glass. If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the
extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the windshield area while pushing glass
outward. To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point.
Page 3920
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair For Side And Rollover
Collision
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
For Side and Rollover Collision
Check the SRS components using the following table. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
WHEN SRS IS ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE OR ROLLOVER COLLISION 1. Replace the following
components: Front seat back assembly (on the side on which side air bag is activated)
- Diagnosis sensor unit
- (LH or RH) side air bag (satellite) sensor (on the side on which side air bag is activated)
2. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the following table. Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage (dents,
cracks, deformation).
3. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-III and "AIR BAG" warning lamp. Refer to See: Air Bag
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and
Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly.
WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE OR ROLLOVER COLLISION 1. Check the SRS
components and the related parts using the following table. If the front seat back assembly is damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced.
2. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-III and "AIR BAG" warning lamp. Refer to See: Air Bag
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and
Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly.
SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION)
Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Pressure
Standard ..............................................................................................................................................
................. 1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2, 185 psi)/300 rpm Minimum ........................................................
........................................................................................................ 981 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2, 142
psi)/300 rpm Differential limit between cylinders
.............................................................................................................................. 98 kPa (1.0
kg/cm2, 14 psi)/300 rpm
Page 4007
8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D"
ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7).
9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A).
10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make
sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B).
11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is
firmly applied (see Figure 9).
12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt.
13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring.
Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Classification: RS01-001B
Reference: NTB01-005B
Date: November 12, 2009
"D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION
This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s).
ACTION
Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to:
^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings.
^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
Page 4922
If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly
may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example.
If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 1578
Locations
Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 2545
2. Remove thrust washer from oil pump assembly.
3. Remove snap ring using suitable tool.
4. Remove 2nd coast brake flange, 2nd coast brake discs and 2nd coast brake plates.
5. Place Tool on return spring, and compress return spring with a press.
Tool number : KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87)
6. Remove snap ring using suitable tool.
Page 2992
Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection
VACUUM LINES
Inspection
VISUAL INSPECTION Check for improper assembly, damage and deteriorate.
CHECK VALVE INSPECTION
Airtightness Inspection
Use a suitable tool to check.
Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model)
Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model)
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM
Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model)
COMPONENT PARTS AND HARNESS CONNECTOR LOCATION
Page 1976
2. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (with PAST): Check the CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (with PAST)
of units indicating "U1000" or "U1001" on
SELF-DIAG RESULTS. Draw a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the possible error circuit.
NOTE: For the details of each indication on CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR, refer to See: Trouble
Diagnosis/CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor.
a. Reception item of "ECM": "VDC/TCS/ABS", "3" is indicated in the "PAST". This means ECM
could not receive the signal from ABS in the
past. Draw a line between ECM and ABS (line 2-a in the figure below).
b. Reception item of "M&A;": "VDC/TCS/ABS", "3" is indicated in the "PAST". This means M&A;
could not receive the signal from ABS in the
past. Draw a line between M&A; and ABS (line 2-b in the figure below).
c. Reception item of "TCM": "VDC/TCS/ABS", "3" is indicated in the "PAST". This means TCM
could not receive the signal from ABS in the
past. Draw a line between TCM and ABS (line 2-c in the figure below).
Page 148
Page 3234
Service and Repair
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair
HYDRAULIC LINE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL Refer to the illustration for hydraulic tube and hose routing. Remove any components
necessary to access the lines.
CAUTION: Be careful not to kink or bend the tubes.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Gear/Service and
Repair/Procedures/On-Vehicle Service and See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power
Steering/Power Steering Pump/Service and Repair/Procedures See: Steering and
Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Pump/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Removal and Installation for tightening torques.
NOTE: Do not reuse non-reusable parts. -
Ensure that hose is properly installed on tube to specification.
CAUTION: Do not apply power steering fluid to surface between tube and hose. To install the eye joint on the power steering pump, align the projection of the eye joint into the
notch of the power steering pump. Make sure the eye joint is properly installed on the power
steering pump, then tighten the eye bolt to specification.
- Connect the harness connector into the power steering pressure switch securely.
Page 4813
- Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the tube until a click is
heard.
- After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by pulling on the tube and the
connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the quick connector.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks: 1. Turn
the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to check the connections for fuel leaks with
the electric fuel pump applying fuel
pressure to the fuel piping.
2. Start the engine and let it idle to check that there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system tube and
hose connections.
Page 2064
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 2495
Attachment General Procedure
Page 3793
Heater Core Case: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
HEATER and COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
FRONT HEATER AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
Removal 1. Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service
and Repair/Procedures. 2. Drain the coolant from the engine cooling system. Refer to See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the cowl top
extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 4.
Disconnect the front heater hoses from the front heater core. 5. Disconnect the high/low pressure
pipe from the front expansion valve. 6. Move the two front seats to the rearmost position on the
seat track. 7. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel.
8. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness at the RH and LH in-line connector brackets, and
the fuse block (J/B) electrical connectors. Refer to
See: Locations/Harness Locations.
9. Disconnect the steering member from each side of the vehicle body.
10. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member,
from the vehicle.
CAUTION: Use care not to damage the seats and interior trim panels when removing the front
heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member.
11. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly from the steering member.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: -
Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high pressure flexible hose with a new
one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
NOTE: Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair.
- Recharge the A/C system. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/Procedures.
REAR HEATER AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
Removal 1. Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service
and Repair/Procedures. 2. Drain the coolant from the engine cooling system. Refer to See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the rear RH interior
trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair.
4. Disconnect the rear heater core hoses from the rear heater core. 5. Disconnect the rear A/C
pipes from the rear expansion valve. 6. Disconnect the following electrical connectors: Rear blower motor
- Rear blower motor resistor
Page 2934
4. Add new brake fluid and bleed the air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. 5.
Adjust the parking brake. Refer to See: Parking Brake System/Testing and Inspection. 6. Install the
wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and
Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel.
CAUTION: Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after
replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to See: Disc Brake
System/Service and Repair/Rear Brake Burnishing Procedure.
Disassembly and Assembly
REAR DISC BRAKE
Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly
DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove the sliding pin bolt, and then remove the pad, shim, shim cover, and
pad retainer from the torque member and cylinder. 2. Remove the sliding pin and the sliding pin
boot from the torque member.
3. Remove the retaining ring from the cylinder body using a screwdriver or suitable tool, as shown.
4. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons
and piston boots.
WARNING: Do not place your finger in front of piston.
5. Remove piston seals from cylinder body using a screwdriver or suitable tool, as shown.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall.
CALIPER INSPECTION
Precaution For Working With HFC-134a (R-134a)
Refrigerant: Service Precautions Precaution For Working With HFC-134a (R-134a)
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a)
WARNING:
CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant are not compatible. If the
refrigerants are mixed compressor failure is likely to occur. Refer to See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Service Precautions/Contaminated Refrigerant. To determine the purity of HFC-134a
(R-134a) in the vehicle and recovery tank, use refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment and
refrigerant identifier.
Use only specified oil for the HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system and HFC-134a (R-134a)
components. If oil other than that specified is used, compressor failure is likely to occur.
The specified HFC-134a (R-134a) oil rapidly absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. The following
handling precautions must be observed:
- When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to
minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere.
- When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just
before connecting the components. Connect all refrigerant loop components as quickly as possible
to minimize the entry of moisture into system.
- Only use the specified oil from a sealed container. Immediately reseal containers of oil. Without
proper sealing, oil will become moisture saturated and should not be used.
- Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat.
Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting
requirements of SAE J2210 [HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment] or J2209 [HFC-134a
(R-134a) recycling equipment]. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before
resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and oil
manufacturers.
- Do not allow refrigerant oil to come in contact with styrofoam parts. Damage may result.
Page 1265
9. Disconnect engine coolant reservoir hose from the radiator and remove engine coolant reservoir.
10. Remove cooling fan assembly. 11. Disconnect lower radiator hose from engine. 12. Disconnect
the power steering fluid reservoir tank hose from the power steering pump and fluid cooler and
remove the power steering fluid
reservoir tank.
13. Remove the front RH wheel and tire. 14. Remove the fender protector side cover RH. 15.
Remove the drive belt. 16. Remove the power steering pump.
17. Remove the lower oil pan. Loosen the lower oil pan bolts using power tool in order as shown.
a. Cut the sealant using Tool and remove the lower oil pan.
Tool number : (J-37228)
CAUTION: - Be careful not to damage the mating surface. - Do not insert a screwdriver, this will
damage the mating surfaces.
b. Slide the Tool by tapping its side with a hammer to remove the lower oil pan.
18. Remove upper oil pan bolts in reverse order as shown. 19. Remove the generator. 20. Remove
the A/C compressor bolts and position the A/C compressor aside. 21. Remove the generator
bracket. 22. Support the engine with suitable jack and remove the RH engine, mount and bracket.
23. Remove the crankshaft pulley as follows:
a. Remove access plate and install Ring Gear Stopper Tool.
Page 1316
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50288 (Ring Gear Stop) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on
December 3, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account was charged $26.90 plus applicable taxes and
freight.Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins), also considered
"Essential", was shipped to each dealer November 2009.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Write down all radio station presets.
Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
Valve Clearance
Page 2861
2. Inspect the right side (inboard side) of the brake pedal pivot pin (see Figure 2). ^ See Figure 3
below for photos of OK and NG, conditions.
Procedures
Battery: Procedures
How to Handle Battery
BATTERY
How to Handle Battery
CAUTION: If it becomes necessary to start the engine with a booster battery and jumper cables, use a 12-volt
booster battery.
- After connecting battery cables, ensure that they are tightly clamped to battery terminals for good
contact.
- Never add distilled water through the hole used to check specific gravity.
METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE
The following precautions must be taken to prevent over-discharging a battery. The battery surface (particularly its top) should always be kept clean and dry.
- The terminal connections should be clean and tight.
- At every routine maintenance, check the electrolyte level. This also applies to batteries
designated as "low maintenance" and "maintenance-free".
- When the vehicle is not going to be used over a long period of time, disconnect the negative
battery terminal.
- Check the charge condition of the battery.
Periodically check the specific gravity of the electrolyte. Keep a close check on charge condition to
prevent over-discharge.
CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL
WARNING: Do not allow battery fluid to come in contact with skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted
surfaces. After touching a battery, do not touch or rub your
Page 3672
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 1303
5. Install the internal chain guide.
- If removed, reinstall slack guide. CAUTION: Do not overtighten slack guide bolts. It is normal for a
gap to exist under the bolt seats when bolts are tightened to specification. - Remove stopper pin
from timing chain tensioner (primary).
6. Make sure again that the matching marks on the sprockets and the timing chain have not slipped
out of alignment. 7. Tighten camshaft sprocket bolts to specification with all timing chains installed
and Ring Gear Stopper Tool holding the crankshaft.
Tool number : (J-50288)
8. Install the front timing chain case.
Inspection After Installation
- Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than
required quantity, fill to the specified level. - Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. - Turn
ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel
leakage at connection points. - Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel
leakage at connection points. - Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. - Warm up
engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including
engine oil and engine coolant. - Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling
system. - After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine
coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary. - Summary of the inspection items:
Page 1962
- Indication of the combination meter is important to detect the root cause because it is the most
obvious to the customer, and it performs CAN communication with many units.
INSPECTION OF VEHICLE CONDITION Check whether or not "U1000" or "U1001" is indicated on "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" by
CONSULT-III.
NOTE: Root cause cannot be detected using the procedure in this section if "U1000" or "U1001" is
not indicated. Check whether the symptom is reproduced or not.
NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF or disconnect the battery cable while reproducing the error. The
error may temporarily correct itself, making it difficult to determine the root cause.
- The procedures for present errors differ from the procedures for past errors. Refer to "DETECT
THE ROOT CAUSE".
CHECK OF CAN SYSTEM TYPE (HOW TO USE CAN SYSTEM TYPE SPECIFICATION CHART)
Determine CAN system type based on vehicle equipment. Then choose the correct diagnosis
sheet.
NOTE: There are two styles for CAN system type specification charts. Depending on the number of
available system types, either style A or style B may be used.
CAN System Type Specification Chart (Style A)
NOTE: CAN system type is easily checked with the vehicle equipment identification information
shown in the chart.
Page 2559
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Page 3801
Page 2142
3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees.
4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees.
^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily.
6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the
sensor will not unscrew any further.
7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed.
Page 3466
Steering Wheel: Service and Repair
STEERING WHEEL
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Remove the driver air bag
module. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air
Bag Module. 3. Remove the steering wheel center nut.
4. Remove the steering wheel using Tools.
CAUTION: Do not tap or bump the steering wheel to remove. Place a piece of tape across the spiral cable so it will not be rotated out of position.
- Inspect the steering wheel near the puller holes for damage. If damaged, replace the steering
wheel.
- Disconnect the horn connector.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Align spiral cable correctly when installing steering wheel. Make sure that the spiral cable is in the
neutral position. The neutral position is detected by turning left 2.5 revolutions from the right end
position and ending with the knob at the top.
- If equipped with VDC, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning for steering angle sensor
adjustment.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to make sure no malfunction is detected.
Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing
Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
CAUTION: The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the cable is not installed in the correct
position.
- With the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond
the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from
the neutral position.
Page 2748
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement
1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove bolt, and turbine
revolution sensor from A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Do not reuse seal bolt.
Page 142
Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Combination Switch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
COMBINATION SWITCH
Combination Switch Inspection
1.SYSTEM CHECK 1. Referring to table below, check to which system the malfunctioning switch
belongs.
- GO TO 2. 2.SYSTEM CHECK With CONSULT-III 1. Connect CONSULT-III, and select "COMB
SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR". 3. Select "START" and
confirm that other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally. Without CONSULT-III
Operate combination switch and confirm that other switches in malfunctioning system operate
normally. Example: When auto light switch is malfunctioning, confirm that "FRONT WIPER LOW"
and "FRONT WIPER INT" in System 3, to which the auto light switch belongs, operate normally.
Check results
Other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally.-Replace lighting switch or wiper switch.
Other switches in malfunctioning system do not operate normally. - GO TO 3.
3.HARNESS INSPECTION 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM and combination
switch connectors. 3. Check for continuity between BCM harness connector of the suspect system
and the corresponding combination switch connector terminals.
4. Check for continuity between each terminal of BCM harness connector in suspect malfunctioning
system and ground.
Page 1497
7. Remove the radiator upper clips by pulling the tabs outside to release the lock, as shown.
CAUTION: To prevent damage, do not pull tabs excessively. 8. Disconnect fan electrical
connectors. 9. Remove the radiator fan assembly.
CAUTION: Do not damage or scratch A/C condenser and radiator core when removing.
10. If necessary, remove the radiator fan assembly from the radiator. Refer to See: Radiator
Cooling Fan/Service and Repair. 11. If necessary, remove the rubber mounting from the radiator.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL 1. Apply pressure using suitable tool and Tool.
Tool number : EG17650301 (J-33984-A)
WARNING: To prevent the risk of the hose coming undone while under pressure, securely fasten it
down with a hose clamp.
CAUTION: Attach a hose to the A/T fluid cooler as well.
2. Place radiator in water filled tank and check for leakage.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following: Fill the radiator with coolant. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair.
Installation of Radiator Upper Clip 1. Install the mounting rubber on mounting pin of radiator core.
Page 216
Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
The occupant classification system control unit, occupant classification system sensor, and bladder
are an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Front Seat/Seat Cushion/Disassembly and
Assembly to remove the seat, and See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Front
Seat/Seat Cushion to replace the seat cushion assembly.
Page 1862
Page 2640
Disclaimer
Page 2816
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid.
Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid. 4.
Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). 5.
Disconnect the brake tubes.
CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
6. Remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket bolts and remove the ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit) with the
bracket.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Hydraulic Circuit for torque
specifications when connecting the brake tubes.
- After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with
new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the brake hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brake
Bleeding/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: To install the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool).
Locations
Auxiliary Water Pump Relay: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Specifications
Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Crankshaft Sprocket
Page 787
2. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and
Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. 3. Remove the high-pressure flexible hose. Refer
to See: Component.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Component.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to
it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
MTC
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Procedures. 2. Remove the engine under
cover. 3. Remove the high-pressure flexible hose. Refer to See: Locations.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Locations.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to
it when installing it.
After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
ATC
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe
REMOVAL 1. Reposition the IPDM E/R aside. 2. Remove the windshield washer fluid bottle filler
neck. 3. Reposition the coolant reservoir tank aside. 4. Reposition the power steering fluid reservoir
aside. 5. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and
Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure. 6. Remove the high-pressure pipe. Refer to See:
Component.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Component.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when
installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
MTC
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe
REMOVAL 1. Reposition the IPDM E/R aside. 2. Remove the windshield washer fluid bottle filler
neck.
Page 335
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair MTC
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Hose/Line
HVAC/Service and Repair/Procedures.
2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector and remove the refrigerant pressure
sensor from the condenser.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Hose/Line HVAC/Locations.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
- Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil
to it when installing it.
Page 2260
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3266
HARNESS CONNECTOR (LEVER LOCKING TYPE) Lever locking type harness connectors are used on certain control units and control modules such
as ECM, ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), etc.
- Lever locking type harness connectors are also used on super multiple junction (SMJ)
connectors.
- Always confirm the lever is fully locked in place by moving the lever as far as it will go to ensure
full connection.
CAUTION: Always confirm the lever is fully released (loosened) before attempting to disconnect or
connect these connectors to avoid damage to the connector housing or terminals.
Page 495
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
Page 467
4. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. -
Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable
pedal electric motor as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the
accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal
nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from
the pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
9. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the
adjustable accelerator pedal as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity.
10. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when
applying or releasing the accelerator pedal.
- Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding
or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward.
- Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See:
Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning.
NON-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL
Removal 1. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the upper
and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 3. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from
the pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Gap
SPARK PLUG
Page 144
Page 1594
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 4986
Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if
the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement.
Page 1558
Be careful of sharp edges after cutting off the excess band clamp.
7. After band clamp(s) installation, road test the vehicle to verify the repair.
Page 5030
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Pressure
Standard ..............................................................................................................................................
................. 1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2, 185 psi)/300 rpm Minimum ........................................................
........................................................................................................ 981 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2, 142
psi)/300 rpm Differential limit between cylinders
.............................................................................................................................. 98 kPa (1.0
kg/cm2, 14 psi)/300 rpm
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Traction Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Page 2210
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE 1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose cannot be freed of obstructions,
replace.
Component Locations
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1769
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Fuel Pressure Check
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in
"WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or
three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
Without CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn
ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out.
The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because V42 models never have fuel return
system.
Method A
CAUTION: The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for other
purposes.
- Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick
connector maintains seal ability with O-rings inside.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Prepare fuel hose for
fuel pressure check, and connect fuel pressure gauge. -
Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine NISSAN fuel hose without quick
connector).
- To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moderately long fuel hose for fuel pressure
check.
- Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with damage or cracks on it.
- Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service
and Repair/Intake Manifold. Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
- Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
- Keep the original fuel hose to be free from intrusion of dust or foreign substances with a suitable
cover.
Page 320
2. Remove the screws (A) and the center lower trim.
3. Remove the center stack lower trim RH. 4. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. 5.
Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the front heater and cooling unit
assembly.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
MTC
INTAKE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
Intake Sensor
Diagrams
Windshield Washer Hose: Diagrams
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Washer Tube Layout
Page 1243
Page EM-1
Page 1684
Knock Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1729
Page 1377
6. Install front timing chain case.
a. Install lower end of front timing chain case tightly onto top surface of oil pan (upper). CAUTION:
Be careful that oil pan gasket is in place.
b. While pressing front timing chain case from its front and top as shown, hammer dowel pin until
the outer end becomes flush with surface using
suitable tool.
- Install dowel pin on the rear timing chain case into dowel pin hole in front timing chain case.
7. Loosely install the front timing chain case bolts.
Bolt position Bolt diameter 1, 2 : 8 mm (0.31 in) 3 - 22 : 6 mm (0.24 in)
8. Tighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown.
- Retighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown.
Bolt position Tightening specification 1, 2 : 28.5 N-m (2.9 kg-m, 21 ft-lb) 3 - 22 : 12.8 N-m (1.3
kg-m, 9 ft-lb)
Locations
Auxiliary Water Pump Relay: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 171
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 5106
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 1917
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 540
Page 175
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
VDC/TCS/ABS
Acceleration/Deceleration Sensor: Locations VDC/TCS/ABS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 2080
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 3158
Fuse Block: Diagrams Fuse And Fusible Link Box
FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX
Terminal Arrangement
Page 2507
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 1884
Locations
Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 3089
Alternator: Service and Repair
CHARGING SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. Refer to See: Battery/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement. 2. Remove the radiator. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the front wheel and tire (RH).
Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 4.
Remove fender protector (RH). Refer to See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender
Liner/Service and Repair. 5. Remove the drive belt. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Testing and
Inspection See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and
Accessories/Drive Belt/Adjustments.
6. Remove the idler pulley. 7. Remove the generator adjustable top mount, using power tools.
8. Remove the generator lower bolt and nut, using power tools. 9. Disconnect the generator
harness connectors.
10. Remove the generator.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Install the generator and check tension of drive belt. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Adjustments.
CAUTION: Be sure to tighten B terminal nut carefully.
B terminal nut torque : 11 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft-lb)
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 23.6 Nm, 17 ft lb
Page 4886
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Page 2232
- Keep fuel hose connections clean.
3. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown
in figure. Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter.
- When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality.
4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 5. Start engine and
check for fuel leakage. 6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 8. Check the following. Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
- Fuel filter for clogging
- Fuel pump
- Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or
replace.
9. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel
pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE
RELEASE".
Page 4978
If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly
may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example.
If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Diagram Information and Instructions
Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Page 3153
Fuse: Testing and Inspection
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Fuse
- If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of incident before installing new fuse.
- Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating.
- Do not partially install fuse, always insert it into fuse holder properly.
- Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time.
Page 3901
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair MTC
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and
Repair/Procedures.
2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector and remove the refrigerant pressure
sensor from the condenser.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hose/Line
HVAC/Locations.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
- Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil
to it when installing it.
Page 3046
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair
G SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove center console lower cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel.
2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts.
CAUTION: Do not use power tools to remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
- Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts to specification.
CAUTION: Do not use power tools to install the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
- Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
Page 3230
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
Page 863
Engine Oil: Testing and Inspection
ENGINE OIL
Inspection
OIL LEVEL Before starting the engine make sure the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface, then check
the oil level. If the engine is already running, turn it off and allow five minutes before checking.
- Check that the oil level is within the low (L) and high (H) range as indicated on the dipstick.
- If the engine oil level is out of range, add oil as necessary.
OIL APPEARANCE Check engine oil for white milky or excessive contamination.
- If engine oil becomes milky, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant.
Repair or replace damaged parts.
OIL LEAKAGE Check for oil leakage around the following areas: Upper and lower oil pan
- Oil pan drain plug
- Oil pressure switch
- Oil filter
- Oil cooler
- Water pump cover
- Timing chain tensioner cover
- Intake valve timing (IVT) control cover and intake valve timing (IVT) control solenoid valve
- Front cover
- Mating surface between cylinder block and cylinder head
- Mating surface between cylinder head and rocker cover
- Mating surface between the front timing chain case and rear timing chain case
- Crankshaft oil seal (front and rear)
OIL PRESSURE CHECK
WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.
- Put the selector lever in the Park "P" position.
1. Check the oil level. 2. Disconnect the oil pressure switch harness connector. 3. Remove the oil
pressure switch.
CAUTION: Do not drop or shock oil pressure switch.
Page 1696
Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater
Page 455
Page 3106
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 1398
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2673
Shaft Replace shaft if there is any bending, cracking, or other damage.
Joint Sub-assembly Make sure there is no rough rotation or unusual axial looseness.
- Make sure there is no foreign material inside joint sub-assembly.
- Check joint sub-assembly for compression scars, cracks or fractures.
CAUTION: If there are any irregular conditions of joint sub-assembly components, replace the
entire joint subassembly.
Sliding Joint Housing and Spider Assembly If roller surface of spider assembly has scratches or wear, replace housing and spider assembly.
NOTE: Housing and spider assembly are components which are used as a set.
Support Bearing Make sure wheel bearing rolls freely and is free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear.
Damper Check damper for cracks or wear. Install damper with new damper bands.
ASSEMBLY
Transaxle Side
1. Cover serrated part of shaft with tape. Install new boot and boot band onto shaft. Be careful not
to damage boot.
CAUTION: Discard old boot and boot band; replace with new ones.
2. Remove protective tape wound around serrated part of shaft. 3. Install spider assembly securely,
making sure the matching marks which were made during disassembly are properly aligned.
4. Install new snap ring using a suitable tool. 5. Pack drive shaft with specified amount of grease
(Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent).
Grease amount : 134 - 144 g (4.73 - 5.08 oz)
6. Install new stopper ring to slide joint assembly. 7. After installation, pull shaft to check
engagement between slide joint assembly and stopper ring.
Page 4079
Page 2886
WARNING: Do not damage the brake tube.
CAUTION: Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only) must be in
the forward most position (closest to the floor). This is to align the base position of the accelerator
and brake pedals (adjustable type only).
- Do not disassemble the brake pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only).
- Avoid damage from dropping the brake pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the brake pedal assembly away from water.
REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Lower Panel LH.
2. Remove the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch from the brake pedal assembly by
turning 45° degrees.
3. If equipped with the adjustable pedal, disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the
adjustable pedal electric motor. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal
electric motor as shown.
4. Remove snap pin and clevis pin from the brake booster clevis. 5. Remove nuts and the brake
pedal assembly. Support the brake booster and master cylinder at the bulkhead so as not to
damage the brake tubes.
CAUTION: Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the forward most
position (closest to the floor). This is to
Page 4633
3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see
Figure 3).
^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information.
4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring.
^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt
NOTE:
^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring.
^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly.
Front Wiper And Washer System
Windshield Washer Motor: Locations Front Wiper And Washer System
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 3207
Concept of Auto Active Test
- IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN
communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN
communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal.
- If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily
diagnosed using auto active test.
Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode
Page 968
Wheels: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Road Wheel
Page 1805
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
CYLINDER HEAD
On-Vehicle Service
CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating
temperature. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. Release fuel pressure and leave the fuel pump
electrically disconnected. Refer to See: Fuel Pressure/Testing and Inspection. 4. Remove all six
spark plugs. Refer to See: Spark Plug/Service and Repair.
5. Attach a compression tester to No. 1 cylinder. 6. Depress accelerator pedal fully to keep the
electric throttle control actuator butterfly-valve wide open to maximize air intake flow. 7. Crank the
engine and record the highest gauge indication. 8. Repeat the measurement on each cylinder
(steps 5 - 7).
NOTE: Always use a fully-charged battery to obtain specified engine speed.
9. If compression in one or more cylinders is low:
a. Pour a small amount of engine oil into cylinders through the spark plug holes. b. Retest
compression (steps 5 - 8).
- If adding oil helps raise compression pressure, then the piston rings may be worn or damaged. If
so, replace piston rings after checking piston.
- If the pressure stays low, a valve may be sticking or is seating improperly. Inspect and repair the
valve and/or valve seat. Refer to See: Maintenance. If the valve and/or valve seat is damaged
excessively, replace as necessary.
- If compression stays low in two or more cylinders that are next to each other:
- The cylinder head gasket may be leaking. - Both cylinders may have valve component damage.
Inspect and repair as necessary.
10. After inspection is complete, install removed components. 11. Start engine and confirm that
engine runs smoothly. 12. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to See:
Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and
Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis Introduction.
Page 2936
4. Install the piston boot with a new retaining ring.
CAUTION: Make sure the boot is firmly in the cylinder body groove.
- Do not reuse the retaining ring.
5. Apply rubber grease and attach the sliding pin and sliding pin boot to the torque member. 6.
Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease, or equivalent, refer to See:
Maintenance See: Maintenance to the rear of the pad
and to both sides of the shim, and attach the inner shim and shim cover to the inner pad, and the
outer shim and outer shim cover to the outer pad.
7. Attach the pad retainer and pad to the torque member.
CAUTION: When attaching the pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it does not float up higher than
the torque member, as shown. 8. After assembling shims and shim covers to pad, install it to the
torque member. 9. Install cylinder body. Tighten sliding pin bolts to specification. Refer to See: Disc
Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Rear/Exploded View.
DISC ROTOR INSPECTION
Visual Inspection Check surface of the disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If
any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part.
Runout Inspection 1. Using wheel nuts, secure disc rotor to the wheel hub. (2 or more positions)
2. Inspect runout using a dial gauge.
Service and Repair
Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair
OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal
REMOVAL 1. Remove oil pan (upper). Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and
Repair. 2. Remove the transaxle. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Transmission Assembly/Removal.
3. Remove drive plate. 4. Remove rear oil seal retainer using Tool.
Tool Number : KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage mating surface.
- If rear oil retainer is removed, replace it with a new one
INSTALLATION 1. Remove old liquid gasket material from mating surface of cylinder block and oil
pan using a suitable scraper.
2. Apply liquid gasket to the new rear oil seal retainer using suitable tool. Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants.
- Assembly should be completed within 5 minutes after coating.
3. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: When replacing an engine or transmission you must make sure the dowels are installed correctly
during re-assembly.
- Improper alignment caused by missing dowels may cause vibration, oil leaks or breakage of
drivetrain components.
Page 1992
ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Branch Line Circuit
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Branch Line Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the
negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
connector side).
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector.
2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit). 2. Check the resistance between the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) harness connector terminals.
- Models with TCS
Page 2880
Brake Pedal Assy: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Brake Pedal
Page 862
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Oil
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
............. API or ILSAC Certified Energy Conserving Viscosity ............................................................
................................................................................................................................................. SAE
5W-30
ATC
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations ATC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 1883
Page 1302
a. Install the crankshaft sprocket.
- Make sure the mating marks on the crankshaft sprocket face front of engine.
4. Install the timing chain (primary).
- Water pump (G). - Install timing chain (primary) so the mating mark (punched) (B) on camshaft
sprocket (C) is aligned with the copper link (A) on the timing
chain, while the mating mark (notched) (E) on the crankshaft sprocket (D) is aligned with the yellow
one (F) on the timing chain, as shown.
- When it is difficult to align mating marks of the timing chain (primary) with each sprocket,
gradually turn the camshaft to align it with the
mating marks.
- During alignment, be careful to prevent dislocation of mating mark alignments of the secondary
timing chains.
Locations
Collision Avoidance Sensor: Locations
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 3076
Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Electronic Component Damage Prevention
Classification: EL09-011
Reference: NTB09-030
Date: April 6, 2009
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT DAMAGE CAN RESULT FROM IMPROPER BATTERY
CONNECTION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ The vehicle 12 volt battery is an important part of the vehicle electrical system and is required to
stay connected when the engine is running.
^ To prevent damage to vehicle electronic components follow the instructions / cautions below.
IMPORTANT:
Damage to electronic components (ECM, TCM, BCM, etc.) due to improper battery connection will
not be covered under warranty.
CAUTION:
^ Make sure the ignition is OFF during battery service and replacement.
^ Do not disconnect or connect any battery cables while the ignition switch is turned ON.
^ When disconnecting a battery, always disconnect the negative cable first.
^ When connecting a battery, always connect the positive cable first.
^ Do not leave a battery cable loose. Tighten battery cables immediately after attachment.
^ If a battery cable is loose, do not operate any electrical loads. (This includes turning the ignition
ON, starting the engine, operating accessories such as
the A/C system, power seats, interior lights, exterior lights etc.).
^ When "jump starting" or "boosting" a battery - be careful. Don't accidentally reverse the polarity of
the cables.
Disclaimer
Revolution Sensor Replacement
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Revolution Sensor Replacement
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Revolution Sensor Replacement
1. Remove intake air duct. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove revolution sensor from
A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Do not reuse seal bolt.
Locations
Exterior View Display Monitor: Locations
REAR VIEW MONITOR
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 3527
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Overhaul
COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER
Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY 1. Set the shock absorber (strut) in a vise, then loosen (without removing) the
piston rod lock nut as shown.
CAUTION: Do not remove piston rod lock nut at this time. 2. Compress the spring using
commercial service tool until the shock absorber (strut) mounting insulator can be turned by hand.
WARNING: Make sure that the pawls of the two spring compressors are firmly hooked on the
spring. The spring compressors must be tightened alternately and evenly so as not to tilt the spring.
3. Remove the piston rod lock nut.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Shock Absorber Assembly Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension.
- Check for oil leakage on welded or gland packing portions.
- Check piston rod for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary.
Mounting Insulator and Rubber Parts Check cemented rubber-to-metal portion for separation or
cracks. Check rubber parts for deterioration and replace if necessary.
Thrust Bearing Check thrust bearing parts for abnormal noise or excessive rattle in axial direction
and replace if necessary.
Coil Spring Check for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary.
- Check the free spring height.
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Classification: EM09-015
Reference: NTB10-009
Date: January 19, 2010
REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure
described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the
exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are
made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
NOTE:
The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads
may not be considered a warrantable expense.
This procedure can be performed by two methods:
Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed
^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle.
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed.
Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle.
^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice.
Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is
performed on the vehicle.
Service Procedure
Rust Penetrant
Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure:
Page 3750
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Intake Sensor
ATC
INTAKE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
Intake Sensor
REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair.
Page 4420
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Page 1626
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed
position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition
switch ON. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve
moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Locations
Power Door Lock Switch: Locations
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 912
Fuse Block: Diagrams Fuse And Fusible Link Box
FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX
Terminal Arrangement
Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
Valve Clearance
Check Valve
Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Specifications Check Valve
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Check Valve
Page 440
Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater
Locations
Traction Control Switch: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 1690
3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees.
4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees.
^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily.
6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the
sensor will not unscrew any further.
7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed.
Page 1337
Page EM-7
Page 2805
Page 2247
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2451
Page 1455
3. Install the water pump.
CAUTION: Do not allow cylinder block to interfere with the O-rings when installing the water pump.
Check that timing chain and water pump sprocket are engaged.
- Insert water pump by tightening bolts alternately and evenly.
4. Remove dust and foreign material completely from back side of chain tensioner and from
installation area of rear timing chain case.
5. Turn the crankshaft pulley approximately 20° clockwise so that the timing chain on the timing
chain tensioner side is loose.
NOTE: When installing the timing chain tensioner, engine oil should be applied to the oil hole and
tensioner. 6. Install the timing chain tensioner.
7. Remove the stopper pin. 8. Install chain tensioner and water pump cover.
a. Before installing, remove all traces of sealant from mating surface of water pump cover and
chain tensioner cover using a scraper. Also remove traces of sealant from the mating surface of the
front cover.
Page 3695
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL
Removal and Installation
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (FRONT)
Removal 1. Remove the instrument lower panel RH and glove box. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and
Repair.
2. Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Center Stack Trim Panel.
3. Disconnect the variable blower control (front) electrical connector. 4. Remove the two screws
and remove the variable blower control (front).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL (REAR)
Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the variable blower control (rear)
electrical connector. 3. Remove the two screws and remove the variable blower control (rear).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3792
Page 695
Valve Clearance: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT
Valve Clearance
CHECKING Perform inspection as follows after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or
valve related parts, or if there is unusual engine conditions regarding valve clearance.
NOTE: Check valve clearance while engine is cold and not running. 1. Remove the intake manifold
collectors. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and
Repair/Intake Manifold
Collector.
2. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition
Coil/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation LH
(LH) and See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal
And Installation RH (RH).
3. Remove the rocker covers. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head
Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair.
4. Set No.1 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. Align pointer (A) with TDC mark on crankshaft pulley.
- Check that the valve lifters on No.1 cylinder are loose and valve lifters on No.4 are tight. If not,
turn the crankshaft one full revolution (360°) and align as shown.
- RH cylinder head (1)
- White Arrow Indicates Engine front
5. Check only the valves as shown.
Page 3064
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 3280
Concept of Auto Active Test
- IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN
communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN
communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal.
- If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily
diagnosed using auto active test.
Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode
Removal and Installation
Fuel Filter: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: Read "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See:
Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions. 1. Remove the fuel
tank. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and
Repair.
Page 1023
Camshaft Journal Clearance
Outer Diameter of Camshaft Journal Measure outer diameter of camshaft journal as shown.
Inner Diameter of Camshaft Bracket
1. Tighten camshaft bracket bolts to specified torque. 2. Using inside micrometer, measure inner
diameter (A) of camshaft bearing.
Calculation of Camshaft Journal to Bracket Clearance (Journal clearance) = (inner diameter of
camshaft bracket) - (outer diameter of camshaft journal)
- When out of the specified range, replace either or both camshaft and cylinder head.
NOTICE: Inner diameter of camshaft bracket is manufactured together with cylinder head. Replace
the whole cylinder head assembly.
Camshaft End Play 1. Install the camshaft in the cylinder head. Refer to "Removal and Installation".
Page 2079
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 3670
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Removal and Installation
Front Door Latch: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR LOCK
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door window regulator assembly. Refer to See: Front Door Window
Glass/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the front door window rear glass run.
3. Remove the grommet, and remove door key cylinder assembly (driver side) or outside handle
escutcheon (passenger side) bolts (TORX T30) from grommet hole.
4. While pulling the outside handle (1), remove door key cylinder assembly or escutcheon (2). 5.
Separate the key cylinder rod from the door key cylinder assembly (if equipped).
6. While pulling outside handle (2), slide toward rear of vehicle to remove (1).
7. Remove the front and rear gaskets.
Page 568
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment
1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Remove cable from range lever. 3. Set range lever in neutral
position.
4. Remove range lever and install Tool.
Tool number : KV911J0060 (J-45404)
5. Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts. 6. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns
with neutral base line on PNP switch body.
7. Tighten PNP switch bolts. 8. Reinstall range lever and cable. 9. Adjust control cable. Refer to
See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Adjustments.
10. Reinstall battery and bracket. 11. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic
Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0705.
Page 4472
^ Bolt A (shown in Figure 1 above) will need to be removed.
NOTE:
You may not need to completely remove the lower finisher. Unclipping the top and pulling it back
may give you enough access.
2. Check bolt "B" (see Figure 1).
^ If bolt B is loose or missing, replace it with a new one.
^ New bolt is listed in the parts information.
^ Apply Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE (or equivalent) to the threads of the
new bolt and torque bolt to 5.7 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 51
in-lb)
NOTE:
If bolt B is missing, make sure to find the missing bolt and remove it from the vehicle. The missing
bolt, if left loose in the passenger compartment, could cause a rattle.
4. Reassemble all parts in reverse order.
^ Apply Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE (or equivalent) to the threads of bolt A
and torque bolt to 15.2 N·m (1.6 kg-m, 11 ft-lb).
5. Make sure the power back door motor works correctly with no abnormal noise.
^ Cycle the power back door (open and close) 5 times.
Description and Operation
Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 1292
6. Install front timing chain case.
a. Install lower end of front timing chain case tightly onto top surface of oil pan (upper). CAUTION:
Be careful that oil pan gasket is in place.
b. While pressing front timing chain case from its front and top as shown, hammer dowel pin until
the outer end becomes flush with surface using
suitable tool.
- Install dowel pin on the rear timing chain case into dowel pin hole in front timing chain case.
7. Loosely install the front timing chain case bolts.
Bolt position Bolt diameter 1, 2 : 8 mm (0.31 in) 3 - 22 : 6 mm (0.24 in)
8. Tighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown.
- Retighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown.
Bolt position Tightening specification 1, 2 : 28.5 N-m (2.9 kg-m, 21 ft-lb) 3 - 22 : 12.8 N-m (1.3
kg-m, 9 ft-lb)
General Specification
Steering Shaft: Specifications General Specification
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specification
Page 1999
NOTE: CAN data of the air bag diagnosis sensor unit is not used by usual service work, thus it is
omitted.
CAN System (Type 1)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CAN System (Type 1)
DIAGNOSIS SHEET
Page 3560
Always replace the seal after every disassembly.
3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification.
NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel.
Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb)
4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side
of tire as normal.
Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim.
6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel
position on vehicle. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel.
NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to
See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter Wake Up Operation. 8.
Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor, if equipped. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Page 3180
Concept of Auto Active Test
- IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN
communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN
communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal.
- If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily
diagnosed using auto active test.
Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode
Page 57
Recall 10V072000: Inspect Replace Brake Pedal
Assembly
Brake Pedal Assy: Recalls Recall 10V072000: Inspect Replace Brake Pedal Assembly
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2008-2010 Nissan/Armada 2008-2010
Nissan/Quest 2008-2009 Nissan/Titan 2008-2010 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V072000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Pedals and Linkages
Potential Number of Units Affected: 179383
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2008-2010 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56,
and model year 2008-2009 Nissan Quest vehicles. The brake pedal pivot pin end was not
spin-formed to specification during the manufacturing process of the brake pedal assembly. The
pivot pin could slide and cause the brake pedal to partially disengage from the brake pedal bracket.
CONSEQUENCE: The driver will experience unusual and noticeable looseness in the pedal and a
reduction in braking force increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will inspect to see if the pivot pin had been formed properly and will replace the
brake pedal assembly if necessary free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or
before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 1899
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 3558
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 4428
Page 1381
Tool number : (J-50288)
- If the original timing chain markings are not legible, use paint or equivalent to mark the timing
chains to the sprockets.
4. If removing the timing chains (secondary), loosen camshaft sprocket bolts. 5. Compress the
timing chain tensioner (primary).
a. Pull lever down and release plunger stopper tab. Plunger stopper tab can be pushed up to
release (coaxial structure with lever).
b. Insert stopper pin into timing chain tensioner (primary) body hole to hold lever, and keep the
stopper tab released. c. Depress the plunger into the tensioner body by pressing the slack guide. d.
Keep the slack guide pressed and lock the plunger in by pushing the stopper pin through the lever
and into the chain tensioner body hole. - Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246.
6. Remove the internal chain guide.
- Slack guide does not need to be removed.
7. Remove timing chain (primary).
CAUTION:
Page 4534
3. Using needle nose pliers, install the anti-rattle spring as shown in Figure 3.
4. Check to make sure both ends of the anti-rattle spring are correctly installed and fully seated as
shown in Figure 4.
5. Check to make sure the seat is operating properly and the anti-rattle spring stays in place.
Page 3133
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Page 3081
eyes until you have thoroughly washed your hands. If acid contacts eyes, skin or clothing,
immediately flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
- Remove the cell plug using a suitable tool.
- Add distilled water up to the MAX level.
Sulfation
A battery will be completely discharged if it is left unattended for a long time and the specific gravity
will become less than 1.100. This may result in sulfation on the cell plates. To determine if a battery
has been sulfated, note its voltage and current when charging it. As shown in the figure, less
current and higher voltage are observed in the initial stage of charging sulfated batteries. A sulfated
battery may sometimes be brought back into service by means of a long, slow charge, 12 hours or
more, followed by a battery capacity test.
SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK
1. Read hydrometer and thermometer indications at eye level. 2. Use the following chart to correct
your hydrometer reading according to electrolyte temperature.
Hydrometer Temperature Correction
Page 5126
OK or NG OK - GO TO 4. NG - Replace fuse block (J/B). 4.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect fuse block (J/B) and door mirror LH or RH. 3. Check
continuity between fuse block (J/B) connector M3 terminal 5N and door mirror connector D13 (LH)
or D113 (RH) terminal 6.
5N - 6 : Continuity should exist.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 5. NG - Repair or replace harness. 5.CHECK DOOR MIRROR
DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between each door mirror connector D13 (LH) or D113 (RH) terminal 5 and
ground.
5 - Ground : Continuity should exist.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 6. NG - Repair or replace harness. 6.CHECK DOOR MIRROR
DEFOGGER
Page 1288
Tool number : (J-50288)
CAUTION: Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth behind the ring gear, when
setting the Tool.
b. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt so that there is a 10 mm (0.39 in) gap between bolt and crankshaft
pulley.
CAUTION: Do not remove crankshaft pulley bolt. Keep loosened crankshaft pulley bolt in place to
protect the crankshaft pulley from dropping.
c. Position a suitable tool at recess hole of crankshaft pulley to remove crankshaft pulley.
CAUTION: Do not use a puller claw on the outside edge of the crankshaft pulley.
24. Disconnect the oil pressure switch harness connector. 25. Disconnect valve timing control
harness connector.
26. Remove the Bank 1 (RH) (A) and Bank 2 (LH) (B) IVT control valve covers.
- Loosen the IVT control valve cover bolts in the reverse order as shown. CAUTION: The shaft in
the IVT control valve cover is inserted into the center hole of the intake camshaft sprocket. Remove
the IVT control valve cover by pulling straight out until the IVT control valve cover disengages from
the camshaft sprocket.
- A: Bank 1 (Conventional RH bank)
- B: Bank 2 (Conventional LH bank)
- C: Dowel pin hole
27. Remove the A/C idler pulley and bracket and the drive belt auto-tensioner. 28. If necessary,
remove the idler pulley and water pump cover.
Page 4923
Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if
the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement.
Page 5029
Page 2147
Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater
Revolution Sensor Replacement
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Revolution Sensor Replacement
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Revolution Sensor Replacement
1. Remove intake air duct. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove revolution sensor from
A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Do not reuse seal bolt.
Page 3059
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Service and Repair
Fuel Rail: Service and Repair
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Apply new engine oil when installing the parts as specified to do so.
- Do not remove or disassemble parts unless instructed as shown.
REMOVAL 1. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to See: Fuel Pressure/Testing and Inspection. 2.
Remove the intake manifold collector (upper and lower). Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and
Repair/Intake Manifold Collector.
3. Disconnect the fuel quick connector on the engine side. Using Tool perform the following steps to disconnect the quick connector.
Tool number : - (J-45488)
Page 4814
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly
Fuel Level Sender Unit
Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors (1) and the wire connector (4). 2. Remove the
fuel sensor (2) from the pump assembly. 3. Depress the tabs (3) and remove the floater arm
assembly (5).
Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly.
Locations
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2115
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Specifications
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Injector
Page 4315
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2370
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Removal And Installation RH
IGNITION COIL
Removal and Installation RH
REMOVAL 1. Remove the intake manifold collector. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold
Collector.
2. Disconnect ignition coil connector. 3. Remove the ignition coil.
CAUTION: Do not shock ignition coil.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3205
Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction
- When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned
OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction.
- When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch
signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay.
NOTE: When the ignition switch is turned ON, the tail lamps are OFF.
Page 3579
Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment
Page 4500
Brake Control/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the brake caliper assemblies from the rear wheel hub and spindle assemblies without
disconnecting the brake lines, using power tool.
Position the brake caliper assemblies aside using suitable wire. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Rear.
- Leave the brake line connected to the brake caliper.
- Do not to depress the brake pedal, or the piston will pop out.
- Do not pull or twist the brake hose.
4. Remove the shock absorber upper end nuts using power tool. 5. Disconnect the LH and RH ABS
sensor harness connectors, and disconnect the ABS sensor harness from the rear suspension
member.
6. Remove the LH and RH member stay bolts using power tool. 7. Use a support jack or suitable
tool, to support the rear suspension member. 8. Remove the rear suspension member nuts using
power tool. Then lower the rear suspension member assembly using the support jack.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Service and Repair
Radiator: Service and Repair
RADIATOR
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from
high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly turn it
a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing down and
turning the cap all the way.
REMOVAL 1. Drain the engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and
Repair.
CAUTION: Perform when engine is cold. 2. Partially drain the A/T fluid. Refer to See: Transmission
and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and
Repair/Procedures/Changing A/T Fluid.
3. Remove fresh air duct. Refer to See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air
Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair. 4. Disconnect radiator upper and lower hoses. 5. Disconnect
the A/T fluid cooler hoses.
NOTE: Plug hoses to avoid leakage of A/T fluid. 6. Disconnect the engine coolant reservoir tank
hose.
Page 2720
Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection
A/T INDICATOR
A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate
1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL 1. Select "METER/M&A;" on CONSULT-III. 2.
Using "DATA MONITOR", confirm each indication while operating the shift lever.
NOTE: If more than one input is ON, A/T indicator will enter fail-safe function and the display will
turn off.
OK or NG OK - Replace combination meter. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Combination Meter. NG - GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TCM Perform self-diagnosis of TCM. Refer to See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures. OK or NG OK - Replace
combination meter. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument
Panel/Service and Repair/Combination Meter. NG - Perform "Diagnostic Procedure" for displayed
DTC.
Page 3612
2. Disconnect the mode door motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the three screws and remove
the mode door motor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Component
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
Component
Air Mix Door Motor (Driver) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Air Mix Door Motor (Passenger) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Specifications
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Throttle Control Motor
Page 145
Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing
Page 2065
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 4324
8. Remove the TORX bolts (T30) and the door lock assembly.
Door lock assembly bolts : 5.3 Nm (0.54 kg-m, 47 in-lb)
9. Remove the TORX bolt (T30) from the outside handle bracket.
10. While pulling the outside handle bracket, slide it toward the rear of the vehicle to remove it and
the door lock assembly. 11. Disconnect the door lock actuator electrical connector.
12. Separate the outside handle cable connection from the outside handle bracket.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install each rod, be sure to rotate the rod holder until a click is felt.
Page 2449
Page 2912
very low mileage. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Rear Brake Burnishing Procedure.
Component Locations
Knock Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2561
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
Page 4171
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Page 955
7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem
(see Figure 6).
^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7).
Tire to Rim Slippage:
^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire
may become un-balanced.
^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage.
^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry.
^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced.
WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION
Page 3627
Defroster Nozzle
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
DEFROSTER NOZZLE
NOTE:
Page 2929
5. Install wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and
Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel.
CAUTION: Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after
replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to See: Disc Brake
System/Service and Repair/Front Brake Burnishing Procedure.
Disassembly and Assembly
FRONT DISC BRAKE
Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly
NOTE: Do not remove torque member, pads, shims, shim covers or pad retainers, when
disassembling or assembling cylinder body.
DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove caliper assembly. Refer to See: . 2. Remove cylinder body from torque
member, then sliding pin boots from torque member.
3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons
and piston boots.
WARNING: Do not get your fingers caught in the piston.
4. Remove the piston seal from the cylinder body using a suitable tool.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Cylinder Body
CAUTION: Use new brake fluid to clean. Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene.
- Check for corrosion, wear, or damage to the cylinder inner wall, and replace the caliper if there
are any non-standard conditions.
- Minor flaws caused by corrosion or a foreign material can be removed by polishing the surface
with a fine sandpaper. Replace the cylinder body, if necessary.
Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace
the affected part.
Piston
Locations
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2711
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
In-Vehicle Sensor
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair In-Vehicle Sensor
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding
/ Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Center Stack Trim Panel.
2. Remove the two screws and remove the in-vehicle sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 4645
8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D"
ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7).
9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A).
10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make
sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B).
11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is
firmly applied (see Figure 9).
12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt.
13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring.
Page 4080
Page 656
- Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
- Keep fuel hose connections clean.
3. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown
in figure. Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter.
- When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality.
4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 5. Start engine and
check for fuel leakage. 6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 8. Check the following. Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
- Fuel filter for clogging
- Fuel pump
- Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or
replace.
9. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel
pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE
RELEASE".
Electrical Units Location
Cellular Phone: Locations Electrical Units Location
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 4115
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Page 621
2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows:
^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates.
^ Center the turn plates to the tires.
^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel.
DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body.
Page 2972
CAUTION: Make sure snap ring is fully inserted in the snap ring groove.
- Do not reuse snap ring.
5. Place the side flange of cylinder body with chamfering around the pin insertion hole facing up,
and firmly set master cylinder assembly in a vise.
CAUTION: When setting the master cylinder assembly with the vise, be sure not to over-tighten.
- When securing with a vise, use copper plates or cloth to protect the flange.
6. Using a pin punch [commercial service tool: diameter approx. 4 mm (0.16 in)], attach the
reservoir tank mounting pin so that the attachment side
and the opposite side are identical.
CAUTION: Do not reuse reservoir tank grommets and pin. 7. If necessary, install brake fluid level
switch.
Page 1972
i. Reception item of "IPDM-E": "UNKWN" is not indicated. This indicates normal communication
between IPDM-E and its receiving units. Do not draw any line.
3. Based on information received from "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR", place a check mark on the
known good CAN communication line between
ECM and IPDM-E. a. Through the previous procedure, the circuit between ADP splice and TCM
has the most amount of lines (shade 3-a in the figure below). b. Place a check mark on the known
good lines to establish the error circuit. Reception item of "IPDM-E": On "ECM", "OK" is indicated.
IPDM-E communicates normally with ECM. Put a check mark on the normal circuit between ECM
and IPDM-E (check mark 3-b in the figure below).
Page 1446
9. Turn the crankshaft 240° and align as above.
10. Set No.5 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. 11. Check only those valves as shown.
12. If all valve clearances are within specification, installation of the remaining components is in the
reverse order of removal. If the valve clearances
are out of specification, adjust the valve clearances.
VALVE ADJUSTING
CAUTION: Adjust valve clearance while engine is cold.
NOTE: Perform adjustment by selecting the correct head thickness of the valve lifter (adjusting shims are
not used).
- The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional
differences caused by temperature. Use specifications for hot engine condition to confirm valve
clearances.
Page 1272
- C: Dowel pin hole
IVT control valve cover bolts : 11.3 N-m (1.2 kg-m, 100 in-lb)
12. Apply liquid gasket and install the water pump cover, if removed.
- Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent.
13. Install crankshaft pulley and tighten the bolt in two steps.
- Lubricate thread and seat surface of the bolt with new engine oil. - Apply a paint mark for the
second step of angle tightening.
Step 1 : 44 N-m (4.5 kg-m, 32 ft-lb) Step 2 : 84° - 90° degrees clockwise
14. Remove the Ring Gear Stopper Tool.
Tool number : (J-50288)
CAUTION: Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth behind the ring gear, when
removing the Tool.
15. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to confirm it
turns smoothly. 16. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Installation
- Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than
required quantity, fill to the specified level. - Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. - Turn
ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel
leakage at connection points. - Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel
leakage at connection points. - Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. - Warm up
engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including
engine oil and engine coolant. - Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling
system. - After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine
coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary. - Summary of the inspection items:
TIMING CHAIN
Page 4862
Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection
A/T INDICATOR
A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate
1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL 1. Select "METER/M&A;" on CONSULT-III. 2.
Using "DATA MONITOR", confirm each indication while operating the shift lever.
NOTE: If more than one input is ON, A/T indicator will enter fail-safe function and the display will
turn off.
OK or NG OK - Replace combination meter. Refer to See: Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service
and Repair/Combination Meter. NG - GO TO 2. 2.CHECK TCM Perform self-diagnosis of TCM.
Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Scan
Tool Testing and Procedures. OK or NG OK - Replace combination meter. Refer to See:
Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Combination Meter. NG - Perform "Diagnostic
Procedure" for displayed DTC.
Page 1223
Page EM-6
Page 1623
Engine Control Module: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 227
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Page 1291
CAUTION: Press fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting the oil seal. NOTE: Make sure the
garter spring is in position and seal lip is not inverted.
3. Install new O-rings on rear timing chain case.
CAUTION: Use new O-rings for installation.
4. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to front timing chain case as shown.
- Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. - Before installation, wipe off the protruding
sealant. - 2.6 - 3.6 mm (0.102 - 0.142 in) dia.
5. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to top surface of oil pan (upper) as shown.
- Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent.
Page 3096
DESCRIPTION
Locations
Seat Memory Switch: Locations
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 3570
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Locations
Remote Switch: Locations
REAR VIEW MONITOR
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 3354
^ Apply the brakes as shown.
^ Start the engine to allow brake boost.
^ Turn the engine OFF,
^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates".
^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate.
Put the bridge plate in the down position.
^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle.
Component Locations
Entertainment Systems: Component Locations
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Navigation System
Navigation Module: Locations Navigation System
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Component Parts Location
Page 1526
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion -
Use a reliable straightedge and feeler gauge to check the flatness of the exhaust manifold mating
surfaces.
Limit : 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Arrow Indicates : Engine front
- Install the RH bank (1) and LH bank (2) exhaust manifold nuts in the order as shown.
CAUTION: Before installing a heated oxygen sensor or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean the exhaust manifold
threads using Tool, and apply anti-seize lubricant.
- Do not over-tighten the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor or heated oxygen sensors. Doing so may cause
damage.
Page 2447
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 629
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Page 401
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
Adjustable and Non-adjustable Accelerator Pedal
CAUTION: Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position.
This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only).
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only).
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the heater and cooling unit
assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and
Repair/Removal
And Installation.
Page 3616
Intake Door Motor (Driver) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Intake Door Motor (Passenger) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Page 3505
Stabilizer Bar: Service and Repair Stabilizer Bar
STABILIZER BAR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the stabilizer bar ends from the connecting rods using power tool.
2. Remove the stabilizer bar clamps using power tool, and remove the stabilizer bar bushings. 3.
Remove the stabilizer bar.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Rear Suspension. Install the stabilizer bar bushing and clamp so they are positioned inside of the crimp ring on the
stabilizer bar.
Page 1896
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 2564
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Front Seat Belt
Seat Belt: Service and Repair Front Seat Belt
SEAT BELTS
Front Seat Belt
COMPONENTS
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR
Removal
CAUTION: Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at
least three minutes.
1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. 2.
Remove the center pillar upper/lower trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 3. Separate the seat belt guide from the center pillar. 4.
Remove the seat belt retractor anchor bolts and assembly.
Page 664
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. Refer to See:
See: .
1. Disconnect the tube clamp at the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube at the mass
air flow sensor. 2. Separate the mass air flow sensor from the air cleaner to electric throttle control
actuator tube. 3. Unhook the air cleaner case side clips and remove the air cleaner case (upper). 4.
Remove the air cleaner filter. 5. Install a new air cleaner filter. 6. Install the remaining components
in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3165
Multiple Junction Connector: Description and Operation
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) -
The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the illustration below. Refer to the description of the slide-locking type connector.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
illustration below.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure
Page 4335
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
SLIDING DOOR
Removal 1. Remove sliding door garnish. 2. Remove sliding door finisher assembly. 3. Remove
sliding door handle screw covers and screws. 4. Remove sliding door handle assembly. Disconnect door lock cable and door handle cable. Refer to See: Locks/Door Locks/Service and
Repair.
5. Remove lower seal.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2910
WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow with
compressed air.
CAUTION: While removing cylinder body, never depress the brake pedal because the piston will pop out.
- It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or
replacement of the cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so that brake hose is
not under tension.
- Do not damage piston boot.
- If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one.
- Always replace shims and shim covers as a set when replacing brake pads.
- Keep the rotor clean of brake fluid.
- Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing
pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Rear
Brake Burnishing Procedure.
Removal And Installation
REAR DISC BRAKE
Removal and Installation of Brake Pad
WARNING: Clean brake pads with a vacuum dust collector to minimize a hazard of airborne
particles or other materials.
CAUTION:
Page 1963
CAN System Type Specification Chart (Style B)
NOTE: CAN system type is easily checked with the vehicle equipment identification information
shown in the chart.
Removal and Installation
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: Read "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See:
Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions. 1. Remove the fuel
tank. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and
Repair.
Page 2810
Page 4979
Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if
the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement.
Page 3700
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair MTC
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
Removal and Installation
FUNCTION The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin microfilters when
the heater or A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin
microfilters are located in the front heater and cooling unit assembly. The rear heater and cooling
unit assembly only draws in air from the passenger compartment to recirculate into the passenger
compartment, so the rear heater and cooling unit assembly is not equipped with in-cabin
microfilters.
REPLACEMENT TIMING Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a
regular interval depending on the driving conditions. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance.
It may also be necessary to replace the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component
replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are damaged.
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the three screws and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. 3. Remove the in-cabin
microfilters from the front heater and cooling unit assembly. 4. Install the in-cabin microfilters,
replacing the two in-cabin microfilters with new filters, into the front heater and cooling unit
assembly.
CAUTION: When installing the two new in-cabin microfilters make sure that the filters are facing in
the direction indicated by the direction arrow for the air flow. The direction arrow is printed on the
side of the in-cabin microfilters. 5. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover. 6. Install the glove box
assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and
Repair.
Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
Valve Clearance
Page 5077
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 2506
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 4839
2. Remove the lock ring using a socket drive handle and Tool as shown.
Tool number : KV991J0090 (J-46214)
3. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly from the fuel tank.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Make sure the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump is free
from defects and foreign materials.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Install the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly with the fuel feed hose facing the
front of the vehicle.
- Turn the lock ring until the lock ring is fully rotated into the fuel tank lock tabs as shown.
- Connect the quick connector as follows:
- Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials.
Revolution Sensor Replacement
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Revolution Sensor Replacement
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Revolution Sensor Replacement
1. Remove intake air duct. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove revolution sensor from
A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Do not reuse seal bolt.
Page 1754
Page 2325
4. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. -
Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable
pedal electric motor as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the
accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal
nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from
the pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
9. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the
adjustable accelerator pedal as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity.
10. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when
applying or releasing the accelerator pedal.
- Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding
or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward.
- Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See:
Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator
Pedal Released Position Learning.
NON-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL
Removal 1. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the upper
and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 3. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from
the pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
Page 137
Page 2907
Brake Pad: Removal and Replacement
Exploded View
FRONT DISC BRAKE
Component
WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow with
compressed air.
CAUTION: While the brake pad and cylinder body are separated, the piston may suddenly jump out, so do not
depress the brake pedal.
- It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or
replacement of the cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so that brake hose is
not under tension.
- Do not damage piston boot.
- If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one.
- Always replace shims and shim covers as a set when replacing brake pads.
- Keep the rotor clean of brake fluid.
- Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing
pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Front Brake Burnishing Procedure.
Removal And Installation
Page 905
Fuse: Locations Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B)
FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX (J/B)
Terminal Arrangement
Page 3604
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations MTC
Front Passenger Compartment
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 164
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 3189
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove coolant reservoir fasteners. 3. Move
coolant reservoir aside.
4. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover.
5. Remove IPDM E/R harness cover.
6. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 7. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and
remove the IPDM E/R.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5089
Page 2443
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Page 4265
Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Automatic Drive Positioner
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Component Locations
Knock Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3595
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Tightening torque of wheel nut
................................................................................................................................................... 112
N.m (11 kg-m, 83 ft-lb)
Page 138
Page 3864
1. Remove the rear air control (rear) (1) from the headlining, located over the sliding door, RH. 2.
Disconnect the rear air control (rear) electrical connector and remove the rear air control (rear).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4190
Entertainment Systems: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
Power Supply Circuit Inspection
1.CHECK FUSES Check that the following fuses are not blown.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before
installing new fuse. Refer to See: Power and Ground Distribution/Description and Operation.
2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK 1. Disconnect DVD player connector. 2. Check voltage
between the DVD player and ground.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - - Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. Repair harness or connector.
3.GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between DVD player harness connector P105 terminal 22 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
Page 1903
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 1557
5. Secure the band clamp with the hex bolt located on the side (or on top, if needed). See Figure 1
above for example.
WARNING:
Do NOT install the hex bolt on the bottom of the exhaust tube.
^ Band clamp hex bolt torque: 4.0 - 5.5 Nm (0.4 - 0.56 Kg-m, 2.9 - 4.0 ft-lb)
6. After securing the band clamp, cut off the clamp's excess at the end.
^ Wrap the end of the band clamp over the hex bolt, and then cut off the excess band clamp within
5 mm (0.2 inches) past the hex bolt (see Figure 2).
WARNING:
Page 3481
Turning torque "B" : 0.49 - 3.43 N.m (5.0 - 35.0 kg-cm, 4.3 - 30.4 in-lb)
Vertical End Play Check dust cover for damage. Replace it and the cover clamp if necessary.
NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10
revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in.
Vertical end play "C" : 0 mm (0 in)
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten the transverse link mounting bolts and nuts to specified torque, refer to See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Suspension. During installation, the final tightening must
be done with the vehicle at curb weight and the tires on the ground.
CAUTION: Discard the old pinch nut and use a new pinch nut for installation of the lower ball joint
pinch bolt. After installation, check the wheel alignment. Refer to See: Alignment/Service and Repair/Front
Suspension.
- Install the wheel and tire. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire
And Wheel.
Page 4737
1. Check to see if the 2 clips have come unattached from the sliding door welt.
^ If the clips are missing replace the door welt and proceed to step 2.
^ If the clips are not missing, reinstall the clips into the door welt by inserting the clips into the 2
holes located on the door welt, then proceed to step 2.
2. Prepare the surface by applying 3M(TM) Automotive Adhesion Promoter or equivalent on the
door welt and sliding door panel.
3. Apply 3M(TM) Acrylic Plus Tape or equivalent to the area as shown in Figure 2.
^ Tape size 5 mm x 20 mm x 1 mm (0.19 in x 0.78 in x 0.039 in)
4. Firmly press the door welt onto the sliding door panel.
^ Make sure the clips are securely inserted into the 2 holes located on the sliding door panel.
5. Check to make sure this issue has been resolved.
Page 2042
Calculated Load Value
Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Calculated Load Value
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Calculated Load Value
Page 131
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Removal and Installation of BCM
REMOVAL
NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference
when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 1. Disconnect negative battery
cable. 2. Remove the parking brake pedal assembly. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Control/Service and
Repair/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the BCM (1) by removing the screw (A) and disconnecting the harness connectors (2). Arrow Indicates : Front
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
- When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition
key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Locations/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS) See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Description and Operation/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle
Immobilizer System-NATS)/System Description See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft
and Alarm Systems/Description and Operation/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer
System-NATS)/System Composition.
- When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system.
Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ID Registration Procedure.
Page 2995
Vacuum Brake Booster: Removal and Replacement
Brake Booster
BRAKE BOOSTER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Be careful not to deform or bend brake piping while removing and installing the brake booster.
- Replace clevis pin if it is damaged.
- Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If brake booster is tilted or inclined
during installation, the dash panel may damage the threads.
Attach the check valve in the correct orientation.
1. Remove the cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl
Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the brake master cylinder. Refer to See: Hydraulic
System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 3. Remove vacuum
hose from the brake booster. Refer to See: Vacuum Lines. 4. Remove instrument lower panel LH.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Lower Panel LH.
5. Remove the brake pedal attachment snap pin and clevis pin from inside the vehicle. 6. Remove
the nuts on the brake booster and brake pedal assembly. 7. Remove brake booster assembly from
the engine compartment side.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Output Rod Length Inspection
ATC
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations ATC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Page 4899
LT-INT/L-02
Page 713
Drive Belt: Adjustments
DRIVE BELTS
Tension Adjustment
CAUTION: When belt is replaced with a new one, adjust it to value for "New belt" to accommodate for
insufficient adaptability with pulley grooves.
- When deflection or tension of belt being used exceeds "Used belt limit" adjust it to value for "After
adjustment" of "Used belt".
- When checking belt deflection or tension immediately after installation, first adjust it to the
specification value. Then, after turning the crankshaft two turns or more, readjust to the specified
value to avoid variation in deflection between pulleys.
- When installing belt, make sure that it is correctly engaged with pulley groove.
- Keep oil and water away from belt.
- Do not twist or bend belt excessively.
GENERATOR AND AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR BELT 1. Remove engine undercover. 2.
Loosen idler pulley lock nut (A) and adjust the belt by turning adjusting bolt (B). For specified belt deflection and tension, refer to See: Testing and Inspection.
3. Tighten lock nut (A).
Lock nut (A) : 34.8 N.m (3.5 kg-m, 26 ft-lb)
4. Tighten adjusting bolt (B).
Adjusting bolt (B) : 5.4 N.m (0.55 kg-m, 48 in-lb)
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP BELT 1. Remove engine undercover. 2. Loosen adjusting bolt (C).
3. Loosen power steering oil pump bolt (D).
NOTE: Bolt head (D) is at the engine rear side. 4. Adjust the belt by turning the adjusting bolt (E).
Component Locations
Engine Control Module: Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Electrical Units Location
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Application and ID
Paint: Application and ID
BODY REPAIR
Body Exterior Paint Color
Specifications
Vacuum Brake Booster: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Brake Booster
Page 2897
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Disc Brake
Removal And Installation
REAR DISC BRAKE
Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor
REMOVAL
1. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies using power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to See:
Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. 3. Remove union bolt and torque member bolts using power
tool, and remove cylinder body. 4. Remove caliper and disc rotor. If the disc rotor cannot be
removed, remove as follows: Make sure parking brake lever is completely disengaged.
- Hold down the disc rotor with the wheel nut and remove the adjuster hole plug.
- Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver through the plug opening and rotate the adjuster in the direction
shown to loosen and retract the brake shoes.
- Prior to removing disc rotor, make alignment mark using a marker between the hub and disc rotor.
- Remove wheel nut and rotor.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Install the disc rotor. Align the marks made during removal on the hub and disc rotor.
2. Install the cylinder body, and tighten the torque member bolts to specification. Refer to See:
Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Rear/Exploded View.
CAUTION: Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off oil and grease on washer seats
on axle assembly and mounting surface of cylinder body. 3. Install brake hose to cylinder body and
tighten union bolt to specification. Refer to See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Rear/Exploded View.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper washer for the union bolts.
- Securely attach the brake hose to the protrusion on the cylinder body.
Page 307
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair MTC
AMBIENT SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the ambient sensor connector.
NOTE: The ambient sensor is located behind the front bumper opening, in front of the condenser.
2. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2331
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3996
5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5).
^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit.
6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure
6A.
NOTE:
^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle.
^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle.
Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8:
^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned.
^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring.
^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no
wrinkles or ridges are present.
^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D"
ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece.
7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B).
Service and Repair
Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag
Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the screws (A) and release clips (B) to remove the steering angle sensor (1) from spiral
cable (2).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: In the case that the ABS actuator and electronic unit (control unit) is replaced, make
sure to adjust position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock
Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
ATC
Expansion Valve: Service and Repair ATC
Removal And Installation For Front Expansion Valve
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Front Expansion Valve
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A)
Service Procedure. 2. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing
Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the cooler grommet. 4. Remove the expansion valve.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them
when installing them.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks
Removal And Installation For Rear Expansion Valve
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Rear Expansion Valve
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A)
Service Procedure. 2. Remove the rear RH interior side trim panel. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the A/C refrigerant
pipes from the expansion valve.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the A/C refrigerant pipe ends with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to
avoid the entry of air and contaminants. 4. Remove the expansion valve.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them
when installing them.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Page 2090
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 3510
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before removing the rear suspension assembly, disconnect the ABS wheel sensors
from the assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires and the sensors
becoming inoperative. 1. Remove the center exhaust tube with mufflers using power tool. Refer to
See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust System/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
2. Disconnect the parking brake cable assemblies from the front cable. Refer to See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking
Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative
Front Door Window Motor: Customer Interest Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative
Classification: EL09-033A
Reference: NTB09-095A
Date: May 5, 2010
POWER WINDOW "AUTO UP" INITIALIZATION
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been revised. No other changes have
been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 350Z Coupe & Roadster (Z33) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60)
2007-2008 Maxima (A34) 2007 Murano (Z50) 2007-2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007-2009 Quest (V42)
2007-2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
A power window "Auto Up" will not work.
ACTION
Reset the limit switch.
1. Raise the door glass to the top position.
2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position.
3. Release the reset switch.
4. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then raises the door glass to the
top position.
NOTES:
> If the window is still not operating correctly, refer to ASIST and the Service Manual for further
diagnosis and repair information.
> The above initialization procedure must be performed if any of the following occur:
> Battery cable is disconnected.
> Power window switch connector is disconnected.
> Power window regulator is replaced.
> Power window motor is replaced.
> Window glass is removed.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Combination Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Page 3199
Power Distribution Module: Diagrams
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 1379
- C: Dowel pin hole
IVT control valve cover bolts : 11.3 N-m (1.2 kg-m, 100 in-lb)
12. Apply liquid gasket and install the water pump cover, if removed.
- Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent.
13. Install crankshaft pulley and tighten the bolt in two steps.
- Lubricate thread and seat surface of the bolt with new engine oil. - Apply a paint mark for the
second step of angle tightening.
Step 1 : 44 N-m (4.5 kg-m, 32 ft-lb) Step 2 : 84° - 90° degrees clockwise
14. Remove the Ring Gear Stopper Tool.
Tool number : (J-50288)
CAUTION: Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth behind the ring gear, when
removing the Tool.
15. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to confirm it
turns smoothly. 16. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Installation
- Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than
required quantity, fill to the specified level. - Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. - Turn
ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel
leakage at connection points. - Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel
leakage at connection points. - Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. - Warm up
engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including
engine oil and engine coolant. - Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling
system. - After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine
coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary. - Summary of the inspection items:
TIMING CHAIN
Page 697
9. Turn the crankshaft 240° and align as above.
10. Set No.5 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. 11. Check only those valves as shown.
12. If all valve clearances are within specification, installation of the remaining components is in the
reverse order of removal. If the valve clearances
are out of specification, adjust the valve clearances.
VALVE ADJUSTING
CAUTION: Adjust valve clearance while engine is cold.
NOTE: Perform adjustment by selecting the correct head thickness of the valve lifter (adjusting shims are
not used).
- The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional
differences caused by temperature. Use specifications for hot engine condition to confirm valve
clearances.
Page 2192
3. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows. When a stick is inserted, the valve should
open, when removing stick it should close. Do not drop any material into the tank. OK or NG OK
>>INSPECTION END NG >>Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank.
Page 3376
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
Page 2874
3. Inspection results (see Figures above):
^ OK - No further action required.
^ NG - Replace the brake pedal assembly.
^ If the brake pedal assembly replacement is needed immediately send an email with the following
information:
Email subject line: PC039 Brake Pedal Inspection
Service Manager Name: Contact phone number: Dealer Code: Dealer Name: VIN:
IMPORTANT:
Include in the email a digital photograph of the pin in the vehicle for our evaluation.
PARTS INFORMATION
^ If the brake pedal assembly replacement is needed immediately send an email as directed
above.
Page 627
^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep.
7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and
adjustments.
NOTE:
If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not
necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster
and easier.
^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system.
If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a
centered steering wheel.
^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right.
This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall
mounted rack and pinion units.
IMPORTANT:
If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to
jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct.
After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment
8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order.
9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight
flat road.
Page 857
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50288 (Ring Gear Stop) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on
December 3, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account was charged $26.90 plus applicable taxes and
freight.Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins), also considered
"Essential", was shipped to each dealer November 2009.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Write down all radio station presets.
Page 2062
Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Page 947
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
CAUTION: Servicing PAX run flat tires and wheels requires special tire equipment and training. DO NOT
service PAX Run Flat tires and wheels with conventional tire servicing equipment or damage to the
tire and wheel will result.
- If a PAX run flat tire and wheel [or transmitter (pressure sensor)] requires service, and the proper
servicing equipment is not available, then replace the complete PAX tire and wheel assembly.
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter
retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
3. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire.
Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the
transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead.
4. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
5. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
6. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then
install seal on transmitter. Refer to See: See: .
NOTE:
Service and Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
COWL TOP
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove RH/LH wiper arms. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Service and
Repair/Front Wiper And Washer System. 2. Remove cowl top cover.
a. Release fastener covers and clips. b. Remove cowl top seal by releasing ends from tabs on cowl
top cover, then releasing plastic clips. c. Remove cowl top weatherstrip. d. Remove windshield
washer nozzles and hoses from cowl top cover. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer
Systems/Windshield Washer
Hose/Diagrams
3. Remove cowl top extension.
a. Remove heater pump from cowl top extension. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Cooling System/Heater Core/Service and
Repair/Heater Pump.
b. Disconnect clip attaching coolant control valve hose to cowl top extension.
A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections
A/C Coupler O-ring: Customer Interest A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections
Classification: HA09-003
Reference: NTB09-099
Date: September 25, 2009
A/C SYSTEM O-RING SEAL LEAKS
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with A/C system
IF YOU CONFIRM
A refrigerant leak at a refrigerant pipe/hose joint location,
NOTE:
Follow the leak detection information in the Service Manual to determine the source of refrigerant
leaks.
ACTIONS
NOTE:
The O-ring seal is the most common cause of a refrigerant leak at an A/C joint.
1. Inspect the metal surfaces of the pipe/hose joint for damage or contamination.
NOTE:
Do not replace a refrigerant pipe, hose, or other A/C component if an o-ring seal will solve the leak
incident, if it should occur.
2. If no damage is found to the joint metal surfaces, replace the O-ring seal.
CAUTION:
^ When replacing O-ring seals, use lint-free gloves,
^ Make sure no foreign material is introduced into the system when the joint is open.
^ Apply A/C oil to the O-ring before installation.
^ After recharging the system, recheck for leaks.
PARTS INFORMATION
Reference an electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) for any needed parts.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the correct coding for repairs
performed.
Page 468
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when
applying or releasing the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See:
Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning.
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL ELECTRIC MOTOR
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal.
3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable
pedal electric motor as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector.
5. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the
adjustable accelerator pedal as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 6. Remove the
adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the adjustable pedal electric motor.
- Avoid damage from dropping the adjustable pedal electric motor during handling.
- Keep the adjustable pedal electric motor away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding
or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward.
- Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released
Page 4423
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Page 1987
NOTE: CAN diagnostic support monitor of the display control unit is indicated on the vehicle
display. Refer to the following. Models with color display: Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and
Compact Disc/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Integrated
Display System/CAN Communication Line Check (With Color Display).
- Models with navigation system: Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Navigation
System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/CAN Communication
Line Check.
Interview Sheet
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Interview Sheet
Page 2049
Page 4875
Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
OPTICAL SENSOR
Removal 1. Remove defrost grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel
.
2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Turn the optical sensor counterclockwise to remove it from
defroster grille.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3175
- CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.
- Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.
- When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status.
2. Sleep waiting status Process to stop CAN communication is activated.
- All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN
communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status.
3. Sleep status IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode.
- CAN communication is stopped.
- When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
- When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections
A/C Coupler O-ring: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections
Classification: HA09-003
Reference: NTB09-099
Date: September 25, 2009
A/C SYSTEM O-RING SEAL LEAKS
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with A/C system
IF YOU CONFIRM
A refrigerant leak at a refrigerant pipe/hose joint location,
NOTE:
Follow the leak detection information in the Service Manual to determine the source of refrigerant
leaks.
ACTIONS
NOTE:
The O-ring seal is the most common cause of a refrigerant leak at an A/C joint.
1. Inspect the metal surfaces of the pipe/hose joint for damage or contamination.
NOTE:
Do not replace a refrigerant pipe, hose, or other A/C component if an o-ring seal will solve the leak
incident, if it should occur.
2. If no damage is found to the joint metal surfaces, replace the O-ring seal.
CAUTION:
^ When replacing O-ring seals, use lint-free gloves,
^ Make sure no foreign material is introduced into the system when the joint is open.
^ Apply A/C oil to the O-ring before installation.
^ After recharging the system, recheck for leaks.
PARTS INFORMATION
Reference an electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) for any needed parts.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the correct coding for repairs
performed.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Page 5061
^ When splicing into the vehicle electrical system, a power-type module/converter must be used to
provide power for all trailer lighting. A power-type
module/converter uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using
the vehicle taillight, stoplight, and turn signal circuits only as a signal source. (See the illustration
above.) The module/converter must draw no more than 5 milliamps from the vehicle turn signal
circuits and no more than 15 milliamps from the stop and tail light circuits.
CAUTION:
Using a module/converter that exceeds these power requirements listed above may negatively
affect the performance and function of the vehicle's electrical system.
See a professional trailer dealer or trailer rental agency for installation of the proper equipment.
Customers who inquire about towing should be reminded of the following:
^ Always check for correct operation of the turn signals, stoplights, and taillights every time a trailer
is hitched up for towing.
^ The towing capacity for 350Z (Coupe Only), Altima, Maxima, and Sentra is 1,000 lbs.
For more information, refer customers to the Owner's Manual as well as the Nissan Towing Guide,
available online at NissanUSA.com.
Component
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair Component
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL
Component
Variable Blower Control (Front)
Variable Blower Control (Rear)
Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the fresh air duct. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from the mass air
flow sensor. 3. Disconnect the tube clamp at the electric throttle control actuator. 4. Disconnect the
PCV hose. 5. Remove air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube, air cleaner case (upper)
with the mass air flow sensor attached. 6. Remove mass air flow sensor from air cleaner case
(upper), as necessary.
CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. Do not shock it.
- Do not disassemble it.
- Do not touch the sensor.
7. Remove the air cleaner case (lower). 8. Remove resonator in the fender, lifting left fender
protector, as necessary.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CHANGING AIR CLEANER FILTER
NOTE:
Page 4349
> Window glass run rubber is replaced.
> Window is partly opened and/or closed many times without being fully closed.
Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting
Front Door Window Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit
Switch Resetting
EL08-031A
Reference: NTB09-027A
Date: July 15, 2010
FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET
This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other
changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If any of the following work has been done:
^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly
^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator
^ installation of a new glass window
^ installation of a new glass run
....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following:
^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B
NOTE:
The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror.
If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in
this bulletin.
NOTE:
Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will
not reset the Limit Switch.
SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH
1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in
the glass raising (up) direction.
Page 1888
Locations
Collision Avoidance Sensor: Locations
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 4127
Cellular Phone: Description and Operation
TELEPHONE
System Description
BLUETOOTH(R) HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM Refer to Bluetooth telephone system operating
instructions.
NOTE: Cellular telephones must have their wireless connection set up (paired) before using the
Bluetooth telephone system. Bluetooth telephone system allows users who have a Bluetooth
cellular telephone to make a wireless connection between their cellular telephone and the
Bluetooth control unit. Hands-free cellular telephone calls can be sent and received. Personal
memos can be created using the Voice Recognition system. Some Bluetooth cellular telephones
may not be recognized by the Bluetooth control unit. When a cellular telephone or the Bluetooth
control unit is replaced, the telephone must be paired with the Bluetooth control unit. Different
cellular telephones may have different pairing procedures. Refer to the cellular telephone operating
manual.
Bluetooth Telephone System Diagram
Bluetooth Control Unit When the ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON, the Bluetooth control unit
will power up. During power up, the Bluetooth control unit is initialized and performs various self
checks. Initialization may take up to 10 seconds. During this time the Bluetooth ON indicator will
flash until initialization is complete. Voice Recognition will then become active and the Bluetooth
ON indicator will remain on. Bluetooth telephone functions can be turned off using the voice
recognition system.
BCM The BCM supplies power for the Bluetooth ON indicator.
Steering Wheel Audio Control Switches When buttons on the steering wheel audio control switch
are pushed, the resistance in steering wheel audio control switch circuit changes depending on
which button is pushed. The Bluetooth control module uses this signal to perform various functions
while navigating through the voice recognition system. The following functions can be performed
using the steering wheel audio control switch: Initiate Self Diagnosis of the Bluetooth telephone system
- Start a voice recognition session
- Answer and end telephone calls
- Adjust the volume of calls
- Record memos
AV Switch Call volume can be adjusted using the AV switch.
Microphone The microphone is located in the roof console assembly. The microphone sends a
signal to the Bluetooth control unit.
Combination Meter The combination meter supplies speed signals to the Bluetooth control unit.
Vehicle speed signals are used to determine which voice command
A/T Models
Timing Chain: Service and Repair A/T Models
"The content of this article/image reflects the changes identified in TSB NTB 10-046"
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
1. Front timing chain case 2. Seal ring 3. Collared O-ring 4. IVT control valve cover RH 5. Chain
tensioner cover 6. Collared O-ring 7. Seal ring 8. IVT control valve cover LH 9. RH engine
mounting bracket 10. Water pump cover 11. Water hose clamp 12. Crankshaft pulley 13. Front oil
seal 14. Idler pulley
15. Idler pulley bracket A. Refer to Installation B. To A/C compressor
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove engine under cover. 2. Drain the engine oil. 3. Drain the engine coolant from the
radiator. 4. Drain the power steering fluid. 5. Remove engine room cover. 6. Remove front air duct.
7. Remove battery tray. 8. Remove upper radiator hose.
Page 2570
Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection
A/T INDICATOR
A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate
1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL 1. Select "METER/M&A;" on CONSULT-III. 2.
Using "DATA MONITOR", confirm each indication while operating the shift lever.
NOTE: If more than one input is ON, A/T indicator will enter fail-safe function and the display will
turn off.
OK or NG OK - Replace combination meter. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Combination Meter. NG - GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TCM Perform self-diagnosis of TCM. Refer to See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures. OK or NG OK - Replace
combination meter. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument
Panel/Service and Repair/Combination Meter. NG - Perform "Diagnostic Procedure" for displayed
DTC.
Page 3009
Repair Flow Chart
Component Locations
Knock Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1434
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
SPARK PLUG
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Ignition
System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation LH
and See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal And
Installation RH.
CAUTION: Do not shock ignition coil.
2. Remove the spark plugs using a suitable tool. If replacing the spark plugs use the correct spark plug for maximum performance. Refer to See:
Maintenance.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
CAUTION: Do not use a wire brush for cleaning.
M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements
Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements
Classification: MT02-001B
Reference: NTB03-015B
Date: December 21, 21009
2001-2010 NISSAN; MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL REQUIRED FOR WARRANTY REPAIRS
This bulletin has been amended. Please discard all copies of the earlier version.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan Manual Transmission-Equipped Vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
If an Applied Vehicle equipped with Manual Transmission (MT) needs servicing for warranty
repairs, Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80,
or Nissan GTR R35 Special is required. See the chart above.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or
Nissan GTR R35 Special oil must be used when performing manual transmission repairs paid by
Nissan. These include warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs.
Nissan will not reimburse dealers for manual transmission repairs when Nissan Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35
Special oil is not used.
Nissan recommends use of the above listed manual transmission fluids, which optimize shift
quality, for customer pay use as well.
Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid and all Nissan chemicals are ordered through the Direct Ship
Chemical Care Product Program.
Disclaimer
Page 1882
Page 3985
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair Top Tether Strap Child Restraint
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The top tether strap child restraint is not serviceable.
Page 1960
Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WORK FLOW
Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart
Page 3137
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 3632
Air Duct: Service and Repair Manual
Component Views
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Component
Ducts - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Page 1228
Page EM-11
Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Firing Order
1-2-3-4-5-6
Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model)
Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model)
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM
Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model)
COMPONENT PARTS AND HARNESS CONNECTOR LOCATION
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Classification: EM09-015
Reference: NTB10-009
Date: January 19, 2010
REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure
described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the
exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are
made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
NOTE:
The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads
may not be considered a warrantable expense.
This procedure can be performed by two methods:
Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed
^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle.
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed.
Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle.
^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice.
Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is
performed on the vehicle.
Service Procedure
Rust Penetrant
Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure:
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Heated Glass Element: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Work Flow
1. Check the symptom and customer's requests. 2. Understand the outline of system. Refer to See:
Description and Operation/System Description. 3. According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair
or replace the cause of the malfunction. Refer to See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures. 4.
Does rear window defogger operate normally? YES: GO TO 5, NO: GO TO 3. 5. Inspection End.
Page 2029
9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads.
^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12.
Page 3804
Rear A/C
Page 101
Power Distribution Module: Diagrams
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 322
3. Remove the center stack lower trim RH. 4. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. 5.
Twist and pull the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the front heater and cooling unit
assembly.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1591
Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Page 4119
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 2862
3. Inspection results (see Figures above):
^ OK - No further action required.
^ NG - Replace the brake pedal assembly.
^ If the brake pedal assembly replacement is needed immediately send an email with the following
information:
Email subject line: PC039 Brake Pedal Inspection
Service Manager Name: Contact phone number: Dealer Code: Dealer Name: VIN:
IMPORTANT:
Include in the email a digital photograph of the pin in the vehicle for our evaluation.
PARTS INFORMATION
^ If the brake pedal assembly replacement is needed immediately send an email as directed
above.
Locations
Power Sliding Door Module: Locations
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Classification: WT04-004C
Reference: NTB04-054C
Date: April 6, 2011
WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION
This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION.
No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the
following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
General Information and Recommendations
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions
supplied with your alignment equipment.
^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions.
^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment.
General Information and Recommendations
1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed.
^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles.
^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure
proper "centering" of the steering wheel.
2. Use the right alignment machine.
^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing
alignment checks.
^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment
equipment.
^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be
checked to ensure that it is level.
3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated.
^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings.
^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should
be checked immediately.
^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended
service/calibration schedule.
NOTE:
In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached
to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
Page 1045
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 2616
COMPONENT INSPECTION
1. Make sure that ATF cooler valve is fully opened at room temperature.
Page 2163
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment
1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Remove cable from range lever. 3. Set range lever in neutral
position.
4. Remove range lever and install Tool.
Tool number : KV911J0060 (J-45404)
5. Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts. 6. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns
with neutral base line on PNP switch body.
7. Tighten PNP switch bolts. 8. Reinstall range lever and cable. 9. Adjust control cable. Refer to
See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Adjustments.
10. Reinstall battery and bracket. 11. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code
Charts/P0705.
Page 3586
Wheel Bearing: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheel Bearing (Rear)
Page 1282
TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER
1. Timing chain tensioner (secondary)(LH) 2. Internal chain guide 3. Timing chain tensioner
(secondary)(RH) 4. Camshaft sprocket RH (EXH) 5. Timing chain (secondary) 6. Timing chain
(primary) 7. Camshaft sprocket RH (INT) 8. Camshaft sprocket LH (INT) 9. Timing chain
(secondary) 10. Camshaft sprocket LH (EXH) 11. Slack guide 12. Crankshaft sprocket 13. Tension
guide
Removal and Installation (Primary Timing Chain Tensioner)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front RH wheel and tire. 2. Remove the fender protector side cover RH. 3. Support
the engine with suitable jack and remove the RH engine insulator, mount and bracket.
Exploded View
Parking Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Exploded View
PARKING BRAKE SHOE
Component
Page 4913
5. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL
SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be
monitored.
6. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To
stop recording, touch "STOP".
Display Item List
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure 1. Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "ACTIVE
TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch item to be tested and check operation of the
selected item. 4. During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation.
Display Item List
Page 4897
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 3764
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the rear A/C pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when
installing them.
Page 2686
Axle Shaft Assembly: Tools and Equipment Special Service Tools
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated
here.
Page 5113
Heated Glass Element: Electrical Diagrams
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Wiring Diagram - DEF GW-DEF-01
Page 2710
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Component Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1548
Page 4488
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4632
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor
mechanism (see Figure 2).
2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor
mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip.
Page 2402
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Page 1941
Page 1064
- Using a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the valve lifter and camshaft.
- Record any valve clearance measurements which are out of specification. They will be used later
to determine the required replacement lifter size.
6. Turn crankshaft 240°. 7. Set No.3 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. 8. Check only
those valves as shown.
Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure
Page 1912
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Service and Repair
Rear Subframe: Service and Repair
REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER
Removal and Installation
Rear Suspension Assembly
Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 2971
avoid damaging parts with the assembly tools.
- Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it.
1. Apply fluid to cylinder inner wall body and contact surface of the piston assembly. Then insert
secondary piston assembly and primary piston
assembly into cylinder body.
CAUTION: Pay attention to the orientation of the piston cups. Also, insert pistons squarely to prevent
scratching the cylinder inner wall.
- Always replace the inner kit as an assembly.
2. Align the slit in the center of the secondary piston with the axial direction of the piston stopper.
Visually check the secondary piston slit from the
piston stopper hole and install the piston stopper.
3. Insert the plates and the guide into the cylinder body as shown.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the primary piston rod.
- Pay attention to the orientation of the guide.
4. Press in the primary piston and install a new snap ring.
Page 456
EGR Temperature Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 2034
Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater
Page 1250
Page EM-8
Page 3127
DESCRIPTION
Page 139
Locations
Throttle Position Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the fresh air duct. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from the mass air
flow sensor. 3. Disconnect the tube clamp at the electric throttle control actuator. 4. Disconnect the
PCV hose. 5. Remove air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube, air cleaner case (upper)
with the mass air flow sensor attached. 6. Remove mass air flow sensor from air cleaner case
(upper), as necessary.
CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. Do not shock it.
- Do not disassemble it.
- Do not touch the sensor.
7. Remove the air cleaner case (lower). 8. Remove resonator in the fender, lifting left fender
protector, as necessary.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CHANGING AIR CLEANER FILTER
NOTE:
Service and Repair
Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag
Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the screws (A) and release clips (B) to remove the steering angle sensor (1) from spiral
cable (2).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: In the case that the ABS actuator and electronic unit (control unit) is replaced, make
sure to adjust position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock
Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Tow Truck Towing
Towing Information: Service and Repair Tow Truck Towing
TOW TRUCK TOWING
Tow Truck Towing
CAUTION: Never tow an automatic transaxle model with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the
ground. This may cause serious and expensive damage to the transaxle. If it is necessary to tow
the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, always use towing dollies under the front wheels.
- Never tow an automatic transaxle model from the rear (that is backward) with four wheels on the
ground. This may cause serious and expensive damage to the transaxle.
NISSAN recommends that the vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground as
shown.
CAUTION: Always release the parking brake when towing the vehicle with the front wheels raised with the rear
wheels on the ground.
Page 5114
GW-DEF-02
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Classification: WT04-004C
Reference: NTB04-054C
Date: April 6, 2011
WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION
This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION.
No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the
following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
General Information and Recommendations
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions
supplied with your alignment equipment.
^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions.
^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment.
General Information and Recommendations
1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed.
^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles.
^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure
proper "centering" of the steering wheel.
2. Use the right alignment machine.
^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing
alignment checks.
^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment
equipment.
^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be
checked to ensure that it is level.
3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated.
^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings.
^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should
be checked immediately.
^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended
service/calibration schedule.
NOTE:
In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached
to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
Component Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 600
SPECIAL TOOLS
Page 1233
Page EM-16
Page 3182
NOTE: The details for display of the period are as follows: CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R.
- PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory.
DATA MONITOR
All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu
Page 4228
Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Automatic Drive Positioner
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model)
Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model)
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM
Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model)
COMPONENT PARTS AND HARNESS CONNECTOR LOCATION
Page 2066
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Body - Power Liftgate Won't Open/Close/Is Noisy
Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Liftgate Won't
Open/Close/Is Noisy
Classification: EL09-022
Reference: NTB09-087
Date: September 10, 2009
2004 - 2009 QUEST; POWER BACK DOOR WILL NOT OPEN/CLOSE AND MAKES NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Quest (V42) with power back door.
IF YOU CONFIRM:
While operating the power back door (lift gate),
^ The power motor will not open or close the door,
and/or
^ There is a grinding and popping noise inside the rear trim panel.
ACTION:
Check for a loose or missing bolt on the back door power lift assembly. Replace if needed.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Access the power back door motor assembly.
^ Remove left side finishers as needed.
^ Refer to sections BL and EI in the Service Manual as needed.
Page 4812
2. Remove the lock ring using a socket drive handle and Tool as shown.
Tool number : KV991J0090 (J-46214)
3. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly from the fuel tank.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Make sure the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump is free
from defects and foreign materials.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Install the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly with the fuel feed hose facing the
front of the vehicle.
- Turn the lock ring until the lock ring is fully rotated into the fuel tank lock tabs as shown.
- Connect the quick connector as follows:
- Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials.
Page 1832
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3477
Control Arm: Testing and Inspection Front Lower Link
FRONT LOWER LINK
Inspection
Check front lower link for any deformation, cracks, or damage and replace if necessary.
Component Locations
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3188
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3
minutes.
Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it.
Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward.
Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has
been dropped or sustained an impact.
After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function
and delete the memory by CONSULT-III.
If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair
malfunctions. Refer to
Page 2708
DESCRIPTION
Page 1218
Page EM-1
Page 165
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Locations
Air Bag Control Module: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SRS Component Parts Location
Page 670
- Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the tube until a click is
heard.
- After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by pulling on the tube and the
connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the quick connector.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks: 1. Turn
the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to check the connections for fuel leaks with
the electric fuel pump applying fuel
pressure to the fuel piping.
2. Start the engine and let it idle to check that there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system tube and
hose connections.
Page 4037
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor
mechanism (see Figure 2).
2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor
mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip.
Page 3097
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Page 1861
Interior - Sliding Door Rubber Welt Is Loose
Sliding Door Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Interior - Sliding Door Rubber Welt Is Loose
Classification: BT09-006
Reference: NTB09-014
Date: March 4, 2009
SLIDING DOOR WELT HAS LOOSENED FROM THE DOOR PANEL
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006 - 2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The door welt (rubber trim) is coming loose from the sliding door panel (clips have detached).
ACTION
Check to see if the clips are missing from the door welt:
^ If the clips are missing, replace the door welt, apply adhesion promoter and double-sided tape.
^ If the clips are not missing, reinstall the clips into the door welt, apply adhesion promoter and
double-sided tape.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 597
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Specifications
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Mass Air Flow Sensor
Page 3605
Rear Passenger Compartment
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
REAR PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Headlamp Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Classification: EL10-021A
Reference: NTB10-061A
Date: June 29, 2010
XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE
This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous
versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps
IF YOU CONFIRM
A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an
internal issue),
ACTION
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon
headlamps.
NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident.
^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available
to solve the incident, if one should occur.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the
repair performed.
^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA.
PARTS INFORMATION
Service and Repair
Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag
Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the screws (A) and release clips (B) to remove the steering angle sensor (1) from spiral
cable (2).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: In the case that the ABS actuator and electronic unit (control unit) is replaced, make
sure to adjust position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock
Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Page 1550
Page 3347
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order:
^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface.
If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the front turn plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
Page 1332
Page EM-2
Page 3821
Specifications
Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications
Disc Brake
Page 5134
Heated Glass Element: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
Terminal And Reference Value For BCM
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Terminal and Reference Value for BCM
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Pinout Values and
Diagnostic Parameters/Terminal And Reference Value For BCM.
Terminal And Reference Value For IPDM E/R
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R
Refer to See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Testing and
Inspection/Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters.
Page 1770
4. Install the fuel pressure gauge as shown in the figure. Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth moistened with gasoline.
- Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel tube and No.1 spool.
- Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches the No.1 spool on fuel tube.
- Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439 N4710 or 16439 40U00).
- When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
- When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality.
- Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
- Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 -0.08in).
Tightening torque: 1 - 1.5 Nm (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m, 9 - 13in-lb)
- Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts.
5. After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose with a force of approximately 98
N (10 kg, 22lb) to confirm fuel tube does not
come off.
6. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage. 7. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 8.
Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false
readings.
- During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
9. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
10. Check the following.
- Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
- Fuel filter for clogging
- Fuel pump
- Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or
replace.
Method B
CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick
connector O-ring maintains seal ability.
- Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel
pressure.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove fuel hose
using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel
Rail/Service and Repair. Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
- Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
Page 5121
Heated Glass Element: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart
- Make sure other systems using the signal of the following systems operate normally.
Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart (Part 1)
Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart (Part 2)
Page 3629
Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel.
2. Remove the RH, center, and LH ventilator duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Floor Connector Duct
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
FLOOR CONNECTOR DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly
HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the three clips and remove the
floor connector duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Floor Distribution Duct
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
FLOOR DISTRIBUTION DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the center lower trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel.
2. Remove the clip and remove the floor distribution duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Floor Junction Duct
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
FLOOR JUNCTION DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the center lower trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel.
2. Remove the clip and remove the floor distribution duct. 3. Remove the floor junction duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Floor Junction Duct Extension
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
FLOOR JUNCTION DUCT EXTENSION
Description and Operation
Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 1044
Tighten the bearing cap bolts in two steps in the order as shown:
AVAILABLE MAIN BEARING
Undersize
Page 2718
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 807
Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Changing Brake Fluid
BRAKE FLUID
Changing Brake Fluid
CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: .
- Always keep fluid level higher than "MIN" line on sub tank.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
1. Connect a vinyl tube and container to the air bleeder. 2. Depressing the brake pedal, drain the
brake fluid gradually from the air bleeder of each wheel. 3. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
Disconnect the ABS actuator and control unit connector or negative battery terminal. 4. Clean the
inside of the sub tank, and refill the sub tank with new brake fluid. 5. Bleed the brake system
refilling the system with new fluid. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair.
Page 129
Body Control Module: Locations
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Service and Repair
Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. Refer to See: Wheels and
Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Without disassembling the hydraulic
lines, remove brake caliper using power tool. Reposition it aside with wire. Refer to See: Brakes
and Traction
Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Front Disc Brake.
NOTE: Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
3. Put alignment marks on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor.
4. Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock
Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed
Sensor/Service and Repair/TCS/ABS/Wheel Sensors (TCS/ABS), See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and
Repair/VDC/TCS/ABS/Wheel Sensors (VDC/TCS/ABS).
CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness. 5. Remove cotter pin, then remove lock nut from
drive shaft using power tool. 6. Remove steering outer tie-rod cotter pin at steering knuckle, then
loosen nut using power tool. Refer to See: Steering/Steering Gear/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement,
Page 2156
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment
1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Remove cable from range lever. 3. Set range lever in neutral
position.
4. Remove range lever and install Tool.
Tool number : KV911J0060 (J-45404)
5. Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts. 6. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns
with neutral base line on PNP switch body.
7. Tighten PNP switch bolts. 8. Reinstall range lever and cable. 9. Adjust control cable. Refer to
See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Adjustments.
10. Reinstall battery and bracket. 11. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code
Charts/P0705.
Page 1559
Page 3179
Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Auto Active Test
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Auto Active Test
DESCRIPTION In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive
signal to the following systems:
- Rear window defogger - Front wipers - Tail, license and parking lamps - Cornering lamps - Front
fog lamps - Headlamps (High, Low) - A/C compressor (magnet clutch) - Cooling fan
OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from
windshield (to prevent glass damage by wiper operation).
NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield
beforehand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press
front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10
seconds after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6.
After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF.
CAUTION: Be sure to perform See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Door Lock System/Door Switch
Check (With Automatic Back Door System) or See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Door Lock System/Door Switch
Check (Without Automatic Back Door System) when the auto active test cannot be performed.
INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE When auto active test mode is actuated, the
following nine steps are repeated three times.
(A): Oil pressure warning lamp is blinking when the auto active test is operating.
Page 3364
^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates.
^ Chock the left rear wheel.
Preliminary Checks:
3. Perform pre-alignment checks.
^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.)
^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation)
^ Tire pressure
^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components
^ Wheel bearing axial play
^ Ball joints of suspension arms
^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage
^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack)
^ Vehicle weight
> Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers
> Fuel level is full
Page 683
Spark Plug: Specifications Torque
Spark Plug
Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 2715
Page 258
Power Sliding Door Switch: Locations Automatic Sliding Door System
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 3808
9. Carefully cut the low pressure pipe (1) using a suitable tool (ratchet-type pipe cutter) (A) as
shown.
CAUTION: Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when cutting the pipe.
A small amount of refrigerant may discharge from the pipe when it is cut.
10. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum hose from the intake manifold collector to allow
removal of the cut A/C pipes.
11. Disconnect the high pressure pipe connection (1), low pressure pipe connection (2), and the
A/C pipe clamp bolt (A) located near the RH front
suspension strut tower (3) as shown.
12. Disconnect the high/low pressure pipe connector bolt (1) from the front expansion valve as
shown.
- Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube (2)
- Electric throttle control actuator (3)
- Arrow Indicates Front
13. Use a suitable tool to pry the pipe support clip (1) from the threaded stud on the dash panel as
shown.
- Arrow Indicates Front
14. Remove the top section of the high/low pressure pipe (1) as shown.
Page 932
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Special Service Tools
LIFTING POINT
Special Service Tool
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated
here.
CAUTION: Every time the vehicle is lifted up, maintain the complete vehicle curb condition.
- Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the front side (engine,
transmission, suspension etc.), support a jack up point on the rear side garage jack with a
transmission jack or equivalent.
- Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the rear side (rear
axle, suspension, etc.), support a jack up point on the front side garage jack with a transmission
jack or equivalent.
- Be careful not to smash or do anything that would affect piping parts.
Page 5013
Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
OPTICAL SENSOR
Removal 1. Remove defrost grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel
.
2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Turn the optical sensor counterclockwise to remove it from
defroster grille.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Locations
Overdrive Switch: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 2900
4. Install the piston boot with a new retaining ring.
CAUTION: Make sure the boot is firmly in the cylinder body groove.
- Do not reuse the retaining ring.
5. Apply rubber grease and attach the sliding pin and sliding pin boot to the torque member. 6.
Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease, or equivalent, refer to See:
Maintenance See: Maintenance to the rear of the pad
and to both sides of the shim, and attach the inner shim and shim cover to the inner pad, and the
outer shim and outer shim cover to the outer pad.
7. Attach the pad retainer and pad to the torque member.
CAUTION: When attaching the pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it does not float up higher than
the torque member, as shown. 8. After assembling shims and shim covers to pad, install it to the
torque member. 9. Install cylinder body. Tighten sliding pin bolts to specification. Refer to See:
Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Rear/Exploded View.
DISC ROTOR INSPECTION
Visual Inspection Check surface of the disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If
any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part.
Runout Inspection 1. Using wheel nuts, secure disc rotor to the wheel hub. (2 or more positions)
2. Inspect runout using a dial gauge.
Page 598
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 4165
Entertainment Systems: Connector Locations
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 4908
- to room/map lamps terminal 2
- to personal lamps 2nd and 3rd row terminal 2 (without rear roof console) or personal lamps 2nd
and 3rd row terminal 3 (with rear roof console).
With power and ground supplied, the lamps illuminate.
SWITCH OPERATION When front door switch LH is ON (door is opened), ground is supplied to ignition keyhole illumination terminal - through BCM terminal 1.
And power is supplied through BCM terminal 56
- to ignition keyhole illumination terminal +.
When any door switch is ON (door is opened), ground is supplied to front step lamp LH and RH terminal 1, and
- to foot lamp LH and RH terminal - through BCM terminal 62.
And power is supplied through BCM terminal 56
- to front step lamp LH and RH terminal 2
- to foot lamp LH and RH terminal +.
When room/map lamps switch is ON, ground is supplied to room/map lamps terminal 3
- through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
And power is supplied through BCM terminal 56
- to room/map lamps terminal 1.
When vanity lamp (if equipped), LH or RH is ON, ground is supplied to vanity lamp LH and RH terminal - through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
And power is supplied through BCM terminal 56
- to vanity lamp LH and RH terminal +.
When personal lamps 2nd row LH or RH is ON, ground is supplied to personal lamps 2nd row LH or RH terminal 3 (without rear roof console assembly) or personal
lamps 2nd row terminal 2 (with rear roof console assembly)
- through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
And power is supplied through BCM terminal 56
- to personal lamps 2nd row LH or RH terminal 1 (without rear roof console assembly) or personal
lamps 2nd row terminal 1 (with rear roof console assembly).
When personal lamps 3rd row LH or RH is ON, ground is supplied to personal lamps 3rd row LH or RH terminal 3 (without rear roof console assembly) or personal
lamps 3rd row terminal 2 (with rear roof console assembly)
- through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
And power is supplied through BCM terminal 56
- to personal lamps 3rd row LH or RH terminal 1(without rear roof console assembly) or personal
lamps 3rd row terminal 1 (with rear roof console assembly).
When cargo lamp is ON, ground is supplied to cargo lamp terminal 1
- through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
And power is supplied through BCM terminal 56
- to cargo lamp terminal 2.
ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION When lamps on demand switch is in DOOR position and when
all conditions below are met, BCM performs timer control (maximum 30 seconds) for interior
room/map lamp ON/OFF. Power is supplied at all times through 15A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
- to key switch terminal 1.
Key is removed from ignition key cylinder (key switch OFF), power will not be supplied to BCM
terminal 37. Ground is supplied to BCM terminal 22
- through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14 (with rear power vent
windows) or 12 (without rear power vent windows).
At the time that front door LH is opened, BCM detects that front door LH is unlocked. It determines
that interior room/map lamp timer operation conditions are met and turns the interior room/map
lamp ON for 30 seconds.
Page 3285
Power Distribution Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R
Locations
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 3451
2. Tighten adjusting screw in 40° - 60° increments until rack sliding force is within specification.
Refer to See: Steering Shaft/Specifications/Steering
Gear And Linkage.
NOTE: Steering gear must be replaced if adjusting screw rotation torque is less than 5.0 N.m (0.9
kg-m, 44 in-lb). 3. Verify rack sliding force. Refer to See: On-Vehicle Service. 4. If rack sliding force
is out of specification adjust rack sliding force again. 5. If rack sliding force cannot be adjusted
within specification replace steering gear.
INCREASE Increase rack sliding force as follows:
1. Tighten adjusting screw until it is flush with housing surface.
CAUTION: Do not remove adjusting screw.
- Steering gear must replaced if adjusting screw is removed or loosened more than two rotations.
2. Loosen adjusting screw in 40° - 60° increments until rack sliding force is within specification.
Refer to See: Steering Shaft/Specifications/Steering
Gear And Linkage.
NOTE: Steering gear must replaced if adjusting screw rotation torque is less than 5.0 N.m (0.9
kg-m, 44 in-lb). 3. Verify rack sliding force. Refer to See: On-Vehicle Service. 4. If rack sliding force
is out of specification adjust rack sliding force again. 5. If rack sliding force cannot be adjusted
within specification replace steering gear.
Page 250
Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Automatic Drive Positioner
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 2070
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 159
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 381
Page 2030
13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part.
16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
Page 1711
EGR Temperature Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3226
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area
Engine Oil: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area
Classification: EM07-001D
Reference: NTB07-042D
Date: May 25, 2010
MAXIMA / ALTIMA / QUEST; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA
This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been
amended. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35 engine ONLY
2004-2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM:
There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system.
^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM).
^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause.
Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis.
ACTION:
1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with
the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin.
2. Change the engine oil and filter.
3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST
closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 1942
Page 493
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Revolution Sensor Replacement
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Revolution Sensor Replacement
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Revolution Sensor Replacement
1. Remove intake air duct. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove revolution sensor from
A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Do not reuse seal bolt.
Page 1887
Interior - Sliding Door Rubber Welt Is Loose
Sliding Door Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Interior - Sliding Door Rubber Welt Is Loose
Classification: BT09-006
Reference: NTB09-014
Date: March 4, 2009
SLIDING DOOR WELT HAS LOOSENED FROM THE DOOR PANEL
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006 - 2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The door welt (rubber trim) is coming loose from the sliding door panel (clips have detached).
ACTION
Check to see if the clips are missing from the door welt:
^ If the clips are missing, replace the door welt, apply adhesion promoter and double-sided tape.
^ If the clips are not missing, reinstall the clips into the door welt, apply adhesion promoter and
double-sided tape.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 3543
Board-On Lift
LIFTING POINT
Board-on Lift
CAUTION: Make sure vehicle is empty when lifting.
The board-on lift attachment at the front end of the vehicle should be set on the front of the sill
under the front door opening.
Position attachments at front and rear ends of board-on lift.
Page 785
Rear A/C
Locations
Auxiliary Water Pump Relay: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Component Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Diagram Information and Instructions
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Locations
Timing Component Alignment Marks: Locations
- Install primary timing chain so the mating mark (punched) on camshaft sprocket is aligned with
the yellow link on the timing chain, while the mating mark (notched) on the crankshaft sprocket is
aligned with the gold link on the timing chain, as shown.
- When it is difficult to align mating marks of the primary timing chain with each sprocket, gradually
turn the camshaft using a wrench on the hexagonal portion to align it with the mating marks.
TCS/ABS
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair TCS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid.
Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid. 4.
Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). 5.
Disconnect the brake tubes.
CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
6. Remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket bolts and remove the ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit) with the
bracket.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Hydraulic Circuit for torque
specifications when connecting the brake tubes.
- After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with
new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the brake hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brake
Bleeding/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: To install the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool).
Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
Ignition Relay: Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 4124
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 1231
Page EM-14
Page 2477
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement
1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove bolt, and turbine
revolution sensor from A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Do not reuse seal bolt.
Page 3112
3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1.
4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2).
5. Replace the battery.
^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece.
6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together.
7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated
in the dot matrix display.
8. If the indicator is still illuminated:
a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door.
b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off.
Component Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1224
Page EM-7
A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Classification: AT07-006B
Reference: NTB08-049B
Date: March 13, 2009
NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT
This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard
all earlier versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information,
the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to
the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used
as specified by the part number in this bulletin.
If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in
the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan
ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used.
PARTS INFORMATION
Specifications
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Mass Air Flow Sensor
Page 5197
^ A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify impact marks that may be less
than 1 mm in diameter.
NOTE:
A lead, or crack from an impact point can run to the edge of the glass and appear to be a low
stress crack starting from the glass outside edge.
Compound crack beginning or ending at the edge of the glass
This type of crack is always caused by impact to the glass. The point of impact is located where the
crack "branches out".
Cracks that are only in the middle of the glass
This type of crack does not begin or end at the edge of the glass.
^ These cracks are always caused by an impact to the glass and are not covered under warranty.
2) How to determine if glass damage is due to a scratch in the glass surface.
Cracks from a scratch in the glass surface
Glass is produced by fusing together various raw materials such as silica, soda ash, and limestone,
and has a hardness of 5 to 6 on the Mohs scale (for reference, a diamond has a hardness of 10 on
the same scale).
Since earth and sand can contain substances harder than that of glass, glass can be easily
scratched by:
^ Fine sand particles
^ Hard metal
^ Rubbing action of contaminated wiper rubbers, or sand partials caught between the wiper and the
glass, especially when operating the wipers in a dry
Service and Repair
License Plate Bulb: Service and Repair
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
Bulb Replacement
FRONT PARKING LAMP Refer to See: Headlamp/Headlamp Bulb/Service and Repair.
LICENSE PLATE LAMP
Removal 1. Remove back door lower finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove license plate lamp socket. 3. Remove license
plate lamp.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TAIL LAMP Refer to See: Tail Lamp/Tail Light Bulb/Service and Repair.
Automatic
Air Duct: Service and Repair Automatic
Component Views
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Component
Ducts - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Page 969
Wheels: Testing and Inspection
ROAD WHEEL
Inspection
1. Check tires for wear and improper inflation. 2. Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other
damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout.
a. Remove tire from aluminum wheel and mount on a tire balance machine.
b. Set dial indicator as shown.
Wheel runout (Dial indicator value) : Refer to See: Specifications.
3. Check front wheel bearings for looseness. Refer to See: Wheel Hub/Testing and
Inspection/Front Wheel Hub And Knuckle. 4. Check front suspension for looseness. Refer to See:
Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Service and Repair/Procedures/Front Suspension
Assembly.
Page 2067
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 3603
Page 3843
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair
OIL
Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor
The oil in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add oil to compressor
when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to
maintain the specified amount. If oil quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions
may result: Lack of oil: May lead to a seized compressor
- Excessive oil: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference)
Oil Name: NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING
CAUTION: If excessive oil leakage is noted, do not perform the oil return operation. Start the
engine and set the following test conditions: Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm
- A/C switch: On
- Blower fan speed: Maximum position
- Temperature control: Optional [set so that intake air temperature is 25° to 30° C (77° to 86°F).]
- Perform oil return operation for about ten minutes.
Adjust the oil quantity according to the following table.
Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor After replacing any of
the following major components, add the correct amount of oil to the system.
Oil Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement
Page 5238
Wiper Motor: Locations Rear Wiper And Washer System
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 3055
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Page 5230
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair Rear Wiper And Washer System
Rear Washer Nozzle
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Rear Washer Nozzle
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Remove back door upper finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair.
2. Remove rear washer tube from rear washer nozzle. 3. Release retaining clips and remove rear
washer nozzle.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Rear Wiper And Washer Switch
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Rear Wiper and Washer Switch
Refer to See: Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Switch/Service and
Repair.
Page 2462
Control Module: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 2312
Fuel Pump Relay: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 1281
5. Install the internal chain guide.
- If removed, reinstall slack guide. CAUTION: Do not overtighten slack guide bolts. It is normal for a
gap to exist under the bolt seats when bolts are tightened to specification. - Remove stopper pin
from timing chain tensioner (primary).
6. Make sure again that the matching marks on the sprockets and the timing chain have not slipped
out of alignment. 7. Tighten camshaft sprocket bolts to specification with all timing chains installed
and Ring Gear Stopper Tool holding the crankshaft.
Tool number : (J-50288)
8. Install the front timing chain case.
Inspection After Installation
- Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than
required quantity, fill to the specified level. - Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. - Turn
ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel
leakage at connection points. - Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel
leakage at connection points. - Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. - Warm up
engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including
engine oil and engine coolant. - Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling
system. - After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine
coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary. - Summary of the inspection items:
Page 2419
ATC
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair ATC
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
Removal and Installation
FUNCTION The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin microfilters when
the heater or A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin
microfilters are located in the front heater and cooling unit assembly. The rear heater and cooling
unit assembly only draws in air from the passenger compartment to recirculate into the passenger
compartment, so the rear heater and cooling unit assembly is not equipped with in-cabin
microfilters.
REPLACEMENT TIMING Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a
regular interval depending on the driving conditions. Refer to See: See: . It may also be necessary
to replace the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin
microfilters are damaged.
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the three screws and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. 3. Remove the in-cabin
microfilters from the front heater and cooling unit assembly. 4. Install the in-cabin microfilters,
replacing the two in-cabin microfilters with new filters, into the front heater and cooling unit
assembly.
CAUTION: When installing the two new in-cabin microfilters make sure that the filters are facing in
the direction indicated by the direction arrow for the air flow. The direction arrow is printed on the
side of the in-cabin microfilters. 5. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover. 6. Install the glove box
assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and
Repair.
Page 2679
Joint Sub-Assembly Make sure there is no rough rotation or unusual axial looseness.
- Make sure there is no foreign material inside joint sub-assembly.
- Check joint sub-assembly for compression scars, cracks or fractures.
CAUTION: If there are any irregular conditions of joint sub-assembly components, replace the
entire joint subassembly.
Slide Joint Housing Make sure there are no compression scars, cracks or fractures or unusual wear of ball rolling
surface.
- Make sure there is no damage to shaft screws.
- Make sure there is no deformation of boot installation parts.
Ball Cage Make sure there are no compression scars, cracks, fractures of sliding surface.
Steel Ball Make sure there are no compression scars, cracks, fractures or unusual wear.
Inner Race Check ball sliding surface for compression scars, cracks or fractures.
- Make sure there is no damage to serrated part.
CAUTION: If there are any irregular conditions in the component, replace with a new set of joint
sub-assembly, ball cage, steel ball and inner race.
Damper Check damper for cracks or wear. Install damper with new damper bands.
ASSEMBLY
Transaxle Side
1. Install new boot and new small boot band on shaft.
CAUTION: Cover drive shaft serration with tape to prevent damage to boot during installation.
2. Remove protective tape wound around serrated part of shaft. 3. Install spider assembly securely,
making sure the matching marks which were made during disassembly are properly aligned.
4. Install new snap ring using a suitable tool.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Specifications
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Page 1376
3. Install new O-rings on rear timing chain case.
CAUTION: Use new O-rings for installation.
4. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to front timing chain case as shown.
- Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. - Before installation, wipe off the protruding
sealant. - 2.6 - 3.6 mm (0.102 - 0.142 in) dia.
5. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to top surface of oil pan (upper) as shown.
- Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent.
Page 4072
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Page 3715
7. Remove the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver. 8. Remove the three magnet coil
screws (B) and remove the magnet coil (5).
- Shim (1)
- Snap ring (2)
- Clutch disc (3)
- Pulley (4)
- Center bolt (A)
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Clutch Disc If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat, replace clutch
disc and pulley.
Pulley Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If the contact surface of the pulley shows
signs of excessive grooving, replace the clutch disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley
assembly should be cleaned with a suitable solvent before installation.
Coil Check the magnet coil for a loose connection or cracked insulation.
INSTALLATION 1. Install the magnet coil.
CAUTION: Be sure to align the magnet coil pin with the hole in the compressor front head. 2. Install
the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver.
Page 1142
Figure 2.
NOTE
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (See Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION
Tighten the bolt no more then necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic
Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic
Classification: EL10-028
Reference: NTB10-106
Date: September 10, 2010
NATS SECURITY - VBC LOGIC
APPLIED VEHICLE: 2009 - 2011 All Nissan with NATS / Immobilizer System
SERVICE INFORMATION
All model year 2009 - 2011 Nissan vehicles equipped with NATS/Immobilizer system have the new
VBC (Validate Before Crank) starter relay logic.
VBC (Validate Before Crank) Logic:
^ The BCM will make sure that a valid (registered) key is being used before engaging the starter
relay. If the key is not authenticated the starter will not
operate.
^ If the engine cranks, the issue is not related to NATS. Do not replace NATS components (BCM,
I-Key, FOB Reader or RF Receiver). Refer to ASIST
for further diagnostic information as needed.
TCS/ABS
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair TCS/ABS
Wheel Sensors
WHEEL SENSORS
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
- When removing the front or rear wheel hub assembly, first remove the wheel sensor from the
assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires, making the sensor
inoperative.
- Pull out the sensor, be careful to turn it as little as possible. Do not pull on the sensor harness.
- Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following, and then tighten the
wheel sensor bolt to the specified torque.
- Before installing the wheel sensor, make sure there are no foreign materials (such as iron
fragments) adhered to the pick-up part of the wheel sensor, to the inside of the wheel sensor
mounting hole or on the rotor mounting surface.
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR
Removal 1. Remove the front wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service
and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Partially remove the front wheel fender protector.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair. 3.
Remove the wheel sensor bolt and wheel sensor. 4. Remove the harness wire from mounts and
disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR WHEEL SENSOR
Removal 1. Remove the wheel sensor bolt and wheel sensor from the rear wheel hub and bearing
assemblies. 2. Remove the harness wire from mounts and harness wire clips from the rear
suspension member. 3. Disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Sensor Rotor
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation
The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub. For removal and installation
procedure, refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear
Wheel Hub.
Page 4840
- Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the tube until a click is
heard.
- After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by pulling on the tube and the
connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the quick connector.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks: 1. Turn
the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to check the connections for fuel leaks with
the electric fuel pump applying fuel
pressure to the fuel piping.
2. Start the engine and let it idle to check that there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system tube and
hose connections.
Page 4565
5. Remove sunroof welt (if equipped). 6. Remove defrost grille assembly. Refer to See: Heating
and Air Conditioning/Air Duct/Service and Repair/Automatic/Removal And Installation. 7. Remove
front pillar finishers. Refer to See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 8. Remove front kicking plates
and door welts. Refer to See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 9. Remove center pillar assist grips.
Refer to See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair.
10. Remove assist grips from headlining. 11. Remove rear kicking plates and door welts. Refer to
See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 12. Remove center pillar seat belt anchors. Refer to See:
Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Front Seat Belt. 13. Remove
center pillar lower finishers. Refer to See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair.
- Disconnect harness from door open/close switch.
14. Remove center pillar lower then center pillar upper finishers. Refer to See: Trim Panel/Service
and Repair. 15. Remove tailgate kicking plate. Refer to See: Carpet/Service and Repair. 16.
Remove rear lower finisher assemblies RH/LH. Refer to See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 17.
Remove roof finisher. refer to See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 18. Remove seat belt D rings
from rear center pillar finishers and rear upper finishers. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt
Systems/Seat
Belt/Service and Repair/Front Seat Belt.
19. Remove front pillar upper finishers. Refer to See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 20. Release
clips from the rear, then remove rear roof console assembly (if equipped).
- Disconnect harness from rear roof console assembly.
21. Remove lower rear console bracket. 22. Remove rear audio control assembly (if equipped).
- Disconnect harness from audio control.
23. Remove rear air control assembly (if equipped).
- Disconnect harnesses from rear air control assembly.
24. Disconnect rear washer hose from headlining. 25. Remove headlining. 26. Remove the front
roof console bracket. 27. Remove rear roof console front and upper brackets. 28. Remove assist
grip brackets from roof.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 797
e. From the engine compartment, tighten the fittings between the upper and lower high pressure
pipe (A) and the low pressure pipe (B) as shown
to specification.
- Arrow Indicates Front
CAUTION: Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when tightening the
fittings.
4. Connect the power brake booster vacuum hose to the intake manifold collector. 5. Check that
there is sufficient clearance between the lower high/low pressure pipe and the front stabilizer bar.
Adjust the lower high/low pressure
pipe as necessary.
6. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and check the A/C system for leaks. Refer to See:
Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and
Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure.
7. Install the remaining components in the reverse order of removal.
Interior - Seat Arm Rest Is Loose
Arm Rest: Customer Interest Interior - Seat Arm Rest Is Loose
Classification: BT09-050
Reference: NTB09-089
Date: September 11, 2009
2004 - 2009 QUEST; SEAT ARMREST LOOSE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The armrest on a captain chair (front seats or 2nd row seats) is loose.
ACTION
1. Remove the armrest.
2. Replace bolt insert.
3. Apply Permatex(R) Threadlocker Blue or equivalent to bolt threads and torque to 28 Nm (2.85
kg-m, 20.6 lb-ft).
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 3634
Grilles
A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Classification: AT07-006B
Reference: NTB08-049B
Date: March 13, 2009
NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT
This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard
all earlier versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information,
the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to
the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used
as specified by the part number in this bulletin.
If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in
the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan
ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used.
PARTS INFORMATION
Locations
Air Bag Control Module: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SRS Component Parts Location
TCS/ABS
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair TCS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid.
Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid. 4.
Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). 5.
Disconnect the brake tubes.
CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
6. Remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket bolts and remove the ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit) with the
bracket.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Hydraulic Circuit for torque
specifications when connecting the brake tubes.
- After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with
new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the brake hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brake
Bleeding/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: To install the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool).
Page 4169
DESCRIPTION
Page 2608
CONTROL CABLE
Drive Plate
Flex Plate: Specifications Drive Plate
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Drive Plate
Page 2500
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 4141
Collision Avoidance Module: Service and Repair
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
Sonar Control Unit
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair to gain
access to sonar control unit.
2. Disconnect electrical connector then remove sonar control unit.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Cooling System - Long Life Coolant Information
Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Long Life Coolant Information
Classification: EM09-001A
Reference: NTB09-040A
Date: May 14, 2010
NEW BLUE NISSAN LONG LIFE ANTIFREEZE/COOLANT
This bulletin has been amended. The Service Information has been updated. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
SERVICE INFORMATION
In calendar year 2009, Nissan began filling some vehicles at the factory with a NEW Nissan Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (LLC) that is blue in color.
NOTE: LLC = Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
The transition to this new Blue LLC continued though MY 2010. Beginning with MY 2011, all
Nissan vehicles are filled at the factory with the Blue LLC.
^ MY 2009 and 2010: Some vehicles are filled at the factory with Blue LLC.
^ MY 2011: All vehicles are filled at the factory with Blue LLC.
Blue LLC is designed to have a service life of 7 years/105,000 miles for the factory fill, and 5
years/75,000 miles for subsequent replacement fills.
Nissan Blue Super LLC is available through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product
Program, Website order link via dealer portal www.NNAnet.com or order direct
www.NissanChemicals.com.
^ Blue LLC one gallon pre-diluted:
P/N 999MP - LP25500P
> The one gallon containers are pre-diluted with 50% antifreeze and 50% distilled water.
> Do not add additional water when using pre-diluted Blue LLC.
Page 5081
Page 3368
^ Apply the brakes as shown.
^ Start the engine to allow brake boost.
^ Turn the engine OFF,
^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates".
^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate.
Put the bridge plate in the down position.
^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle.
Page 3056
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Removal and Installation
Fuel Filter: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: Read "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See: Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions. 1. Remove the fuel tank. Refer to See: Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair.
Page 1324
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50288 (Ring Gear Stop) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on
December 3, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account was charged $26.90 plus applicable taxes and
freight.Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins), also considered
"Essential", was shipped to each dealer November 2009.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Write down all radio station presets.
Checking Fluid Level
Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Checking Fluid Level
POWER STEERING FLUID
Checking Fluid Level
Check fluid level, referring to the scale on reservoir tank. Use HOT range for fluid temperatures of
50° - 80°C (122° - 176°F). Use COLD range for fluid temperatures of 0° - 30°C (32° - 86°F).
CAUTION: Do not overfill.
- Do not reuse any used power steering fluid.
- Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Refer to See: Maintenance See:
Maintenance.
Page 783
Page 4186
Entertainment Systems: Description and Operation
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
Schematic
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
System Description
Refer to Owner's Manual for DVD entertainment system operating instructions. Power is supplied
at all times through 15A fuse [No. 22, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
- to DVD player terminal 16.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
Page 1871
Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic
Operation
Classification: BT07-032A
Reference: NTB07-070A
Date: September 25, 2009
SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been revised. No other changes
have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2007 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2007 - 2009
Maxima (A34, A35) 2007 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007 - 2009 Quest (V42) 2007 - 2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
Sunroof auto operation will not work or sunroof does not operate properly:
^ When the battery has been disconnected or discharged
^ When the sunroof motor has been disconnected from power
^ When the sunroof motor was changed
ACTION
Perform the following initialization procedure:
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully
closed.
3. After the sunroof has closed all the way, push and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) again for
more than 2 seconds to re-learn motor position.
4. Initialization is complete if the sunroof operates normally.
NOTE:
If the sunroof is still not operating properly after initialization, refer to ASIST and section RF of the
Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis and repair information.
Page 1934
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Page 3484
Control Arm: Service and Repair Front Lower Link
FRONT LOWER LINK
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly using power tool. Refer to See: Wheels and
Tires/Service and Repair/Pax Run Flat Tires And Wheels See:
Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel.
2. Set a transmission jack or suitable tool, to relieve the coil spring tension and support the front
lower link.
3. Disconnect the shock absorber lower end bolt using power tool. 4. Remove the front lower link
adjusting bolt using power tool.
5. Disconnect the front lower link nut and bolt from the wheel hub and spindle assembly using
power tool, then remove front lower link.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Suspension.
- After installing the front lower link, check the wheel alignment and adjust if necessary. Refer to
See: Alignment/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension.
Page 151
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Front Axle Nut
Page 3517
1. Set the shock absorber (strut) in a vise, then loosen (without removing) the piston rod lock nut as
shown.
CAUTION: Do not remove piston rod lock nut at this time. 2. Compress the spring using
commercial service tool until the shock absorber (strut) mounting insulator can be turned by hand.
WARNING: Make sure that the pawls of the two spring compressors are firmly hooked on the
spring. The spring compressors must be tightened alternately and evenly so as not to tilt the spring.
3. Remove the piston rod lock nut.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Shock Absorber Assembly Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension.
- Check for oil leakage on welded or gland packing portions.
- Check piston rod for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary.
Mounting Insulator and Rubber Parts Check cemented rubber-to-metal portion for separation or
cracks. Check rubber parts for deterioration and replace if necessary.
Thrust Bearing Check thrust bearing parts for abnormal noise or excessive rattle in axial direction
and replace if necessary.
Coil Spring Check for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary.
- Check the free spring height.
ASSEMBLY
Page 1255
Page EM-13
Page 1607
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 4893
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Page 2615
Transmission Cooler: Removal and Replacement
ATF Cooler
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
ATF Cooler
REMOVAL 1. Drain ATF. 2. Drain engine coolant. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 3. Remove hose clamps and hoses from
ATF cooler. 4. Remove bolt from ATF cooler and remove ATF cooler.
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal. Do not reuse sealing parts.
ATF Cooler Valve
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
ATF Cooler Valve
Page 1940
Page 3455
Steering Gear: Overhaul
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION: Use soft jaws when holding steering gear housing. Handle gear housing carefully, as it is made of
aluminum. Do not grip cylinder in a vise.
- Do not disassemble steering gear housing. Replace as an assembly.
1. Remove the outer tie-rods. 2. Remove the boot clamps and boot bands 3. Remove the inner
tie-rods and dust boots.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Thoroughly clean all parts in cleaning solvent or Genuine
NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance. Blow dry the parts with
compressed air.
Page 3609
Component
Intake Door Motor (Driver) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Intake Door Motor (Passenger) - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Page 2272
Fuel Injector: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1349
Page EM-19
Page 3995
3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see
Figure 3).
^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information.
4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring.
^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt
NOTE:
^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring.
^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly.
Page 1751
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Diagrams
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Diagrams
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Rear Washer Tube Layout
Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Pressure
Standard ..............................................................................................................................................
................. 1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2, 185 psi)/300 rpm Minimum ........................................................
........................................................................................................ 981 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2, 142
psi)/300 rpm Differential limit between cylinders
.............................................................................................................................. 98 kPa (1.0
kg/cm2, 14 psi)/300 rpm
Page 2538
5. Re-check the fluid level at fluid temperatures using the "HOT" range on the A/T fluid level gauge.
CAUTION: Firmly secure the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the
attached stopper, this will provide an accurate reading on the gauge, and will keep the gauge in
position while driving.
6. Check the fluid for the following conditions: If the fluid is very dark or smells burned, refer to the See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Changing
A/T Fluid. Flush the AT fluid cooling system after repairing the transaxle.
- If the fluid contains frictional material (from the clutches or bands), remove the radiator and flush
the cooler lines using a cleaning solvent and compressed air after completing repairs to the
transaxle. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Procedures/A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning.
Page 3478
Control Arm: Testing and Inspection Rear Lower Link And Coil Spring
REAR LOWER LINK AND COIL SPRING
Inspection
Check for deformation, cracks, or other damage and replace if necessary.
Page 3208
CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Display Item List
Page 1560
Page 2445
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
Specifications
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Camshaft Sprocket
Page 1259
Page EM-17
Page 4772
Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Check combination meter circuit. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges
and Warning Indicators/Locations See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators/Description and Operation/Combination Meter/System Description. 4.CHECK
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis For
Intermittent Incident/Description See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis For
Intermittent Incident/Diagnosis Procedure. >> INSPECTION END
Page 710
2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and
forth) movement (see Example 2):
^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm.
^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended.
Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped)
No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible.
Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the rotor.
NOTE:
The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is
removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected.
1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel.
2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front.
^ Pulley should be locked.
^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator.
3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front.
Page 2664
Axle Shaft Assembly: Vehicle Damage Warnings
Precaution For Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" And "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER",
used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage
front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag
deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and
whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system
safely is included in the Restraint Systems Information.
WARNING: To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
- Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to
personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and
Air Bag Module, see the Supplemental Restraint.
- Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS
wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Precaution
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution
CAUTION: When installing each rubber part, the final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition*
with tires on the ground. *Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and
mats in designated positions.
- After installing the removed suspension parts, check the front wheel alignment.
- Do not jack up the vehicle by the transverse link .
Observe the following precautions when disassembling and servicing drive shaft. Perform work in a location which is as dust-free as possible.
- Before disassembling and servicing, clean the outside of parts.
- Prevention of the entry of foreign objects must be taken into account during disassembly of the
service location.
- Disassembled parts must be carefully reassembled in the correct order. If work is interrupted, a
clean cover must be placed over parts.
- Paper shop cloths must be used. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger of
lint adhering to parts.
- Disassembled parts (except for rubber parts) should be cleaned with kerosene which shall be
removed by blowing with air or wiping with paper shop cloths.
Page 5130
OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - Replace display control unit. Refer to See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Service and Repair/Integrated Display
System. 2.CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CAN communication line check is executed.
Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Integrated Display System/CAN
Communication Line Check (With Color Display). OK or NG OK - Check the condition of the
harness and the connector. NG - In addition, it is necessary to check CAN communication line.
Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Integrated Display System/CAN
Communication Line Check (With Color Display).
Rear Window Defogger Circuit Inspection
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Rear Window Defogger Circuit Inspection
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect rear window defogger. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4.
Check voltage between rear window defogger connector D504 terminal + and ground.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - GO TO 3. 2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER GROUND
CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check continuity between rear window defogger connector D515
terminal - and ground.
Page 4743
1. Check to see if the 2 clips have come unattached from the sliding door welt.
^ If the clips are missing replace the door welt and proceed to step 2.
^ If the clips are not missing, reinstall the clips into the door welt by inserting the clips into the 2
holes located on the door welt, then proceed to step 2.
2. Prepare the surface by applying 3M(TM) Automotive Adhesion Promoter or equivalent on the
door welt and sliding door panel.
3. Apply 3M(TM) Acrylic Plus Tape or equivalent to the area as shown in Figure 2.
^ Tape size 5 mm x 20 mm x 1 mm (0.19 in x 0.78 in x 0.039 in)
4. Firmly press the door welt onto the sliding door panel.
^ Make sure the clips are securely inserted into the 2 holes located on the sliding door panel.
5. Check to make sure this issue has been resolved.
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Electronic Brake Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic
Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Page 1878
Page 2676
8. Install new large and small boot bands securely using Tool.
Tool number : KV40107300 ( - )
NOTE: Do not reuse boot bands.
CAUTION:
Secure boot band so that dimension "M" meets specification as shown.
Dimension "M" : 1.0 - 4.0 mm (0.039 - 0.157 in)
9. After installing housing and shaft, rotate boot to check whether or not the actual position is
correct. If boot position is not correct, remove old boot
bands then reposition the boot and secure with new boot bands.
Damper
1. Use new damper bands for installation. 2. Install damper from stationary-joint side while holding
it securely.
Page 1294
- C: Dowel pin hole
IVT control valve cover bolts : 11.3 N-m (1.2 kg-m, 100 in-lb)
12. Apply liquid gasket and install the water pump cover, if removed.
- Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent.
13. Install crankshaft pulley and tighten the bolt in two steps.
- Lubricate thread and seat surface of the bolt with new engine oil. - Apply a paint mark for the
second step of angle tightening.
Step 1 : 44 N-m (4.5 kg-m, 32 ft-lb) Step 2 : 84° - 90° degrees clockwise
14. Remove the Ring Gear Stopper Tool.
Tool number : (J-50288)
CAUTION: Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth behind the ring gear, when
removing the Tool.
15. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from front) to confirm it
turns smoothly. 16. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Installation
- Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than
required quantity, fill to the specified level. - Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. - Turn
ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel
leakage at connection points. - Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel
leakage at connection points. - Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. - Warm up
engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including
engine oil and engine coolant. - Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling
system. - After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine
coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary. - Summary of the inspection items:
TIMING CHAIN
Removal
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Removal
LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Removal
1. Remove steering column cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Steering Column Cover.
2. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and disconnect from
the base.
Page 1973
4. Through the above procedure, the error is detected in the TCM branch line (shaded in the figure
below).
NOTE: For abbreviations, refer to See: CAN/Abbreviation List. 5. Perform the inspection for the
detected error circuit. For the inspection procedure, refer to See: Trouble Diagnosis/Malfunction
Area Chart.
ATC
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair ATC
AMBIENT SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the ambient sensor connector.
NOTE: The ambient sensor is located behind the front bumper opening, in front of the condenser.
2. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal And Installation (Without Rear Power Vent
Windows)
Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair Removal And Installation (Without Rear Power Vent
Windows)
SIDE WINDOW GLASS
Removal and Installation (without Rear Power Vent Windows)
REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear pillar upper finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the rear side window latch bolts. 3.
Disconnect the antenna. 4. Remove the side window front bolts and glass.
CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
- Do set or stand glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
INSTALLATION 1. Install the glass from outside to insure that it is even with the top and bottom of
the opening. Tighten side window front bolts to the specified
torque.
2. Install rear side window latch bolts. 3. Connect the antenna. 4. Install rear pillar upper finisher.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair.
Locations
Headlamp Relay: Locations
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 3678
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Locations
Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Specifications
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Mass Air Flow Sensor
Page 4857
Page 1413
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. Refer to See:
Maintenance See: Maintenance.
1. Disconnect the tube clamp at the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube at the mass
air flow sensor. 2. Separate the mass air flow sensor from the air cleaner to electric throttle control
actuator tube. 3. Unhook the air cleaner case side clips and remove the air cleaner case (upper). 4.
Remove the air cleaner filter. 5. Install a new air cleaner filter. 6. Install the remaining components
in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1598
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 4779
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Testing and Inspection
Fusible Link: Testing and Inspection
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Fusible Link
A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its
condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp.
CAUTION: If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying
circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of incident.
- Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape.
- Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts.
ATC
Evaporator Core: Service and Repair ATC
Removal And Installation For Front Evaporator
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Front Evaporator
Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
REMOVAL 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly
HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the blower motor side cover. 3.
Remove the front blower motor.
4. Remove the heater core and evaporator case bottom cover. 5. Remove the blower motor case.
Page 3782
Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Page 3333
SPECIAL TOOLS
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Entertainment Systems: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnosis
Page 5163
^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise.
^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise.
2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator.
3. Install the regulator assembly into the door.
4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to
regulator.
5. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top.
Page 5110
Page 4788
Page 4216
Navigation Module: Locations Electrical Units Location
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 1388
5. Install the internal chain guide.
- If removed, reinstall slack guide. CAUTION: Do not overtighten slack guide bolts. It is normal for a
gap to exist under the bolt seats when bolts are tightened to specification. - Remove stopper pin
from timing chain tensioner (primary).
6. Make sure again that the matching marks on the sprockets and the timing chain have not slipped
out of alignment. 7. Tighten camshaft sprocket bolts to specification with all timing chains installed
and Ring Gear Stopper Tool holding the crankshaft.
Tool number : (J-50288)
8. Install the front timing chain case.
Inspection After Installation
- Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than
required quantity, fill to the specified level. - Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. - Turn
ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel
leakage at connection points. - Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel
leakage at connection points. - Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. - Warm up
engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including
engine oil and engine coolant. - Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling
system. - After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine
coolant. Refill to specified level, if necessary. - Summary of the inspection items:
Page 2299
2. Remove the lock ring using a socket drive handle and Tool as shown.
Tool number : KV991J0090 (J-46214)
3. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly from the fuel tank.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Make sure the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump is free
from defects and foreign materials.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Install the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly with the fuel feed hose facing the
front of the vehicle.
- Turn the lock ring until the lock ring is fully rotated into the fuel tank lock tabs as shown.
- Connect the quick connector as follows:
- Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials.
Service and Repair
Sound Proofing / Insulation: Service and Repair
BODY REPAIR
Foam Repair
During factory body assembly, foam insulators are installed in certain body panels and locations
around the vehicle. Use the following procedure(s) to replace any factory-installed foam insulators.
URETHANE FOAM APPLICATIONS Use commercially available spray foam for sealant (foam
material) repair of material used on vehicle. Read instructions on product for fill procedures.
FILL PROCEDURES 1. Fill procedures after installation of service part. Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side.
- Clean area in which foam was removed.
- Install service part.
- Insert nozzle into hole near fill area and fill foam material or fill in enough to close gap with the
service part.
2. Fill procedures before installation of service part. Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side.
- Clean area in which foam was removed.
- Fill foam material on wheelhouse outer side.
NOTE: Fill in enough to close gap with service part while avoiding flange area. Install service part.
NOTE: Refer to label for information on working times.
Service and Repair
Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
FRONT FOG LAMP
Bulb Replacement
The front fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen bulb.
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Turn fog lamp switch OFF before disconnecting and connecting the connector.
- Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
- Grasp only the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching
the glass could significantly affect the bulb life and/or fog lamp performance. Keep grease and
other oily substances away from bulb.
- Do not leave bulb out of fog lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture, smoke, etc.,
may affect the performance of fog lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one.
1. Position the front fender protector aside. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front
Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect electrical connector.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove bulb.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1160
OIL PUMP
OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)
Page 499
Diagrams
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams
SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)
Terminal Arrangement
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3
minutes.
Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it.
Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward.
Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has
been dropped or sustained an impact.
After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function
and delete the memory by CONSULT-III.
If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair
malfunctions. Refer to
Page 4782
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Locations
Overdrive Switch: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 3577
^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps.
5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure.
Generally this is 40psi.
If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure:
a. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
c. Remount the tire.
6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area.
^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel.
NOTE:
Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated.
If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform
1. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
3. Remount the tire.
Page 2812
Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 1592
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Power Door Lock System
Power Sliding Door Switch: Locations Power Door Lock System
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Testing and Inspection
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Testing and Inspection
REAR LOWER LINK AND COIL SPRING
Inspection
Check for deformation, cracks, or other damage and replace if necessary.
Service and Repair
Valve Cover: Service and Repair
ROCKER COVER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine cover using power tool. 2. If removing rocker cover (RH),
disconnect the mass air flow sensor electrical connector and remove the air cleaner to electric
throttle control
actuator tube and air cleaner lid. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air
Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair.
3. If removing rocker cover (RH), remove the front cowl panel. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 4. If removing rocker cover (RH), remove
the windshield wiper arms and motor assembly. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper
Motor/Service and Repair/Front Wiper And Washer System.
5. If removing rocker cover (RH), remove the intake manifold collector. Refer to See: Intake
Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold Collector
.
Page 1813
1. Remove the camshaft. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and
Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal
And Installation.
2. Remove the valve lifter that was measured as being outside the standard specifications.
3. Measure the center thickness of the removed lifter with a micrometer as shown. 4. Use the
equation below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement.
- Thickness of new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the
cylinder).
Available thickness of valve lifter: 27 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.40 mm (0.3102 to 0.3307 in) in
steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to See: Maintenance.
CAUTION: Install identification letter at the end and top, (U) and (N), at each of proper positions.
(Be careful of mis-installation between intake and exhaust.) 5. Install the selected replacement
valve lifter. 6. Install the camshaft. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft,
Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal
And Installation.
7. Rotate the crankshaft a few turns by hand. 8. Confirm that the valve clearances are within
specification. 9. After the engine has been run to full operating temperature, confirm that the valve
clearances are within specification.
Revolution Sensor Replacement
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Revolution Sensor Replacement
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Revolution Sensor Replacement
1. Remove intake air duct. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove revolution sensor from
A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Do not reuse seal bolt.
Page 5239
Wiper Motor: Locations Front Wiper And Washer System
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 4085
3. To locate a break, move probe along element. Tester indication will change abruptly when probe
passes the broken point.
Element Repair Refer to See: Windows and Glass/Heated Glass Element/Service and Repair.
Locations
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 1104
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-50288 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets (no picture shown).
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioners
plungers. Figure 1 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tools where shown in
Page 3714
Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair Refrigerant Lines
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch
REMOVAL 1. Remove the compressor. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Refrigerant Lines.
2. Remove the center bolt by holding the clutch disc steady using a suitable tool (A). 3. Remove the
clutch disc.
4. Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers. 5. Remove the pulley assembly using
Tool.
- Use a pulley puller with a small adapter. Position the small adapter on the end of the compressor
shaft and the center of the puller on the small adapter as shown.
Tool number : KV99233130 (J-29884)
CAUTION: To prevent deformation of the pulley groove, the puller claws should be hooked under
(not into) the pulley groove. 6. Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers.
Page 726
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair MTC
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
Removal and Installation
FUNCTION The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin microfilters when
the heater or A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin
microfilters are located in the front heater and cooling unit assembly. The rear heater and cooling
unit assembly only draws in air from the passenger compartment to recirculate into the passenger
compartment, so the rear heater and cooling unit assembly is not equipped with in-cabin
microfilters.
REPLACEMENT TIMING Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a
regular interval depending on the driving conditions. Refer to See: See: . It may also be necessary
to replace the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin
microfilters are damaged.
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the three screws and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. 3. Remove the in-cabin
microfilters from the front heater and cooling unit assembly. 4. Install the in-cabin microfilters,
replacing the two in-cabin microfilters with new filters, into the front heater and cooling unit
assembly.
CAUTION: When installing the two new in-cabin microfilters make sure that the filters are facing in
the direction indicated by the direction arrow for the air flow. The direction arrow is printed on the
side of the in-cabin microfilters. 5. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover. 6. Install the glove box
assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and
Repair.
Page 1589
Page 1237
Page EM-20
Page 118
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove coolant reservoir fasteners. 3. Move
coolant reservoir aside.
4. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover.
5. Remove IPDM E/R harness cover.
6. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 7. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and
remove the IPDM E/R.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Specifications
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Mass Air Flow Sensor
Page 997
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Special Service Tools
LIFTING POINT
Special Service Tool
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated
here.
CAUTION: Every time the vehicle is lifted up, maintain the complete vehicle curb condition.
- Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the front side (engine,
transmission, suspension etc.), support a jack up point on the rear side garage jack with a
transmission jack or equivalent.
- Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the rear side (rear
axle, suspension, etc.), support a jack up point on the front side garage jack with a transmission
jack or equivalent.
- Be careful not to smash or do anything that would affect piping parts.
Electrical - Trailer Light Wiring Info.
Trailer Adapter Kit: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Trailer Light Wiring Info.
Classification: EL03-043H
Reference: NTB04-049H
Date: April 13, 2011
TRAILER LIGHT WIRING
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard
previous versions of this is bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
SERVICE INFORMATION
NOTE:
This bulletin provides information to be shared with all affected customers.
^ This TSB contains the appropriate hookup points for connecting a trailer light wiring harness to
the towing vehicle's electrical system.
^ The wiring diagrams contained in this bulletin are for Nissan vehicles that have trailer towing
capability (see the owners manual) but do not have a
Genuine Nissan accessory towing kit (with wiring) available.
Page 5190
1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio,
Stereo, and Compact Disc/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3.
Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Temporarily reconnect the power window switch to the door
harness. 5. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the door
glass bolts can be seen. 6. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 7. Remove the door glass bolts.
8. Raise the door glass up into the door frame/channel and hold in place with a suitable tool (A). 9.
Disconnect the harness connector for the regulator assembly.
10. Remove the regulator nuts, and remove the regulator assembly.
Inspection After Removal Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is
detected, replace or grease it. Wire wear
- Regulator deformation
The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION AND
SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION".
Door glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
Disassembly 1. Remove the regulator motor bolts. 2. Remove the regulator motor from the
regulator assembly.
Assembly Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
FITTING INSPECTION AND SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator nuts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position.
Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in
the motor). Removal and installation of the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the regulator motor from the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the door glass.
- Removal and installation of the door glass run.
Page 1229
Page EM-12
Page 2893
5. Install wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and
Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel.
CAUTION: Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after
replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Front Brake Burnishing Procedure.
Disassembly and Assembly
FRONT DISC BRAKE
Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly
NOTE: Do not remove torque member, pads, shims, shim covers or pad retainers, when
disassembling or assembling cylinder body.
DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove caliper assembly. Refer to See: . 2. Remove cylinder body from torque
member, then sliding pin boots from torque member.
3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons
and piston boots.
WARNING: Do not get your fingers caught in the piston.
4. Remove the piston seal from the cylinder body using a suitable tool.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Cylinder Body
CAUTION: Use new brake fluid to clean. Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene.
- Check for corrosion, wear, or damage to the cylinder inner wall, and replace the caliper if there
are any non-standard conditions.
- Minor flaws caused by corrosion or a foreign material can be removed by polishing the surface
with a fine sandpaper. Replace the cylinder body, if necessary.
Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace
the affected part.
Piston
Page 437
13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part.
16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
Page 1343
Page EM-13
Page 434
NOTES:
^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply.
^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product
Program, Website order via link on dealer portal.
^ WD-40 is available from various local sources.
Removal Tool
^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to
accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and
strip the sensor.
^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box
end wrench or 6-point deep well socket.
1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice.
2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the
threads.
Page 3908
Rear A/C
Page 3103
Page 4126
AV-H/PHON-02
Page 1273
1. Timing chain tensioner (secondary)(LH) 2. Internal chain guide 3. Timing chain tensioner
(secondary)(RH) 4. Camshaft sprocket RH (EXH) 5. Timing chain (secondary) 6. Timing chain
(primary) 7. Camshaft sprocket RH (INT) 8. Camshaft sprocket LH (INT) 9. Timing chain
(secondary) 10. Camshaft sprocket LH (EXH) 11. Slack guide 12. Crankshaft sprocket 13. Tension
guide
CAUTION: - After removing timing chains, do not turn the crankshaft and camshaft separately, or
the valves will strike the pistons. - When installing camshafts, chain tensioners, oil seals, or other
sliding parts, lubricate contacting surfaces with new engine oil. - Apply new engine oil to bolt
threads and seat surfaces when installing camshaft sprockets, camshaft brackets, and crankshaft
pulley. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the rocker covers or intake manifold collector to
remove or install the timing chain(s).
Removal
1. Set No. 1 cylinder to TDC.
- Rotate crankshaft pulley clockwise to align timing mark (grooved line without color) with timing
indicator.
2. Remove front timing chain case. 3. Check timing chain markings to confirm No. 1 cylinder is at
TDC of its compression stroke.
- If not, remove Ring Gear Stopper Tool and turn crankshaft clockwise 360° (one revolution). Re-install Ring Gear Stopper Tool.
Page 3389
Alignment: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
Rear Wheel Alignment
Before checking rear wheel alignment, be sure to make a preliminary inspection.
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION Check tires for wear and for improper inflation.
- Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check
wheel runout. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Wheels/Testing and Inspection.
- Check rear wheel bearings for looseness.
- Check rear suspension for looseness.
- Check that rear shock absorber works properly.
- Check wheelarch height (unladen*). Refer to See: Specifications/Rear Suspension/Wheelarch
Height.
GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 1. A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should
be performed. This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN vehicle.
- The four-wheel "thrust" process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering
wheel is centered.
- The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN vehicle.
- The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level.
2. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information.
- Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended
Service/Calibration Schedule.
THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed. Refer to
See: Specifications/Rear Suspension/Wheel Alignment. 1. When displaying the alignment settings,
many alignment machines use "indicators": (Green/red, plus or minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use
these indicators.
- The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these
indicators may not be correct.
- This may result in an ERROR.
2. Some newer alignment machines are equipped with an optional "Rolling Compensation" method
to "compensate" the sensors (alignment
targets or head units). Do NOT use this "Rolling Compensation" method.
- Use the "Jacking Compensation" method. After installing the alignment targets or head units,
raise the vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways.
- See Instructions in the alignment machine you are using for more information.
CAMBER Measure camber of both right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge and adjust in
accordance with the following procedures.
Camber : Refer to See: Specifications/Rear Suspension/Wheel Alignment.
- If camber is not within specification, adjust by turning the adjusting bolts in the same direction.
Page 1283
4. Remove the Bank 1 (RH) IVT control valve cover.
- Loosen the IVT control valve cover bolts in the order as shown. CAUTION: The shaft in the IVT
control valve cover is inserted into the center hole of the intake camshaft sprocket. Remove the IVT
control valve cover by pulling straight out until the IVT control valve cover disengages from the
camshaft sprocket.
5. Remove the primary timing chain tensioner as follows:
a. Pull the lever (C) down to release the plunger stopper tab (B). b. Insert the stopper pin A into the
tensioner body hole to hold the lever (C) and keep the plunger stopper tab (B) released. c.
Compress the plunger (D) into the tensioner body (1) by pressing the slack guide (2). d. Keep the
slack guide (2) pressed and lock the plunger (D) in by pushing the stopper pin A through the lever
(C) and into the chain tensioner
body hole. - Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246.
e. Remove timing chain tensioner bolts and then remove the timing chain tensioner.
CAUTION: Be careful not to drop timing chain tensioner bolts inside timing chain case.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing primary timing chain tensioner, push
in plunger and keep it pressed in with stopper pin. Remove any dirt and foreign materials completely from the back and the mounting surfaces of
primary timing chain tensioner.
- After installation, pull out stopper pin.
- When installing the IVT control valve covers perform the following steps.
1. Install IVT control valve covers as follows:
a. Install new collared O-rings in front cover oil hole (LH and RH sides).
Page 3350
^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates.
^ Chock the left rear wheel.
Preliminary Checks:
3. Perform pre-alignment checks.
^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.)
^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation)
^ Tire pressure
^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components
^ Wheel bearing axial play
^ Ball joints of suspension arms
^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage
^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack)
^ Vehicle weight
> Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers
> Fuel level is full
Page 2668
Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Removal and Installation (Left Side)
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
Removal and Installation (Left Side)
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and
Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Remove wheel sensor from steering
knuckle. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Wheel Speed
Sensor/Service and Repair/TCS/ABS/Wheel Sensors (TCS/ABS) See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and
Repair/VDC/TCS/ABS/Wheel Sensors (VDC/TCS/ABS).
3. Remove cotter pin. Then remove lock nut from drive shaft. 4. Remove brake hose lock plate.
Then remove brake hose from strut. 5. Remove the lower ball joint pinch bolt using power tool, then
separate lower ball joint from steering knuckle. Refer to See: Wheel Hub/Service
and Repair/Front Wheel Hub And Knuckle.
6. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly, using a puller or suitable tool.
CAUTION: When removing drive shaft, do not apply an excessive angle to drive shaft joint. Also be careful not
to excessively extend slide joint.
7. Remove drive shaft from transaxle using Tool and drive shaft puller or suitable tool. Set Tool and a drive shaft puller or suitable tool between drive shaft (slide joint side) and transaxle
as shown and remove drive shaft.
Tool number : KV40107500 ( - )
Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Classification: WT11-003
Reference: NTB11-029
Date: March 21, 2011
TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration.
^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care
to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin.
Tire Mounting Tips:
NOTE:
These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to
read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment
1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid.
^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process.
2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and
corrosion.
Page 1266
Tool number : (J-50288)
CAUTION: Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth behind the ring gear, when
setting the Tool.
b. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt so that there is a 10 mm (0.39 in) gap between bolt and crankshaft
pulley.
CAUTION: Do not remove crankshaft pulley bolt. Keep loosened crankshaft pulley bolt in place to
protect the crankshaft pulley from dropping.
c. Position a suitable tool at recess hole of crankshaft pulley to remove crankshaft pulley.
CAUTION: Do not use a puller claw on the outside edge of the crankshaft pulley.
24. Disconnect the oil pressure switch harness connector. 25. Disconnect valve timing control
harness connector.
26. Remove the Bank 1 (RH) (A) and Bank 2 (LH) (B) IVT control valve covers.
- Loosen the IVT control valve cover bolts in the reverse order as shown. CAUTION: The shaft in
the IVT control valve cover is inserted into the center hole of the intake camshaft sprocket. Remove
the IVT control valve cover by pulling straight out until the IVT control valve cover disengages from
the camshaft sprocket.
- A: Bank 1 (Conventional RH bank)
- B: Bank 2 (Conventional LH bank)
- C: Dowel pin hole
27. Remove the A/C idler pulley and bracket and the drive belt auto-tensioner. 28. If necessary,
remove the idler pulley and water pump cover.
Page 996
Board-On Lift
LIFTING POINT
Board-on Lift
CAUTION: Make sure vehicle is empty when lifting.
The board-on lift attachment at the front end of the vehicle should be set on the front of the sill
under the front door opening.
Position attachments at front and rear ends of board-on lift.
Page 1469
8. Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches of vacuum. The gauge may not
reach 28 inches in high altitude locations, use the
vacuum specifications below, based on the altitude above sea level.
9. When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20
seconds to see if the system loses any vacuum. If
the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the system and repeat steps 6 - 8 to
bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks.
10. Place the coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the
radiator. Then open the ball valve on the refill hose so
the coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling system is full when the vacuum
gauge reads zero.
CAUTION: Do not allow the coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being
drawn into the cooling system.
11. Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening. 12. Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to
the specified level, and install the radiator cap. Run the engine to warm up the cooling system and
top up
the system as necessary.
FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM 1. Fill the radiator from the filler neck above the radiator upper
hose and reservoir tank with clean water and reinstall radiator filler cap. 2. Run the engine and
warm it up to normal operating temperature. 3. Rev the engine two or three times under no-load. 4.
Stop the engine and wait until it cools down. 5. Drain the water from the system. Refer to See: . 6.
Repeat steps 1 through 5 until clear water begins to drain from the radiator.
Page 1300
1. Internal chain guide 2. Camshaft sprocket (INT) 3. Mating mark (copper link) 4. Mating mark
(punched) 5. Timing chain tensioner (secondary) 6. Mating mark (yellow link) 7. Timing chain
(secondary) 8. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 9. Tension guide 10. Water pump
11. Crankshaft sprocket 12. Mating mark (notched) 13. Timing chain (primary) 14. Slack guide 15.
Timing chain tensioner (primary) 16. Mating mark (back side) 17. Crankshaft key
NOTE: The figure above shows the relationship between the mating mark on each timing chain and
that on the corresponding sprocket, with the components installed.
1. Make sure that dowel pin hole, dowel pin of camshaft and crankshaft key are located as shown.
(No. 1 cylinder at compression TDC)
NOTE: - Though camshaft does not stop at the position as shown, for the placement of cam nose,
it is generally accepted camshaft is placed for the same
direction of the figure.
Camshaft dowel pin hole (intake side)
: At cylinder head upper face side in each bank.
Camshaft dowel pin (exhaust side)
: At cylinder head upper face side in each bank.
Crankshaft key
: At cylinder head side of right bank.
2. Install the timing chains (secondary) and camshaft sprockets as follows:
CAUTION: Mating marks between timing chain and sprockets slip easily. Confirm all mating mark
positions repeatedly during the installation process.
a. Push plunger of timing chain tensioner (secondary) and keep it pressed in with stopper pin.
Page 2332
Page 465
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 4751
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Page 694
Page 4027
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor
mechanism (see Figure 2).
2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor
mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip.
Page 1587
Page 4076
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Technician Safety Information
Information Bus: Technician Safety Information
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER",
used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage
front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag
deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and
whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system
safely is included in the Restraint Systems information.
WARNING: To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
- Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to
personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and
Air Bag Module, see the "SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM".
- Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS
wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Page 2896
6. Attach the pad retainer to the torque member.
CAUTION: When attaching the pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it does not float up higher than
the torque member, as shown. 7. After assembling the shims and the shim covers to the pad,
install it to the torque member. 8. Install cylinder body and tighten sliding pin to the specification.
Refer to See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Front/Exploded View.
Page 1833
Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure
Page 4781
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Page 2967
2. Place the side flange of cylinder body with chamfering around the pin insertion hole facing up,
and firmly set master cylinder assembly in a vise.
CAUTION: When setting the master cylinder assembly with the vise, be sure not to over-tighten.
- When securing with a vise, use copper plates or cloth to protect the flange.
3. Remove pin on the reservoir tank, using a suitable tool [commercial service tool: diameter
approx. 4 mm (0.16 in)]. 4. Remove master cylinder assembly from the vise. 5. Remove reservoir
tank and grommets from cylinder body. 6. Remove brake fluid level switch from reservoir tank, if
necessary.
7. Push in the piston and remove the piston stopper from the cylinder body using a suitable tool.
8. Carefully pull the primary piston assembly straight out to prevent cylinder inner wall from being
damaged using a suitable tool.
Page 1364
Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications
Timing Chain Tensioner
Page 1898
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 1249
Page EM-7
Page 1467
5. Check the drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. -
If contaminated, flush the engine cooling system.
REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Install the radiator drain plug. If the cooling system was drained
completely, install the reservoir tank and the cylinder block drain plugs and
tighten to specification.
CAUTION: If the vehicle is equipped with an engine block heater in place of the cylinder block LH
drain plug, do not remove the engine block heater. The radiator must be completely empty of coolant and water.
- Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plugs.
Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid
Type Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants.
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage
Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision
Damage
Classification: FA10-006
Reference: NTB10-126
Date: October 21, 2010
WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight
indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise.
NOTE:
Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a
warrantable repair
If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension
damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows:
1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle.
2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands.
3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise).
4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one.
Locations
Starter Relay: Locations
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 1284
b. Install new seal rings on the IVT control valve covers. c. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to the IVT
control valve covers.
- Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent.
- Being careful not to move the seal ring from the installation groove, align the dowel pins on the
chain case with the holes to install the IVT
control valve covers.
- Tighten the intake valve timing control valve cover bolts in the order as shown.
IVT control valve cover bolts: 11.3 N-m (1.2 kg-m, 100 in-lb)
Removal and Installation (Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the timing chains (primary) and (secondary). 2. Remove the rocker covers. 3. Remove
the camshaft brackets (No. 1). 4. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioners.
Page 1389
TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER
1. Timing chain tensioner (secondary)(LH) 2. Internal chain guide 3. Timing chain tensioner
(secondary)(RH) 4. Camshaft sprocket RH (EXH) 5. Timing chain (secondary) 6. Timing chain
(primary) 7. Camshaft sprocket RH (INT) 8. Camshaft sprocket LH (INT) 9. Timing chain
(secondary) 10. Camshaft sprocket LH (EXH) 11. Slack guide 12. Crankshaft sprocket 13. Tension
guide
Removal and Installation (Primary Timing Chain Tensioner)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front RH wheel and tire. 2. Remove the fender protector side cover RH. 3. Support
the engine with suitable jack and remove the RH engine insulator, mount and bracket.
Page 2110
4. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. -
Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable
pedal electric motor as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the
accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal
nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from
the pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
9. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the
adjustable accelerator pedal as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity.
10. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when
applying or releasing the accelerator pedal.
- Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding
or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward.
- Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning.
NON-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL
Removal 1. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the upper
and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 3. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from
the pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Page 1275
After removing timing chains, do not turn the crankshaft and camshaft separately, or the valves will
strike the pistons.
8. Remove crankshaft sprocket, if necessary. 9. Remove timing chain (secondary) and camshaft
sprockets as follows:
a. Attach stopper pin (B) to the right (A) and left (C) timing chain tensioners (secondary) (1).
NOTE: - Use stopper pins included with Tool J-50246.
b. Remove camshaft sprocket (INT and EXH) bolts.
c. Remove the timing chains (secondary) together with camshaft sprockets (INT) and (EXH).
- Turn camshaft slightly to secure slack of timing chain on timing chain tensioner (secondary) side.
- Insert metal or resin plate [0.5 mm (0.020 in)] into guide between timing chain (secondary) and
timing chain tensioner (secondary) plunger.
Remove camshaft sprocket and timing chain (secondary) with timing chain removed from guide
groove.
CAUTION: Timing chain tensioner plunger can move while stopper pin is inserted in timing chain
tensioner. Plunger can come out of tensioner when timing chain is removed. Use caution during
removal. NOTE: Camshaft sprocket (INT) is a one piece integrated design with sprockets for timing
chain (primary) and for timing chain (secondary).
Page 1533
WARNING: -
Perform the work when the exhaust and cooling system have completely cooled down.
- When removing the front and rear engine mounting through bolts and nuts, lift the engine up
slightly for safety. For engine slingers, refer to See: Engine/Service and Repair.
1. Disconnect battery. Refer to See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement. 2. Remove cowl top. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding /
Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) connector. 4. Remove
the front wheel and tires using power tool. 5. Remove the engine undercover. 6. Remove the inner
wheel well splash shields. 7. If removing only air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) do so at this time
through the wheel well opening, using Tool.
Tool number : KV991J0050 (J-44626)
8. If removing the exhaust manifold (LH bank), remove the radiator and cooling fan assembly.
Refer to See: Cooling System/Radiator/Service and
Repair.
9. Remove the front exhaust tube. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Exploded View.
10. If removing the exhaust manifold (RH), remove the front suspension member. Refer to See:
Steering and Suspension/Suspension/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Suspension Member.
11. Remove the bank 1 (1) and bank 2 (2) three way catalyst manifolds support bolts in the order
as shown.
Arrow Indicates : Engine front
12. Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1), heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2), air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 (bank 1) and air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
(bank 2). a. Remove harness connector of each sensor, and disconnect the harness from the
bracket and middle clamp. b. Remove both heated oxygen sensors and air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors
using Tool.
Tool numbers : KV10114400 (J-38365)
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage heated oxygen sensors or air fuel ratio (A/F) sensors.
- Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new sensor.
13. Remove exhaust manifold and three way catalyst manifold heat shields using power tool. 14.
Remove the three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 1) and three way catalyst (manifold) (bank 2) by
loosening the bolts first and then removing the
nuts and through bolts using power tool.
15. Remove the RH bank (1) and LH bank (2) exhaust manifolds.
Loosen the exhaust manifold nuts in the order as shown using power tool. Arrow Indicates : Engine
front
Page 795
NOTE: Reposition the rear heater pipe clamp (3) for additional clearance to remove the lower
section of the high/low pressure pipe as necessary.
d. Pry off the pipe support clip (1) secured to the dash panel threaded stud, using a suitable tool.
e. Carefully remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe (1).
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the open pipe connections with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to
avoid the entry of air, moisture and contamination.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Clean all of the A/C pipe fittings and connections.
- Replace the O-rings of the high/low-pressure pipe with new ones.
- Lubricate all the O-rings with the specified A/C system oil.
NOTE: The service replacement high/low pressure pipe is a two piece pipe assembly. 1. Install and
position the new lower high/low pressure pipe without tightening the connections.
NOTE: To ease installation, first remove the A/C support clip from the lower section high/low
pressure pipe and secure it to the dash panel threaded stud. 2. Install the new upper high/low
pressure pipe through the engine compartment.
a. Install the high/low pressure pipe to the front expansion valve and only hand tighten the
connector bolt (1) as shown.
- Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube (2)
- Electric throttle control actuator (3)
- Arrow Indicates Front
Page 1994
OK Present error: Replace the BCM. Refer to See: Body Control Module/Service and Repair.
- Past error: Error was detected in the BCM branch line.
NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
CAN Communication Circuit
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CAN Communication Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF 2. Disconnect the battery cable from
the negative terminal. 3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system. 4.
Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO
2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector.
2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT) Check the continuity between the data link
connector terminals.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the harness and repair the root cause.
3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT) Check the continuity between the data link
connector and the ground.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the harness and repair the root cause.
4.CHECK ECM AND IPDM E/R TERMINATION CIRCUIT 1. Remove the ECM and the IPDM E/R.
2. Check the resistance between the ECM terminals.
Page 285
The rear wheel sensor rotor is built into the rear wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure,
refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Wheel Hub.
Page 1262
Page EM-20
Page 2919
Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Rear
REAR DISC BRAKE
Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor
REMOVAL
1. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies using power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to See:
Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. 3. Remove union bolt and torque member bolts using power
tool, and remove cylinder body. 4. Remove caliper and disc rotor. If the disc rotor cannot be
removed, remove as follows: -
Make sure parking brake lever is completely disengaged.
- Hold down the disc rotor with the wheel nut and remove the adjuster hole plug.
- Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver through the plug opening and rotate the adjuster in the direction
shown to loosen and retract the brake shoes.
- Prior to removing disc rotor, make alignment mark using a marker between the hub and disc rotor.
- Remove wheel nut and rotor.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Install the disc rotor. Align the marks made during removal on the hub and disc rotor.
2. Install the cylinder body, and tighten the torque member bolts to specification. Refer to See:
Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Rear/Exploded View.
CAUTION: Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off oil and grease on washer seats
on axle assembly and mounting surface of cylinder body. 3. Install brake hose to cylinder body and
tighten union bolt to specification. Refer to See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Rear/Exploded View.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper washer for the union bolts.
- Securely attach the brake hose to the protrusion on the cylinder body.
4. Add new brake fluid and bleed the air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. 5.
Adjust the parking brake. Refer to See: Parking Brake System/Testing and Inspection. 6. Install the
wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and
Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel.
Page 768
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor
mechanism (see Figure 2).
2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor
mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip.
ATC
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair ATC
Defroster Door Motor
DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
Defroster Door Motor - Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
REMOVAL 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly
HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the steering member from the
front heater and cooling unit assembly. 3. Disconnect the defroster door motor electrical connector.
4. Remove the two screws and remove the defroster door motor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Component
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
Page 3235
Page 2069
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 3202
- CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.
- Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.
- When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status.
2. Sleep waiting status Process to stop CAN communication is activated.
- All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN
communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status.
3. Sleep status IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode.
- CAN communication is stopped.
- When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
- When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
Page 3008
Page 163
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 4771
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following
conditions.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake Pedal
Assy/Testing and Inspection, and perform step 3 again.
Component Description
ASCD INDICATOR
Component Description
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators,
CRUISE and SET, and is integrated in combination meter. CRUISE indicator illuminates when
MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicate that ASCD system is ready for
operation. SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met. CRUISE indicator is illuminated.
- SET/COAST switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range
of ASCD setting. SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control. Refer to See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Automatic Speed Control
Device (ASCD)/System Description for the ASCD function.
Diagnosis Procedure
ASCD INDICATOR
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.
OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. 2.CHECK DTC Check that DTC UXXXX is
not displayed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC UXXXX.
Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/U Code Charts/U0101.
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER OPERATION Does combination meter operate normally? Yes
or No
Page 2427
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
SPARK PLUG
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to See: Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal
And Installation LH and See: Ignition Coil/Service and
Repair/Removal And Installation RH.
CAUTION: Do not shock ignition coil.
2. Remove the spark plugs using a suitable tool. If replacing the spark plugs use the correct spark plug for maximum performance. Refer to See:
Maintenance.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
CAUTION: Do not use a wire brush for cleaning.
Page 492
DESCRIPTION
Page 3348
^ Make sure the rear slide plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place.
NOTE:
Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep.
The Alignment Process
The Alignment Process
IMPORTANT:
Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the
alignment.
1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack.
^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in
Figure 4.
^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5).
^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then
re-enter the rack.
^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front
wheels straight.
Page 3116
Starter Motor: Description and Operation
STARTING SYSTEM
System Description
Power is supplied at all times: to starter motor terminal B, and
- through 40A fusible link (letter k, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
- to ignition switch terminal B.
With the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied: from ignition switch terminal ST
- to IPDM E/R terminal 4.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
- to park/neutral position (PNP) switch terminal 1.
With the selector lever in the P or N position, power is supplied: through PNP switch terminal 5
- to IPDM E/R terminal 53.
Ground is supplied at all times: to IPDM E/R terminals 38, 50 and 60
- through body grounds E9, E15 and E24.
Provided that the IPDM E/R receives a starter relay request ON signal from the BCM over the CAN
lines, the IPDM E/R grounds the starter relay and power is supplied: from terminal 3 of the IPDM E/R
- to terminal S of the starter motor windings.
The starter motor plunger closes and provides a closed circuit between the battery and the starter
motor. The starter motor is grounded to the cylinder block. With power and ground supplied, the
starter motor operates.
Page 2048
Front Disc Brake
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Disc Brake
Removal And Installation
FRONT DISC BRAKE
Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to See: Brake
Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid.
3. Remove union bolt and torque member bolts using power tool, then remove cylinder body. 4.
Remove disc rotor.
CAUTION: Put matching marks on both disc rotor and wheel hub when removing disc rotor.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Install disc rotor.
CAUTION: Align matching marks made during removal when reusing disc rotor.
2. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, and tighten torque member bolts to specification. Refer to
See: Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front/Exploded View.
CAUTION: Before installing the cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe any oil off the knuckle spindle
washers and cylinder body attachment surfaces. 3. Install brake hose to the cylinder body, and
tighten union bolt to the specification. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front/Exploded View.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper washer for union bolts.
- Attach the brake hose to the protrusion on the cylinder body attachment part.
4. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair.
Page 588
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Page 4282
Page 3787
REMOVAL 1. Remove the cowl top. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding /
Trim/Service and Repair. 2. Partially drain the engine cooling system. Refer to See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 3. Unclip the heater pump from
the cowl top extension. 4. Disconnect the heater pump electrical connector and the two heater
hoses, then remove the heater pump.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the heater pump, replace the heater pump as an assembly.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2073
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 2712
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Locations
Seat Occupant Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SRS Component Parts Location
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications
Automatic Air Conditioner
REFRIGERANT
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
........................................ 900 ± 50 g (1.98 ± 0.11 lb)
Manual Air Conditioner
REFRIGERANT
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
........................................ 900 ± 50 g (1.98 ± 0.11 lb)
Page 1517
11. Remove the timing chain tensioner assembly.
a. Pull the lever down and release the plunger stopper tab. b. Insert the stopper pin into the
tensioner body hole to hold the lever and keep the stopper tab released.
NOTE: An allen wrench [2.5 mm (0.098 in)] is used for a stopper pin as an example.
c. Insert the plunger into the tensioner body by pressing the timing chain slack guide. d. Keep the
slack guide pressed and hold the plunger stopper tab in by pushing the stopper pin deeper through
the lever and into the timing chain
tensioner body hole.
e. Make a gap between water pump gear and timing chain by turning the crankshaft pulley
approximately 20° clockwise.
12. Remove timing chain tensioner.
CAUTION: Be careful not to drop timing chain tensioner bolts inside front timing chain case.
13. Remove the three water pump bolts. Make a maximum gap between water pump gear and
timing chain by turning crankshaft pulley
counterclockwise until timing chain loosens on water pump sprocket.
14. Screw M8 bolts [pitch: 1.25 mm (0.49 in) length: approx. 50 mm
Page 2005
OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector.
2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of display control unit. 2.
Check the resistance between the display control unit harness connector terminals.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the display control unit branch line.
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground
circuit of the display control unit. Refer to. Models with color display: See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact
Disc/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Integrated Display
System/Power Supply And Ground Circuit Inspection For Display Control Unit
- Models with navigation system: See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Navigation
System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Supply And
Ground Circuit Inspection For Display Control Unit
OK or NG OK >> Present error: Replace the display control unit. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Service and Repair/Integrated Display System.
- Past error: Error was detected in the display control unit branch line.
NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
Display Unit Branch Line Circuit
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Display Unit Branch Line Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the
negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the display unit for damage, bend and
loose connection (unit side and connector side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the
terminal and connector.
2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of display unit. 2. Check
the resistance between the display unit harness connector terminals.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the display unit branch line.
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground
circuit of the display unit. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and
Compact Disc/Description and Operation/Integrated Display System. OK or NG OK >> Present error: Replace the display unit. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio,
Stereo, and Compact Disc/Service and Repair/Integrated Display System.
- Past error: Error was detected in the display unit branch line.
Page 3352
5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly.
^ Mount the top claws first.
^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13.
^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14.
^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level.
IMPORTANT:
Page 1784
2. Remove the lock ring using a socket drive handle and Tool as shown.
Tool number : KV991J0090 (J-46214)
3. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly from the fuel tank.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Make sure the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump is free
from defects and foreign materials.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Install the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly with the fuel feed hose facing the
front of the vehicle.
- Turn the lock ring until the lock ring is fully rotated into the fuel tank lock tabs as shown.
- Connect the quick connector as follows:
- Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials.
Page 3685
Removal 1. Remove the rear heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater Core
Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the three screws and remove the
blower motor.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 791
NOTE: To ease installation, first remove the A/C support clip from the lower section high/low
pressure pipe and secure it to the dash panel threaded stud. 2. Install the new upper high/low
pressure pipe through the engine compartment.
a. Install the high/low pressure pipe to the front expansion valve and only hand tighten the
connector bolt (1) as shown.
- Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube (2)
- Electric throttle control actuator (3)
- Arrow Indicates Front
b. Hand tighten the fittings between the upper and lower high pressure pipe (A) and the low
pressure pipe (B) as shown.
- Arrow Indicates Front
c. Hand tighten the high pressure pipe connection (1) and low pressure pipe connection (2) located
near the RH front suspension strut tower (3)
as shown.
d. Install the A/C pipe clamp bolt (A) to the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown. e. Attach
the high/low pressure pipe to the A/C support clip (secured to the dash panel threaded stud). f.
Tighten the high pressure pipe connection (1) and low pressure pipe connection (2) located near
the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown to specification.
3. Complete the installation of the lower high/low pressure pipe.
CAUTION: Clean all of the A/C pipe fittings and connections.
- Replace the O-rings of the high/low-pressure pipe with new ones.
- Lubricate all the O-rings with the specified A/C system oil.
Page 1949
Information Bus: Vehicle Damage Warnings
CAN
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER",
used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage
front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag
deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and
whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system
safely is included in the Restraint Systems information.
WARNING: To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
- Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to
personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and
Air Bag Module, see the "SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM".
- Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS
wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
CAN Fundamental
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Harness Repair
- Solder the repaired area and wrap tape around the soldered area.
NOTE: A fray of twisted lines must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).
- Bypass connection is never allowed at the repaired area.
NOTE: Bypass connection may cause CAN communication error. The spliced wire becomes
separated and the characteristics of twisted line are lost.
- Replace the applicable harness as an assembly if error is detected on the shield lines of CAN
communication line.
CAN
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Harness Repair
Page 349
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly
Fuel Level Sender Unit
Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors (1) and the wire connector (4). 2. Remove the
fuel sensor (2) from the pump assembly. 3. Depress the tabs (3) and remove the floater arm
assembly (5).
Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly.
Page 4006
5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5).
^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit.
6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure
6A.
NOTE:
^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle.
^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle.
Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8:
^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned.
^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring.
^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no
wrinkles or ridges are present.
^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D"
ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece.
7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B).
Page 5135
Heated Glass Element: Service and Repair
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Filament Repair
REPAIR EQUIPMENT Conductive silver composition (DuPont No. 4817 or equivalent)
- Ruler 30 cm (11.8 in) long
- Drawing pen
- Heat gun
- Alcohol
- Cloth
REPAIRING PROCEDURE 1. Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with a cloth
dampened in alcohol.
2. Apply a small amount of conductive silver composition to tip of drawing pen. Shake silver
composition container before use. 3. Place ruler on glass along broken line. Deposit conductive
silver composition on break with drawing pen. Slightly overlap existing heat wire on
both sides [preferably 5 mm (0.20 in)] of the break.
4. After repair has been completed, check repaired wire for continuity. This check should be
conducted 10 minutes after silver composition is
deposited.
Do not touch repaired area while test is being conducted.
5. Apply a constant stream of hot air directly to the repaired area for approximately 20 minutes with
a heat gun. A minimum distance of 3 cm (1.2 in)
should be kept between repaired area and hot air outlet.
If a heat gun is not available, let the repaired area dry for 24 hours.
Page 1067
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Before starting engine, check the levels of engine coolant, engine oil and working fluid. If less than
required quantity, fill to the specified level.
- Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage.
- Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for
fuel leakage at connection points.
- Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
- Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
- Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of engine coolant, engine oil,
working fluid, fuel and exhaust gas.
- Bleed air from passages in pipes and tubes of applicable lines, such as in cooling system.
- After cooling down engine, again check amounts of engine coolant, engine oil and working fluid.
Refill to specified level, if necessary.
- Summary of the inspection items:
VIN Registration
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair VIN Registration
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
VIN Registration
DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed
each time ECM is replaced.
NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M).
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-III 1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to See: Application and
ID/Model Variation. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. 3. Select "VIN
REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III display.
Locations
Horn Relay: Locations
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Page 4288
Component Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2077
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 1756
Page 3852
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair MTC
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and
Repair/Procedures.
2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector and remove the refrigerant pressure
sensor from the condenser.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hose/Line
HVAC/Locations.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
- Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil
to it when installing it.
Page 4185
AV-DVD-06
Electrical - Trailer Light Wiring Info.
Trailer Lamps: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Trailer Light Wiring Info.
Classification: EL03-043H
Reference: NTB04-049H
Date: April 13, 2011
TRAILER LIGHT WIRING
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard
previous versions of this is bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
SERVICE INFORMATION
NOTE:
This bulletin provides information to be shared with all affected customers.
^ This TSB contains the appropriate hookup points for connecting a trailer light wiring harness to
the towing vehicle's electrical system.
^ The wiring diagrams contained in this bulletin are for Nissan vehicles that have trailer towing
capability (see the owners manual) but do not have a
Genuine Nissan accessory towing kit (with wiring) available.
Page 1420
Fuel Filter: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly
Fuel Level Sender Unit
Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors (1) and the wire connector (4). 2. Remove the
fuel sensor (2) from the pump assembly. 3. Depress the tabs (3) and remove the floater arm
assembly (5).
Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly.
Locations
Collision Avoidance Sensor: Locations
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Front Axle Nut
Page 1403
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Fuel Pressure Check
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in
"WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or
three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
Without CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn
ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out.
The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because V42 models never have fuel return
system.
Method A
CAUTION: The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for other
purposes.
- Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick
connector maintains seal ability with O-rings inside.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Prepare fuel hose for
fuel pressure check, and connect fuel pressure gauge. -
Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine NISSAN fuel hose without quick
connector).
- To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moderately long fuel hose for fuel pressure
check.
- Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with damage or cracks on it.
- Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Intake Manifold. Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
- Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
- Keep the original fuel hose to be free from intrusion of dust or foreign substances with a suitable
cover.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Cruise Control: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Page 3544
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Special Service Tools
LIFTING POINT
Special Service Tool
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated
here.
CAUTION: Every time the vehicle is lifted up, maintain the complete vehicle curb condition.
- Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the front side (engine,
transmission, suspension etc.), support a jack up point on the rear side garage jack with a
transmission jack or equivalent.
- Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the rear side (rear
axle, suspension, etc.), support a jack up point on the front side garage jack with a transmission
jack or equivalent.
- Be careful not to smash or do anything that would affect piping parts.
Page 5027
Page 3216
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove coolant reservoir fasteners. 3. Move
coolant reservoir aside.
4. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover.
5. Remove IPDM E/R harness cover.
6. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 7. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and
remove the IPDM E/R.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4883
Page 3661
Page 3636
The defroster nozzle is part of the instrument panel and is replaced as an assembly.
Removal Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel .
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Fresh Air Duct
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
FRESH AIR DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel .
2. Remove the defroster nozzle. 3. Remove the fresh air duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Defroster Duct
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
DEFROSTER DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater Core
Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the defroster duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
RH and LH Side Demister Duct
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
RH AND LH SIDE DEMISTER DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater Core
Case/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the RH or LH side demister duct.
RH, LH, and Center Ventilator Duct
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
RH, LH, AND CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel.
Page 2074
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Service and Repair
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Wiper and Washer Switch
REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column covers. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Steering Column Cover.
2. Remove wiper washer switch electrical connector. 3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch
base and slide switch away from steering column to remove.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Front Disc Brake
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Disc Brake
Removal And Installation
FRONT DISC BRAKE
Removal and Installation of Caliper Assembly and Disc Rotor
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to See: Hydraulic
System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid.
3. Remove union bolt and torque member bolts using power tool, then remove cylinder body. 4.
Remove disc rotor.
CAUTION: Put matching marks on both disc rotor and wheel hub when removing disc rotor.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Install disc rotor.
CAUTION: Align matching marks made during removal when reusing disc rotor.
2. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, and tighten torque member bolts to specification. Refer to
See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Front/Exploded View.
CAUTION: Before installing the cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe any oil off the knuckle spindle
washers and cylinder body attachment surfaces. 3. Install brake hose to the cylinder body, and
tighten union bolt to the specification. Refer to See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Front/Exploded View.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper washer for union bolts.
- Attach the brake hose to the protrusion on the cylinder body attachment part.
4. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair.
Page 1612
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting
Front Door Window Regulator: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit
Switch Resetting
EL08-031A
Reference: NTB09-027A
Date: July 15, 2010
FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET
This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other
changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If any of the following work has been done:
^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly
^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator
^ installation of a new glass window
^ installation of a new glass run
....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following:
^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B
NOTE:
The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror.
If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in
this bulletin.
NOTE:
Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will
not reset the Limit Switch.
SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH
1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in
the glass raising (up) direction.
Service and Repair
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the fresh air duct. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from the mass air
flow sensor. 3. Disconnect the tube clamp at the electric throttle control actuator. 4. Disconnect the
PCV hose. 5. Remove air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube, air cleaner case (upper)
with the mass air flow sensor attached. 6. Remove mass air flow sensor from air cleaner case
(upper), as necessary.
CAUTION: Handle mass air flow sensor with care. Do not shock it.
- Do not disassemble it.
- Do not touch the sensor.
7. Remove the air cleaner case (lower). 8. Remove resonator in the fender, lifting left fender
protector, as necessary.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CHANGING AIR CLEANER FILTER
NOTE:
Specifications
Piston: Specifications
Available Piston
Page 3241
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Power Socket - 2 (RH) And Rear Power Socket
(2nd Row)
POWER SOCKET
Front Power Socket - 2 (RH) and Rear Power Socket (2nd Row)
REMOVAL and INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Remove inner socket from ring, while pressing the hook on the ring out from square
hole.
2. Disconnect power socket electrical connector. 3. Remove ring from power socket finisher while
pressing pawls.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Locations
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 2537
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Checking A/T Fluid
A/T FLUID
Checking A/T Fluid
1. Warm up the engine. 2. Check for any transaxle fluid leaks.
3. Before driving, the fluid level can be checked at fluid temperature using the "COLD" range on the
A/T fluid level gauge.
a. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set parking brake. b. Start the engine and move the
transaxle selector lever through each gear position. Leave the selector lever in the "P" park
position.
c. Check the fluid level with the engine idling.
CAUTION: Firmly secure the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the
attached stopper, this will provide an accurate reading on the gauge.
d. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and wipe it clean with a lint-free paper. e. Re-insert the A/T
fluid level gauge into the charging pipe as far as it will go. f.
Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and note the reading. If the reading is at or below the low side of
the range, add the necessary specified A/T fluid through the A/T fluid charging pipe and then
re-insert the A/T fluid level gauge.
CAUTION: Do not overfill the transaxle.
- Firmly secure the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the attached stopper,
this will provide an accurate reading on the gauge, and will keep the gauge in position while driving.
4. Drive the vehicle for approximately 5 minutes at moderate speeds.
Page 1161
Engine Oil Pressure: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit
OIL PRESSURE
REGULATOR VALVE
OIL PUMP
OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)
Page 2958
- Always tighten the brake tubes to the specified torque when installing.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Locations
Headlamp Relay: Locations
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 4340
Resetting After installing each component to the vehicle, perform the following procedure to reset
the limit switch. 1. Raise the door glass to the top position.
2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position. 3.
Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then
raises the door glass to the top position.
CAUTION: Do not operate the door glass automatically to raise the door glass to the top position.
Page 946
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 5168
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. -
Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the
instructions furnished with it.
- While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being
forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
- The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap.
- Check gap along bottom to confirm that glass does not contact sheet metal.
- Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
WARNING: Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable.
- The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
- Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if
inhaled.
If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air. Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance
of the windshield in case of an accident.
CAUTION: Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date
printed on the box.
- Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
- Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
- The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will
increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities.
Repairing Water leaks for Rear Window Glass Leaks can be repaired without removing or
reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between urethane adhesive material and body or glass,
determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the rear window area while
pushing glass outward. To stop leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the
leak point.
Locations
Auxiliary Water Pump Relay: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 112
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/System Description/CAN Communication System.
ACTIVE TEST
Page 422
Page 3713
Check the clearance (B) all the way around between the clutch disc (1) and pulley (2) using a
suitable tool (A) as shown.
Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance (B) : 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in)
If the specified clearance (B) is not obtained, replace the adjusting shim(s) and recheck the
clearance (B) as shown.
BREAK-IN OPERATION When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always conduct the
break-in operation. This is done by engaging and disengaging the clutch about 30 times. Break-in
operation raises the level of transmitted torque.
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Information Bus: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor
CONSULT-III and CAN diagnostic support monitor (on-board diagnosis function) are used for
detecting root cause.
MONITOR ITEM (CONSULT-III)
Example: CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR indication
Without PAST
With PAST
Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure
Page 3490
CAUTION: Do not reuse non-reusable parts. When installing wheel hub and bearing assembly to steering knuckle, align cutout in toner ring
cover with wheel sensor mounting hole in steering knuckle.
- When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks. (When not using
the alignment mark, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake
Caliper/Service and Repair/Front Disc Brake.)
Page 3504
- Check the stabilizer bushings for deterioration or cracks. Replace if necessary.
- Check that the connecting rod ball joint can rotate in all directions.
If movement is not smooth and free, replace connecting rod.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- When installing stabilizer bar, make sure that the stabilizer clamps are facing in the correct
direction as shown.
- Make sure that slit in stabilizer bushing is in the position as shown.
- Lubricate the inner and outer surfaces of the stabilizer bushing using a silicone lubricant.
- Install stabilizer bar with ball joint socket properly placed as shown.
- When installing wheel and tire, refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional
Tire And Wheel.
Service and Repair
Back Window Glass: Service and Repair
REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear wiper arm and motor. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the connectors and grounds for the
rear window defogger.
- Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag.
- If the rear window glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks.
WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves
to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION: When a windshield glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool.
- Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
- Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
INSTALLATION
Page 1991
Diag On CAN
System Description
Diag on CAN
DESCRIPTION "Diag on CAN" is a diagnosis using CAN communication instead of previous DDL1
and DDL2 communication lines, between control units and diagnosis unit.
System Diagram
Page 367
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
Page 4330
8. Remove the TORX bolts (T30) and the door lock assembly.
Door lock assembly bolts : 5.3 Nm (0.54 kg-m, 47 in-lb)
9. Remove the TORX bolt (T30) from the outside handle bracket.
10. While pulling the outside handle bracket, slide it toward the rear of the vehicle to remove it and
the door lock assembly. 11. Disconnect the door lock actuator electrical connector.
12. Separate the outside handle cable connection from the outside handle bracket.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install each rod, be sure to rotate the rod holder until a click is felt.
Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Classification: WT11-003
Reference: NTB11-029
Date: March 21, 2011
TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration.
^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care
to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin.
Tire Mounting Tips:
NOTE:
These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to
read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment
1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid.
^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process.
2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and
corrosion.
Page 3275
- CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.
- Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.
- When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status.
2. Sleep waiting status Process to stop CAN communication is activated.
- All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN
communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status.
3. Sleep status IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode.
- CAN communication is stopped.
- When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
- When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
Page 3366
5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly.
^ Mount the top claws first.
^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13.
^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14.
^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level.
IMPORTANT:
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Page 4078
Page 1297
After removing timing chains, do not turn the crankshaft and camshaft separately, or the valves will
strike the pistons.
8. Remove crankshaft sprocket, if necessary. 9. Remove timing chain (secondary) and camshaft
sprockets as follows:
a. Attach stopper pin (B) to the right (A) and left (C) timing chain tensioners (secondary) (1).
NOTE: - Use stopper pins included with Tool J-50246.
b. Remove camshaft sprocket (INT and EXH) bolts.
c. Remove the timing chains (secondary) together with camshaft sprockets (INT) and (EXH).
- Turn camshaft slightly to secure slack of timing chain on timing chain tensioner (secondary) side.
- Insert metal or resin plate [0.5 mm (0.020 in)] into guide between timing chain (secondary) and
timing chain tensioner (secondary) plunger.
Remove camshaft sprocket and timing chain (secondary) with timing chain removed from guide
groove.
CAUTION: Timing chain tensioner plunger can move while stopper pin is inserted in timing chain
tensioner. Plunger can come out of tensioner when timing chain is removed. Use caution during
removal. NOTE: Camshaft sprocket (INT) is a one piece integrated design with sprockets for timing
chain (primary) and for timing chain (secondary).
Page 2405
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Page 3371
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Locations
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 923
select the item or perform the action.
HOW TO USE THE TRIP BUTTON
When the TRIP button is pressed, the following modes will display on the screen.
Warning message (if any) -- TRIP 1 -- TRIP 2 -- FUEL ECONOMY -- MAINTENANCE -- Audio or
OFF -- TRIP 1
Maintenance items
Press the TRIP button to display maintenance information or set maintenance intervals for the
following:
- Engine Oil
- Tire Rotation
- Tire Pressure (if so equipped)
For setting the Tire Pressure display1 refer to "Tire pressure information" later in this section.
Changing the maintenance interval
Select the "Engine Oil" or "Tire Rotation" key using the joystick and press the ENTER button to
display the screen to change the maintenance interval.
Select the "Maintenance Schedule" key using the joystick and move the joystick to right or left to
set the maintenance interval.
Resetting the maintenance interval
Page 176
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 4586
3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1.
4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2).
5. Replace the battery.
^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece.
6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together.
7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated
in the dot matrix display.
8. If the indicator is still illuminated:
a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door.
b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off.
Page 2797
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement
1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove bolt, and turbine
revolution sensor from A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Do not reuse seal bolt.
Page 1752
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 648
1. Turn the adjusting bolts in the same direction to calibrate.
NOTE: Camber changes about 5' minutes with each graduation of the adjusting bolt.
2. Tighten adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to See: Steering and
Suspension/Suspension/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear
Suspension.
TOE-IN Measure toe-in using following procedure. If out of specification, inspect and replace any
damaged or worn rear suspension parts.
WARNING: Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface.
- Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it.
1. Bounce rear of vehicle up and down to stabilize the posture. 2. Push the vehicle straight ahead
about 5 m (16 ft).
3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both tires at the same height of hub center.
This mark is a measuring point.
4. Measure distance "A" (rear side).
Page 2815
- Always tighten the brake tubes to the specified torque when installing.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage
Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision
Damage
Classification: FA10-006
Reference: NTB10-126
Date: October 21, 2010
WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight
indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise.
NOTE:
Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a
warrantable repair
If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension
damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows:
1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle.
2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands.
3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise).
4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one.
Page 2709
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Electronic Brake Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic
Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Page 1914
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 4396
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
SLIDING DOOR
Removal 1. Remove sliding door garnish. 2. Remove sliding door finisher assembly. 3. Remove
sliding door handle screw covers and screws. 4. Remove sliding door handle assembly. Disconnect door lock cable and door handle cable. Refer to See: Locks/Door Locks/Service and
Repair.
5. Remove lower seal.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4371
^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise.
^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise.
2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator.
3. Install the regulator assembly into the door.
4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to
regulator.
5. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top.
Page 3660
Rear Passenger Compartment
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
REAR PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 2918
Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after replacing pads
or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Front
Brake Burnishing Procedure.
Page 1256
Page EM-14
Page 414
Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Service and Repair
Rear Subframe: Service and Repair
REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER
Removal and Installation
Rear Suspension Assembly
Page 2594
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Turbine Revolution Sensor Replacement
1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove bolt, and turbine
revolution sensor from A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Do not reuse seal bolt.
Locations
Seat Memory Switch: Locations
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Locations
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 2714
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Page 1026
2. Before installing the No. 1 camshaft bracket, remove the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the
mating surface using suitable scraper.
CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surface.
3. Turn the crankshaft until No. 1 piston is set at TDC on the compression stroke. The crankshaft key should line up with the right bank cylinder center line as shown.
4. Install the RH (1) and LH (2) secondary timing chain tensioners (3) on the cylinder heads. O-rings (4)
- Stopper pins (5)
5. Install valve lifters.
NOTE: Install them in original positions.
6. Install exhaust and intake camshafts and camshaft brackets. Intake camshaft has a drill mark on camshaft sprocket mounting flange.
- Follow your identification marks (2) and (3) made during removal, or follow the identification
marks (1) that are present on the new camshafts components for proper placement and direction of
the components.
Page 3307
Concept of Auto Active Test
- IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN
communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN
communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal.
- If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily
diagnosed using auto active test.
Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode
Page 2617
2. Submerge ATF cooler valve in a water-filled container, and then heat it up with temperature of
over 82°C (180°F) for 10 minutes more.
3. Make sure that ATF cooler valve is fully closed.
Page 3909
CAUTION: The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not
confuse O-rings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will
leak at or around the connection.
O-Ring Part Numbers and Specifications
WARNING: Make sure all refrigerant is discharged into the recycling equipment and the pressure in
the system is less than atmospheric pressure. Then gradually loosen the discharge side hose fitting
and remove it.
CAUTION: When replacing or cleaning refrigerant cycle components, observe the following. When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car.
Failure to do so will cause oil to enter the low pressure chamber.
Page 47
Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 2658
3. Re-install the front wheel drive shafts per the Service Manual instructions.
^ Install the drive shaft 180° from the position it was removed.
^ Use new axle nuts and new cotter pins when re-installing the front wheel drive shaft. See the
Parts Information section.
4. Tighten the Axle Nuts to 200 Nm (147 ft-lb), instead of 125 Nm (92 ft-lb).
5. Test drive the vehicle to confirm the incident is resolved.
Page 77
1. Remove the rear air control (rear) (1) from the headlining, located over the sliding door, RH. 2.
Disconnect the rear air control (rear) electrical connector and remove the rear air control (rear).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Recall PC039 - Brake Pedal Inspection/Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-030B Date: 100816
Recall PC039 - Brake Pedal Inspection/Replacement
Reference: NTB10-030B
Date: August 16, 2010
VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2008-2010 ARMADA & TITAN AND 2008-2009 QUEST
BRAKE PEDAL PIVOT PIN INSPECTION
The Claims Information in this bulletin has been amended. Please discard previous versions.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC039
NHTSA# 10V-072
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2008-2010 Armada (TA60) 2008-2010 Titan (A60) 2008-2009 Quest (V42)
Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a Voluntary Recall Campaign on certain specific 2008 - 2010 Armada & Titan
and 2008 - 2009 Quest vehicles to inspect, and if necessary, replace the brake pedal. On a small
number of the potentially affected vehicles the brake pedal assembly may have been manufactured
out of specification.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC039 to this quality assurance inspection. This
number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this
activity.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS
1. Look under the dash to view the brake pedal pivot pin.
Page 3638
2. Remove the clip and remove the floor junction duct extension.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Floor Duct
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
FLOOR DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the floor carpet. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the floor duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Rear Overhead Duct
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
REAR OVERHEAD DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the bolt and two clips, and remove the
rear overhead duct.
NOTE: The rear headliner duct connected to the rear overhead duct is part of the headlining trim
panel and is replaced as an assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Rear Floor Duct
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
REAR FLOOR DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screw and clip, then remove the
rear floor duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Grilles
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
GRILLES
Removal 1. Remove the interior trim panel as necessary that contains the grille to be removed.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim
Page 2863
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 2525
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Page 1855
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Page 1982
CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor
Use "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" for detecting the root cause.
MONITOR ITEM LIST (CONSULT-III)
ECM
Page 379
- Inspection End.
Page 2651
3. Re-install the front wheel drive shafts per the Service Manual instructions.
^ Install the drive shaft 180° from the position it was removed.
^ Use new axle nuts and new cotter pins when re-installing the front wheel drive shaft. See the
Parts Information section.
4. Tighten the Axle Nuts to 200 Nm (147 ft-lb), instead of 125 Nm (92 ft-lb).
5. Test drive the vehicle to confirm the incident is resolved.
Page 1897
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Changing A/T Fluid
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Changing A/T Fluid
A/T FLUID
Changing A/T Fluid
1. Run the engine to warm up the transaxle until the fluid is at full operating temperature "HOT".
2. Stop the engine. 3. Remove the engine undercover.
4. Drain the A/T fluid by removing the drain plug. Reinstall the drain plug to the specified tightness
using a new drain washer.
Drain plug : 39 N.m (4.0 kg-m, 29 ft-lb)
5. Refill the transaxle with new specified A/T fluid through the A/T fluid charging pipe. Always refill
the transaxle with the same volume amount that
was drained out.
Fluid grade and capacity : Refer to See: .
CAUTION: Do not overfill the transaxle. 6. Run the engine at idle speed for five minutes. 7. Check
fluid level and condition. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and
Repair/Procedures/Checking A/T Fluid. If the fluid is still contaminated, repeat step 2 through 5.
ATC
Receiver Dryer: Service and Repair ATC
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Condenser
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A)
Service Procedure. 2. Remove the radiator. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling
System/Radiator/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator.
3. Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe from the condenser.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air. 4. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector. 5. Remove the refrigerant
pressure sensor. 6. Carefully release retaining clips located on top driver side of condenser and
rotate the condenser out of its mounts as shown.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hose/Line
HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Component.
CAUTION: Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure pipe, refrigerant pressure sensor, and high-pressure
flexible hose with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 1187
2. Press in valve oil seal to height (H) using Tool to specified height.
Tool number : - (J-39386)
NOTE: Dimension (H): height measured before valve spring seat installation.
Intake and exhaust : 14.3 - 14.9 mm (0.563 - 0.587 in)
3. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
Locations
Throttle Position Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 409
Page 4849
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Page 4748
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Page 3372
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
Page 1082
^ Pulley should turn with some dragging
^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator.
VDC/TCS/ABS
Acceleration/Deceleration Sensor: Locations VDC/TCS/ABS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 2678
6. Put matching marks on spider assembly and shaft.
7. Remove snap ring using a suitable tool, then remove spider assembly from shaft. 8. Remove
boot from shaft. 9. Clean the old grease off of the slide joint assembly.
Wheel Side 1. Mount the front drive shaft in a vise.
CAUTION: When mounting shaft in a vise, always use copper or aluminum plates between vise
and shaft.
2. Remove boot bands and slide the boot back.
3. Screw a sliding hammer or suitable tool 30 mm (1.18 in) or more into threaded part of joint
sub-assembly. Pull joint sub-assembly out of shaft.
CAUTION: Align sliding hammer or suitable tool and drive shaft then remove joint sub-assembly by pulling
directly.
If joint sub-assembly cannot be removed after five or more unsuccessful attempts, replace the
entire drive shaft assembly.
4. Remove boot from shaft. 5. Remove circlip from shaft. 6. While rotating ball cage, clean the old
grease off of the joint sub-assembly.
Damper Remove damper bands, then remove damper from shaft.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Shaft Replace shaft if there is bending, cracking, or other damage.
Locations
Air Bag: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SRS Component Parts Location
Page 3370
Alignment: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Daytime Running Lamp: Customer Interest Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Classification: EL03-030E
Reference: NTB03-074E
Date: January 4, 2010
EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been
revised. Please discard all previous versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models
SERVICE INFORMATION
Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT
due to a defect.
The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an
incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not.
All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed).
^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations"
(warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp.
^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents.
^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense.
^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions
or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1.
NOTE:
This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location.
Locations
Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Locations
SUNROOF
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 1704
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment
1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Remove cable from range lever. 3. Set range lever in neutral
position.
4. Remove range lever and install Tool.
Tool number : KV911J0060 (J-45404)
5. Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts. 6. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns
with neutral base line on PNP switch body.
7. Tighten PNP switch bolts. 8. Reinstall range lever and cable. 9. Adjust control cable. Refer to
See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Adjustments.
10. Reinstall battery and bracket. 11. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to See: Computers
and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and
Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0705.
Page 393
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Installation
LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3886
2. Remove the screws (A) and the center lower trim.
3. Remove the center stack lower trim RH. 4. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. 5.
Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the front heater and cooling unit
assembly.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
MTC
INTAKE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
Intake Sensor
Locations
Blower Motor Relay: Locations
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Service and Repair
Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag
Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the screws (A) and release clips (B) to remove the steering angle sensor (1) from spiral
cable (2).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: In the case that the ABS actuator and electronic unit (control unit) is replaced, make
sure to adjust position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock
Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative
Front Door Window Motor: Customer Interest Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative
Classification: EL09-033A
Reference: NTB09-095A
Date: May 5, 2010
POWER WINDOW "AUTO UP" INITIALIZATION
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been revised. No other changes have
been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 350Z Coupe & Roadster (Z33) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60)
2007-2008 Maxima (A34) 2007 Murano (Z50) 2007-2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007-2009 Quest (V42)
2007-2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
A power window "Auto Up" will not work.
ACTION
Reset the limit switch.
1. Raise the door glass to the top position.
2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position.
3. Release the reset switch.
4. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then raises the door glass to the
top position.
NOTES:
> If the window is still not operating correctly, refer to ASIST and the Service Manual for further
diagnosis and repair information.
> The above initialization procedure must be performed if any of the following occur:
> Battery cable is disconnected.
> Power window switch connector is disconnected.
> Power window regulator is replaced.
> Power window motor is replaced.
> Window glass is removed.
Page 1071
6. If removing rocker cover (LH), disconnect the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor. 7. Remove the ignition
coils. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and
Repair/Removal And Installation LH
(LH) and See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal
And Installation RH (RH).
8. Position engine harness aside. 9. Disconnect PCV hoses.
10. Remove the engine oil dipstick. 11. Remove rocker cover bolts in the reverse order as shown.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
ATC
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair ATC
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A)
Service Procedure.
2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector and remove the refrigerant pressure
sensor from the condenser.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hose/Line
HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Component.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
- Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil
to it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 1655
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 4301
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Removal and Installation of BCM
REMOVAL
NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference
when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove the
parking brake pedal assembly. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake
System/Parking Brake Control/Service and
Repair/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the BCM (1) by removing the screw (A) and disconnecting the harness connectors (2). Arrow Indicates : Front
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning.
- When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition
key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Locations/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS) See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Description and Operation/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle
Immobilizer System-NATS)/System Description See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft
and Alarm Systems/Description and Operation/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer
System-NATS)/System Composition.
- When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system.
Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ID Registration Procedure.
Page 348
- Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the tube until a click is
heard.
- After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by pulling on the tube and the
connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the quick connector.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks: 1. Turn
the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to check the connections for fuel leaks with
the electric fuel pump applying fuel
pressure to the fuel piping.
2. Start the engine and let it idle to check that there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system tube and
hose connections.
Page 3146
Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection Power Supply Routing Circuit
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Circuit Breaker (PTC)
The PTC thermistor generates heat in response to current flow. The temperature (and resistance)
of the thermistor element varies with current flow. Excessive current flow will cause the element's
temperature to rise. When the temperature reaches a specified level, the electrical resistance will
rise sharply to reduce the circuit current. This reduced current flow will cause the element to cool
lowering the resistance accordingly. Once resistance falls to a specified level normal circuit current
flow is allowed to resume.
Page 5083
Combination Switch: Electrical Diagrams
COMBINATION SWITCH
Wiring Diagram - COMBSW LT-COMBSW-01
Page 1225
Page EM-8
VIN Registration
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair VIN Registration
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
VIN Registration
DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed
each time ECM is replaced.
NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M).
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-III 1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to See: Application and
ID/Model Variation. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. 3. Select "VIN
REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III display.
Page 2849
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair
G SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove center console lower cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel.
2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts.
CAUTION: Do not use power tools to remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
- Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts to specification.
CAUTION: Do not use power tools to install the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
- Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
Page 2882
CAUTION: Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is located inside the clevis as
shown.
3. Turn input rod to adjust the brake pedal to the specified height.
When the brake pedal is adjusted to specification, tighten the lock nut to specification. Refer to
See: Power Brake Assist/Vacuum Brake Booster/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Brake Booster.
Tool number : - (J-46532)
4. With the pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp switch and the ASCD cancel
switch in until the threaded ends contact the rubber
stops.
5. With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch contacting the rubber
stops, turn the switches 45° clockwise to lock them
in place.
CAUTION: Make sure that the gap "C1" and "C2" between the rubber stops and switch ends are
within specification. 6. Check the pedal play "A".
CAUTION: Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the pedal is released. 7. Start the engine
and check the height of the brake pedal when depressing it.
Page 3682
Blower Motor: Service and Repair Blower Motor
ATC
BLOWER MOTOR
Component
Front Blower Motor
Rear Blower Motor
Page 2621
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment
1. Remove battery and bracket. 2. Remove cable from range lever. 3. Set range lever in neutral
position.
4. Remove range lever and install Tool.
Tool number : KV911J0060 (J-45404)
5. Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch bolts. 6. Adjust PNP switch so that Tool pointer aligns
with neutral base line on PNP switch body.
7. Tighten PNP switch bolts. 8. Reinstall range lever and cable. 9. Adjust control cable. Refer to
See: Valve Body/Adjustments.
10. Reinstall battery and bracket. 11. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic
Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0705.
Page 3082
CHARGING THE BATTERY
CAUTION: Do not "quick charge" a fully discharged battery.
- Keep the battery away from open flame while it is being charged.
- When connecting the charger, connect the leads first, then turn on the charger. Do not turn on the
charger first, as this may cause a spark.
- If battery electrolyte temperature rises above 55°C (131°F), stop charging. Always charge battery
at a temperature below 55°C (131°F).
Charging Rates
Do not charge at more than 50 ampere rate.
NOTE: The ammeter reading on your battery charger will automatically decrease as the battery
charges. This indicates that the voltage of the battery is increasing normally as the state of charge
improves. The charging amps indicated above refer to initial charge rate. If, after charging, the specific gravity of any two cells varies more than 0.050, the battery should be
replaced.
Page 4120
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Page 4859
Component Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Testing and Inspection
Brake Hose/Line: Testing and Inspection
BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE
Inspection
CAUTION: If leakage occurs around hose and tube connections, retighten or, if necessary, replace
damaged parts.
1. Check brake lines (tubes and hoses) for leaks, cracks, distortion, deformation, without interfering
with other parts or loosening connecting parts,
deterioration or other damage. Replace any damaged parts.
2. Apply a stepping force of 784 N (80 kg-f, 176 lb-f) to the brake pedal with the engine running and
keep it for about 5 seconds, then check each
part for leaks.
Locations
Blower Motor Relay: Locations
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 2279
- Keep fuel hose connections clean.
3. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown
in figure. Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter.
- When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality.
4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 5. Start engine and
check for fuel leakage. 6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 8. Check the following. Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
- Fuel filter for clogging
- Fuel pump
- Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or
replace.
9. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel
pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE
RELEASE".
Page 3187
Page 1615
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 2071
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Specifications
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Injector
Page 1363
1. Check to see if the 2 clips have come unattached from the sliding door welt.
^ If the clips are missing replace the door welt and proceed to step 2.
^ If the clips are not missing, reinstall the clips into the door welt by inserting the clips into the 2
holes located on the door welt, then proceed to step 2.
2. Prepare the surface by applying 3M(TM) Automotive Adhesion Promoter or equivalent on the
door welt and sliding door panel.
3. Apply 3M(TM) Acrylic Plus Tape or equivalent to the area as shown in Figure 2.
^ Tape size 5 mm x 20 mm x 1 mm (0.19 in x 0.78 in x 0.039 in)
4. Firmly press the door welt onto the sliding door panel.
^ Make sure the clips are securely inserted into the 2 holes located on the sliding door panel.
5. Check to make sure this issue has been resolved.
Page 3934
Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
- Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Description and
Operation/Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to See: Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
Page 620
^ Make sure the rear slide plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place.
NOTE:
Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep.
The Alignment Process
The Alignment Process
IMPORTANT:
Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the
alignment.
1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack.
^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in
Figure 4.
^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5).
^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then
re-enter the rack.
^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front
wheels straight.
Page 2007
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the ECM branch line.
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground
circuit of the ECM. Refer to See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Power Supply And Ground Circuit.
OK or NG OK >>. Present error: Replace the ECM. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Procedure After Replacing ECM.
- Past error: Error was detected in the ECM branch line.
NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
Front Air Control Branch Line Circuit
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Front Air Control Branch Line Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of
the front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). OK or
NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector.
2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of front air control. 2.
Check the resistance between the front air control harness connector terminals.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the front air control branch line.
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground
circuit of the front air control. Refer to the following. Models with automatic air conditioner: See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/ATC/Power Supply And Ground Circuit For
Front Air Control
- Models with manual air conditioner: See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/MTC/Power Supply And Ground Circuit For
Front Air Control
OK or NG OK >> Present error: Replace the front air control. Refer to the following.
- Models with automatic air conditioner: See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Control
Assembly/Service and Repair
- Models with manual air conditioner: See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Control Module
HVAC/Service and Repair
- Past error: Error was detected in the front air control branch line.
NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
IPDM E/R Branch Line Circuit
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
IPDM E/R Branch Line Circuit
Page 1443
Component Locations
EGR Temperature Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1293
9. Install upper oil pan bolts as shown.
Upper oil pan bolts : 22.0 N-m (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft-lb)
10. Install lower oil pan.
11. Install IVT control valve covers as follows:
a. Install new collared O-rings in front cover oil hole (LH and RH sides).
b. Install new seal rings on the IVT control valve covers. c. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to the IVT
control valve covers. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent.
- Being careful not to move the seal ring from the installation groove, align the dowel pins on the
chain case with the holes to install the IVT
control valve covers.
- Tighten the intake valve timing control valve cover bolts in the order as shown. - A: Bank 1
(Conventional RH bank) - B: Bank 2 (Conventional LH bank)
Page 817
5. Check the drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. -
If contaminated, flush the engine cooling system.
REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Install the radiator drain plug. If the cooling system was drained
completely, install the reservoir tank and the cylinder block drain plugs and
tighten to specification.
CAUTION: If the vehicle is equipped with an engine block heater in place of the cylinder block LH
drain plug, do not remove the engine block heater. The radiator must be completely empty of coolant and water.
- Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plugs.
Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid
Type Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants.
Page 1586
Page 1619
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 958
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Customer Interest Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation
Classification: BT07-032A
Reference: NTB07-070A
Date: September 25, 2009
SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been revised. No other changes
have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2007 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2007 - 2009
Maxima (A34, A35) 2007 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007 - 2009 Quest (V42) 2007 - 2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
Sunroof auto operation will not work or sunroof does not operate properly:
^ When the battery has been disconnected or discharged
^ When the sunroof motor has been disconnected from power
^ When the sunroof motor was changed
ACTION
Perform the following initialization procedure:
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully
closed.
3. After the sunroof has closed all the way, push and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) again for
more than 2 seconds to re-learn motor position.
4. Initialization is complete if the sunroof operates normally.
NOTE:
If the sunroof is still not operating properly after initialization, refer to ASIST and section RF of the
Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis and repair information.
Service Precautions
Service Port HVAC: Service Precautions
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Refrigerant Connection
A new type refrigerant connection has been introduced to all refrigerant lines except the following
locations. Expansion valve to cooling unit
- Evaporator pipes to evaporator (inside cooling unit)
- Refrigerant pressure sensor
FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT CONNECTION The O-ring has been relocated. It has also been provided with a groove for proper installation. This
reduces the possibility of the O-ring being caught in, or damaged by, the mating part. The sealing
direction of the O-ring is now set vertically in relation to the contacting surface of the mating part to
improve sealing characteristics.
- The reaction force of the O-ring will not occur in the direction that causes the joint to pull out,
thereby facilitating piping connections.
O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION Front A/C Compressor and Condenser
Page 3184
Inspection With CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis)
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Inspection with CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis)
1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK 1. Connect CONSULT-III and select "IPDM E/R" on the
"SELECT SYSTEM" screen. 2. Select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE"
screen. 3. Check display content in self-diagnosis results.
NOTE: The Details for Display for the Period are as follows: CRNT: Error currently detected by IPDM E/R.
- PAST: Error detected in the past and stored in IPDM E/R memory.
Contents displayed NO DTC DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE
REQUIRED.-INSPECTION END. CAN COMM CIRC-Print out the self-diagnosis result and refer to
See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/System Description/CAN Communication
System.
Removal and Replacement
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Removal and Replacement
Front Coil Spring And Strut
COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service
and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Remove cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the wheel
sensor wire and front brake hose from the brackets on the front shock absorber (strut). 4.
Disconnect the connecting rod upper link using power tool. 5. Support the wheel hub and steering
knuckle assembly with a suitable wire.
6. Remove the shock absorber (strut) lower bolts and nuts using power tool. 7. Remove the three
upper strut mounting nuts using power tool.
CAUTION: Do not remove piston rod lock nut on vehicle. 8. Remove the coil spring and shock
absorber (strut) assembly.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After installation, check that the front wheel alignment is within specification. Refer to See:
Alignment/Service and Repair/Front Suspension.
- When installing the strut spacer, it must be positioned as shown.
- Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Front Suspension.
WARNING: Always replace the shock absorber (strut) lower mounting nuts.
- When installing shock absorber (strut) to steering knuckle, be sure to hold bolts when tightening
nuts.
- Install wheel and tire. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And
Wheel.
Rear Suspension
SHOCK ABSORBER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly using power tool. Refer to See: Wheels and
Tires/Service and Repair/Pax Run Flat Tires And Wheels See:
Page 4682
3. Using needle nose pliers, install the anti-rattle spring as shown in Figure 3.
4. Check to make sure both ends of the anti-rattle spring are correctly installed and fully seated as
shown in Figure 4.
5. Check to make sure the seat is operating properly and the anti-rattle spring stays in place.
Page 1105
Figure 2.
NOTE
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (See Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION
Tighten the bolt no more then necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Specifications
Piston Ring: Specifications
Piston Ring
Page 2883
Brake Pedal Assy: Adjustments
BRAKE PEDAL
Inspection and Adjustment
INSPECTION 1. If equipped with adjustable pedals, move the brake pedal to the forward most
position (closest to the floor).
2. Inspect the brake pedal height, play, and switch clearance from the dash lower panel as shown.
CAUTION: When equipped with adjustable pedals, the brake pedal must be set in the forward most
position (closest to the floor) for checking the brake pedal specifications.
Tool number : - (J-46532)
3. Adjust the brake pedal as necessary.
ADJUSTMENT 1. Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch by turning 45°
counterclockwise.
2. Loosen the lock nut on the input rod.
Component Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Component Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1173
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Intake Manifold
INTAKE MANIFOLD
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance
Checks/Fuel Pressure/Testing and Inspection. 2. Remove the intake manifold collector (upper and
lower). Refer to See: Intake Manifold Collector. 3. Remove the fuel rail with the fuel injectors. Refer
to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Rail/Service and Repair.
4. Loosen the intake manifold nuts and bolts in the order as shown using power tool, and remove
the intake manifold.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion
Using straightedge and feeler gauge, inspect the surface distortion of both the intake manifold and
the intake manifold collector (lower).
Limit : 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
Procedures
Brake Pad: Procedures
Front
FRONT DISC BRAKE
On Board Inspection
PAD WEAR INSPECTION
- Inspect the thickness of the pad through the cylinder body inspection hole. Use a scale for
inspection if necessary.
Rear
REAR DISC BRAKE
On Board Inspection
PAD WEAR INSPECTION
- Inspect the thickness of the pad through the cylinder body inspection hole. Use a scale for
inspection if necessary.
Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
Ignition Relay: Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 4505
Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Daytime Running Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging
Inspection
Classification: EL03-030E
Reference: NTB03-074E
Date: January 4, 2010
EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been
revised. Please discard all previous versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models
SERVICE INFORMATION
Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT
due to a defect.
The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an
incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not.
All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed).
^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations"
(warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp.
^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents.
^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense.
^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions
or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1.
NOTE:
This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location.
Locations
Combination Switch: Locations
CORNERING LAMP
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 792
a. Under the vehicle, tighten the high/low pressure pipe connection (1) bolt (A) as shown to
specification. b. Install the A/C pipe clamp (2) and tighten the A/C pipe clamp bolt (B). c. As
necessary, reposition the rear heater pipe clamp (3). d. Attach the other pipe support clip to the
dash panel threaded stud.
e. From the engine compartment, tighten the fittings between the upper and lower high pressure
pipe (A) and the low pressure pipe (B) as shown
to specification. Arrow Indicates Front
CAUTION: -
Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when tightening the
fittings.
4. Connect the power brake booster vacuum hose to the intake manifold collector. 5. Check that
there is sufficient clearance between the lower high/low pressure pipe and the front stabilizer bar.
Adjust the lower high/low pressure
pipe as necessary.
6. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and check the A/C system for leaks. Refer to See:
Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and
Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure.
7. Install the remaining components in the reverse order of removal.
Removal And Installation For Low-Pressure Flexible Hose
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Procedures.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air. 2. Remove the engine under cover. 3. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to
See: Locations.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Locations.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Removal And Installation For High/Low-Pressure Pipe
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for High/Low-Pressure Pipe
Wheel Bearing
Axle Shaft Assembly: Specifications Wheel Bearing
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheel Bearing
Page 1885
Specifications
Steering Wheel: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Steering Wheel
Page 2497
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Locations
Throttle Position Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2300
- Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the tube until a click is
heard.
- After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by pulling on the tube and the
connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the quick connector.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks: 1. Turn
the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to check the connections for fuel leaks with
the electric fuel pump applying fuel
pressure to the fuel piping.
2. Start the engine and let it idle to check that there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system tube and
hose connections.
Page 2061
Attachment General Procedure
Page 1823
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when
applying or releasing the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning.
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL ELECTRIC MOTOR
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal.
3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable
pedal electric motor as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector.
5. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the
adjustable accelerator pedal as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 6. Remove the
adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the adjustable pedal electric motor.
- Avoid damage from dropping the adjustable pedal electric motor during handling.
- Keep the adjustable pedal electric motor away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding
or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward.
- Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning.
Page 2840
The rear wheel sensor rotor is built into the rear wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure,
refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Wheel Hub.
Page 4552
Console: Service and Repair Assembly
CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY
Assembly
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly
Procedures
Brake Master Cylinder: Procedures
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
On Board Inspection
LEAK INSPECTION Check for leaking in the master cylinder installation surface, the reservoir tank installation surface,
the reservoir hose connections, and the brake tube connections.
Page 5088
Combination Switch: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
COMBINATION SWITCH
CONSULT-III Function (BCM)
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure 1. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "DATA
MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION
FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen.
4. Touch "START". 5. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored.
When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the signals will be
monitored.
6. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To
stop recording, touch "STOP".
Display Item List
Page 2327
Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning.
Page 2950
4. Tighten all flare nuts and connecting bolts to specification. Refer to See: Hydraulic Circuit. 5.
Refill until new brake fluid comes out of each air bleeder valve. 6. Bleed air from the brake system.
Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair.
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 1317
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-50288 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets (no picture shown).
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioners
plungers. Figure 1 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tools where shown in
Page 4134
Page 2491
Locations
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 2256
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. Refer to See:
Maintenance See: Maintenance.
1. Disconnect the tube clamp at the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube at the mass
air flow sensor. 2. Separate the mass air flow sensor from the air cleaner to electric throttle control
actuator tube. 3. Unhook the air cleaner case side clips and remove the air cleaner case (upper). 4.
Remove the air cleaner filter. 5. Install a new air cleaner filter. 6. Install the remaining components
in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4841
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly
Fuel Level Sender Unit
Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors (1) and the wire connector (4). 2. Remove the
fuel sensor (2) from the pump assembly. 3. Depress the tabs (3) and remove the floater arm
assembly (5).
Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly.
Page 136
Page 5189
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR GLASS
Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the hole cover over
rear glass bolt. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Temporarily reconnect the power window
switch to the door harness. 5. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass
until the door glass bolts can be seen. 6. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 7. Remove the
inside seal. 8. Remove the door glass bolts.
9. While holding the door window, raise it at the rear end to pull the glass out of the sash toward
the outside of the door.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR
Removal
Page 610
5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly.
^ Mount the top claws first.
^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13.
^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14.
^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level.
IMPORTANT:
Page 2546
7. Remove return spring.
8. While pushing the 2nd coast brake piston by hand, apply compressed air (4kg/cm2) into the oil
passage as shown and remove 2nd coast brake
piston.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the O-ring and 2nd coast brake piston.
9. Remove O-rings from 2nd coast brake piston.
10. Remove snap ring using suitable tool.
11. Remove 2nd brake flange, 2nd brake discs and 2nd brake plates.
Page 3053
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Page 172
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Locations
Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SRS Component Parts Location
Locations
Timing Component Alignment Marks: Locations
- Install primary timing chain so the mating mark (punched) on camshaft sprocket is aligned with
the yellow link on the timing chain, while the mating mark (notched) on the crankshaft sprocket is
aligned with the gold link on the timing chain, as shown.
- When it is difficult to align mating marks of the primary timing chain with each sprocket, gradually
turn the camshaft using a wrench on the hexagonal portion to align it with the mating marks.
Page 5131
- - Ground : Continuity should exist.
OK or NG OK - Check filament. Refer to See: Filament Check. If filament is OK.
Check the condition of the harness and the connector. If filament is NG.
Repair filament. NG - Repair or replace harness. 3.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
HARNESS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect rear window defogger relay. 3. Check continuity
between rear window defogger relay connector B4 terminal 5 and rear window defogger connector
D504 terminal +.
5 - + : Continuity should exist.
OK or NG OK - Check the condition of the harness and the connector. NG - Repair or replace
harness.
Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Inspection
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Inspection
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH OPERATION With CONSULT-III Check ("REAR
DEF SW", "IGN ON SW") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT-III.
Without CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between BCM connector ground.
Specifications
Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications
CONNECTING ROD BEARING
Undersize
BEARING CLEARANCE
Page 2016
Service and Repair
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Wiper and Washer Switch
REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column covers. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Steering Column Cover.
2. Remove wiper washer switch electrical connector. 3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch
base and slide switch away from steering column to remove.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Specifications
Power Steering Fluid: Specifications
Power Steering Fluid
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
........................... Genuine Nissan PSF or equivalent.
Page 3571
Tires: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Tire
Page 5086
OK or NG OK - GO TO 4. NG - Check harness between BCM and combination switch for open or
short circuit. 4.BCM OUTPUT TERMINAL INSPECTION 1. Turn lighting switch and wiper switch to
OFF. 2. Set wiper dial to position 4. 3. Connect BCM and combination switch connectors. 4. Turn
ignition switch ON, and check combination switch input (BCM output) terminal voltage waveform of
suspect malfunctioning system.
OK or NG OK - Open circuit in combination switch, GO TO 5. NG - Replace BCM. Refer to See:
Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body Control Module/Service and Repair.
5.COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION Referring to table below, perform combination switch
inspection.
Page 4868
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 3342
SPECIAL TOOLS
Hydraulic Circuit
Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Hydraulic Circuit
BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE
Hydraulic Circuit
Page 4644
5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5).
^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit.
6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure
6A.
NOTE:
^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle.
^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle.
Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8:
^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned.
^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring.
^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no
wrinkles or ridges are present.
^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D"
ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece.
7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B).
Page 3349
2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows:
^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates.
^ Center the turn plates to the tires.
^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel.
DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body.
Front Suspension
Stabilizer Bar: Service and Repair Front Suspension
STABILIZER BAR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service
and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Remove the steering gear bolts on the lower side.
Refer to See: Steering/Steering Gear/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. Support steering gear.
3. Disconnect the connecting rod end at the stabilizer bar using power tool. -
Prevent the connecting rod from turning by inserting a hex wrench into the end of the ball stud,
then remove nut.
4. Remove the two stabilizer bar clamps from the front suspension member. 5. Remove the
stabilizer bar by withdrawing from side. Remove the two stabilizer bushings as necessary.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the stabilizer bar for deformation or cracks and replace if necessary.
Page 1978
4. Search for the possible cause using CAN communication signal chart using information from the
interview with the customer.
NOTE: For the details of CAN communication signal, refer to See: Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Trouble Diagnosis/CAN Communication Signal Chart.
a. ABS warning lamp turned ON and speedometer did not move: This means that "ABS warning
lamp signal" and "Vehicle speed signal" could
not communicate between M&A; and ABS (4-a in the figure below).
b. The tachometer moved normally: This means that "Engine speed signal" could communicate
normally between ECM and M&A; (4-b in the
figure below).
Page 759
3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see
Figure 3).
^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information.
4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring.
^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt
NOTE:
^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring.
^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly.
Locations
Impact Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SRS Component Parts Location
Page 2406
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
Locations
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 533
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Page 2558
DESCRIPTION
Page 2483
Page 1723
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when
applying or releasing the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See:
Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator
Pedal Released Position Learning.
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL ELECTRIC MOTOR
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal.
3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable
pedal electric motor as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector.
5. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the
adjustable accelerator pedal as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity. 6. Remove the
adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the adjustable pedal electric motor.
- Avoid damage from dropping the adjustable pedal electric motor during handling.
- Keep the adjustable pedal electric motor away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding
or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward.
- Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released
Page 3946
- If equipped with VDC, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning for steering angle sensor
adjustment.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to make sure no malfunction is detected.
Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
CAUTION: The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the cable is not installed in the correct
position.
- With the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond
the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from
the neutral position.
Page 858
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-50288 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets (no picture shown).
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioners
plungers. Figure 1 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tools where shown in
Page 1373
CAUTION: Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth behind the ring gear, when
setting the Tool.
b. Loosen crankshaft pulley bolt so that there is a 10 mm (0.39 in) gap between bolt and crankshaft
pulley.
CAUTION: Do not remove crankshaft pulley bolt. Keep loosened crankshaft pulley bolt in place to
protect the crankshaft pulley from dropping.
c. Position a suitable tool at recess hole of crankshaft pulley to remove crankshaft pulley.
CAUTION: Do not use a puller claw on the outside edge of the crankshaft pulley.
24. Disconnect the oil pressure switch harness connector. 25. Disconnect valve timing control
harness connector.
26. Remove the Bank 1 (RH) (A) and Bank 2 (LH) (B) IVT control valve covers.
- Loosen the IVT control valve cover bolts in the reverse order as shown. CAUTION: The shaft in
the IVT control valve cover is inserted into the center hole of the intake camshaft sprocket. Remove
the IVT control valve cover by pulling straight out until the IVT control valve cover disengages from
the camshaft sprocket.
- A: Bank 1 (Conventional RH bank)
- B: Bank 2 (Conventional LH bank)
- C: Dowel pin hole
27. Remove the A/C idler pulley and bracket and the drive belt auto-tensioner. 28. If necessary,
remove the idler pulley and water pump cover.
29. Remove the front timing chain case.
Page 4005
3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see
Figure 3).
^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information.
4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring.
^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt
NOTE:
^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring.
^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly.
Page 1975
Past Error -- Open Circuit -- Review CAN communication signal chart based on information
received from the interview with the customer and on past error information from SELF-DIAG
RESULTS and CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR. 1. SELF-DIAG RESULTS: Inspect the control units
indicating "U1000" or "U1001" on SELF-DIAG RESULTS.
Page 1724
Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning.
Page 1341
Page EM-11
Engine - Revised Timing Chain Service Procedure
Timing Chain: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Revised Timing Chain Service Procedure
Classification: EM10-001
Reference: NTB10-046
Date: March 19, 2010
ALTIMA, MAXIMA, AND QUEST; REVISED VQ35 ENGINE TIMING CHAIN PROCEDURES
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Altima (L31) - VQ35DE engine ONLY 2004-2008 Maxima (A34)
2004-2009 Quest (V42)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Removal and installation procedures for the VQ35 engine front timing chain case and timing chains
(primary and secondary) have been updated to no longer require removal of the rocker covers and
intake collector.
In addition, new removal and installation procedures have been added for the timing chain
tensioners (primary and secondary) and secondary timing chain tensioner shoe. The updated
procedures are available via hyperlink in this bulletin (see below).
Nissan Service Manuals for 2004-2006 Altima, 2004-2008 Maxima, and 2004-2009 Quest vehicles
will be updated with these new procedures. Updated Service Manuals will be distributed to the field
as quickly as possible.
Until the updated Service Manuals are made available, please use the procedures shown below for
any VQ35 engine front timing chain case, timing chain, or timing chain tensioner-related repairs on
an Applied Vehicle.
Page 991
Towing Information: Service and Repair Vehicle Recovery
TOW TRUCK TOWING
Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle)
Front Use the towing hook only, not other parts of the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle body will be
damaged.
- Use the towing hook only to free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle
for a long distance using only the towing hook.
- The towing hook is under tremendous force when used to free a stuck vehicle. Always pull the
cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the hook at an angle.
- Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
Rear Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle.
- Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake
or cooling systems.
- Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the vehicle at
an angle.
- Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or
recovery.
Page 402
4. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. -
Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable
pedal electric motor as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the
accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal
nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from
the pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
9. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the
adjustable accelerator pedal as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity.
10. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when
applying or releasing the accelerator pedal.
- Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding
or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward.
- Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See:
Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning.
NON-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL
Removal 1. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the upper
and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 3. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from
the pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
Page 2717
Page 4826
The ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION maintenance intervals can be reset to 0 miles (kilometers).
Select the "Reset" key using the joystick and press the ENTER button.
Displaying the maintenance notice reminder
Select the "Display Maintenance Notification" key and press the ENTER button to display the
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automatically at the set maintenance interval.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen (ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION) will be automatically
displayed as shown when both of the following conditions are met:
- The vehicle is driven the set distance and the ignition key is turned OFF
- The ignition key is turned ON the next time the vehicle will be driven.
To return to the previous display after the MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press the
BACK button.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays each time the key is turned ON until one of the
following conditions are met:
- "Reset" key is selected.
- "Display Maintenance Notification" is set OFF.
- The maintenance interval is set again.
HOW TO USE THE SETTING BUTTON
When the SETTING button is pressed, the SETTINGS screen will appear on the display. You can
select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle. Move
the joystick and press the ENTER button to select each item to be set.
System settings
Select the "System Settings" key by using the joystick and pressing the ENTER button. The
SYSTEM SETTINGS menu will be displayed.
Locations
Trailer Lighting Module: Locations
TRAILER TOW
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 4411
1. Check to see if the 2 clips have come unattached from the sliding door welt.
^ If the clips are missing replace the door welt and proceed to step 2.
^ If the clips are not missing, reinstall the clips into the door welt by inserting the clips into the 2
holes located on the door welt, then proceed to step 2.
2. Prepare the surface by applying 3M(TM) Automotive Adhesion Promoter or equivalent on the
door welt and sliding door panel.
3. Apply 3M(TM) Acrylic Plus Tape or equivalent to the area as shown in Figure 2.
^ Tape size 5 mm x 20 mm x 1 mm (0.19 in x 0.78 in x 0.039 in)
4. Firmly press the door welt onto the sliding door panel.
^ Make sure the clips are securely inserted into the 2 holes located on the sliding door panel.
5. Check to make sure this issue has been resolved.
Page 436
9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads.
^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12.
Page 4900
LT-INT/L-03
Locations
Trailer Lighting Module: Locations
TRAILER TOW
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Service and Repair
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
Locations
Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 4422
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Page 1856
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Page 2213
3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 17 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >>Go to See: Ignition System/Description and Operation/Ignition Signal. NG >>GO
TO 8.
8.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10
seconds. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: After turning ignition switch OFF, battery voltage will exist for a few seconds, then drop
approximately 0 V.
OK or NG OK >>GO TO 13. NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)-GO TO 9. NG (Battery voltage
exists for more than a few seconds.) >>GO TO 11.
9.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
Check voltage between ECM terminal 111 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >>GO TO 10. NG >>GO TO 11.
10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E122. 3.
Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and IPDM E/R terminal 18. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG
Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis
Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis
Classification: EM09-013
Reference: NTB10-002
Date: January 12, 2010
DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS
APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s),
ACTION
Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any
repairs performed.
Page 733
Fuel Filter: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly
Fuel Level Sender Unit
Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors (1) and the wire connector (4). 2. Remove the
fuel sensor (2) from the pump assembly. 3. Depress the tabs (3) and remove the floater arm
assembly (5).
Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly.
Page 4325
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
FRONT DOOR LOCK
Disassembly and Assembly
DOOR KEY CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
Remove the key cylinder escutcheon pawl and remove the door key cylinder.
Locations
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 609
> Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels
> Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and
inspections.
4. Check the target mounts.
^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before
performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11).
NOTE:
The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines.
Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment.
Page 1891
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 4760
Cruise Control: Electrical Diagrams
ASCD Brake Switch
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Wiring Diagram
EC-ASCBOF-01
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: Never use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Specifications
Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Crankshaft Sprocket
Page 1488
Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Page 1236
Page EM-19
Page 483
Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Electrical - IPDM Serviceability
Power Distribution Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - IPDM Serviceability
Classification: EL09-014
Reference: NTB09-036
Date: April 27, 2009
IPDM SERVICE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Nissan Models with IPDM
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) is ONLY serviceable as an assembly.
The ONLY serviceable parts of an IPDM are the fuses.
^ Some IPDM designs have sections that Relays Relays appear to be serviceable relays.
^ These "relays" are NEVER to be removed.
^ These "relays" may have markings indicating they are similar. They are not "swappable".
CAUTION:
NEVER REMOVE relays from an IPDM.
Tampering with the relays of an IPDM may cause additional incidents with the vehicle.
Such incidents may include:
^ Headlights inoperative.
^ Radiator fan inoperative
^ Fog lamps inoperative
^ Wiper inoperative
Page 2987
Other Inspections Check shoe sliding surface for excessive wear and damage.
- Check anti-rattle pin for excessive wear and corrosion.
- Check return spring for sagging.
- Check that adjuster moves smoothly.
- Check either visually or with a vernier caliper to see if there is any excessive wear, cracks, or
damage inside the drum.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Exploded View and apply brake grease to the specified points during installation.
- There is a difference between the adjusters orientation from left and right. Assemble the adjuster
so the threaded part expands when rotating it in the direction shown by the arrow.
- Shorten adjuster by rotating it.
- When disassembling the adjuster, apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone based
grease to the threads.
- After replacing brake shoes or disc rotors, or if brakes do not function well, perform break-in
operation as follows.
1. Adjust the parking brake pedal stroke to the specified stroke. Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection. 2. Perform break-in (drag run) operation by driving the vehicle under the following
conditions: Drive the vehicle forward.
- Maintain vehicle speed at approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) keeping it constant in forward
direction.
- Apply the parking brake at an operating force of approximately 147 N (15 kg-f, 33 lb-f) with
constant force.
- Release the parking brake after approximately 10 seconds.
3. After break-in operation, check lever stroke of the parking brake. Readjust if it is no longer at the
specified stroke. To prevent the lining from getting too hot, allow a cool off period of approximately 5 minutes after
every break-in operation.
- Do not perform excessive break-in operations, because it may cause uneven or early wear of the
lining.
Page 4462
^ Bolt A (shown in Figure 1 above) will need to be removed.
NOTE:
You may not need to completely remove the lower finisher. Unclipping the top and pulling it back
may give you enough access.
2. Check bolt "B" (see Figure 1).
^ If bolt B is loose or missing, replace it with a new one.
^ New bolt is listed in the parts information.
^ Apply Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE (or equivalent) to the threads of the
new bolt and torque bolt to 5.7 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 51
in-lb)
NOTE:
If bolt B is missing, make sure to find the missing bolt and remove it from the vehicle. The missing
bolt, if left loose in the passenger compartment, could cause a rattle.
4. Reassemble all parts in reverse order.
^ Apply Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE (or equivalent) to the threads of bolt A
and torque bolt to 15.2 N·m (1.6 kg-m, 11 ft-lb).
5. Make sure the power back door motor works correctly with no abnormal noise.
^ Cycle the power back door (open and close) 5 times.
Page 2215
3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >>GO TO 16. NG >>GO TO 15.
15.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors F14, E5
- Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
>>Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
16.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis For Intermittent
Incident/Description See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection
and Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis For Intermittent Incident/Diagnosis Procedure. OK or
NG OK >>Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution
Module/Description and Operation/System Description. NG >>Repair open circuit or short to power
in harness or connectors.
A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Classification: AT07-006B
Reference: NTB08-049B
Date: March 13, 2009
NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT
This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard
all earlier versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information,
the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to
the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used
as specified by the part number in this bulletin.
If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in
the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan
ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 4564
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect both negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least 3 minutes.
2. Remove sun visor assemblies. -
Disconnect harness from each sun visor assembly.
3. Remove sun visor holders. 4. Remove front roof console assembly. Disconnect harnesses from sunroof switch assembly.
Page 3422
Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Air Bleeding Hydraulic System
POWER STEERING FLUID
Bleeding Hydraulic System
1. Raise the front end of vehicle until the wheels are clear of the ground.
2. Add Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent into the steering fluid reservoir tank to the specified
level. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance.
Then quickly turn the steering wheel fully to right and left and lightly touch steering stoppers.
Repeat steering wheel operation until the fluid level no longer decreases.
3. Start the engine then repeat step 2 above. Incomplete air bleeding will cause the following
symptoms: Air bubbles in reservoir tank
- Clicking noise in oil pump
- Excessive buzzing in oil pump
If this happens, bleed out the air repeating step 2 above. Fluid noise may occur in the valve or oil
pump. This is common when the vehicle is stationary or while turning the steering wheel slowly.
This does not affect the performance or durability of the system.
Revolution Sensor Replacement
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Revolution Sensor Replacement
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Revolution Sensor Replacement
1. Remove intake air duct. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove revolution sensor from
A/T. 4. Reinstall any part removed. Do not reuse seal bolt.
Page 3671
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
Procedures
Power Steering Pump: Procedures
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
On-Vehicle Service
CHECKING HYDRAULIC SYSTEM Before starting, check belt tension, driving pulley and tire
pressure.
1. Set Tool. Open shut-off valve. Then bleed air. Refer to See: Power Steering Fluid/Service and
Repair/Checking Fluid Level.
Tool numbers : KV48103500 (J-26357 and J-26357-10), KV48102500 (J-33914)
2. Run engine at idle speed or 1,000 rpm.
Make sure temperature of fluid in tank rises to 60° - 80°C (140° - 176°F).
WARNING: Warm up engine with shut-off valve fully opened. If engine is started with shut-off valve
closed, fluid pressure in oil pump increases to maximum. This will raise oil temperature abnormally.
3. Check pressure with steering wheel fully turned to left and right positions with engine idling at
1,000 rpm.
CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more than 15 seconds.
Oil pump maximum standard pressure : 8,800 kPa (89.76 kg/cm2, 1,276 psi)
- If pressure reaches maximum operating pressure, system is OK.
- If pressure increases above maximum operating pressure, check power steering pump flow
control valve. Refer to See: Specifications.
4. If power steering pressure is below the maximum operating pressure, slowly close shut-off valve
and check pressure again.
CAUTION: Do not close shut-off valve for more than 15 seconds. If pressure increases to maximum operating pressure, gear is damaged. Refer to See: Steering
Gear/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
- If pressure remains below maximum operating pressure, pump is damaged. Refer to See:
Removal and Replacement/Removal and Installation.
5. After checking hydraulic system, remove Tool and add fluid as necessary. Then completely
bleed air out of system. Refer to See: Power Steering
Fluid/Service and Repair/Checking Fluid Level.
Component Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2601
Shift Interlock Cable: Service and Repair Installation
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
Installation
1. Set key interlock cable to key cylinder and install holder. 2. Turn ignition key to lock position. 3.
Set selector lever to P position.
4. Insert interlock rod into adjuster holder. 5. Install casing cap to bracket. 6. Move slider in order to
secure adjuster holder to interlock rod.
Locations
Throttle Position Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 4526
1. Adjust the seat so you have access to the armrest bolt cover.
2. Remove the armrest bolt cover.
^ Use a plastic trim tool.
3. Remove bolt and armrest.
4. Push the insert out of the armrest as shown in Figure 3 and 4 using a suitable tool.
Procedures
Steering Gear: Procedures
On-Vehicle Service
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
On-Vehicle Service
CHECKING STEERING GEAR Check gear housing and boots for looseness and damage.
- Check gear housing and boots for fluid leakage. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/Checking Fluid Leakage.
- Check connection with steering column for looseness.
- Prior to removing the steering gear from the vehicle, check rack sliding force. Refer to "Checking
rack sliding force".
- If rack sliding force is not within specification, adjust rack sliding force. Refer to See: Adjustment
Of Rack Sliding Force.
CHECKING STEERING LINKAGE Check ball joint, and other component parts for looseness, wear, and damage.
CHECKING GEAR HOUSING MOVEMENT 1. Check the movement of steering gear housing
during stationary steering on a dry paved surface. Apply a force of 49 N (5 kg-f, 11 lb-f) to steering wheel to check the gear housing movement. Turn
off ignition key while checking.
Movement of gear housing : ±2 mm (±0.08 in) or less
2. If movement exceeds the limit, replace or repair as necessary.
CHECKING RACK SLIDING FORCE 1. Disconnect steering column lower joint and knuckle arms
from the gear. 2. Start and run engine at idle to make sure steering fluid has reached normal
operating temperature.
3. Using a suitable spring gauge, pull tie-rod slowly to move it from neutral position to ±11.5 mm
(±0.453 in) at speed of 3.5 mm (0.138 in)/s. Check
that rack sliding force is within specification. Refer to See: Steering Shaft/Specifications/Steering
Gear And Linkage.
Adjustment Of Rack Sliding Force
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
Adjustment of Rack Sliding Force
DECREASE Decrease rack sliding force as follows: 1. Loosen adjusting screw two rotations
counterclockwise.
CAUTION: Do not remove adjusting screw.
- Steering gear must replaced if adjusting screw is removed or loosened more than two rotations.
Page 1351
ERROR: undefined
OFFENDING COMMAND: f‘~
STACK:
Locations
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SRS Component Parts Location
Page 2454
Shift Indicator: Testing and Inspection
A/T INDICATOR
A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate
1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL 1. Select "METER/M&A;" on CONSULT-III. 2.
Using "DATA MONITOR", confirm each indication while operating the shift lever.
NOTE: If more than one input is ON, A/T indicator will enter fail-safe function and the display will
turn off.
OK or NG OK - Replace combination meter. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Combination Meter. NG - GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TCM Perform self-diagnosis of TCM. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool
Testing and Procedures. OK or NG OK - Replace combination meter. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Combination
Meter. NG - Perform "Diagnostic Procedure" for displayed DTC.
Page 4105
e. A "Basic Features" list showing specific phone features and "Compatibility" for each feature will
be displayed.
f. Use this list to determine if the customer's concern(s) relates to any of the listed features.
g. If the feature related to the customer's concern(s) shows as "N" (not compatible):
^ STOP YOUR DIAGNOSIS HERE.
^ Do NOT perform any further diagnosis for this incident.
^ Do NOT perform any repairs for this incident.
^ Do NOT replace any parts for this incident.
^ The customer concern(s) cannot be addressed due the phone's feature(s) being incompatible.
^ If the customer still wants the feature(s) to function, they will need to get an approved phone
showing the feature(s) as "Y" (compatible) in the "Basic
Features" list.
h. If the feature related to the customer's concern(s) shows as "Y" (compatible), perform diagnosis
in the applicable section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
Quick Reference
QUICK REFERENCE
Poor Sound Quality
1. If a customer concern of poor sound quality is verified, in the vehicle and / or "land" side (other
end of the call), perform the following steps.
^ Have the customer lower the in-vehicle phone volume by using the audio system volume control.
NOTE:
Lowering the in-vehicle phone volume improves noise canceling performance.
Speaker Adaptation
1. If a customer concern related to Voice Recognition is verified:
a. Verify the vehicle you are working on has Speaker Adaptation feature.
Page 1383
- When handling camshaft sprocket (INT), be careful of the following: CAUTION: - Handle carefully
to avoid any shock to camshaft sprocket. - Do not disassemble. (Do not loosen bolts (A) as shown).
NOTE: For removal of timing chain tensioner (secondary), refer to Removal and Installation
(Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner). [Removing camshaft bracket (No. 1) is required.]
Inspection
Locations
Seat Memory Switch: Locations
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 5108
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications
Automatic Air Conditioner
REFRIGERANT
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
........................................ 900 ± 50 g (1.98 ± 0.11 lb)
Manual Air Conditioner
REFRIGERANT
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
........................................ 900 ± 50 g (1.98 ± 0.11 lb)
Page 2448
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Page 5073
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Electrical - IPDM Serviceability
Power Distribution Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - IPDM Serviceability
Classification: EL09-014
Reference: NTB09-036
Date: April 27, 2009
IPDM SERVICE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Nissan Models with IPDM
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) is ONLY serviceable as an assembly.
The ONLY serviceable parts of an IPDM are the fuses.
^ Some IPDM designs have sections that Relays Relays appear to be serviceable relays.
^ These "relays" are NEVER to be removed.
^ These "relays" may have markings indicating they are similar. They are not "swappable".
CAUTION:
NEVER REMOVE relays from an IPDM.
Tampering with the relays of an IPDM may cause additional incidents with the vehicle.
Such incidents may include:
^ Headlights inoperative.
^ Radiator fan inoperative
^ Fog lamps inoperative
^ Wiper inoperative
Page 1814
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Before starting engine, check the levels of engine coolant, engine oil and working fluid. If less than
required quantity, fill to the specified level.
- Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage.
- Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for
fuel leakage at connection points.
- Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
- Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
- Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of engine coolant, engine oil,
working fluid, fuel and exhaust gas.
- Bleed air from passages in pipes and tubes of applicable lines, such as in cooling system.
- After cooling down engine, again check amounts of engine coolant, engine oil and working fluid.
Refill to specified level, if necessary.
- Summary of the inspection items:
Page 58
Repair Flow Chart
Page 1119
Engine Oil: Service and Repair
ENGINE OIL
Changing Engine Oil
WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil may be hot.
- Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct
skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
1. Park the vehicle on a flat and level surface, then start the engine to warm up the oil. 2. Check for
oil leaks from the engine. 3. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes.
4. Remove the oil drain plug and oil filler cap. 5. Drain the engine oil. 6. Install the oil pan drain
plug.
Oil pan drain plug : Refer to See: Oil Pan/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: Clean the oil pan drain plug and install using a new washer.
7. Refill the engine with new engine oil. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance.
CAUTION: The refill oil capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for
reference only.
- Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine.
8. Warm up the engine and check the oil pan drain plug and oil filter for oil leaks. 9. Stop engine
and wait at least 10 minutes.
10. Check engine oil level. Refer to See: .
Locations
Key Reminder Switch: Locations
WARNING CHIME
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 4246
Navigation Module: Locations Electrical Units Location
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 796
b. Hand tighten the fittings between the upper and lower high pressure pipe (A) and the low
pressure pipe (B) as shown.
- Arrow Indicates Front
c. Hand tighten the high pressure pipe connection (1) and low pressure pipe connection (2) located
near the RH front suspension strut tower (3)
as shown.
d. Install the A/C pipe clamp bolt (A) to the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown. e. Attach
the high/low pressure pipe to the A/C support clip (secured to the dash panel threaded stud). f.
Tighten the high pressure pipe connection (1) and low pressure pipe connection (2) located near
the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown to specification.
3. Complete the installation of the lower high/low pressure pipe.
CAUTION: Clean all of the A/C pipe fittings and connections.
- Replace the O-rings of the high/low-pressure pipe with new ones.
- Lubricate all the O-rings with the specified A/C system oil.
a. Under the vehicle, tighten the high/low pressure pipe connection (1) bolt (A) as shown to
specification. b. Install the A/C pipe clamp (2) and tighten the A/C pipe clamp bolt (B). c. As
necessary, reposition the rear heater pipe clamp (3). d. Attach the other pipe support clip to the
dash panel threaded stud.
Page 2978
Parking Brake Control: Specifications Parking Drum Brake
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Parking Drum Brake
Page 1585
Page 3798
Rear A/C
CAUTION: The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not
confuse Orings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will
leak at or around the connection.
Page 2121
Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1340
Page EM-10
Page 2076
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 2360
Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1683
Page 5111
ATC
Blower Motor: Locations ATC
Front Passenger Compartment
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 1571
Page 3278
Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction
- When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned
OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction.
- When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch
signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay.
NOTE: When the ignition switch is turned ON, the tail lamps are OFF.
Page 4074
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
Electrical - IPDM Serviceability
Power Distribution Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - IPDM Serviceability
Classification: EL09-014
Reference: NTB09-036
Date: April 27, 2009
IPDM SERVICE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Nissan Models with IPDM
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) is ONLY serviceable as an assembly.
The ONLY serviceable parts of an IPDM are the fuses.
^ Some IPDM designs have sections that Relays Relays appear to be serviceable relays.
^ These "relays" are NEVER to be removed.
^ These "relays" may have markings indicating they are similar. They are not "swappable".
CAUTION:
NEVER REMOVE relays from an IPDM.
Tampering with the relays of an IPDM may cause additional incidents with the vehicle.
Such incidents may include:
^ Headlights inoperative.
^ Radiator fan inoperative
^ Fog lamps inoperative
^ Wiper inoperative
Locations
Air Bag Control Module: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SRS Component Parts Location
Page 2562
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area
Oil Filter: Customer Interest Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area
Classification: EM07-001D
Reference: NTB07-042D
Date: May 25, 2010
MAXIMA / ALTIMA / QUEST; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA
This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been
amended. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35 engine ONLY
2004-2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM:
There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system.
^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM).
^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause.
Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis.
ACTION:
1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with
the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin.
2. Change the engine oil and filter.
3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST
closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Courtesy Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
How To Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
How to Proceed with Trouble Diagnosis
1. Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. 2. Understand operation description and function
description. Refer to See: Description and Operation. 3. Carry out the Preliminary Check. Refer to
See: Preliminary Check. 4. Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. 5. Does
the interior room lamp operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. 6. Inspection End.
Preliminary Check
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Preliminary Check
SWITCH INSPECTION Ensure lamps on demand switch is in the DOOR or ON position.
BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Page 2060
Page 1877
Page 3037
The rear wheel sensor rotor is built into the rear wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure,
refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Wheel Hub.
Page 1141
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-50288 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets (no picture shown).
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioners
plungers. Figure 1 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tools where shown in
Page 940
Always replace the seal after every disassembly.
3. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut to specification.
NOTE: Make sure no burrs exist in the valve stem hole of the wheel.
Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb)
4. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 5. Lubricate tire well, and install second side
of tire as normal.
Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim.
6. Inflate tire and balance the wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 7. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel
position on vehicle. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel.
NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to
See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter
Wake Up Operation. 8. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor, if equipped. Refer to See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Page 372
Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Classification: EL09-042
Reference: NTB09-118
Date: October 28, 2009
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR
RESET
APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below.
IF YOU CONFIRM
^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side.
And
^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery.
2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display.
NOTES:
^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage
the printed circuit board (PCB).
^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver.
Page 788
3. Reposition the coolant reservoir tank aside. 4. Reposition the power steering fluid reservoir
aside. 5. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Procedures. 6. Remove the high-pressure pipe.
Refer to See: Locations.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Locations.
CAUTION: -
Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when
installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Removal And Installation For High/Low-Pressure Pipe
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for High/Low-Pressure Pipe
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and
Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure.
WARNING: Avoid breathing the A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate the eyes, nose and
throat.
- If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming removal.
2. Remove the cowl top cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service
and Repair. 3. Disconnect the ECM from the cowl top extension and reposition it out of the way. 4.
Remove the two heater pump clips from the cowl top extension and reposition the heater pump out
of the way. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Cooling System/Heater Core/Service and Repair/Heater Pump.
5. Disconnect the heater hose clips from the cowl top extension and reposition the heater hose out
of the way. 6. Remove the wiper motor and linkage. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer
Systems/Wiper Motor/Service and Repair/Front Wiper And Washer
System.
7. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding /
Trim/Service and Repair.
8. Carefully cut the high pressure pipe (1) using a suitable tool (ratchet-type pipe cutter) (A) as
shown.
CAUTION: Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when cutting the pipe.
A small amount of refrigerant may discharge from the pipe when it is cut.
- Do not allow debris to fall into the cut ends of the pipe.
Page 5115
GW-DEF-03
Page 3971
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both terminals and wait at least
three minutes.
1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. 2.
Disconnect the harness connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 3.
Remove center console lower cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel.
4. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors. 5. Remove bolts from the diagnosis
sensor unit.
CAUTION: Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts.
- Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to make sure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If
it shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one.
- Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
CAUTION: The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark pointing toward the front of
the vehicle for proper operation.
ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis
sensor unit identification is correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to See: Air Bag
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/CONSULT-III Function (Air
Bag).
Page 3057
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
Page 2000
CAN System (Type 2)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CAN System (Type 2)
DIAGNOSIS SHEET
Page 762
^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times.
14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt.
Page 5076
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 4121
Page 1345
Page EM-15
Locations
Key Reminder Switch: Locations
WARNING CHIME
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 2089
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 4958
NOTE:
^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not
replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control
unit using the old starter.
^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is:
^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb)
Page 1204
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-50288 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets (no picture shown).
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioners
plungers. Figure 1 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tools where shown in
Page 2412
Page 2428
- Do not drop or shock spark plug.
If spark plug tip is covered with carbon, a spark plug cleaner may be used.
Checking and adjusting spark plug gap is not required between change intervals.
Spark plug gap (nominal) : 1.1 mm (0.043 in)
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Use standard type spark plug for normal driving conditions. Refer to See: Maintenance.
- The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under
conditions such as: Frequent engine starts
- Low ambient temperatures
- The cold type spark plug is suitable when engine spark knock occurs with the standard type spark
plug under conditions such as: Extended highway driving
- Frequent high engine revolution.
Front Suspension
Alignment: Specifications Front Suspension
Wheel Alignment
Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)
Wheelarch Height
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)
Description and Operation
Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Front Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter
The seat belt pre-tensioner system with load limiter is installed for both the driver's seat and the
front passenger's seat. It operates simultaneously with the SRS air bag system in the event of a
frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified level. When the frontal collision with an impact
exceeding a specified level occurs, seat belt slack resulting from clothing or other factors is
immediately taken up by the pre-tensioner. Vehicle passengers are securely restrained. When
passengers in a vehicle are thrown forward in a collision and the restraining force of the seat belt
exceeds a specified level, the load limiter permits the specified extension of the seat belt by the
twisting of the ELR shaft, and a relaxation of the chest-area seat belt web tension while maintaining
force.
Page 370
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Page 2503
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 812
^ Blue LLC one quart concentrate:
P/N 999MP - L255QTP
> The one quart concentrate containers are intended for extreme cold weather application.
> Use the concentrate without mixing (do not add water).
> Add directly to the cooling system in specific amounts as directed on the container label.
Additional Information for using Blue LLC
Blue LLC and Green-colored Nissan LLC (P/N 999MP-AF000P) are compatible with each other:
^ Blue can be mixed/added with Green
^ Green can be mixed/added with Blue
CAUTION:
^ Adding Green LLC to Blue LLC will reduce/shorten the life expectancy of the Blue LLC to that of
the Green LLC (4 years / 60,000 miles).
^ LLC must always be used with demineralized or distilled water, otherwise the life expectancy of
the LLC (Blue or Green) will be degraded and
cooling system damage may occur.
Page 3214
Component
Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair Component
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL
Component
Page 4241
Collision Avoidance Module: Service and Repair
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
Sonar Control Unit
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair to gain
access to sonar control unit.
2. Disconnect electrical connector then remove sonar control unit.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1433
Spark Plug: Application and ID
SPARK PLUG
Page 5082
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Component Locations
Knock Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1799
Spark Plug: Application and ID
SPARK PLUG
Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area
Timing Chain Tensioner: Customer Interest Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area
Classification: EM07-001D
Reference: NTB07-042D
Date: May 25, 2010
MAXIMA / ALTIMA / QUEST; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA
This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been
amended. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35 engine ONLY
2004-2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM:
There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system.
^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM).
^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause.
Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis.
ACTION:
1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with
the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin.
2. Change the engine oil and filter.
3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST
closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 1749
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Page 2251
Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning.
Page 4132
Cellular Phone: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
TELEPHONE
Bluetooth Control Unit Self-Diagnosis Function
The Bluetooth control unit has two diagnostic checks. The first diagnostic check is performed
automatically every ignition cycle during control unit initialization. The second diagnostic check is
performed by the technician using the steering wheel audio control switches prior to trouble
diagnosis.
BLUETOOTH CONTROL UNIT INITIALIZATION CHECKS Internal control unit failure
- Bluetooth antenna connection open or shorted
- Steering wheel audio control switches (SEND/END) stuck closed
- Vehicle speed pulse count
- Microphone connection test (with playback to operator)
- Bluetooth inquiry check
STARTING THE DIAGNOSTIC MODE 1. Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON. 2. Wait for the
Bluetooth system to complete initialization and the Bluetooth ON indicator to stop flashing. This
may take up to 10 seconds.
3. Press and hold the steering wheel audio control switch SEND button for at least 5 seconds. The
Bluetooth system will begin to play a verbal
prompt.
4. While the prompt is playing, momentarily press both the steering wheel audio control switches
SEND and END buttons simultaneously. The
Bluetooth system will sound a 5 second beep.
5. While the beep is sounding, momentarily press both the steering wheel audio control switches
SEND and END buttons simultaneously again. 6. The Bluetooth system has now entered into the
diagnostic mode. Results of the diagnostic checks will be verbalized to the technician by the
system.
Service and Repair
Sliding Door Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair
DOOR FINISHER
Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR
Removal 1. Release clip and remove front corner cover. 2. Remove screw cover then screw from
cup of power window and door lock/unlock switch assembly. 3. Remove power window and door
lock/unlock switch assembly. Release clip and disconnect harness connectors.
4. Remove memory seat/fuel door release switch assembly. Release clip and disconnect harness connectors.
5. Remove step light. Release tab and disconnect harness connectors.
6. Remove door finisher and disconnect lock cable and handle cable from door handle assembly. Release clips and remove door lock cable and door handle cable. Refer to See: Front
Door/Locations See: Front Door/Front Door Latch/Service and Repair.
7. Remove screws and front door release handle from front door finisher.
Page 1468
2. If disconnected, reattach the upper radiator hose at the engine side.
3. Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition
ON with the engine OFF as necessary to activate
the heater mode.
4. Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the radiator neck opening. Then attach
the gauge body assembly with the refill tube and
the venturi assembly to the radiator cap adapter.
Tool number : KV991J0070 (J-45695)
5. Insert the refill hose into the coolant mixture container that is placed at floor level. Make sure the
ball valve is in the closed position. Use Specified engine coolant or equivalent. Refer to See: Maintenance.
6. Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must be within specification.
Compressed air supply pressure : 5.7 - 8.5 kPa (5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm2, 80 - 120 psi)
CAUTION: The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air dryer. 7. The vacuum gauge
will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this process open the ball valve
on the refill hose slightly.
Coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill hose is full of coolant, close the ball
valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose.
Page 1902
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Specifications
Power Steering Pump: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Power Steering
Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area
Engine Oil: Customer Interest Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area
Classification: EM07-001D
Reference: NTB07-042D
Date: May 25, 2010
MAXIMA / ALTIMA / QUEST; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA
This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been
amended. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35 engine ONLY
2004-2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM:
There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system.
^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM).
^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause.
Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis.
ACTION:
1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with
the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin.
2. Change the engine oil and filter.
3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST
closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Removal And Installation For Condenser
Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair Removal And Installation For Condenser
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Condenser
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A)
Service Procedure. 2. Remove the radiator. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling
System/Radiator/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator.
3. Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe from the condenser.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air. 4. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector. 5. Remove the refrigerant
pressure sensor. 6. Carefully release retaining clips located on top driver side of condenser and
rotate the condenser out of its mounts as shown.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hose/Line
HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Component.
CAUTION: Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure pipe, refrigerant pressure sensor, and high-pressure
flexible hose with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 3213
Page 1689
NOTES:
^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply.
^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product
Program, Website order via link on dealer portal.
^ WD-40 is available from various local sources.
Removal Tool
^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to
accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and
strip the sensor.
^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box
end wrench or 6-point deep well socket.
1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice.
2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the
threads.
Page 408
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3785
1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heater Core Case/Service
and Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the side cover.
3. Remove the front heater core.
NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core,
replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new front heater core.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR HEATER CORE
Removal 1. Partially drain the engine cooling system. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair.
3. Disconnect the rear heater core hoses from the rear heater core. 4. Remove the rear heater core
bracket.
5. Remove the rear heater core.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3233
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Service and Repair
Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR GLASS
Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the hole cover over
rear glass bolt. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Temporarily reconnect the power window
switch to the door harness. 5. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass
until the door glass bolts can be seen. 6. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 7. Remove the
inside seal. 8. Remove the door glass bolts.
9. While holding the door window, raise it at the rear end to pull the glass out of the sash toward
the outside of the door.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR
Removal
Page 1307
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation (Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoe)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the timing chains (secondary). 2. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioner shoe by
evenly prying at base of shoe with suitable tool as shown.
INSTALLATION
1. Install new secondary timing chain tensioner shoe using Tool (A) as shown.
- Tighten the bolt until the secondary timing chain tensioner shoe is fully seated on the secondary
timing chain tensioner. CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolt.
Tool number : (J-50246)
2. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1519
3. Install the water pump.
CAUTION: Do not allow cylinder block to interfere with the O-rings when installing the water pump.
Check that timing chain and water pump sprocket are engaged.
- Insert water pump by tightening bolts alternately and evenly.
4. Remove dust and foreign material completely from back side of chain tensioner and from
installation area of rear timing chain case.
5. Turn the crankshaft pulley approximately 20° clockwise so that the timing chain on the timing
chain tensioner side is loose.
NOTE: When installing the timing chain tensioner, engine oil should be applied to the oil hole and
tensioner. 6. Install the timing chain tensioner.
7. Remove the stopper pin. 8. Install chain tensioner and water pump cover.
a. Before installing, remove all traces of sealant from mating surface of water pump cover and
chain tensioner cover using a scraper. Also remove traces of sealant from the mating surface of the
front cover.
Page 1642
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 4391
1. Remove sliding door finisher. Refer to See: Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 2.
Remove exterior door handle. 3. Disconnect sliding door lock assembly electrical connectors. 4.
Remove sliding door lock assembly. Remove screws from front and rear latches.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
SLIDING DOOR CABLE ASSEMBLY AND MOTOR
Page 2667
7. Remove support bearing bolts using power tool, and pry drive shaft from transaxle. -
Pry off drive shaft from transaxle.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Move joint up/down, left/right, and in axial direction. Check for any rough movement or significant
looseness.
- Check boot for cracks or other damage, and for grease leakage.
- If damaged, disassemble drive shaft to verify damage, and repair or replace as necessary.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following: Refer to "Removal and Installation (Right Side)" for tightening torque. Install in the reverse order of
removal.
CAUTION: Do not reuse non-reusable parts.
- In order to prevent damage to differential side oil seal, place Tool "A" onto oil seal before inserting
drive shaft as shown. Slide drive shaft into slide joint and tap with a hammer to install securely.
Tool number : KV38106800 (J-34297)
- Install new circlip on drive shaft in the circular clip groove on transaxle side. Refer to See:
Disassembly And Assembly (Left Side).
CAUTION: Make sure the new circlip on the drive shaft is securely fastened.
- After its insertion, try to pull the flange out of the slide joint by hand. If it pulls out, the circlip is not
properly meshed with the transaxle side gear.
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Fuse: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 3644
1. Remove the interior trim panel as necessary that contains the grille to be removed. Refer to See:
Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim
Panel/Service and Repair or See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and
Repair.
2. Remove the grille from the interior trim panel.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1579
Page 2409
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Page 772
^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times.
14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt.
Locations
Number One Cylinder: Locations
Firing Order
1-2-3-4-5-6
Locations
Headlamp Relay: Locations
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 4642
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor
mechanism (see Figure 2).
2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor
mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip.
Page 4405
1. Check to see if the 2 clips have come unattached from the sliding door welt.
^ If the clips are missing replace the door welt and proceed to step 2.
^ If the clips are not missing, reinstall the clips into the door welt by inserting the clips into the 2
holes located on the door welt, then proceed to step 2.
2. Prepare the surface by applying 3M(TM) Automotive Adhesion Promoter or equivalent on the
door welt and sliding door panel.
3. Apply 3M(TM) Acrylic Plus Tape or equivalent to the area as shown in Figure 2.
^ Tape size 5 mm x 20 mm x 1 mm (0.19 in x 0.78 in x 0.039 in)
4. Firmly press the door welt onto the sliding door panel.
^ Make sure the clips are securely inserted into the 2 holes located on the sliding door panel.
5. Check to make sure this issue has been resolved.
Page 793
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and
Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure.
WARNING: Avoid breathing the A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate the eyes, nose and
throat.
- If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming removal.
2. Remove the cowl top cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service
and Repair. 3. Disconnect the ECM from the cowl top extension and reposition it out of the way. 4.
Remove the two heater pump clips from the cowl top extension and reposition the heater pump out
of the way. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Cooling System/Heater Core/Service and Repair/Heater Pump.
5. Disconnect the heater hose clips from the cowl top extension and reposition the heater hose out
of the way. 6. Remove the wiper motor and linkage. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer
Systems/Wiper Motor/Service and Repair/Front Wiper And Washer
System.
7. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding /
Trim/Service and Repair.
8. Carefully cut the high pressure pipe (1) using a suitable tool (ratchet-type pipe cutter) (A) as
shown.
CAUTION: Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when cutting the pipe.
- A small amount of refrigerant may discharge from the pipe when it is cut.
- Do not allow debris to fall into the cut ends of the pipe.
9. Carefully cut the low pressure pipe (1) using a suitable tool (ratchet-type pipe cutter) (A) as
shown.
CAUTION: Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when cutting the pipe.
- A small amount of refrigerant may discharge from the pipe when it is cut.
10. Disconnect the power brake booster vacuum hose from the intake manifold collector to allow
removal of the cut A/C pipes.
11. Disconnect the high pressure pipe connection (1), low pressure pipe connection (2), and the
A/C pipe clamp bolt (A) located near the RH front
Page 2394
Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1491
1. Remove the front heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Heater Core Case/Service and Repair/Removal
And Installation.
2. Remove the side cover.
3. Remove the front heater core.
NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core,
replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new front heater core.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR HEATER CORE
Removal 1. Partially drain the engine cooling system. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair. 2.
Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair.
3. Disconnect the rear heater core hoses from the rear heater core. 4. Remove the rear heater core
bracket.
5. Remove the rear heater core.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 3058
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 1984
Driver Seat Control Unit
BCM
NOTE: Replace the unit when "NG" is indicated on the "INITIAL DIAG".
Front Air Control
Service and Repair
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
Page 1382
After removing timing chains, do not turn the crankshaft and camshaft separately, or the valves will
strike the pistons.
8. Remove crankshaft sprocket, if necessary. 9. Remove timing chain (secondary) and camshaft
sprockets as follows:
a. Attach stopper pin (B) to the right (A) and left (C) timing chain tensioners (secondary) (1).
NOTE: - Use stopper pins included with Tool J-50246.
b. Remove camshaft sprocket (INT and EXH) bolts.
c. Remove the timing chains (secondary) together with camshaft sprockets (INT) and (EXH).
- Turn camshaft slightly to secure slack of timing chain on timing chain tensioner (secondary) side.
- Insert metal or resin plate [0.5 mm (0.020 in)] into guide between timing chain (secondary) and
timing chain tensioner (secondary) plunger.
Remove camshaft sprocket and timing chain (secondary) with timing chain removed from guide
groove.
CAUTION: Timing chain tensioner plunger can move while stopper pin is inserted in timing chain
tensioner. Plunger can come out of tensioner when timing chain is removed. Use caution during
removal. NOTE: Camshaft sprocket (INT) is a one piece integrated design with sprockets for timing
chain (primary) and for timing chain (secondary).
Locations
Antenna: Locations
AUDIO ANTENNA
Location of Antenna
Description and Operation
Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 907
Fuse: Testing and Inspection
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Fuse
- If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of incident before installing new fuse.
- Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating.
- Do not partially install fuse, always insert it into fuse holder properly.
- Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time.
Page 3635
Defroster Nozzle
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
DEFROSTER NOZZLE
NOTE:
Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B)
Fuse Block: Diagrams Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B)
FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX (J/B)
Terminal Arrangement
Page 4008
^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times.
14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt.
Page 2193
Refueling Vapor Recovery System: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
Component Inspection
REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
With CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel
Tank/Service and Repair. 2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer. b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one
side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other side to a fuel container. c.
Drain fuel using "FUEL PUMP RELAY" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and
check that the air flows freely into the tank.
4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. Always
replace O-ring with new one. c. Put fuel tank upside down. d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end
[-13.3 kPa (-0.136 kg/cm2, -1.93 psi)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the
pressure is applicable.
Without CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel
Tank/Service and Repair. 2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel gauge retainer. b. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel
container.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and
check that the air flows freely into the tank.
4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. Always
replace O-ring with new one. c. Put fuel tank upside down. d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end
[-13.3 kPa (-0.136 kg/cm2, -1.93 psi)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the
pressure is applicable.
Front Suspension
Alignment: Service and Repair Front Suspension
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
Front Wheel Alignment
DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Before checking the front wheel alignment, be sure to make a preliminary inspection
(Unladen*). *: Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in
designated positions.
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION Check the tires for wear and improper inflation. Refer to See: Wheels and
Tires/Tires/Specifications.
- Check the wheel runout. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Wheels/Testing and Inspection.
- Check the front wheel bearings for looseness. Refer to See: Suspension/Wheel Hub/Testing and
Inspection/Front Wheel Hub And Knuckle.
- Check the front suspension for looseness. Refer to See: Suspension/Service and
Repair/Procedures/Front Suspension Assembly.
- Check the steering linkage for looseness. Refer to See: Steering/Steering Gear/Service and
Repair/Procedures/On-Vehicle Service.
- Check that the front shock absorbers work properly.
- Check the vehicle height (posture) in the unladen condition. Refer to See: Suspension/Service
and Repair/Procedures/Front Suspension Assembly.
GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 1. A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should
be performed. This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN vehicle.
- The four-wheel "thrust" process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering
wheel is centered.
- The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN vehicle.
- The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level.
2. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information.
- Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended
Service/Calibration Schedule.
THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in this.
Refer to See: Specifications. 1. When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines
use "indicators": (Green/red, plus or minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use
these indicators.
- The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these
indicators may not be correct.
- This may result in an ERROR.
2. Some newer alignment machines are equipped with an optional "Rolling Compensation" method
to "compensate" the sensors (alignment
targets or head units). Do NOT use this "Rolling Compensation" method.
- Use the "Jacking Compensation" method. After installing the alignment targets or head units,
raise the vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways.
- See Instructions in the alignment machine you are using for more information.
CAMBER, CASTER AND KINGPIN INCLINATION
NOTE: Camber, caster and kingpin inclination are preset at factory and cannot be adjusted.
1. Measure the camber, caster and kingpin inclination of both the right and left wheels using
attachment Tool and a suitable alignment gauge.
Camber, caster and kingpin inclination : Refer to See: Specifications.
Page 599
Page 2951
Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Rear Brake Piping And Hose
BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE
Rear Brake Piping and Hose
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
- All hoses must be free from excessive bending, twisting and pulling.
- Cover the open end of lines and hoses when disconnecting to prevent entrance of dirt.
1. Connect vinyl tube and container to air bleeder valve.
2. Drain brake fluid from each air bleeder valve by depressing brake pedal.
3. Remove flare nut connecting brake tube and hose, then withdraw lock spring. 4. Remove
connecting bolt and disconnect brake hose from caliper assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Attach the brake hose to the brake tube and temporarily tighten the flare nut as much as
possible by hand.
2. Attach the brake hose with a lock spring, then tighten the connecting bolt and flare nut using a
torque wrench to specification. Refer to See:
Hydraulic Circuit.
Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic
Operation
Classification: BT07-032A
Reference: NTB07-070A
Date: September 25, 2009
SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been revised. No other changes
have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2007 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2007 - 2009
Maxima (A34, A35) 2007 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007 - 2009 Quest (V42) 2007 - 2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
Sunroof auto operation will not work or sunroof does not operate properly:
^ When the battery has been disconnected or discharged
^ When the sunroof motor has been disconnected from power
^ When the sunroof motor was changed
ACTION
Perform the following initialization procedure:
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully
closed.
3. After the sunroof has closed all the way, push and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) again for
more than 2 seconds to re-learn motor position.
4. Initialization is complete if the sunroof operates normally.
NOTE:
If the sunroof is still not operating properly after initialization, refer to ASIST and section RF of the
Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis and repair information.
Service and Repair
Grille: Service and Repair
FRONT GRILLE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Release the tabs attaching front grille to front bumper fascia, then remove front grille.
NOTE: If equipped, remove the screws and remove the front license plate bracket from front
bumper fascia.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1162
Engine Oil Pressure: Capacity Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit
OIL PRESSURE
REGULATOR VALVE
OIL PUMP
OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)
Page 5173
Resetting After installing each component to the vehicle, perform the following procedure to reset
the limit switch. 1. Raise the door glass to the top position.
2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position. 3.
Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then
raises the door glass to the top position.
CAUTION: Do not operate the door glass automatically to raise the door glass to the top position.
Page 5104
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Page 3533
Wheel Bearing: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheel Bearing (Rear)
Page 2661
Axle Shaft Assembly: Specifications Dynamic Damper
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Damper
Page 1445
- Using a feeler gauge, measure the clearance between the valve lifter and camshaft.
- Record any valve clearance measurements which are out of specification. They will be used later
to determine the required replacement lifter size.
6. Turn crankshaft 240°. 7. Set No.3 cylinder at TDC on its compression stroke. 8. Check only
those valves as shown.
Page 1986
MONITOR ITEM LIST (ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS)
Display Control Unit
NOTE: CAN diagnostic support monitor of the display control unit is indicated on the vehicle
display. Refer to the following. Models with color display: Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and
Compact Disc/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Integrated
Display System/CAN Communication Line Check (With Color Display).
- Models with navigation system: Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Navigation
System/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/CAN Communication
Line Check.
Data Sheet
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Data Sheet
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS COPY SHEET
Page 3994
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor
mechanism (see Figure 2).
2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor
mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip.
Page 3365
> Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels
> Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and
inspections.
4. Check the target mounts.
^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before
performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11).
NOTE:
The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines.
Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment.
Locations
Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Locations
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Description and Operation
Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 1933
DESCRIPTION
System Description
Heated Glass Element: Description and Operation System Description
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Schematic
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
System Description
The rear window defogger system is controlled by BCM (body control module) and IPDM E/R
(intelligent power distribution module engine room). The rear window defogger operates only for
approximately 15 minutes. Power is supplied at all times through 20A fuses (No. 32 and 37, located in the IPDM E/R)
- to rear window defogger relay terminals 3 and 6
Page 686
- Do not drop or shock spark plug.
If spark plug tip is covered with carbon, a spark plug cleaner may be used.
Checking and adjusting spark plug gap is not required between change intervals.
Spark plug gap (nominal) : 1.1 mm (0.043 in)
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Use standard type spark plug for normal driving conditions. Refer to See: .
- The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under
conditions such as: Frequent engine starts
- Low ambient temperatures
- The cold type spark plug is suitable when engine spark knock occurs with the standard type spark
plug under conditions such as: Extended highway driving
- Frequent high engine revolution.
Page 3664
Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
Valve Clearance
Page 2006
NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
Driver Seat Control Unit Branch Line Circuit
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Driver Seat Control Unit Branch Line Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the
negative terminal. 3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose
connection (unit side and connector side). Driver seat control unit
- Harness connector B400
- Harness connector B37
- Harness connector B1
- Harness connector M11
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector.
2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of driver seat control unit.
2. Check the resistance between the driver seat control unit harness connector terminals.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the driver seat control unit branch line.
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground
circuit of the driver seat control unit. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Memory
Positioning Systems/Description and Operation. OK or NG OK >> Present error: Replace the driver seat control unit. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Memory Positioning Systems/Service and Repair.
- Past error: Error was detected in the driver seat control unit branch line.
NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
ECM Branch Line Circuit
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM Branch Line Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the
negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the ECM for damage, bend and loose
connection (unit side and connector side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal
and connector.
2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of ECM. 2. Check the
resistance between the ECM harness connector terminals.
Page 4173
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 966
7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem
(see Figure 6).
^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7).
Tire to Rim Slippage:
^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire
may become un-balanced.
^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage.
^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry.
^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced.
WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage
Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision
Damage
Classification: FA10-006
Reference: NTB10-126
Date: October 21, 2010
WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight
indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise.
NOTE:
Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a
warrantable repair
If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension
damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows:
1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle.
2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands.
3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise).
4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one.
Page 1268
32. Remove all old Silicone RTV Sealant from all the bolt holes and bolts.
CAUTION: Do not damage the threads or mating surfaces.
33. Use a scraper to remove all of the old Silicone RTV Sealant from the front timing chain case
and opposite mating surfaces.
CAUTION: Do not damage the mating surfaces.
INSTALLATION
1. Install dowel pins (right and left) into front timing chain case up to a point close to taper in order
to shorten protrusion length.
2. Install the new front oil seal on the front timing chain case. Apply new engine oil to the oil seal
edges.
NOTE: Install it so that each seal lip is oriented as shown.
a. Install the new front oil seal so that it becomes flush with the face with front timing chain case
using suitable drift.
Page 2388
Ignition Relay: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 3726
2. Disconnect the rear air control (rear) electrical connector and remove the rear air control (rear).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 887
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair
OIL
Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor
The oil in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add oil to compressor
when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to
maintain the specified amount. If oil quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions
may result: Lack of oil: May lead to a seized compressor
- Excessive oil: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference)
Oil Name: NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING
CAUTION: If excessive oil leakage is noted, do not perform the oil return operation. Start the
engine and set the following test conditions: Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm
- A/C switch: On
- Blower fan speed: Maximum position
- Temperature control: Optional [set so that intake air temperature is 25° to 30° C (77° to 86°F).]
- Perform oil return operation for about ten minutes.
Adjust the oil quantity according to the following table.
Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor After replacing any of
the following major components, add the correct amount of oil to the system.
Oil Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement
Page 1909
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 3683
MTC
BLOWER MOTOR
Component
Front Blower Motor
Rear Blower Motor
Page 474
Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
Ignition Relay: Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 2200
Page 1149
14. Remove the front drive shafts. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings
and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation (Left Side).
15. Remove the front suspension member. Refer to See: Steering and
Suspension/Suspension/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front
Suspension Member.
16. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensors and air flow ratio (A/F) sensors and remove the two
three way catalysts manifold from the exhaust
manifolds using power tool. Refer to See: Exhaust System/Service and Repair/Exploded View and
See: Exhaust System/Exhaust Manifold/Service and Repair.
17. Remove the rear cover plate from the upper oil pan. 18. Loosen the lower oil pan bolts using
power tool in order as shown.
19. Remove the lower oil pan.
a. Insert Tool between the lower oil pan and the upper oil pan.
- After removing the bolts and nuts, separate the mating surface using Tool and remove the liquid
gasket sealing.
Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228)
- In areas where the Tool is difficult to use, use a plastic hammer to lightly tap the Tool (1) where
the Silicone RTV Sealant is applied. Use a plastic hammer to slide the Tool (2) by tapping on the
side.
CAUTION: If for some unavoidable reason a tool such as a flat-bladed screwdriver is used, be
careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
Page 4425
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 4247
Page 4424
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
Page 1764
Knock Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Interior - Anti-Rattle Spring Falls Off 2nd Row Seats
Seat Latch: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Anti-Rattle Spring Falls Off 2nd Row Seats
Classification: BT09-003
Reference: NTB09-034
Date: April 24, 2009
ANTI-RATTLE SPRING HAS FALLEN OFF THE LEFT AND / OR RIGHT 2ND ROW SEAT
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The inner and/or outer anti-rattle spring has fallen off from the left and/or right 2nd row seat.
AND
The seat continues to latch and otherwise operate normally.
ACTION
Install a new anti-rattle spring.
NOTE:
Do not replace the seat assembly for this incident if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
WARNING:
Make sure to wear safety glasses when performing this Service Procedure.
Page 3152
Fuse: Locations Fuse And Fusible Link Box
FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX
Terminal Arrangement
Page 3643
FLOOR DISTRIBUTION DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the center lower trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel.
2. Remove the clip and remove the floor distribution duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FLOOR JUNCTION DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the center lower trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel.
2. Remove the clip and remove the floor distribution duct. 3. Remove the floor junction duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FLOOR JUNCTION DUCT EXTENSION
Removal 1. Remove the center lower trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Panel.
2. Remove the clip and remove the floor junction duct extension.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FLOOR DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the floor carpet. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the floor duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR OVERHEAD DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the bolt and two clips, and remove the
rear overhead duct.
NOTE: The rear headliner duct connected to the rear overhead duct is part of the headlining trim
panel and is replaced as an assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR FLOOR DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the rear lower finisher assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screw and clip, then remove the
rear floor duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
GRILLES
Removal
Page 1172
- If removed, install the electric throttle control actuator bolts in the order as shown. Install gasket
with three protrusions facing down.
Electric throttle control actuator bolts : 8.4 N.m (0.86 kg-m, 74 in-lb)
- Install the intake manifold collector (lower) bolts in the order as shown.
Intake manifold collector (lower) bolts : 19.6 N.m (2.0 kg-m, 14 ft-lb)
Service and Repair
Fluid Pan: Service and Repair
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Side cover
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine under cover. 2. Drain ATF. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Procedures/Changing A/T Fluid.
3. Remove side cover bolts and side cover.
INSTALLATION Installation is the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Automatic Transmission/Component.
Locations
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area
Oil Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area
Classification: EM07-001D
Reference: NTB07-042D
Date: May 25, 2010
MAXIMA / ALTIMA / QUEST; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA
This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been
amended. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35 engine ONLY
2004-2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM:
There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system.
^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM).
^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause.
Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis.
ACTION:
1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with
the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin.
2. Change the engine oil and filter.
3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST
closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 1171
Limit : 0.1 mm (0.004 in)
- If it exceeds the limit, replace the intake manifold collector (lower).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: After installation, it is necessary to re-calibrate the electric throttle control actuator as
follows: 1. Perform the "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" when harness connector of the
electric throttle control actuator is disconnected. Refer to
See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning.
2. Perform the "Idle Air Volume Learning" when the electric throttle control actuator is replaced.
Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers
and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume
Learning.
- If removed, install power valve bolts in the order as shown.
Power valve bolts : 19.6 N.m (2.0 kg-m, 14 ft-lb)
- If removed, tighten the intake manifold collector (upper) bolts in the order as shown.
Intake manifold collector (upper) bolts : 19.6 N.m (2.0 kg-m, 14 ft-lb)
Page 4570
CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER
Removal 1. Remove seat belt anchor. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat
Belt/Service and Repair/Front Seat Belt. 2. Remove front and rear kicking plates. 3. Remove center
pillar lower finisher. Disconnect harness to power opening door switch.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CENTER PILLAR UPPER FINISHER
Component Locations
Knock Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Locations
Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 52
- To install the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool).
- Always tighten the brake tubes to the specified torque when installing.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Page 2033
Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater
Page 886
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Automatic Air Conditioner
OIL
Name ...................................................................................................................................................
............................... NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S
Manual Air Conditioner
OIL
Name ...................................................................................................................................................
............................... NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S
Drivetrain - Front Axle Clicking Noise On Acceleration
Axle Shaft Assembly: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Front Axle Clicking Noise On Acceleration
Classification: FA06-004B
Reference: NTB06-085B
Date: October 19, 2009
CLICKING NOISE FROM FRONT AXLES DURING TAKE-OFF/ACCELERATION
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles, Parts Information, and Service Procedure
sections have been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous
versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLE: 2004 - 2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM:
An applied vehicle has a "clicking" noise coming from the front axles during take-off/acceleration.
ACTION:
Apply Molykote M77 grease (P/N 44003-7S000) to the front wheel drive shaft bearing surfaces.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the new torque specification for the axle nut: 200 Nm (147 ft-lb), instead of 125
Nm (92 ft-lb).
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove both front wheel drive shafts from the axle hubs. Refer to the FAX section of the
applicable Service Manual for the removal procedure.
Page 2221
Page 3887
REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the screws (A) and the center lower trim.
Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
Brake Fluid
Type ....................................................................................................................... Genuine NISSAN
Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3
Component Locations
Engine Control Module: Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Electrical Units Location
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Page 4892
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Component Locations
Knock Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Marker Lamp: Customer Interest Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Classification: EL03-030E
Reference: NTB03-074E
Date: January 4, 2010
EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been
revised. Please discard all previous versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models
SERVICE INFORMATION
Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT
due to a defect.
The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an
incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not.
All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed).
^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations"
(warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp.
^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents.
^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense.
^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions
or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1.
NOTE:
This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location.
Page 3760
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the rear A/C pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when
installing them.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks
Diagram Information and Instructions
Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Page 1276
- When handling camshaft sprocket (INT), be careful of the following: CAUTION: - Handle carefully
to avoid any shock to camshaft sprocket. - Do not disassemble. (Do not loosen bolts (A) as shown).
NOTE: For removal of timing chain tensioner (secondary), refer to Removal and Installation
(Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner). [Removing camshaft bracket (No. 1) is required.]
Inspection
Page 3390
1. Turn the adjusting bolts in the same direction to calibrate.
NOTE: Camber changes about 5' minutes with each graduation of the adjusting bolt.
2. Tighten adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to See: Suspension/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Suspension.
TOE-IN Measure toe-in using following procedure. If out of specification, inspect and replace any
damaged or worn rear suspension parts.
WARNING: Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface.
- Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it.
1. Bounce rear of vehicle up and down to stabilize the posture. 2. Push the vehicle straight ahead
about 5 m (16 ft).
3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both tires at the same height of hub center.
This mark is a measuring point.
4. Measure distance "A" (rear side). 5. Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180°
degrees (1/2 turn).
Page 2261
Service and Repair
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
REAR VIEW MONITOR
Rear View Camera Control Unit
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the front passenger seat. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Front Seat/Removal And Installation. 3.
Disconnect the rear view camera control unit connector.
4. Remove the screws (1) and remove the rear view camera control unit (2).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4339
1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio,
Stereo, and Compact Disc/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3.
Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Temporarily reconnect the power window switch to the door
harness. 5. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the door
glass bolts can be seen. 6. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 7. Remove the door glass bolts.
8. Raise the door glass up into the door frame/channel and hold in place with a suitable tool (A). 9.
Disconnect the harness connector for the regulator assembly.
10. Remove the regulator nuts, and remove the regulator assembly.
Inspection After Removal Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is
detected, replace or grease it. Wire wear
- Regulator deformation
The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION AND
SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION".
Door glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
Disassembly 1. Remove the regulator motor bolts. 2. Remove the regulator motor from the
regulator assembly.
Assembly Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
FITTING INSPECTION AND SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator nuts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position.
Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in
the motor). Removal and installation of the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the regulator motor from the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the door glass.
- Removal and installation of the door glass run.
Page 1821
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
Adjustable and Non-adjustable Accelerator Pedal
CAUTION: Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position.
This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only).
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only).
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the heater and cooling unit
assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and
Repair/Removal
And Installation.
Component Locations
Engine Control Module: Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Electrical Units Location
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Page 3084
Battery: Removal and Replacement
BATTERY
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery negative and positive terminals.
CAUTION: When disconnecting, disconnect battery negative terminal first. 2. Remove battery
frame nuts and battery frame. 3. Remove battery cover. 4. Remove battery.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: When connecting, connect battery positive terminal first.
Reset electronic systems as necessary. Refer to See: Procedures/Required Procedures After
Battery Disconnection.
Service and Repair
EGR Valve: Service and Repair
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine cover using power tool. 2. Remove air cleaner case (upper),
mass air flow sensor, and air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube as an assembly. Refer
to See: Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair.
3. Partially drain the coolant when the engine is cool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: Cover any engine openings to avoid the entry of any foreign material. 4. Disconnect the
EGR temperature sensor electrical connector and bracket.
Page 1600
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Specifications
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Locations
Door Switch: Locations
WARNING CHIME
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Locations
Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location
Locations
Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location
Page 758
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor
mechanism (see Figure 2).
2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor
mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip.
Service and Repair
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Service and Repair
COOLING FAN
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove radiator. Refer to See: Radiator/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: Perform this step when engine is cold. 2. Remove radiator cooling fan assembly from
radiator.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for engine coolant leaks. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Inspection.
- Start and warm up engine. Visually inspect that there are no engine coolant or A/T fluid leaks.
Page 956
Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment
Page 3282
NOTE: The details for display of the period are as follows: CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R.
- PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory.
DATA MONITOR
All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu
Page 2498
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
ATC
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations ATC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Page 2733
Control Module: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Locations
Throttle Position Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 441
Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater
Procedures
Transmission Cooler: Procedures
A/T FLUID
A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning
Whenever an automatic transaxle is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, the A/T fluid cooler
mounted in the radiator must be inspected and cleaned. Metal debris and friction material, if
present, can become trapped in the A/T fluid cooler. This debris can contaminate the newly
serviced A/T or, in severe cases, can block or restrict the flow of A/T fluid. In either case,
malfunction of the newly serviced A/T may result. Debris, if present, may build up as A/T fluid
enters the cooler inlet. It will be necessary to back flush the cooler through the cooler outlet in order
to flush out any built up debris.
A/T FLUID COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE 1. Position an oil pan under the automatic
transaxle's inlet and outlet cooler hoses. 2. Identify the inlet and outlet fluid cooler hoses.
3. Disconnect the fluid cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses from the steel cooler tubes or bypass
valve.
NOTE: Replace the cooler hoses if rubber material from the hose remains on the tube fitting. 4.
Allow any A/T fluid that remains in the cooler hoses to drain into the oil pan.
5. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N
999MP-AM006) into the cooler outlet hose.
CAUTION: Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the Transmission Cooler Cleaner.
- Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation.
- Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
- Do not breath vapors or spray mist.
6. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a
continuous stream into the cooler outlet hose until fluid
flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds.
Page 537
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 699
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Before starting engine, check the levels of engine coolant, engine oil and working fluid. If less than
required quantity, fill to the specified level.
- Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage.
- Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for
fuel leakage at connection points.
- Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
- Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
- Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of engine coolant, engine oil,
working fluid, fuel and exhaust gas.
- Bleed air from passages in pipes and tubes of applicable lines, such as in cooling system.
- After cooling down engine, again check amounts of engine coolant, engine oil and working fluid.
Refill to specified level, if necessary.
- Summary of the inspection items:
Page 1258
Page EM-16
Page 3186
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Classification: EM09-015
Reference: NTB10-009
Date: January 19, 2010
REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure
described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the
exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are
made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
NOTE:
The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads
may not be considered a warrantable expense.
This procedure can be performed by two methods:
Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed
^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle.
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed.
Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle.
^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice.
Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is
performed on the vehicle.
Service Procedure
Rust Penetrant
Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure:
Locations
Remote Control Module: Locations
AUDIO
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Locations
Seat Occupant Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SRS Component Parts Location
Page 3689
Page 1838
Body Control Module: Locations
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Locations
Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Power Distribution Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection
1.FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK INSPECTION Check that the following fusible links or IPDM E/R
fuses are not blown.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - Replace fuse or fusible link. 2.POWER CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1.
Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E120. 3. Check voltage
between IPDM E/R harness connector E120 terminals 1, 2 and ground.
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Repair or replace IPDM E/R power circuit harness. 3.GROUND
CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E121 and E124.
2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E121(A) terminal 60, E124(B) terminal
38 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG OK - Inspection End. NG - Repair or replace IPDM E/R ground circuit harness.
Page 1859
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 2008
INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the following terminals and
connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). IPDM E/R
- Harness connector E25
- Harness connector M90
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector. 2.CHECK HARNESS FOR
OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of IPDM E/R. 2. Check the resistance between the
IPDM E/R harness connector terminals.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the IPDM E/R branch line. 3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY
AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the IPDM E/R. Refer to
See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Testing and Inspection/Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview. OK or NG OK >> Present error: Replace the IPDM E/R. Refer to See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power
Distribution Module/Service and Repair.
- Past error: Error was detected in the IPDM E/R branch line.
NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
Main Line Between TCM And Data Link Connector
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Main Line Between TCM and Data Link Connector
INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the following terminals and
connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). Harness connector E26
- Harness connector M91
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector.
2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Disconnect the harness connectors E26
and M91. 2. Check the continuity between the TCM harness connector and the harness connector.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the main line between the TCM and the harness
connector E26.
Component Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 287
The rear wheel sensor rotor is built into the rear wheel hub. For removal and installation procedure,
refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear Wheel Hub.
Electrical - Trailer Light Wiring Info.
Trailer Lamps: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Trailer Light Wiring Info.
Classification: EL03-043H
Reference: NTB04-049H
Date: April 13, 2011
TRAILER LIGHT WIRING
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard
previous versions of this is bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
SERVICE INFORMATION
NOTE:
This bulletin provides information to be shared with all affected customers.
^ This TSB contains the appropriate hookup points for connecting a trailer light wiring harness to
the towing vehicle's electrical system.
^ The wiring diagrams contained in this bulletin are for Nissan vehicles that have trailer towing
capability (see the owners manual) but do not have a
Genuine Nissan accessory towing kit (with wiring) available.
Page 2004
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair the combination meter branch line.
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground
circuit of the combination meter. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Combination
Meter/Power Supply And Ground Circuit Inspection. OK or NG OK >> Present error: Replace the combination meter. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Combination Meter.
- Past error: Error was detected in the combination meter branch line.
NG >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
Data Link Connector Branch Line Circuit
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Data Link Connector Branch Line Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of
the data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side).
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the terminal and connector.
2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check the resistance between the data link connector
terminals.
OK or NG OK >> Present error: Check the following items again.
- Decision of CAN system type.
- Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU
list" included)].
- Not copied from on-board diagnosis.
- Procedure for detecting root cause.
- Past error: Error was detected in the data link connector branch line circuit.
NG >> Repair the data link connector branch line.
Display Control Unit Branch Line Circuit
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Display Control Unit Branch Line Circuit
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the
negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the display control unit for damage,
bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). OK or NG
Page 1605
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 4856
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Locations
Horn Relay: Locations
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Page 3806
2. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service
Procedure. 3. Remove the high-pressure flexible hose. Refer to See: Component.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Component.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to
it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
MTC
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Procedures. 2. Remove the engine under
cover. 3. Remove the high-pressure flexible hose. Refer to See: Locations.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Locations.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to
it when installing it.
After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
ATC
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe
REMOVAL 1. Reposition the IPDM E/R aside. 2. Remove the windshield washer fluid bottle filler
neck. 3. Reposition the coolant reservoir tank aside. 4. Reposition the power steering fluid reservoir
aside. 5. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service
Procedure. 6. Remove the high-pressure pipe. Refer to See: Component.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Component.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when
installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
MTC
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe
REMOVAL 1. Reposition the IPDM E/R aside. 2. Remove the windshield washer fluid bottle filler
neck.
Specifications
Timing Cover: Specifications
Timing Cover
Loosely install the front timing chain case bolts.
- Tighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown.
- Retighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown.
Page 815
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Coolant
Type ............................................................ 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or
equivalent, 50% Distilled or Demineralized Water.
Locations
Starter Relay: Locations
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 1879
Specifications
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Page 2887
align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only) for installation.
- Do not disassemble the brake pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only).
- Avoid damage from dropping the brake pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the brake pedal assembly away from water.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check brake pedal for following items. Clevis pin deformation
- Crack of any welded portion
- Brake pedal bent or damaged
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the brake pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying
or releasing the brake pedal.
- If equipped, check the brake pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no
binding or sticking when adjusting the brake pedal forward or backward.
- After installing the brake pedal assembly, adjust as necessary. Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection.
Locations
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Locations
Trailer Lighting Module: Locations
TRAILER TOW
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 166
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 4851
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Page 5028
Page 1556
The exhaust system may be hot. Allow to cool down before inspection/repairs.
NOTE: Exhaust system parts do not need to be removed for this inspection/repair.
1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
2. Inspect the heat shields on the front exhaust tube for the following:
^ Heat shield contact with the exhaust tube.
^ Separated / missing band clamp(s).
^ Weld separation(s).
3. If a heat shield is found contacting the exhaust tube, pry it away to allow a minimum 1 mm (.040
inch) space.
^ Road test the vehicle to verify the repair.
4. If a weld or band clamp is separated, or the band clamp is missing, install new band clamps as
needed.
^ For band clamp(s) location, refer to the pictures below that applies to your vehicle.
Page 4758
Page 2969
3. Holding down the piston with the stopper cap, push the stopper cap tabs so they are firmly into
the cylinder grooves, then attach the stopper cap.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the stopper cap. 4. Apply brake fluid to the grommets and attach to the
cylinder body.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the grommets. 5. Place master cylinder assembly is a vise as described in
disassembly step 2.
6. Install the reservoir tank pin so that the pin is evenly seated on both sides of the reservoir, using
a suitable tool [commercial service tool: diameter
approx. 4 mm (0.16 in)].
CAUTION: Do not reuse reservoir tank grommets and pin. 7. If necessary, install brake fluid level
switch.
WITH VDC MODELS
Disassembly
1. Place the side flange of cylinder body with chamfering around the pin insertion hole facing up,
and firmly set master cylinder assembly in a vise.
CAUTION: When setting the master cylinder assembly with the vise, be sure not to over-tighten.
- When securing with a vise, use copper plates or cloth to protect the flange.
Page 1150
20. Remove the four upper oil pan to transaxle bolts. 21. Remove the upper oil pan.
a. Loosen the bolts in the order as shown, using power tool. b. Insert a suitable tool into the notch
(1) of the upper oil pan as shown.
c. Pry off the upper oil pan by moving the suitable tool up and down (2) as shown.
22. Remove the O-ring seals from the bottom of the cylinder block and oil pump housing, use new
O-rings for installation.
23. Remove front cover gasket and rear oil seal retainer gasket. 24. Remove the oil strainer.
Page 830
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Checking A/T Fluid
A/T FLUID
Checking A/T Fluid
1. Warm up the engine. 2. Check for any transaxle fluid leaks.
3. Before driving, the fluid level can be checked at fluid temperature using the "COLD" range on the
A/T fluid level gauge.
a. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set parking brake. b. Start the engine and move the
transaxle selector lever through each gear position. Leave the selector lever in the "P" park
position.
c. Check the fluid level with the engine idling.
CAUTION: Firmly secure the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the
attached stopper, this will provide an accurate reading on the gauge.
d. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and wipe it clean with a lint-free paper. e. Re-insert the A/T
fluid level gauge into the charging pipe as far as it will go. f.
Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and note the reading. If the reading is at or below the low side of
the range, add the necessary specified A/T fluid through the A/T fluid charging pipe and then
re-insert the A/T fluid level gauge.
CAUTION: Do not overfill the transaxle.
- Firmly secure the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe using the attached stopper,
this will provide an accurate reading on the gauge, and will keep the gauge in position while driving.
4. Drive the vehicle for approximately 5 minutes at moderate speeds.
Page 3185
Power Distribution Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R
Page 4550
Console: Service and Repair Disassembly
CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY
Disassembly
1. Remove center console. Refer to See: Removal.
2. Remove front bin assembly.
3. Remove rear console trim cover.
4. Remove RH and LH console side trim panels.
5. Remove storage bin door assembly.
Page 2804
Acceleration/Deceleration Sensor: Locations Electrical Units Location
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Specifications
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Mass Air Flow Sensor
Component Locations
EGR Temperature Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 275
Acceleration/Deceleration Sensor: Locations Electrical Units Location
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 3098
Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines,
representing wires, with different weight are used. A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Page 1892
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 2935
Cylinder Body
CAUTION: Use new brake fluid to clean. Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene.
Check inner wall of cylinder for corrosion, wear, and damage. If any non-standard condition is
detected, replace cylinder body.
- Minor flaws caused by corrosion or a foreign material can be removed by polishing the surface
with a fine sandpaper. Replace the cylinder body, if necessary.
Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace
the affected part.
Piston
CAUTION: Since the piston surface is plated, do not repair using sandpaper. Check piston surface
for corrosion, wear, and damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part.
Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots Check that there is no wear, damage, or cracks in the
sliding pin bolts and sliding pin boots, and if there are, replace them.
ASSEMBLY
1. Apply a rubber grease to the piston seal and attach to cylinder body.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the piston seals.
2. Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to the piston boot, place it on the piston, and firmly insert the
piston boot cylinder-side lip into the cylinder
body groove.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the piston boot. 3. Apply a brake fluid to the piston, insert into the cylinder
body by hand and firmly attach the piston boot piston-side lip into the piston boot.
CAUTION: Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from
being rubbed.
Page 4907
- to key switch terminal 1, and
- through 15A fuse [No. 3, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
- to BCM terminal 57, and
- through 50A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
- to BCM terminal 70.
When the key is inserted in key switch, power is supplied through the key switch terminal 2
- to BCM terminal 37.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied through 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
- to BCM terminal 38.
Ground is supplied to BCM terminal 67
- through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
When the front door LH is opened, ground is supplied to BCM terminal 47
- through front door switch LH terminal 1
- through case ground of front door switch LH.
When the front door RH is opened, ground is supplied to BCM terminal 12
- through front door switch RH terminal 1
- through case ground of front door switch RH.
When the sliding door LH is opened, ground is supplied to BCM terminal 48
- through sliding door switch LH terminal 1
- through case ground of sliding door switch LH.
When the sliding door RH is opened, ground is supplied to BCM terminal 13
- through sliding door switch RH terminal 1
- through case ground of sliding door switch RH.
When the liftgate is opened, ground is supplied to BCM terminal 43
- through back door switch terminal 1 (without power back door) or back door latch (door ajar
switch) terminal 7 (with power back door)
- through back door switch terminal 3 (without power back door) or back door latch (door ajar
switch) terminal 8 (with power back door)
- through grounds D403 and D404.
When doors are locked or unlocked by either door lock/unlock switch, BCM receives a ground
signal to BCM terminal 22
- through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14 (with rear power vent
windows) or terminal 12 (without rear power vent windows)
- through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 17 (with rear power vent
windows) or terminal 15 (without rear power vent windows), or
- through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 16
- through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 11
- through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
When the front door LH is unlocked by the key, the BCM receives a ground signal to BCM terminal 22
- through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14 (with rear power vent
windows) or terminal 12 (without rear power vent windows)
- through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 6 (with rear power vent
windows) or terminal 7 (without rear power vent windows)
- through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminal 6
- through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminal 5
- through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
When the front door LH is locked by the key, the BCM receives a ground signal to BCM terminal 22
- through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14 (with rear power vent
windows) or terminal 12 (without rear power vent windows)
- through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 4 (with rear power vent
windows) or terminal 6 (without rear power vent windows)
- through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminal 1
- through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminal 5
- through grounds M57, M61 and M79.
When a signal, or combination of signals is received by BCM, ground is supplied through BCM terminal 63
- to lamps on demand switch terminal 3
- through lamps on demand switch terminal 4 (with switch in DOOR position)
Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Pressure
Standard ..............................................................................................................................................
................. 1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2, 185 psi)/300 rpm Minimum ........................................................
........................................................................................................ 981 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2, 142
psi)/300 rpm Differential limit between cylinders
.............................................................................................................................. 98 kPa (1.0
kg/cm2, 14 psi)/300 rpm
Page 4168
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Page 1656
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
Adjustable and Non-adjustable Accelerator Pedal
CAUTION: Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most position.
This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only).
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only).
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the heater and cooling unit
assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and
Repair/Removal
And Installation.
Page 4592
3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1.
4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2).
5. Replace the battery.
^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece.
6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together.
7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated
in the dot matrix display.
8. If the indicator is still illuminated:
a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door.
b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off.
Page 2488
Page 2043
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Removal and Installation of BCM
REMOVAL
NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference
when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 1. Disconnect negative battery
cable. 2. Remove the parking brake pedal assembly. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Control/Service and
Repair/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the BCM (1) by removing the screw (A) and disconnecting the harness connectors (2). Arrow Indicates : Front
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
- When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition
key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Locations/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS) See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Description and Operation/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle
Immobilizer System-NATS)/System Description See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft
and Alarm Systems/Description and Operation/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer
System-NATS)/System Composition.
- When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system.
Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ID Registration Procedure.
Page 4727
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3252
Fuse: Locations Fuse And Fusible Link Box
FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX
Terminal Arrangement
Page 4689
3. Using needle nose pliers, install the anti-rattle spring as shown in Figure 3.
4. Check to make sure both ends of the anti-rattle spring are correctly installed and fully seated as
shown in Figure 4.
5. Check to make sure the seat is operating properly and the anti-rattle spring stays in place.
Page 4014
Seat Belt: Service and Repair Third Row Seat Belt
SEAT BELTS
Third Row Seat Belt
COMPONENTS
Third Row Center
Page 630
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
Tools and Equipment
Fuel Supply Line: Tools and Equipment
Niss./Toy. Line Disconnect Tool
AST tool# 8026
5/16"Fuel Line Disconnect Tool. Used for disconnecting the fuel line from the fuel rail. Applicable to
2004 and newer Nissan and Toyota Models
- 5/16" Fuel Line Disconnect Tool
- Quick Line Removal*Green-Anodized Aluminum Construction
- See Application Chart
- Included in the #8110 Line Disconnect Set.
Contact AST for pricing.
Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1-800-525-2943
This Tool is also available in the following kits:
Page 1385
1. Internal chain guide 2. Camshaft sprocket (INT) 3. Mating mark (copper link) 4. Mating mark
(punched) 5. Timing chain tensioner (secondary) 6. Mating mark (yellow link) 7. Timing chain
(secondary) 8. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) 9. Tension guide 10. Water pump
11. Crankshaft sprocket 12. Mating mark (notched) 13. Timing chain (primary) 14. Slack guide 15.
Timing chain tensioner (primary) 16. Mating mark (back side) 17. Crankshaft key
NOTE: The figure above shows the relationship between the mating mark on each timing chain and
that on the corresponding sprocket, with the components installed.
1. Make sure that dowel pin hole, dowel pin of camshaft and crankshaft key are located as shown.
(No. 1 cylinder at compression TDC)
NOTE: - Though camshaft does not stop at the position as shown, for the placement of cam nose,
it is generally accepted camshaft is placed for the same
direction of the figure.
Camshaft dowel pin hole (intake side)
: At cylinder head upper face side in each bank.
Camshaft dowel pin (exhaust side)
: At cylinder head upper face side in each bank.
Crankshaft key
: At cylinder head side of right bank.
2. Install the timing chains (secondary) and camshaft sprockets as follows:
CAUTION: Mating marks between timing chain and sprockets slip easily. Confirm all mating mark
positions repeatedly during the installation process.
a. Push plunger of timing chain tensioner (secondary) and keep it pressed in with stopper pin.
Page 2937
CAUTION: Before measuring, make sure the axle end play is 0 mm (0 in). Refer to See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Testing and Inspection/Rear Wheel Hub. 3. If runout is
outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by shifting mounting positions of the disc rotor and
wheel hub by one hole. 4. If runout is outside the specified value after performing the above
operation, turn the disc rotor using Tool.
Tool number : 38-PFM90.5
Thickness Inspection
Using a micrometer, check thickness of the disc rotor. If thickness is not within specification,
replace disc rotor.
Page 3010
Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Locations
Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Locations
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 4179
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 3803
Hose/Line HVAC: Removal and Replacement
Component
REFRIGERANT LINES
Component
Front A/C Compressor and Condenser
Page 3253
Fuse: Testing and Inspection
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Fuse
- If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of incident before installing new fuse.
- Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating.
- Do not partially install fuse, always insert it into fuse holder properly.
- Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time.
Page 1800
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
SPARK PLUG
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to See: Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and
Repair/Removal And Installation LH and See: Ignition
System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation RH.
CAUTION: Do not shock ignition coil.
2. Remove the spark plugs using a suitable tool. If replacing the spark plugs use the correct spark plug for maximum performance. Refer to See:
Maintenance.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
CAUTION: Do not use a wire brush for cleaning.
Page 1957
- When data link connector branch line is open, "ECU list" displayed on the CONSULT-III "CAN
DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" may be the same as when the CAN communication line has short-circuit.
However, symptoms differ depending on the case. See below chart for the differences.
Example: Main Line Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control
Unit) Open Circuit
Example: CAN-H, CAN-L Harness Short Circuit
Page 2632
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Page 3283
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/System Description/CAN Communication System.
ACTIVE TEST
Page 4791
Audible Warning Device: Electrical Diagrams
WARNING CHIME
Wiring Diagram - CHIME DI-CHIME-01
Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Classification: EL09-042
Reference: NTB09-118
Date: October 28, 2009
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR
RESET
APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below.
IF YOU CONFIRM
^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side.
And
^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery.
2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display.
NOTES:
^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage
the printed circuit board (PCB).
^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver.
Page 5191
Resetting After installing each component to the vehicle, perform the following procedure to reset
the limit switch. 1. Raise the door glass to the top position.
2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position. 3.
Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then
raises the door glass to the top position.
CAUTION: Do not operate the door glass automatically to raise the door glass to the top position.
Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model)
Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model)
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM
Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model)
COMPONENT PARTS AND HARNESS CONNECTOR LOCATION
Page 4193
4. Remove the video monitor and housing. 5. Remove the video monitor hinge screws and remove
the video monitor.
Installation Installation is in reverse order of removal.
Page 2680
5. Pack drive shaft with specified amount of new grease (Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent).
Grease amount : 134 - 144 g (4.73 - 5.08 oz)
6. Install new stopper ring to housing of slide joint assembly. 7. After installation, pull shaft to check
engagement between slide joint assembly and stopper ring.
8. Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by * marks) as shown.
CAUTION: If there is grease on boot mounting surfaces (indicated by * marks) of shaft and
housing, boot may come off. Clean all grease from surfaces.
9. Make sure boot installation length "L" is the length specified below. Insert a flat-bladed
screwdriver or similar tool into the large end of boot.
Bleed air from boot to prevent boot deformation.
Boot installation length "L" : 167.9 mm (6.61 in)
CAUTION: Boot may break if boot installation length is less than standard value.
- Be careful that screwdriver tip does not contact inside surface of boot.
10. Secure large and small ends of boot with new boot bands as shown.
CAUTION: Discard old boot bands and replace with new ones.
11. Install new dust shield to slide joint housing. 12. After installing housing and shaft, make sure
boot position is correct. If boot position is not correct, remove old boot bands then reposition the
boot and secure with new boot bands.
Wheel Side
Page 1970
d. Reception item of "BCM": On "TCM", "UNKWN" is indicated. This means BCM cannot receive
the signal from TCM. Draw a line to
indicate an error between BCM and TCM (line 2-d in the figure below).
e. Reception item of "EPS" and "I-KEY": "UNKWN" is not indicated. This indicates normal
communication between EPS and I-KEY and their
receiving units. Do not draw any line.
NOTE: On CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (without PAST), "UNKWN" is indicated even though the
item is not used in the trouble diagnosis. For the details of each item on CAN diagnostic support
monitor, refer to See: Trouble Diagnosis/CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor.
Page 2600
Shift Interlock Cable: Service and Repair Removal
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
Removal
1. Unlock slider by squeezing lock tabs on slider from adjuster holder. 2. Remove casing cap from
bracket of control device and remove interlock rod from cable.
3. Remove holder from key cylinder and remove key interlock cable.
Page 983
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Tightening torque of wheel nut
................................................................................................................................................... 112
N.m (11 kg-m, 83 ft-lb)
Page 1691
9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads.
^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12.
Page 2965
Brake Master Cylinder: Removal and Replacement
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas, it may cause damage. If brake
fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
REMOVAL 1. Remove the cowl top and cowl top extension. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 2. Drain the brake fluid. Refer to See: Brake
Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid. 3. Remove the air cleaner to electric throttle
control actuator tube attached to air cleaner case (upper). Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and
Repair.
4. Disconnect the harness connector for the brake fluid level switch. 5. Disconnect the master
cylinder brake tubes and the hose from the reservoir tank to the sub tank using a suitable tool. 6.
Remove the master cylinder nuts and remove the master cylinder.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Place master cylinder onto brake booster and tighten the master cylinder nuts to specification. 2.
Connect the sub tank hose to the master cylinder reservoir tank and fill the sub tank with new brake
fluid. 3. Plug all ports on master cylinder with your fingers to prevent air suction while releasing
brake pedal. 4. Have an assistant depress brake pedal slowly several times until no air comes out
of the master cylinder. Install and tighten brake tube flare nuts to specification. Refer to See: Brake Hose/Line/Service and
Repair/Hydraulic Circuit.
- Refill the brake system fluid and bleed the air from the brake system. Refer to See: Brake
Bleeding/Service and Repair.
5. Installation of the remaining components is in reverse order of removal.
Page 1785
- Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the tube until a click is
heard.
- After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by pulling on the tube and the
connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the quick connector.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks: 1. Turn
the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to check the connections for fuel leaks with
the electric fuel pump applying fuel
pressure to the fuel piping.
2. Start the engine and let it idle to check that there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system tube and
hose connections.
Page 4790
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 428
ATC
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair ATC
AMBIENT SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the ambient sensor connector.
NOTE: The ambient sensor is located behind the front bumper opening, in front of the condenser.
2. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Specifications
Starter Motor: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Starter
Page 3383
Alignment: Specifications Rear Suspension
Wheel Alignment
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)
Wheelarch Height
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)
Page 1950
- Solder the repaired area and wrap tape around the soldered area.
NOTE: A fray of twisted lines must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).
- Bypass connection is never allowed at the repaired area.
NOTE: Bypass connection may cause CAN communication error. The spliced wire becomes
separated and the characteristics of twisted line are lost.
- Replace the applicable harness as an assembly if error is detected on the shield lines of CAN
communication line.
CAN Fundamental
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis
CAUTION: Never apply 7.0 V or more to the measurement terminal.
- Use a tester with open terminal voltage of 7.0 V or less.
- Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal when
checking the harness.
CAN
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis
CAUTION: Never apply 7.0 V or more to the measurement terminal.
- Use a tester with open terminal voltage of 7.0 V or less.
- Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal when
checking the harness.
Technician Safety Information
Axle Shaft Assembly: Technician Safety Information
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution
CAUTION: When installing each rubber part, the final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition*
with tires on the ground. *Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and
mats in designated positions.
- After installing the removed suspension parts, check the front wheel alignment.
- Do not jack up the vehicle by the transverse link .
Observe the following precautions when disassembling and servicing drive shaft. Perform work in a location which is as dust-free as possible.
- Before disassembling and servicing, clean the outside of parts.
- Prevention of the entry of foreign objects must be taken into account during disassembly of the
service location.
- Disassembled parts must be carefully reassembled in the correct order. If work is interrupted, a
clean cover must be placed over parts.
- Paper shop cloths must be used. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger of
lint adhering to parts.
- Disassembled parts (except for rubber parts) should be cleaned with kerosene which shall be
removed by blowing with air or wiping with paper shop cloths.
Navigation Sysetm - Various Garmin Nuvi(R) Issues
Global Positioning System: Customer Interest Navigation Sysetm - Various Garmin Nuvi(R) Issues
Classification: EL09-017
Reference: NTB09-047
Date: June 17, 2009
NISSAN (GARMIN) PORTABLE NAVIGATION UNIT ISSUES
APPLIED VEHICLES: Any equipped with the Nissan (Garmin) Nuvi 750 unit.
SERVICE INFORMATION
If there is any incident with the function of the Nuvi 750 Portable Navigation Unit
BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY REPAIRS:
Perform a System Reset of the Unit by sliding the "Power Key" to the left and hold for eight (8)
seconds, then return it to the normal position.
If a System Reset resolves the incident inform the customer that this System Reset can be
performed by them at any time such an incident may occur.
NOTE:
^ DO NOT REPLACE the Unit when a System Reset will resolve an incident, if one should occur.
^ This action will perform a "Soft Reset" (i.e. "reboot") of the Unit.
^ This action will not affect stored user data such as "Favorites", "Recently Found", etc.
^ This System Reset instruction is in the Unit Owner's Manual and referenced in NNA CLAIMS
BULLETIN WB/09-014* "Replacement Procedures
for Nissan (Garmin) Portable Navigation Unit".
*This CLAIMS BULLETIN can be found at NNAnet.com. Go to:
Applications > My Documents
Click on Advanced in the Search area
Under Advanced Search select the Include archives box
Type GARMIN in the Keywords box and click on SEARCH
Disclaimer
Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Classification: WT11-003
Reference: NTB11-029
Date: March 21, 2011
TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration.
^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care
to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin.
Tire Mounting Tips:
NOTE:
These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to
read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment
1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid.
^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process.
2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and
corrosion.
Page 86
NOTE:
^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not
replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control
unit using the old starter.
^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is:
^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb)
Page 292
Yaw Rate Sensor: Locations Electrical Units Location
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 2093
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications
Automatic Air Conditioner
OIL
Capacity
Total in system
..............................................................................................................................................................
220 ml (7.44 US fl oz, 7.7 Imp fl oz) Compressor (service part) charging amount
..................................................................... Refer to ATC-19, "Maintenance of Oil Quantity in
Compressor".
Manual Air Conditioner
OIL
Capacity
Total in system
..............................................................................................................................................................
220 ml (7.44 US fl oz, 7.7 Imp fl oz) Compressor (service part) charging amount
.................................................................... Refer to MTC-19, "Maintenance of Oil Quantity in
Compressor".
Driver Air Bag Module
Air Bag: Service and Repair Driver Air Bag Module
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect SRS component connectors. If a driver
air bag direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the spiral cable must be replaced.
- Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at
least three minutes.
- When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. 2.
Remove the side lids LH/RH. 3. Remove the driver air bag module bolts. 4. Lift the driver air bag
module from the steering wheel. 5. Disconnect the driver air bag harness and horn connectors,
then remove the driver air bag module. For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Description and
Operation/Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors,
CAUTION: When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
- Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward.
- Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors.
- Do not disassemble air bag module.
- Do not use old bolts after removal; replace with new bolts.
- Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F).
Page 1608
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 3454
- Initially, tighten nut on outer tie-rod socket and knuckle arm to specification. Then tighten further
to align nut groove with first pin hole so that the cotter pin can be installed.
CAUTION: Tightening torque must not exceed 49 N.m (5 kg-m, 36 ft-lb). Refill power steering system and bleed air after installation. Refer to See: Service and Repair See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Checking Fluid Leakage See:
Power Steering/Power Steering Fluid/Service and Repair/Checking Fluid Level.
Page 4635
8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D"
ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7).
9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A).
10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make
sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B).
11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is
firmly applied (see Figure 9).
12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt.
13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring.
Removal And Installation
Camshaft: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
CAMSHAFT
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Apply new engine oil to parts marked in illustration before installation.
REMOVAL 1. Remove the timing chains. Refer to See: Timing Components/Timing Chain/Service
and Repair.
Page 4634
5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5).
^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit.
6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure
6A.
NOTE:
^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle.
^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle.
Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8:
^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned.
^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring.
^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no
wrinkles or ridges are present.
^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D"
ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece.
7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B).
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Locations
Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Locations
AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 1132
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50288 (Ring Gear Stop) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on
December 3, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account was charged $26.90 plus applicable taxes and
freight.Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins), also considered
"Essential", was shipped to each dealer November 2009.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Write down all radio station presets.
Page 5200
Windshield: Service and Repair
WINDSHIELD GLASS
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove inside mirror. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and
Repair/Inside Mirror. 2. Partially remove the headliner (front edge). Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 3. Remove cowl top cover. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 4. Apply protective tape
around the windshield glass to protect the painted surface from damage. Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag.
- If the windshield glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks.
WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves
to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION: When a windshield glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool.
- Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
- Do set or stand glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the
instructions furnished with it.
- While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being
forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
- The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap.
- Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
WARNING: Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable.
- The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
- Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if
inhaled.
If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air.
Page 3828
Receiver Dryer: Service and Repair MTC
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Condenser
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and
Repair/Procedures. 2. Remove the radiator. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling
System/Radiator/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator.
3. Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe from the condenser.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air. 4. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector. 5. Remove the refrigerant
pressure sensor. 6. Carefully release retaining clips located on top driver side of condenser and
rotate the condenser out of its mounts as shown.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Hose/Line
HVAC/Locations.
CAUTION: Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure pipe, refrigerant pressure sensor, and high-pressure
flexible hose with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 535
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Heated Glass Element: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Page 286
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
Wheel Sensors
WHEEL SENSORS
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
- When removing the front or rear wheel hub assembly, first remove the wheel sensor from the
assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires, making the sensor
inoperative.
- Pull out the sensor, be careful to turn it as little as possible. Do not pull on the sensor harness.
- Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following, and then tighten the
wheel sensor bolt to the specified torque.
- Before installing the wheel sensor, make sure there are no foreign materials (such as iron
fragments) adhered to the pick-up part of the wheel sensor, to the inside of the wheel sensor
mounting hole or on the rotor mounting surface.
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR
Removal 1. Remove the front wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service
and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Partially remove the front wheel fender protector.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair. 3.
Remove the wheel sensor bolt and wheel sensor. 4. Remove the harness wire from mounts and
disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR WHEEL SENSOR
Removal 1. Remove the wheel sensor bolt and wheel sensor from the rear wheel hub and bearing
assemblies. 2. Remove the harness wire from mounts and harness wire clips from the rear
suspension member. 3. Disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Sensor Rotor
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation
The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub. For removal and installation
procedure, refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear
Wheel Hub.
Page 4421
DESCRIPTION
Page 241
Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Automatic Drive Positioner
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Front Axle Nut
Page 3279
Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Auto Active Test
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Auto Active Test
DESCRIPTION In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive
signal to the following systems:
- Rear window defogger - Front wipers - Tail, license and parking lamps - Cornering lamps - Front
fog lamps - Headlamps (High, Low) - A/C compressor (magnet clutch) - Cooling fan
OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from
windshield (to prevent glass damage by wiper operation).
NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield
beforehand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press
front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10
seconds after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6.
After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF.
CAUTION: Be sure to perform See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Door Lock System/Door Switch
Check (With Automatic Back Door System) or See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Door Lock System/Door Switch
Check (Without Automatic Back Door System) when the auto active test cannot be performed.
INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE When auto active test mode is actuated, the
following nine steps are repeated three times.
(A): Oil pressure warning lamp is blinking when the auto active test is operating.
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 23.6 Nm, 17 ft lb
Power Door Lock System
Power Sliding Door Switch: Locations Power Door Lock System
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 146
Page 3363
2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows:
^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates.
^ Center the turn plates to the tires.
^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel.
DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body.
Locations
Variable Induction Control Solenoid: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Service and Repair
Brake Light Bulb: Service and Repair
STOP LAMP
Bulb Replacement
HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP
Removal 1. Remove the rear washer nozzle. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Windshield
Washer Spray Nozzle/Service and Repair/Rear Wiper And
Washer System/Rear Washer Nozzle.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Remove the nuts and remove the high-mounted stop
lamp. 4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the high-mounted stop lamp
housing. 5. Pull the bulb from the socket.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
STOP LAMP Refer to See: Tail Lamp/Tail Light Bulb/Service and Repair.
Page 2613
7. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose. 8. Wrap a shop rag around the
air gun tip and of the cooler outlet hose. 9. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (71 - 128
psi) through the cooler outlet hose for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid.
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times. 11. Position an oil pan under the banjo bolts
that connect the fluid cooler steel lines to the transaxle. 12. Remove the banjo bolts. 13. Flush each
steel line from the cooler side back toward the transaxle by spraying Transmission Cooler Cleaner
in a continuous stream for 5 seconds. 14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (71 - 128
psi) through each steel line from the cooler side back toward the transaxle for 10 seconds
to force out any remaining fluid.
15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines. 16. Ensure all debris is removed from
the banjo bolts and fittings. 17. Perform "A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE".
A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
NOTE: Insufficient cleaning of the cooler inlet hose exterior may lead to inaccurate debris
identification. 1. Position an oil pan under the automatic transaxle's inlet and outlet cooler hoses. 2.
Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler inlet hose.
3. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N
999MP-AM006) into the cooler outlet hose.
CAUTION: Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the Transmission Cooler Cleaner.
- Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation.
- Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
- Do not breath vapors or spray mist.
4. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a
continuous stream into the cooler outlet hose until fluid
flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds.
Page 2766
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 1901
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattles
Heat Shield: Customer Interest Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattles
Classification: EM10-003
Reference: NTB10-097
Date: August 23, 2010
EXHAUST HEAT SHIELD NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002 - 2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35DE (V6) engine only 2007 - 2010 Altima
Sedan (L32) 2008 - 2010 Altima Coupe (CL32) 2007 - 2010 Altima Hybrid (L32HV) 2004-2008
Maxima (A34) 2009 - 2010 Maxima (A35) 2004- 2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A noise is coming from the front exhaust tube heat shield(s) due to rattle.
ACTION:
Secure the heat shield(s) with new band clamps (see PARTS INFORMATION).
^ Refer to REPAIR PROCEDURE.
Do not replace the front exhaust tube for this incident, if it should occur.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
WARNING:
Page 2051
Page 1757
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Diagram Information and Instructions
Entertainment Systems: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Page 2027
NOTES:
^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply.
^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product
Program, Website order via link on dealer portal.
^ WD-40 is available from various local sources.
Removal Tool
^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to
accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and
strip the sensor.
^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box
end wrench or 6-point deep well socket.
1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice.
2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the
threads.
Page 3626
Grilles
Page 1840
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Removal and Installation of BCM
REMOVAL
NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference
when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 1. Disconnect negative battery
cable. 2. Remove the parking brake pedal assembly. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Control/Service and
Repair/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the BCM (1) by removing the screw (A) and disconnecting the harness connectors (2). Arrow Indicates : Front
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
- When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition
key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Locations/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS) See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Description and Operation/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle
Immobilizer System-NATS)/System Description See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft
and Alarm Systems/Description and Operation/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer
System-NATS)/System Composition.
- When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system.
Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ID Registration Procedure.
Page 4100
Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Service and Repair
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Keyfob Battery Replacement
Page 2908
FRONT DISC BRAKE
Removal and Installation of Brake Pad
WARNING: Clean brake pads with a vacuum dust collector to minimize a hazard of airborne
particles or other materials.
CAUTION: While removing pad assemblies, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
- Be careful not to damage piston boot or get oil on disc rotor. Always replace shims when
replacing pads.
- If shims are rusted or show peeling of rubber coat, replace them with new shims.
- It is not necessary to remove torque member mounting bolt except for disassembly or
replacement of cylinder body. In this case, suspend cylinder body with wire so as not to stretch
brake hose.
- Carefully monitor brake fluid level because brake fluid will return to reservoir when pushing back
piston.
- Burnish the brake pads (or linings) and disc rotor mutually contacting surfaces after refinishing or
replacing drums or rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at a very low
mileage. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Front Brake Burnishing Procedure.
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool.
2. Remove lower sliding pin.
3. Hang the cylinder body with a wire and remove the pad and shim assemblies, then pad retainers
from the torque member.
CAUTION: Do not damage piston boot.
- When removing pad retainer from torque member, lift pad retainer in the direction of arrow as
shown so as not to deform it.
- Keep rotor clean and free from brake fluid.
INSTALLATION 1. Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) or equivalent, to the pad back plate and inner
shim sides. Install inner shims and outer shim covers to inner and
outer pads.
Page 4785
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 4082
Antenna: Electrical Diagrams
AUDIO ANTENNA
Wiring Diagram - W/ANT AV-W/ANT-01
Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
Brake Fluid
Type ....................................................................................................................... Genuine NISSAN
Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3
Page 619
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order:
^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface.
If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the front turn plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
Ignition Relay: Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 4786
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Page 4030
8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D"
ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7).
9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A).
10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make
sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B).
11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is
firmly applied (see Figure 9).
12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt.
13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring.
Page 711
^ Pulley should turn with some dragging
^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator.
Service and Repair
Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Washer Motor
REMOVAL 1. Remove fender protector. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front
Fender Liner/Service and Repair. 2. Remove front and rear washer motor electrical connector and
front and rear washer hoses.
3. Pull out front and rear washer motor in the direction of the arrow as shown, and remove the front
and rear washer motor from the washer fluid
reservoir.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: When installing front and rear washer motor, there should be no packing twists, etc.
Page 760
5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5).
^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit.
6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure
6A.
NOTE:
^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle.
^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle.
Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8:
^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned.
^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring.
^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no
wrinkles or ridges are present.
^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D"
ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece.
7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B).
Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 1722
4. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. -
Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable
pedal electric motor as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the
accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal
nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from
the pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
9. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the
adjustable accelerator pedal as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity.
10. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when
applying or releasing the accelerator pedal.
- Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding
or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward.
- Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See:
Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator
Pedal Released Position Learning.
NON-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL
Removal 1. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the upper
and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 3. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from
the pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
Page 4283
^ When splicing into the vehicle electrical system, a power-type module/converter must be used to
provide power for all trailer lighting. A power-type
module/converter uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using
the vehicle taillight, stoplight, and turn signal circuits only as a signal source. (See the illustration
above.) The module/converter must draw no more than 5 milliamps from the vehicle turn signal
circuits and no more than 15 milliamps from the stop and tail light circuits.
CAUTION:
Using a module/converter that exceeds these power requirements listed above may negatively
affect the performance and function of the vehicle's electrical system.
See a professional trailer dealer or trailer rental agency for installation of the proper equipment.
Customers who inquire about towing should be reminded of the following:
^ Always check for correct operation of the turn signals, stoplights, and taillights every time a trailer
is hitched up for towing.
^ The towing capacity for 350Z (Coupe Only), Altima, Maxima, and Sentra is 1,000 lbs.
For more information, refer customers to the Owner's Manual as well as the Nissan Towing Guide,
available online at NissanUSA.com.
Page 1062
Service and Repair
Coolant Outlet: Service and Repair
WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from
high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator.
REMOVAL 1. Drain engine coolant from radiator and drain plugs on both sides of cylinder block.
Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 2. Remove fresh air duct, air cleaner to electric throttle
control actuator tube, mass air flow sensor and upper air cleaner case as an assembly. Refer to
See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair.
3. Remove radiator upper hose and heater hose. 4. Remove connector(s) from heater pipe. 5.
Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor electrical connector. 6. Remove water outlet, heater
pipe, water connector, and water bypass pipe nuts and bolts.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. -
Securely insert each hose, and install a clamp at a position where it does not interfere with the pipe
bulge.
- When inserting a water pipe into water connector, apply neutral detergent to O-ring.
CAUTION: Use new O-rings for installation. Refill engine coolant. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for engine coolant leaks. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Inspection.
- Start and warm up the engine. Visually make sure that there are no engine coolant leaks.
Crash Zone Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor
CRASH ZONE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at
least three minutes.
1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes.
2. Remove front grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Grille/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the
crash zone sensor harness connector. 4. Remove crash zone sensor nuts.
CAUTION: Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
- Do not disassemble crash zone sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic
Trouble Codes.
Page 1549
Page 170
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 2997
CAUTION: Because vacuum hose contains a check valve, it must be installed in the correct orientation. Refer
to the stamp or label to confirm correct installation. The brake booster will not operate normally if
the hose is installed in the wrong direction.
- Insert the vacuum hose for at least 24 mm (0.94 in).
- Never use lubricating oil during assembly.
Page 3769
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations MTC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 3964
Side Air Bag: Description and Operation Side Curtain Air Bag
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Side Curtain Air Bag
Side curtain air bag modules are located above the vehicle headlining.
Vehicles with side curtain air bags are equipped with labels as shown.
Page 608
^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates.
^ Chock the left rear wheel.
Preliminary Checks:
3. Perform pre-alignment checks.
^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.)
^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation)
^ Tire pressure
^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components
^ Wheel bearing axial play
^ Ball joints of suspension arms
^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage
^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack)
^ Vehicle weight
> Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers
> Fuel level is full
Page 4752
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
Page 3021
Repair Flow Chart
Page 4506
^ When splicing into the vehicle electrical system, a power-type module/converter must be used to
provide power for all trailer lighting. A power-type
module/converter uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using
the vehicle taillight, stoplight, and turn signal circuits only as a signal source. (See the illustration
above.) The module/converter must draw no more than 5 milliamps from the vehicle turn signal
circuits and no more than 15 milliamps from the stop and tail light circuits.
CAUTION:
Using a module/converter that exceeds these power requirements listed above may negatively
affect the performance and function of the vehicle's electrical system.
See a professional trailer dealer or trailer rental agency for installation of the proper equipment.
Customers who inquire about towing should be reminded of the following:
^ Always check for correct operation of the turn signals, stoplights, and taillights every time a trailer
is hitched up for towing.
^ The towing capacity for 350Z (Coupe Only), Altima, Maxima, and Sentra is 1,000 lbs.
For more information, refer customers to the Owner's Manual as well as the Nissan Towing Guide,
available online at NissanUSA.com.
Page 4783
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Fuse, Connector And Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 1227
Page EM-10
Page 532
DESCRIPTION
Page 1663
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 363
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Page 2959
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid.
Refer to See: Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Changing Brake Fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator
harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). 5. Disconnect the brake tubes.
CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
6. Remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket bolts and remove the ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit) with the
bracket.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Brake Hose/Line/Service and Repair/Hydraulic Circuit for torque specifications when
connecting the brake tubes.
- After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with
new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the brake hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brake
Bleeding/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: To install the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool).
Page 1331
Page EM-1
Page 3842
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Automatic Air Conditioner
OIL
Name ...................................................................................................................................................
............................... NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S
Manual Air Conditioner
OIL
Name ...................................................................................................................................................
............................... NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S
Page 5182
Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box.
- Keep primers and adhesives in a cool dry place. ideally they should be stored in a refrigerator.
- Do not leave primers and adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps off.
- The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured. Curing time depends on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase
under lower temperature and lower humidities.
Repairing Water Leaks for Slide Door Glass Leaks can be repaired without removing and
reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass,
determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the glass area while
pushing glass outward. To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to
the leak point.
Page 541
Electrical Units Location
Rear Vision Camera: Locations Electrical Units Location
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Crash Zone Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor
CRASH ZONE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at
least three minutes.
1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes.
2. Remove front grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Grille/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the
crash zone sensor harness connector. 4. Remove crash zone sensor nuts.
CAUTION: Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
- Do not disassemble crash zone sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
See: Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
Interior - Seat Arm Rest Is Loose
Arm Rest: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat Arm Rest Is Loose
Classification: BT09-050
Reference: NTB09-089
Date: September 11, 2009
2004 - 2009 QUEST; SEAT ARMREST LOOSE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The armrest on a captain chair (front seats or 2nd row seats) is loose.
ACTION
1. Remove the armrest.
2. Replace bolt insert.
3. Apply Permatex(R) Threadlocker Blue or equivalent to bolt threads and torque to 28 Nm (2.85
kg-m, 20.6 lb-ft).
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Diagram Information and Instructions
Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Page 1080
Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped)
1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side)
movement (see Example 1):
^ See above table for maximum movement specification.
^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended.
Page 3810
NOTE: To ease installation, first remove the A/C support clip from the lower section high/low
pressure pipe and secure it to the dash panel threaded stud. 2. Install the new upper high/low
pressure pipe through the engine compartment.
a. Install the high/low pressure pipe to the front expansion valve and only hand tighten the
connector bolt (1) as shown.
- Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube (2)
- Electric throttle control actuator (3)
- Arrow Indicates Front
b. Hand tighten the fittings between the upper and lower high pressure pipe (A) and the low
pressure pipe (B) as shown.
- Arrow Indicates Front
c. Hand tighten the high pressure pipe connection (1) and low pressure pipe connection (2) located
near the RH front suspension strut tower (3)
as shown.
d. Install the A/C pipe clamp bolt (A) to the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown. e. Attach
the high/low pressure pipe to the A/C support clip (secured to the dash panel threaded stud). f.
Tighten the high pressure pipe connection (1) and low pressure pipe connection (2) located near
the RH front suspension strut tower (3) as shown to specification.
3. Complete the installation of the lower high/low pressure pipe.
CAUTION: Clean all of the A/C pipe fittings and connections.
- Replace the O-rings of the high/low-pressure pipe with new ones.
- Lubricate all the O-rings with the specified A/C system oil.
Page 4861
Shift Indicator: Electrical Diagrams
A/T INDICATOR
Wiring Diagram - AT/IND DI-AT/IND-01
Page 712
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection
DRIVE BELTS
Checking Drive Belts
WARNING: Be sure to perform when the engine is not running. 1. Inspect belt for cracks, fraying,
wear or oil adhesion. If necessary, replace with a new one.
2. Inspect drive belt deflections by applying 98 N (10 kg-f, 22 lb-f) on the belt midway between
pulleys as shown. 3. Measure the belt tension using Tool at the locations as shown.
Tool number : BT-3373-F
NOTE: Inspect drive belt deflection or tension when engine is cold.
- Adjust if belt deflections exceed the limit or if belt tension is not within specifications.
CAUTION:
- When checking belt deflection or tension immediately after installation, first adjust it to the
specification value. Then, after turning the crankshaft two turns or more, readjust to the specified
value to avoid variation in deflection between pulleys.
- Tighten idler pulley lock nut by hand and measure deflection or tension without looseness.
Page 3483
- Check that the projecting part inside the upper seat and the flange part of bracket are attached as
shown.
- Check that the projection part outside the upper seat directs to vehicle front.
- Position the hollow of the rubber seat with the groove part of rear lower link to install.
- Install coil spring with the side of two paint markers directing to lower side.
- After installing the rear lower link and coil spring, check the wheel alignment and adjust if
necessary. Refer to See: Alignment/Service and Repair/Rear Suspension.
Page 1597
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 646
c. Tighten the outer tie-rod lock nuts to specified torque.
Lock nut : Refer to See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Gear/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement.
FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE
1. Set the front wheels in a straight-ahead position. Then move the vehicle forward until the front
wheels rest on the turning radius gauge as shown. 2. Rotate steering wheel all the way right and
left; measure the turning angles "A" and "B" as shown.
Wheel turning angle (full turn) : Refer to See: Specifications.
Locations
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Front Power Socket - 1 (LH) And Rear Power Socket
(Cargo)
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Power Socket - 1 (LH) And Rear Power Socket
(Cargo)
POWER SOCKET
Front Power Socket - 1 (LH) and Rear Power Socket (Cargo)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect battery negative terminal.
2. Remove inner socket from ring, while pressing the hook on the ring out from square hole. 3.
Disconnect power socket electrical connector. 4. Remove ring from power socket finisher while
pressing pawls.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1270
6. Install front timing chain case.
a. Install lower end of front timing chain case tightly onto top surface of oil pan (upper). CAUTION:
Be careful that oil pan gasket is in place.
b. While pressing front timing chain case from its front and top as shown, hammer dowel pin until
the outer end becomes flush with surface using
suitable tool.
- Install dowel pin on the rear timing chain case into dowel pin hole in front timing chain case.
7. Loosely install the front timing chain case bolts.
Bolt position Bolt diameter 1, 2 : 8 mm (0.31 in) 3 - 22 : 6 mm (0.24 in)
8. Tighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown.
- Retighten the front timing chain case bolts in the order as shown.
Bolt position Tightening specification 1, 2 : 28.5 N-m (2.9 kg-m, 21 ft-lb) 3 - 22 : 12.8 N-m (1.3
kg-m, 9 ft-lb)
Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuel Door: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Page 5242
Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Rear Wiper And Washer System
Rear Wiper Motor
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Rear Wiper Motor
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Remove rear wiper arm. Refer to See: Wiper Arm/Service and Repair.
2. Remove pivot cap. 3. Remove back door lower finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 4. Disconnect rear wiper motor electrical
connector. 5. Remove rear wiper motor bolts, and remove rear wiper motor.
Installation
CAUTION: Do not drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts.
Page 1995
3. Check the resistance between the IPDM E/R terminals.
OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace the ECM and/or the IPDM E/R.
5.CHECK SYMPTOM Connect all the connectors. Check if the symptoms described in the
"Symptom (Results from interview with customer)" are reproduced. Inspection result
Reproduced-GO TO 6. Non-reproduced-Start the diagnosis again. Follow the trouble diagnosis
procedure when past error is detected.
6.CHECK UNIT REPRODUCTION Perform the reproduction test as per the following procedure for
each unit. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative
terminal. 3. Disconnect one of the unit connectors of CAN communication system.
NOTE: ECM and IPDM E/R have a termination circuit. Check other units first. 4. Connect the
battery cable to the negative terminal. Check if the symptoms described in the "Symptom (Results
from interview with customer)" are
reproduced.
NOTE: Although unit-related error symptoms occur, do not confuse them with other symptoms.
Inspection result Reproduced-Connect the connector. Check other units as per the above
procedure. Non-reproduced-Replace the unit whose connector was disconnected.
CAN Communication Signal Chart
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CAN Communication Signal Chart
Refer to See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis Work Flow/How To Use
CAN Communication Signal Chart for how to use CAN communication signal chart.
TYPE 1/TYPE 2
NOTE: Refer to See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/CAN/Abbreviation List for the
abbreviations of the connecting units.
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Seat Belt Retractor: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Classification: RS01-001B
Reference: NTB01-005B
Date: November 12, 2009
"D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION
This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s).
ACTION
Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to:
^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings.
^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
Page 1881
Page 1384
Check for cracks and any excessive wear at link plates. Replace chain if necessary.
- Inspect all timing chains and associated parts for wear or damage, replace as necessary.
Installation
Service and Repair
Sliding Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
SLIDE DOOR GLASS
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Apply protective tape around the slide door glass to protect the painted surface from
damage. 2. Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag.
WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves
to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION: When a slide door glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool.
Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
- Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the
instructions furnished with it.
- While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a window. This will prevent the glass from being
forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
- The rubber seal must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap.
- Inform customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
WARNING: Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesives are flammable.
- The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
- Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if
inhaled.
if affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to area with fresh air. Driving the vehicle before urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of
the slide door glass in case of an accident.
CAUTION: Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture.
Page 2534
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
........................................ Genuine Nissan Matic "K"
NOTE:Using Automatic Transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan ATF will cause deterioration
in driveability and automatic transmission
durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new
vehicle limited warranty.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Cellular Phone: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Page 2249
4. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. -
Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable end to disconnect it from the adjustable
pedal electric motor as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
5. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the
accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the upper and lower accelerator pedal
nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from
the pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
9. Disconnect the adjustable accelerator pedal cable from the adjustable accelerator pedal. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable accelerator pedal cable end to disconnect it from the
adjustable accelerator pedal as shown.
- When unlocking the cable end, do not spread open the lock tabs more than is necessary to
release the cable end.
NOTE: The rear view of the adjustable accelerator pedal is shown for clarity.
10. Remove the adjustable pedal electric motor from the adjustable accelerator pedal bracket.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Check the accelerator pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when
applying or releasing the accelerator pedal.
- Check the accelerator pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding
or sticking when adjusting the accelerator pedal forward or backward.
- Check that the cable end is locked securely onto the adjustable pedal electric motor.
CAUTION: Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been
disconnected, perform the "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See:
Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator
Pedal Released Position Learning.
NON-ADJUSTABLE PEDAL
Removal 1. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the upper
and lower accelerator pedal nuts. 3. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the pedal assembly. Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from
the pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
Page 1584
Page 1516
Water Pump: Service and Repair
WATER PUMP
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from
high pressure coolant escaping from the radiator.
CAUTION: When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to get coolant on drive belt.
- Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit.
After installing water pump, connect hose and clamp securely, then check for leaks using radiator
cap tester.
REMOVAL 1. Drain engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 2. Remove engine coolant reservoir tank. Refer to
See: Radiator/Service and Repair. 3. Remove IPDM E/R bolts and position aside. Refer to See:
Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair. 4. Remove RH
wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and
Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 5. Remove fender protector (RH). Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair. 6. Remove drive belts. Refer
to See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 7.
Remove idler pulley and idler pulley bracket. 8. Support engine and remove front engine insulator
and bracket. Refer to See: Engine/Service and Repair.
9. Remove water drain plug on water pump side of cylinder block.
10. Remove chain tensioner cover and water pump cover.
Page 5031
Combination Switch: Electrical Diagrams
COMBINATION SWITCH
Wiring Diagram - COMBSW LT-COMBSW-01
Locations
Key Reminder Switch: Locations
WARNING CHIME
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Interior - Sliding Door Rubber Welt Is Loose
Sliding Door Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Sliding Door Rubber Welt Is
Loose
Classification: BT09-006
Reference: NTB09-014
Date: March 4, 2009
SLIDING DOOR WELT HAS LOOSENED FROM THE DOOR PANEL
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006 - 2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The door welt (rubber trim) is coming loose from the sliding door panel (clips have detached).
ACTION
Check to see if the clips are missing from the door welt:
^ If the clips are missing, replace the door welt, apply adhesion promoter and double-sided tape.
^ If the clips are not missing, reinstall the clips into the door welt, apply adhesion promoter and
double-sided tape.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 1750
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
Page 4765
When the SET/COAST switch is depressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set
speed until the switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
RESUME OPERATION When the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is depressed after cancel
operation other than depressing MAIN switch is performed, vehicle speed will return to last set
speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must meet following conditions. Brake pedal is released
- A/T shift lever is in other than P and N positions
- Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH)
Component Description
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Component Description
ASCD STEERING SWITCH Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P
Code Charts/P1564
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P
Code Charts/P1572 and See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/ASCD Brake Switch/Component
Description See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/ASCD Brake Switch.
STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P
Code Charts/P1572 , See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P1805 and
See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/ASCD Brake Switch/Component Description See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and
Procedures/ASCD Brake Switch.
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P2100, See: Powertrain Management/Computers
and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/P Code Charts/P2101, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P
Code Charts/P2118 and See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P2119.
ASCD INDICATOR Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/ASCD
Indicator/Component Description See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/ASCD Indicator.
Component Locations
Knock Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2911
- While removing pad assemblies, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
- Be careful not to damage piston boot or get oil on disc rotor. Always replace shims when
replacing pads.
- If shims are rusted or show peeling of rubber coat, replace them with new shims.
- It is not necessary to remove torque member mounting bolt except for disassembly or
replacement of cylinder body. In this case, suspend cylinder body with wire so as not to stretch
brake hose.
- Carefully monitor brake fluid level because brake fluid will return to reservoir when pushing back
piston.
- Burnish the brake pads (or linings) and disc rotor mutually contacting surfaces after refinishing or
replacing drums or rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at a very low
mileage. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Front Brake Burnishing Procedure.
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tires assemblies using power tool. 2. Remove bottom sliding pin
bolt.
3. Hang the cylinder body with a wire and remove the pad and shim assemblies, then pad retainers
from the torque member.
CAUTION: Do not damage piston boot.
- When removing pad retainer from torque member, lift pad retainer in the direction of arrow as
shown so as not to deform it.
- Keep rotor clean and free from brake fluid.
INSTALLATION 1. Apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or silicone-based grease to the rear of
the pad and to both sides of the shim, and attach the inner shim and
shim cover to the inner pad, and the outer shim to the outer pad.
2. Attach the pad retainer and pad to the torque member.
CAUTION: When attaching the pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it does not float up higher than
the torque member, as shown. 3. Push the piston in so that the pad is firmly attached and attach
the cylinder body to the torque member.
CAUTION: By pushing in the piston, the brake fluid returns to the master cylinder reservoir tank
and the sub tank. Watch the brake fluid level in the sub tank.
NOTE: Using a disc brake piston tool (commercial service tool), makes it easier to push in the
piston. 4. Install the sliding pin bolt and tighten to specification. Refer to See: Rear/Exploded View.
5. Check the brake for any drag. 6. Install the wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel.
CAUTION: Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after
replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at
Page 1274
Tool number : (J-50288)
- If the original timing chain markings are not legible, use paint or equivalent to mark the timing
chains to the sprockets.
4. If removing the timing chains (secondary), loosen camshaft sprocket bolts. 5. Compress the
timing chain tensioner (primary).
a. Pull lever down and release plunger stopper tab. Plunger stopper tab can be pushed up to
release (coaxial structure with lever).
b. Insert stopper pin into timing chain tensioner (primary) body hole to hold lever, and keep the
stopper tab released. c. Depress the plunger into the tensioner body by pressing the slack guide. d.
Keep the slack guide pressed and lock the plunger in by pushing the stopper pin through the lever
and into the chain tensioner body hole. - Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246.
6. Remove the internal chain guide.
- Slack guide does not need to be removed.
7. Remove timing chain (primary).
CAUTION:
Page 2569
Shift Indicator: Electrical Diagrams
A/T INDICATOR
Wiring Diagram - AT/IND DI-AT/IND-01
Page 207
Ignition Relay: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 3610
Removal And Installation
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
DRIVER SIDE
Removal 1. Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Instrument Lower Panel LH.
2. Remove the center stack trim panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Center Stack Trim Panel.
Page 939
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
CAUTION: Servicing PAX run flat tires and wheels requires special tire equipment and training. DO NOT
service PAX Run Flat tires and wheels with conventional tire servicing equipment or damage to the
tire and wheel will result.
- If a PAX run flat tire and wheel [or transmitter (pressure sensor)] requires service, and the proper
servicing equipment is not available, then replace the complete PAX tire and wheel assembly.
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter
retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
3. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire.
Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the
transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead.
4. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
5. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
6. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then
install seal on transmitter. Refer to See: See: .
NOTE:
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3
minutes.
Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it.
Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward.
Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has
been dropped or sustained an impact.
After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function
and delete the memory by CONSULT-III.
If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair
malfunctions. Refer to
Page 469
Position Learning". Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released
Position Learning.
Page 2278
4. Install the fuel pressure gauge as shown in the figure. Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth moistened with gasoline.
- Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel tube and No.1 spool.
- Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches the No.1 spool on fuel tube.
- Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439 N4710 or 16439 40U00).
- When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
- When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality.
- Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
- Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 -0.08in).
Tightening torque: 1 - 1.5 Nm (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m, 9 - 13in-lb)
- Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts.
5. After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose with a force of approximately 98
N (10 kg, 22lb) to confirm fuel tube does not
come off.
6. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage. 7. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 8.
Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false
readings.
- During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
9. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
10. Check the following.
- Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
- Fuel filter for clogging
- Fuel pump
- Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or
replace.
Method B
CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick
connector O-ring maintains seal ability.
- Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel
pressure.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove fuel hose
using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to See: Fuel Rail/Service and Repair. Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
- Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
Locations
Remote Switch: Locations
REAR VIEW MONITOR
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 4109
Page 3813
suspension strut tower (3) as shown.
12. Disconnect the high/low pressure pipe connector bolt (1) from the front expansion valve as
shown.
- Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube (2)
- Electric throttle control actuator (3)
- Arrow Indicates Front
13. Use a suitable tool to pry the pipe support clip (1) from the threaded stud on the dash panel as
shown.
- Arrow Indicates Front
14. Remove the top section of the high/low pressure pipe (1) as shown.
- Arrow Indicates Front
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the open pipe connections with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to
avoid the entry of air, moisture and contamination.
15. Remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe.
a. Access the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe from under the vehicle. b. Remove the
high/low pressure pipe connection (1) bolt (A). c. Remove the A/C pipe clamp bolt (B) to release
the A/C pipe clamp (2).
Diagram Information and Instructions
Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Electronic Brake Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic
Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Page 5172
1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio,
Stereo, and Compact Disc/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3.
Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Temporarily reconnect the power window switch to the door
harness. 5. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door glass until the door
glass bolts can be seen. 6. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 7. Remove the door glass bolts.
8. Raise the door glass up into the door frame/channel and hold in place with a suitable tool (A). 9.
Disconnect the harness connector for the regulator assembly.
10. Remove the regulator nuts, and remove the regulator assembly.
Inspection After Removal Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is
detected, replace or grease it. Wire wear
- Regulator deformation
The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.Refer to "FITTING INSPECTION AND
SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION".
Door glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
Disassembly 1. Remove the regulator motor bolts. 2. Remove the regulator motor from the
regulator assembly.
Assembly Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
FITTING INSPECTION AND SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator nuts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position.
Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in
the motor). Removal and installation of the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the regulator motor from the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the door glass.
- Removal and installation of the door glass run.
Page 2831
Repair Flow Chart
Page 2501
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B)
Fuse Block: Diagrams Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B)
FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX (J/B)
Terminal Arrangement
VDC/TCS/ABS
Yaw Rate Sensor: Locations VDC/TCS/ABS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 2769
Page 5079
Page 2681
1. Insert the amount of grease (Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent) into joint sub-assembly
serration hole until grease begins to ooze from ball
groove and serration hole. After inserting grease, use a shop cloth to wipe off old grease that has
oozed out.
2. Cover serrated part of shaft with tape. Install new boot band and boot to shaft. Be careful not to
damage boot.
CAUTION: Discard old boot band and boot; replace with new one.
3. Remove protective tape wound around serrated part of shaft.
4. Attach new circlip to shaft. The circlip must fit securely into shaft groove. Attach nut to joint
sub-assembly.
Use a suitable tool to press-fit.
CAUTION: Discard old circlip and replace with new one.
5. Insert the amount of new grease (Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent) listed below into
housing from large end of boot.
Grease amount : 170 - 190 g (6.00 - 6.70 oz)
Page 2347
Page 3759
REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear heater and cooling unit assembly from the vehicle. Refer to See:
Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal And
Installation.
2. Remove the rear blower motor. 3. Remove the variable blower control (rear).
4. Remove the rear air mix door motor. 5. Remove the rear duct and blend door assembly. Refer to
See: Air Duct/Service and Repair/Automatic/Removal And Installation. 6. Disassemble the rear
heater and cooling unit assembly to remove the evaporator.
Locations
Hazard Warning Switch: Locations
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 906
Fuse: Locations Fuse And Fusible Link Box
FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX
Terminal Arrangement
Page 5087
- Inspection End.
Page 1932
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Page 1990
Information Bus: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
CAN Communication System
System Description
CAN Communication System
- CAN communication is a multiplex communication system. This enables the system to transmit
and receive large quantities of data at high speed by connecting control units with two
communication lines (CAN-H and CAN-L).
- Control units on the CAN network transmit signals using the CAN communication control circuit.
They receive only necessary signals from other control units to operate various functions.
- CAN communication lines adopt twisted-pair line style (two lines twisted) for noise immunity.
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Each control unit passes an electric current to the termination circuits when transmitting CAN
communication signal. The termination circuits produce an electrical potential difference between
CAN-H and CAN-L. CAN communication system transmits and receives CAN communication
signals by the potential difference.
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL CIRCUIT
Locations
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 2568
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 4117
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements
Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements
Classification: MT02-001B
Reference: NTB03-015B
Date: December 21, 21009
2001-2010 NISSAN; MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL REQUIRED FOR WARRANTY REPAIRS
This bulletin has been amended. Please discard all copies of the earlier version.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan Manual Transmission-Equipped Vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
If an Applied Vehicle equipped with Manual Transmission (MT) needs servicing for warranty
repairs, Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80,
or Nissan GTR R35 Special is required. See the chart above.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or
Nissan GTR R35 Special oil must be used when performing manual transmission repairs paid by
Nissan. These include warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs.
Nissan will not reimburse dealers for manual transmission repairs when Nissan Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35
Special oil is not used.
Nissan recommends use of the above listed manual transmission fluids, which optimize shift
quality, for customer pay use as well.
Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid and all Nissan chemicals are ordered through the Direct Ship
Chemical Care Product Program.
Disclaimer
Locations
Collision Avoidance System Switch: Locations
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Component
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair Component
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL
Component
Variable Blower Control (Front)
Variable Blower Control (Rear)
Page 5037
Service and Repair
Solar Sensor: Service and Repair
OPTICAL SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the front demister grille. Refer to See: Sensors and Switches - Lighting and
Horns/Ambient Light Sensor/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the optical sensor connector (2). 3. Twist the optical sensor (1) counter clockwise to
remove it from the defroster grille.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain Area
Timing Chain Tensioner: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Buzz/Whine Form Timing Chain
Area
Classification: EM07-001D
Reference: NTB07-042D
Date: May 25, 2010
MAXIMA / ALTIMA / QUEST; BUZZING / WHINING NOISE FROM TIMING CHAIN AREA
This bulletin has been amended. PARTS INFORMATION and CLAIMS INFORMATION have been
amended. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Maxima (A34) 2004-2006 Altima (L31) with VQ35 engine ONLY
2004-2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM:
There is a high frequency buzzing / whining noise coming from the secondary timing chain system.
^ The noise should increase in frequency with engine speed (RPM).
^ If the noise does not increase with engine speed, the timing chain system may not be the cause.
Refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis.
ACTION:
1. Replace both secondary timing chains and both secondary timing chain tensioner "shoes" with
the ones from the PARTS INFORMATION section of this bulletin.
2. Change the engine oil and filter.
3. For repair procedure, refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE section of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You MUST
closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 613
^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep.
7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and
adjustments.
NOTE:
If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not
necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster
and easier.
^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system.
If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a
centered steering wheel.
^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right.
This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall
mounted rack and pinion units.
IMPORTANT:
If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to
jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct.
After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment
8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order.
9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight
flat road.
Page 2898
4. Add new brake fluid and bleed the air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. 5.
Adjust the parking brake. Refer to See: Parking Brake System/Testing and Inspection. 6. Install the
wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and
Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel.
CAUTION: Burnish the brake contact surfaces when refinishing or replacing brake rotors, after
replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Rear
Brake Burnishing Procedure.
Disassembly and Assembly
REAR DISC BRAKE
Disassembly and Assembly of Caliper Assembly
DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove the sliding pin bolt, and then remove the pad, shim, shim cover, and
pad retainer from the torque member and cylinder. 2. Remove the sliding pin and the sliding pin
boot from the torque member.
3. Remove the retaining ring from the cylinder body using a screwdriver or suitable tool, as shown.
4. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons
and piston boots.
WARNING: Do not place your finger in front of piston.
5. Remove piston seals from cylinder body using a screwdriver or suitable tool, as shown.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall.
CALIPER INSPECTION
Page 3075
Specifications
Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications
Main Bearing Cap
Page 2410
Locations
Overdrive Switch: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Locations
Power Sliding Door Module: Locations
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications
Automatic Air Conditioner
OIL
Capacity
Total in system
..............................................................................................................................................................
220 ml (7.44 US fl oz, 7.7 Imp fl oz) Compressor (service part) charging amount
..................................................................... Refer to ATC-19, "Maintenance of Oil Quantity in
Compressor".
Manual Air Conditioner
OIL
Capacity
Total in system
..............................................................................................................................................................
220 ml (7.44 US fl oz, 7.7 Imp fl oz) Compressor (service part) charging amount
.................................................................... Refer to MTC-19, "Maintenance of Oil Quantity in
Compressor".
Page 4133
Cellular Phone: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
Bluetooth Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout
TELEPHONE
Bluetooth Control Unit Harness Connector Terminal Layout
Terminal And Reference Value For Bluetooth Control Unit
TELEPHONE
Terminal and Reference Value for Bluetooth Control Unit
Page 2968
9. Tap flange using a soft block such as wood, and carefully pull the secondary piston assembly
straight out to prevent cylinder inner wall from being
damaged.
Inspection After Disassembly Master cylinder Check that there is no damage, friction, rusting, or
pinholes on the cylinder inner wall, and replace if there are any non-standard conditions. Piston
Check cup for damage. Replace the piston if damage is found.
Assembly
CAUTION: Never use mineral oils such as kerosene, gasoline during the cleaning and assembly process.
- Make sure there is no foreign matter such as dirt or dust attached to the inner cylinder walls, the
piston, or the cap seal, and use care to avoid damaging parts with the assembly tools.
- Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it.
1. Apply fluid to cylinder inner wall body and contact surface of the piston assembly. Then insert
secondary piston assembly and primary piston
assembly into cylinder body in this order.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the primary and secondary piston assemblies.
- Be sure to replace the assembly without disassembling the new inner kit.
- Pay attention to the orientation of the piston cup, and insert straight to prevent the cup from being
caught by cylinder inner wall.
2. Perform a visual inspection of the secondary piston slit through the tank boss hole on the
secondary side of the cylinder body, and install the piston
stopper using a suitable tool.
Page 2768
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Page 2781
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Page 721
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. Refer to See:
See: .
1. Disconnect the tube clamp at the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube at the mass
air flow sensor. 2. Separate the mass air flow sensor from the air cleaner to electric throttle control
actuator tube. 3. Unhook the air cleaner case side clips and remove the air cleaner case (upper). 4.
Remove the air cleaner filter. 5. Install a new air cleaner filter. 6. Install the remaining components
in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1937
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 2548
1. Install O-rings in 2nd brake sleeve and 2nd brake piston.
CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring.
- Apply ATF to O-ring.
2. Coat the inner surfaces of oil pump assembly with ATF. 3. Press 2nd brake piston and 2nd brake
sleeve into oil pump assembly.
4. Install snap ring using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage oil pump assembly.
5. Place return spring on 2nd brake piston with the spring side up.
6. Install 2nd brake flange, 2nd brake discs and 2nd brake plates.
Page 4902
LT-INT/L-05
WITHOUT REAR ROOF CONSOLE
Page 5196
Most windshield damage that occurs due to impact is easily identified as shown above.
Cracks can spread and become larger from the original strike point or crush mark due to:
^ Thermal stresses caused by temperature fluctuation
^ External physical stresses, such as hand touch, wind force, or vehicle vibration during driving (pot
holes)
A lead, or crack from one of the star cracked impact points can run to the edge of the glass and
appear to be a low stress crack starting from the glass outside edge.
Single crack beginning or ending at the edge of the glass
Single cracks must be inspected along the entire crack for impact marks.
^ If any impact mark is found anywhere along the crack, it indicates the damage occurred from an
object striking the windshield. This is not covered
under warranty.
Page 4478
^ Bolt A (shown in Figure 1 above) will need to be removed.
NOTE:
You may not need to completely remove the lower finisher. Unclipping the top and pulling it back
may give you enough access.
2. Check bolt "B" (see Figure 1).
^ If bolt B is loose or missing, replace it with a new one.
^ New bolt is listed in the parts information.
^ Apply Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE (or equivalent) to the threads of the
new bolt and torque bolt to 5.7 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 51
in-lb)
NOTE:
If bolt B is missing, make sure to find the missing bolt and remove it from the vehicle. The missing
bolt, if left loose in the passenger compartment, could cause a rattle.
4. Reassemble all parts in reverse order.
^ Apply Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE (or equivalent) to the threads of bolt A
and torque bolt to 15.2 N·m (1.6 kg-m, 11 ft-lb).
5. Make sure the power back door motor works correctly with no abnormal noise.
^ Cycle the power back door (open and close) 5 times.
Page 3809
- Arrow Indicates Front
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the open pipe connections with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to
avoid the entry of air, moisture and contamination.
15. Remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe.
a. Access the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe from under the vehicle. b. Remove the
high/low pressure pipe connection (1) bolt (A). c. Remove the A/C pipe clamp bolt (B) to release
the A/C pipe clamp (2).
NOTE: Reposition the rear heater pipe clamp (3) for additional clearance to remove the lower
section of the high/low pressure pipe as necessary.
d. Pry off the pipe support clip (1) secured to the dash panel threaded stud, using a suitable tool.
e. Carefully remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe (1).
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the open pipe connections with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to
avoid the entry of air, moisture and contamination.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Clean all of the A/C pipe fittings and connections.
- Replace the O-rings of the high/low-pressure pipe with new ones.
- Lubricate all the O-rings with the specified A/C system oil.
NOTE: The service replacement high/low pressure pipe is a two piece pipe assembly. 1. Install and
position the new lower high/low pressure pipe without tightening the connections.
Page 605
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order:
^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface.
If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the front turn plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
Front Suspension
Ball Joint: Specifications Front Suspension
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Lower Ball Joint
Page 4077
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Page 1301
- Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246.
b. Before installing timing chains (secondary) and camshaft sprockets, confirm mating marks are
visible. If necessary, use paint or equivalent to
re-mark the camshaft sprockets at each mating mark.
c. Install timing chains (secondary) (8) and camshaft sprockets [INT (1) and EXH (9)].
- Left bank mating marks (6) - Align the timing chain mating marks (secondary) (2) (yellow color
link) with the ones on camshaft sprockets (INT and EXH)(4), (5), (7) and
(10)(punched), and install them.
NOTE:
- Mating marks for camshaft sprocket (INT) are on the back side of camshaft sprocket (secondary).
- There are two types of mating marks, circle (7), (10) and oval (4), (5) types. They should be used
for the right and left banks, respectively.
Right bank : Use circle type (7) and (10). Left bank : Use oval type (4) and (5).
- Align dowel pin (3) and pin hole on camshafts with the groove (11) and dowel pin on sprockets,
and install them. - On the intake side, align pin hole on the small diameter side of the camshaft
front end with dowel pin (3) on the back side of camshaft
sprocket, and install them.
- On the exhaust side, align dowel pin on camshaft front end with pin groove (11) on camshaft
sprocket, and install them. - In case that positions of each mating mark and each dowel pin do not
fit on mating parts, make fine adjustment to the position by slightly
turning camshaft(s).
- Bolts for camshaft sprockets must be tightened in the next step. Tightening them by hand is
enough to prevent the dislocation of dowel pins.
d. Confirm the mating marks are aligned, then finger tighten camshaft sprocket bolts. Final
tightening will be done with all timing chains installed. e. Remove stopper pins out from timing
chain tensioners (secondary).
3. Install timing chain (primary) as follows:
Locations
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 931
Board-On Lift
LIFTING POINT
Board-on Lift
CAUTION: Make sure vehicle is empty when lifting.
The board-on lift attachment at the front end of the vehicle should be set on the front of the sill
under the front door opening.
Position attachments at front and rear ends of board-on lift.
Page 2175
Tool numbers : KV10114400 (J-38365)
- Install the bank 1 (1) and bank 2 (2) three way catalyst support bolts in the order as shown.
Arrow Indicates : Engine front
Three way catalyst support bolts : 22.0 N.m (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft-lb)
- Install the exhaust manifold heat shield bolts.
- Install the three way catalyst manifolds heat shield bolts.
Three way catalyst manifold heat shield bolts : 8.3 N.m (0.85 kg-m, 73 in-lb)
Page 3073
JIS = Japan Industrial Standard, used for Japan produced batteries CCA = Cold Cranking Amps,
standard for North American produced batteries
IMPORTANT:
^ JIS batteries have different testing specifications than CCA batteries.
^ If you must use the GR-8 Battery Tester in a mode other than MODEL mode, JIS Mode MUST
ALWAYS BE USED for JIS batteries otherwise an
incorrect result will occur. NEVER test a JIS battery using the CCA test in the GR-8; the test
software in the GR-8 is different for JIS and CCA modes. ANY CCA value you may have for a
JIS-type battery is inaccurate for testing purposes.
^ ALWAYS test with the GR-8 using the MODEL mode (if available).
^ Selecting MODEL and vehicle type will automatically select the proper JIS or CCA value for the
Original Equipment battery.
^ If the applicable vehicle is not listed, update the GR-8 to make sure it has the most recent data
package. (1)
(1) To run the Midtronics Update Wizard for the GR-8 tester in CONSULT III:
^ Make sure the cables from the GR-8 to the multitasker are connected and both units are turned
on.
^ Click on the ASIST icon.
^ Click on INFO. Tool Box.
^ Select Midtronics GR-8.
^ Midtronics Update Wizard file screen displays.
^ Click on Change MUP File.
^ The Select a MUP file window displays with the path: C:\ProgramFiles\Midtronics\MUW.
^ Select 192-725C and click OK.
^ Click on next and follow the prompts on the Midtronics Update Wizard screen.
If the applicable vehicle still is not listed:
1) Determine which type of battery (CCA or JIS) is installed in the vehicle. See below for
descriptions of each battery.
2) Select CCA or JIS in the GR-8 based on the type of battery installed. See below for more
information.
Determine the Battery Type
Batteries with JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard) Number
Page 3172
Power Distribution Module: Diagrams
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Testing and Inspection
Fusible Link: Testing and Inspection
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Fusible Link
A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its
condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp.
CAUTION: If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying
circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of incident.
- Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape.
- Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts.
Page 2670
Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Disassembly And Assembly (Right Side)
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
Disassembly and Assembly (Right Side)
DISASSEMBLY
Transaxle Side 1. Press shaft in a vise.
CAUTION: When retaining shaft in a vise, always use copper or aluminum plates between vise and
shaft.
2. Remove circlip and dust shield from slide joint housing. 3. Remove boot bands and slide the
boots back. 4. Put matching marks on slide joint housing and shaft before separating slide joint
housing.
Page 3898
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations MTC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM
Programming Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 276
Locations
Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location
Page 2266
2. Remove the lock ring using a socket drive handle and Tool as shown.
Tool number : KV991J0090 (J-46214)
3. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly from the fuel tank.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Make sure the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump is free
from defects and foreign materials.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Install the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly with the fuel feed hose facing the
front of the vehicle.
- Turn the lock ring until the lock ring is fully rotated into the fuel tank lock tabs as shown.
- Connect the quick connector as follows:
- Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials.
Page 5020
DESCRIPTION
Page 4890
Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional
electrical reference at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the
Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector
Area.
Page 2719
Shift Indicator: Electrical Diagrams
A/T INDICATOR
Wiring Diagram - AT/IND DI-AT/IND-01
Page 1771
- Keep fuel hose connections clean.
3. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown
in figure. Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter.
- When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality.
4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 5. Start engine and
check for fuel leakage. 6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 8. Check the following. Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
- Fuel filter for clogging
- Fuel pump
- Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or
replace.
9. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel
pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE
RELEASE".
Page 3453
4. Remove the front stabilizer bar bracket rear bolts and loosen the front bolts. Refer to See:
Suspension/Stabilizer Bar/Service and Repair/Front
Suspension.
5. Remove the lower joint pinch bolt. Refer to See: Steering Column/Service and Repair. 6. Drain
the power steering fluid. 7. Disconnect the power steering high and low pressure lines from the
steering gear. 8. Reposition the stabilizer bar up and out of the way.
9. Remove the two gear housing bolts using power tool. Refer to "Removal and Installation". Do not remove the gear housing mounting bracket from the gear housing.
10. Remove the power steering gear and linkage assembly.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: Do not reuse non-reusable parts. Use the specified tightening torque when installing the high-pressure tube and low-pressure hose
connections. Refer to See: Power Steering/Power Steering Line/Hose/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: Excessive tightening will damage threads of connection or O-ring. The O-ring in low-pressure hose connector is larger than that in high-pressure connector. Take
care to install the proper O-ring.
Page 4038
3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see
Figure 3).
^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information.
4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring.
^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt
NOTE:
^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring.
^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly.
Page 1304
TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER
1. Timing chain tensioner (secondary)(LH) 2. Internal chain guide 3. Timing chain tensioner
(secondary)(RH) 4. Camshaft sprocket RH (EXH) 5. Timing chain (secondary) 6. Timing chain
(primary) 7. Camshaft sprocket RH (INT) 8. Camshaft sprocket LH (INT) 9. Timing chain
(secondary) 10. Camshaft sprocket LH (EXH) 11. Slack guide 12. Crankshaft sprocket 13. Tension
guide
Removal and Installation (Primary Timing Chain Tensioner)
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front RH wheel and tire. 2. Remove the fender protector side cover RH. 3. Support
the engine with suitable jack and remove the RH engine insulator, mount and bracket.
Specifications
Accelerator Pedal: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Accelerator Control
PEDAL TRAVEL
Page 2068
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 1910
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Gap
SPARK PLUG
Page 1372
10. Remove cooling fan assembly. 11. Disconnect lower radiator hose from engine. 12. Disconnect
the power steering fluid reservoir tank hose from the power steering pump and fluid cooler and
remove the power steering fluid
reservoir tank.
13. Remove the front RH wheel and tire. 14. Remove the fender protector side cover RH. 15.
Remove the drive belt. 16. Remove the power steering pump.
17. Remove the lower oil pan. Loosen the lower oil pan bolts using power tool in order as shown.
a. Cut the sealant using Tool and remove the lower oil pan.
Tool number : (J-37228)
CAUTION: - Be careful not to damage the mating surface. - Do not insert a screwdriver, this will
damage the mating surfaces.
b. Slide the Tool by tapping its side with a hammer to remove the lower oil pan.
18. Remove upper oil pan bolts in reverse order as shown. 19. Remove the generator. 20. Remove
the A/C compressor bolts and position the A/C compressor aside. 21. Remove the generator
bracket. 22. Support the engine with suitable jack and remove the RH engine, mount and bracket.
23. Remove the crankshaft pulley as follows:
a. Remove access plate and install Ring Gear Stopper Tool.
Tool number : (J-50288)
Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock
Installation/Removal
Wheel Fastener: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock
Installation/Removal
Classification: WT09-002
Reference: NTB09-056
Date: July 14, 2009
ACCESSORY WHEEL LOCKS INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
Always use hand tools when installing or removing accessory wheel lock nuts.
WARNING:
Do not use power tools to install or remove accessory wheel lock nuts.
Use of an impact wrench or other power tool may cause permanent damage to the wheel lock nut
and/or key.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Accessory wheel locks, wheel lock keys, or vehicle wheels that are damaged due to improper
installation or removal will not be considered a manufacturer defect and will not be covered under
warranty.
Accessory Wheel Lock Installation / Removal Guidelines
^ For ease of removal, the wheel lock nut should always be the first lug nut removed.
^ If needed, clean threads on lug studs with a wire brush.
^ The wheel lock nut should always be the last lug nut tightened.
^ Always use the special key supplied in the wheel lock set to install and remove the wheel locks.
^ Always tighten the wheel lock nuts using a hand torque wrench to the torque specification in the
Service Manual.
Disclaimer
Diagram Information and Instructions
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions
How To Read Wiring Diagram
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
How to Read Wiring Diagram
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the
terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPLE -
Cell Phone - Bluetooth(R) Initial Diagnosis
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-063 Date: 090727
Cell Phone - Bluetooth(R) Initial Diagnosis
Classification: EL09-019
Reference: NTB09-063
Date: July 27, 2009
BLUETOOTH(R) PHONE SYSTEM; INITIAL DIAGNOSIS
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with factory equipped Bluetooth(R) phone system
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a vehicle comes to the dealer with a Bluetooth(R) phone system related concern, use this bulletin
for initial diagnosis.
^ This bulletin will help reduce unnecessary diagnosis and parts replacement. Refer to the
SERVICE PROCEDURE section below, and QUICK
REFERENCE.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. Make sure the customer's Bluetooth(R) related concern is understood.
a. Customer comment(s) _______________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
2. Verify the customer's concern(s).
NOTE:
The customer's phone may be required, depending upon their concern(s).
3. Write down the customer's cell phone brand, model number, and service provider.
Brand (Motorola, Blackberry, etc.) _________________________________
Model (Razr, Pearl, etc.) _________________________________
Model Number (V3m, 8120, etc.) _________________________________
Service Provider (Verizon, Sprint, etc.) _________________________________
^ It is necessary to know the service provider. On occasion, a given phone may be on the approved
list with one provider, but may not be on the
approved list with other providers.
4. Go to www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/.
a. Using the website's search engine, find out if the customer's phone is on the approved list.
b. Put the correct application in "Vehicle", "Year", "Equipped With" (as applicable), "Phone
Manufacturer", and then click on "Search".
c. If the phone is NOT on the approved list:
^ STOP YOUR DIAGNOSIS HERE.
^ Do NOT perform any further diagnosis for this incident.
^ Do NOT perform any repairs for this incident.
^ Do NOT replace any parts for this incident.
^ The customer needs to obtain a Bluetooth(R) phone that is on the approved list before any further
action.
d. IF the customer's phone is on the approved list, click on the picture of the phone.
Service and Repair
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
REAR VIEW MONITOR
Rear View Camera Control Unit
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the front passenger seat. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Front Seat/Removal And Installation. 3.
Disconnect the rear view camera control unit connector.
4. Remove the screws (1) and remove the rear view camera control unit (2).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4114
DESCRIPTION
Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Customer Interest Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation
Classification: BT07-032A
Reference: NTB07-070A
Date: September 25, 2009
SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been revised. No other changes
have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2007 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2007 - 2009
Maxima (A34, A35) 2007 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007 - 2009 Quest (V42) 2007 - 2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
Sunroof auto operation will not work or sunroof does not operate properly:
^ When the battery has been disconnected or discharged
^ When the sunroof motor has been disconnected from power
^ When the sunroof motor was changed
ACTION
Perform the following initialization procedure:
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully
closed.
3. After the sunroof has closed all the way, push and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) again for
more than 2 seconds to re-learn motor position.
4. Initialization is complete if the sunroof operates normally.
NOTE:
If the sunroof is still not operating properly after initialization, refer to ASIST and section RF of the
Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis and repair information.
Page 3457
4. Before installing the dust boot, coat the contact surfaces between the boot and the inner tie-rod
with grease.
5. Install the boot clamps and boot bands securely.
Page 5026
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Component
Shift Interlock Cable: Service and Repair Component
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
Component
CAUTION:
Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or
interference with adjacent parts.
After installing key interlock cable to control device, make sure that casing cap and bracket are
firmly secured in their positions. If casing cap can be removed with an external load of less than
39.2 N (4.0 kg, 8.8 lb), replace key interlock cable with new one.
Component
Heater Core Case: Service and Repair Component
HEATER and COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
Component
Front Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Rear Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Page 2441
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Page 771
8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D"
ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7).
9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A).
10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make
sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B).
11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is
firmly applied (see Figure 9).
12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt.
13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring.
Page 1880
Page 1390
4. Remove the Bank 1 (RH) IVT control valve cover.
- Loosen the IVT control valve cover bolts in the order as shown. CAUTION: The shaft in the IVT
control valve cover is inserted into the center hole of the intake camshaft sprocket. Remove the IVT
control valve cover by pulling straight out until the IVT control valve cover disengages from the
camshaft sprocket.
5. Remove the primary timing chain tensioner as follows:
a. Pull the lever (C) down to release the plunger stopper tab (B). b. Insert the stopper pin A into the
tensioner body hole to hold the lever (C) and keep the plunger stopper tab (B) released. c.
Compress the plunger (D) into the tensioner body (1) by pressing the slack guide (2). d. Keep the
slack guide (2) pressed and lock the plunger (D) in by pushing the stopper pin A through the lever
(C) and into the chain tensioner
body hole. - Use stopper pin included with Tool J-50246.
e. Remove timing chain tensioner bolts and then remove the timing chain tensioner.
CAUTION: Be careful not to drop timing chain tensioner bolts inside timing chain case.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing primary timing chain tensioner, push
in plunger and keep it pressed in with stopper pin. Remove any dirt and foreign materials completely from the back and the mounting surfaces of
primary timing chain tensioner.
- After installation, pull out stopper pin.
- When installing the IVT control valve covers perform the following steps.
1. Install IVT control valve covers as follows:
a. Install new collared O-rings in front cover oil hole (LH and RH sides).
Service and Repair
Sliding Door Handle: Service and Repair
SLIDE DOOR LOCK
Removal and Installation
OUTSIDE HANDLE 1. Remove the sliding door finisher. Refer to See: Front Door/Front Door
Panel/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the grommet, and the outside handle escutcheon bolt (TORX T30) from grommet hole.
3. While pulling the outside handle (1), remove outside handle escutcheon (2).
4. While pulling outside handle (1), slide toward rear of vehicle to remove (2).
5. Remove the front gasket and rear gasket.
Locations
Blower Motor Relay: Locations
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Electrical Units Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Checking Brake Fluid Level
Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Checking Brake Fluid Level
BRAKE FLUID
Checking Brake Fluid Level
- Check fluid level in the sub tank. It should be between "MAX" and "MIN" lines on the sub tank.
- Visually check around the reservoir tank and sub tank for leaks.
- If fluid level is extremely low, check brake system for leaks.
- Release parking brake lever and see if brake warning lamp goes off. If not, check brake system
for leaks.
Page 3210
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/System Description/CAN Communication System.
ACTIVE TEST
Service and Repair
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair
BRAKE FLUID
Bleeding Brake System
CAUTION: Carefully monitor brake fluid level at the sub tank during bleeding operation.
- Fill the sub tank with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance. Make sure it is full at all times
while bleeding the air out of system.
- Place a container under the sub tank to avoid spilling brake fluid.
- Do not loosen the line fittings at the ABS actuator during air bleeding.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and control unit connector or negative
battery terminal. 2. Connect a transparent vinyl tube and container to air bleeder valve.
3. Fully depress brake pedal several times. 4. With brake pedal depressed, open air bleeder valve
to release air. 5. Close air bleeder valve. 6. Release brake pedal slowly. 7. Tighten air bleeder
valve to specification.
Air bleeder valve : Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Front/Exploded View, See: Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear/Exploded View.
8. Repeat steps 2 through 7 until no more air bubbles come out of air bleeder valve. 9. Bleed the
brake hydraulic system air bleeder valves in the following order:
Right rear brake to Left front brake to Left rear brake to Right front brake
Page 1022
6. Remove camshaft RH (1) and LH (2) secondary timing chain tensioner (3) from cylinder head
with the stopper pin (5) inserted.
NOTE: Stopper pin (5) was installed when secondary timing chain was removed. O-rings (4)
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Camshaft Visual Check Check camshaft for scratches, seizure and wear. Replace if necessary.
Camshaft Runout 1. Put V-block on precise flat bed and support No. 2 and No. 4 journal of
camshaft as shown.
2. Set dial gauges vertically to No. 3 journal as shown. 3. Turn camshaft in one direction slowly by
hand, measure the camshaft runout on the dial gauges. Runout is the largest indicator reading after one full revolution.
4. If actual runout exceeds the limit, replace the camshaft.
Camshaft Cam Lobe Height
1. Measure camshaft cam lobe height as shown. Refer to See: Maintenance. 2. If wear has
reduced the lobe height below specifications, replace the camshaft.
Page 502
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Audible Warning Device: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
WARNING CHIME
CONSULT-III Function (BCM)
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
NOTE:
If "CAN communication U1000" is indicated, after printing the monitor item, go to "CAN System".
Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing
and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Trouble Diagnosis/CAN Diagnostic
Support Monitor.
Page 1606
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 4463
Trunk / Liftgate Motor: Service and Repair
BACK DOOR LOCK
Back Door Power Lift Assembly
REMOVAL 1. Remove the LH rear pillar upper finisher. Refer to See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim
Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the closure rod to door bolt. 3. Remove the back door motor
gear assembly. 4. Remove the back door motor. Disconnect the electrical connector.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4081
Abbreviations
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Abbreviations
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Locations
Ambient Light Sensor: Locations
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Drivetrain - Front Axle Clicking Noise On Acceleration
Axle Shaft Assembly: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Front Axle Clicking Noise On
Acceleration
Classification: FA06-004B
Reference: NTB06-085B
Date: October 19, 2009
CLICKING NOISE FROM FRONT AXLES DURING TAKE-OFF/ACCELERATION
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles, Parts Information, and Service Procedure
sections have been revised. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous
versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLE: 2004 - 2009 Quest (V42)
IF YOU CONFIRM:
An applied vehicle has a "clicking" noise coming from the front axles during take-off/acceleration.
ACTION:
Apply Molykote M77 grease (P/N 44003-7S000) to the front wheel drive shaft bearing surfaces.
NOTE:
Make sure to use the new torque specification for the axle nut: 200 Nm (147 ft-lb), instead of 125
Nm (92 ft-lb).
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove both front wheel drive shafts from the axle hubs. Refer to the FAX section of the
applicable Service Manual for the removal procedure.
Page 1676
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Recall PC039 - Brake Pedal Inspection/Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-030B Date: 100816
Recall PC039 - Brake Pedal Inspection/Replacement
Reference: NTB10-030B
Date: August 16, 2010
VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2008-2010 ARMADA & TITAN AND 2008-2009 QUEST
BRAKE PEDAL PIVOT PIN INSPECTION
The Claims Information in this bulletin has been amended. Please discard previous versions.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC039
NHTSA# 10V-072
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2008-2010 Armada (TA60) 2008-2010 Titan (A60) 2008-2009 Quest (V42)
Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a Voluntary Recall Campaign on certain specific 2008 - 2010 Armada & Titan
and 2008 - 2009 Quest vehicles to inspect, and if necessary, replace the brake pedal. On a small
number of the potentially affected vehicles the brake pedal assembly may have been manufactured
out of specification.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC039 to this quality assurance inspection. This
number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this
activity.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS
1. Look under the dash to view the brake pedal pivot pin.
Page 4904
LT-INT/L-07
Procedures
Hose/Line HVAC: Procedures
REFRIGERANT LINES
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure
SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Discharging Refrigerant
WARNING: Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose
and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified service
equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or SAE
J2201 HFC-134a (R-134a) recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate
the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained
from the refrigerant and oil manufacturers.
Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant
Page 4985
If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly
may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example.
If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 1581
Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic
Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic
Classification: EL10-028
Reference: NTB10-106
Date: September 10, 2010
NATS SECURITY - VBC LOGIC
APPLIED VEHICLE: 2009 - 2011 All Nissan with NATS / Immobilizer System
SERVICE INFORMATION
All model year 2009 - 2011 Nissan vehicles equipped with NATS/Immobilizer system have the new
VBC (Validate Before Crank) starter relay logic.
VBC (Validate Before Crank) Logic:
^ The BCM will make sure that a valid (registered) key is being used before engaging the starter
relay. If the key is not authenticated the starter will not
operate.
^ If the engine cranks, the issue is not related to NATS. Do not replace NATS components (BCM,
I-Key, FOB Reader or RF Receiver). Refer to ASIST
for further diagnostic information as needed.
Page 628
Alignment: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
System Description
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation System Description
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
System Description
- IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse
block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM
E/R control circuits.
- IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication
control, oil pressure switch signal reception, etc.
- It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines.
CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R 1. Lamp control Using CAN communication lines, it
receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps: Headlamps (High, Low)
- Parking lamps
- Tail and license plate lamps
- Cornering lamps
- Front fog lamps
2. Wiper control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the
front wipers. 3. Rear window defogger relay control Using CAN communication lines, it receives
signals from the BCM and controls the rear window defogger relay. 4. A/C compressor control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C
compressor (magnet clutch). 5. Starter control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals
from the BCM and controls the starter relay. 6. Cooling fan control Using CAN communication
lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays. 7. Horn control Using
CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay.
CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL With CAN communication, by connecting each control
unit using two communication lines (CAN L-line, CAN H-line), it is possible to transmit a maximum
amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and
reads necessary information only. 1. Fail-safe control When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe
control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control.
- Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as follows:
IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based
on each operating condition. 1. CAN communication status
Page 4386
Power Sliding Door Switch: Locations Automatic Sliding Door System
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 442
Oxygen Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 794
suspension strut tower (3) as shown.
12. Disconnect the high/low pressure pipe connector bolt (1) from the front expansion valve as
shown.
- Air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube (2)
- Electric throttle control actuator (3)
- Arrow Indicates Front
13. Use a suitable tool to pry the pipe support clip (1) from the threaded stud on the dash panel as
shown.
- Arrow Indicates Front
14. Remove the top section of the high/low pressure pipe (1) as shown.
- Arrow Indicates Front
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the open pipe connections with a suitable material such as vinyl tape to
avoid the entry of air, moisture and contamination.
15. Remove the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe.
a. Access the lower section of the high/low pressure pipe from under the vehicle. b. Remove the
high/low pressure pipe connection (1) bolt (A). c. Remove the A/C pipe clamp bolt (B) to release
the A/C pipe clamp (2).
Page 3038
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
Wheel Sensors
WHEEL SENSORS
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
- When removing the front or rear wheel hub assembly, first remove the wheel sensor from the
assembly. Failure to do so may result in damage to the sensor wires, making the sensor
inoperative.
- Pull out the sensor, be careful to turn it as little as possible. Do not pull on the sensor harness.
- Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following, and then tighten the
wheel sensor bolt to the specified torque.
- Before installing the wheel sensor, make sure there are no foreign materials (such as iron
fragments) adhered to the pick-up part of the wheel sensor, to the inside of the wheel sensor
mounting hole or on the rotor mounting surface.
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR
Removal 1. Remove the front wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service
and Repair/Conventional Tire And Wheel. 2. Partially remove the front wheel fender protector.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair. 3.
Remove the wheel sensor bolt and wheel sensor. 4. Remove the harness wire from mounts and
disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR WHEEL SENSOR
Removal 1. Remove the wheel sensor bolt and wheel sensor from the rear wheel hub and bearing
assemblies. 2. Remove the harness wire from mounts and harness wire clips from the rear
suspension member. 3. Disconnect the wheel sensor harness connector.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Sensor Rotor
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation
The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub. For removal and installation
procedure, refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair/Rear
Wheel Hub.
Page 1860
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Specifications
Exhaust Manifold: Specifications
Exhaust Manifold
Page 1738
Camshaft Position Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 5103
Harness Indication -
Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Page 3667
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Locations
Key Reminder Switch: Locations
WARNING CHIME
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 2094
Engine Control Module: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2931
ASSEMBLY
1. Apply rubber grease or brake fluid to the piston seals and install them into cylinder body.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the piston seals.
2. Apply rubber grease to the piston boot, place it on the piston, and firmly insert the piston boot
cylinder-side lip into the cylinder body groove.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the piston boot.
3. Apply brake fluid to the piston, insert into the cylinder body by hand and firmly attach the piston
boot piston-side lip into the piston groove.
CAUTION: Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from
being rubbed. 4. Install sliding pins and sliding pin boots to torque member. 5. Apply PBC (Poly
Butyl Cuprysil) or equivalent, to the pad back plate and inner shim sides. Install inner shims and
outer shim covers to inner and
outer pads.
Page 5243
1. Clean up the pivot area as shown. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm looseness. 2. Install
rear wiper motor. 3. Attach pivot cap. 4. Connect rear wiper motor electrical connector. 5. Install
back door finisher lower. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim
Panel/Service and Repair. 6. Attach rear wiper arm. Refer to See: Wiper Arm/Service and Repair.
Washer Motor
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Washer Motor
Refer to See: Windshield Washer Pump/Service and Repair.
Page 2650
IMPORTANT:
Make sure to mark the drive shaft and hub as shown in Figure 1 before removing the drive shaft.
NOTE:
Do not remove the axles from the transmission for this bulletin.
2. Apply a moderate coat of Molykote M77 Grease (P/N 44003-7S000) to the entire front wheel
drive shaft bearing surface (see Figure 2).
Page 871
Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Checking Fluid Leakage
POWER STEERING FLUID
Checking Fluid Leakage
Check the lines for improper attachment and for leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing
and deterioration. 1. Run engine between idle speed and 1,000 rpm.
Make sure temperature of fluid in oil tank rises to 60° - 80°C (140° - 176°F).
2. Turn steering wheel right-to-left several times. 3. Hold steering wheel at each lock position for
five seconds and carefully check for fluid leakage.
CAUTION: Do not hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more than 15 seconds. 4. If fluid
leakage at connectors is noticed, loosen flare nut and then retighten.
Do not overtighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer and connector.
5. If fluid leakage from power steering oil pump is noticed, check the power steering oil pump.
Refer to See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power
Steering/Power Steering Pump/Service and Repair/Procedures.
6. Check steering gear boots for accumulation of power steering fluid, indicating a steering gear
leak.
Page 3211
Inspection With CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis)
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Inspection with CONSULT-III (Self-Diagnosis)
1.SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK 1. Connect CONSULT-III and select "IPDM E/R" on the
"SELECT SYSTEM" screen. 2. Select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE"
screen. 3. Check display content in self-diagnosis results.
NOTE: The Details for Display for the Period are as follows: CRNT: Error currently detected by IPDM E/R.
- PAST: Error detected in the past and stored in IPDM E/R memory.
Contents displayed NO DTC DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE
REQUIRED.-INSPECTION END. CAN COMM CIRC-Print out the self-diagnosis result and refer to
See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/System Description/CAN Communication
System.
Page 642
Locations
Auxiliary Water Pump Relay: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Page 1286
Timing Chain: Service and Repair M/T Models
"The content of this article/image reflects the changes identified in TSB NTB 10-046"
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR
FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE
1. Front timing chain case 2. Seal ring 3. Collared O-ring 4. IVT control valve cover RH 5. Chain
tensioner cover 6. Collared O-ring 7. Seal ring 8. IVT control valve cover LH 9. RH engine
mounting bracket 10. Water pump cover 11. Water hose clamp 12. Crankshaft pulley 13. Front oil
seal 14. Idler pulley
15. Idler pulley bracket A. Refer to Installation B. To A/C compressor
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove engine under cover. 2. Drain the engine oil. 3. Drain the engine coolant from the
radiator. 4. Drain the power steering fluid. 5. Remove engine room cover. 6. Remove front air duct.
7. Remove battery tray. 8. Remove upper radiator hose.
Latch (Lower Anchors And Tether For Children) System
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair Latch (Lower Anchors And Tether For Children)
System
LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system is not serviceable.
Page 4869
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
CAUTION: Servicing PAX run flat tires and wheels requires special tire equipment and training. DO NOT
service PAX Run Flat tires and wheels with conventional tire servicing equipment or damage to the
tire and wheel will result.
- If a PAX run flat tire and wheel [or transmitter (pressure sensor)] requires service, and the proper
servicing equipment is not available, then replace the complete PAX tire and wheel assembly.
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter
retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
3. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire.
Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the
transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead.
4. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
5. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
6. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
1. Place first side of tire onto rim. 2. Apply suitable silicone lubricant to new transmitter seal then
install seal on transmitter. Refer to See: Maintenance See: Maintenance.
NOTE:
Page 1968
DETECT THE ROOT CAUSE Identify the root cause using the created diagnosis sheet.
Identifying the root cause Draw a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the possible cause. Narrow the search.
NOTE: -
Color-code when drawing lines.
- Do not draw a line onto a existing line.
- Drawing a line is not necessary if the circuit is shorted. Refer to "Present Error -- Short Circuit --",
"Past Error -- Short Circuit --". Refer to the following for details of the trouble diagnosis procedure.
- "Present Error -- Open Circuit --"
- "Present Error -- Short Circuit --"
- "Past Error -- Open Circuit --"
- "Past Error -- Short Circuit --"
NOTE: When the root cause appears to be a branch line or short circuit, be sure to check the
control unit as well as the communication line.
Present Error -- Open Circuit -- Identify the error circuit using information from the "CAN DIAG
SUPPORT MNTR" ("ECU list" included). 1. ECU list: Check the items indicated in "ECU list". Draw
a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the error circuit.
NOTE: CAN communication line has no error if units other than Diag on CAN units are not
indicated. An error may be on the power supply of the control unit, DDL1 line or DDL2 line.
a. "TCM" which is Diag on CAN unit, is not indicated on "ECU list". This indicates that DLC is not
receiving a signal from TCM. Draw a line to
Page 4176
Page 1212
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-50288 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets (no picture shown).
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioners
plungers. Figure 1 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tools where shown in
Page 3431
Power Steering Pump: Removal and Replacement
Removal and Installation
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove side splash guard.
3. Remove heat insulator. 4. Loosen adjustment screw and oil pump bolt, then remove belt. 5.
Drain power steering fluid. 6. Remove power steering oil pump union bolt and hose. 7. Remove
power steering oil pump bracket bolts. 8. Remove power steering oil pump.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten component connections to specification. Refer to See: Disassembly and Assembly.
- Adjust belt tension. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts,
Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Testing and Inspection.
- Refill power steering system and bleed air after installation. Refer to See: Service and Repair
See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Checking Fluid Leakage
See: Power Steering Fluid/Service and Repair/Checking Fluid Level.
Disassembly and Assembly
Page 2087
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 2408
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 2144
13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part.
16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
Page 2996
Apply specified vacuum to the brake booster. Then check output rod length, using a suitable tool.
INSTALLATION
1. Loosen the lock nut to adjust the input rod length so that the dimension shown satisfies the
specified value.
Standard value : 110 mm (4.33 in)
2. After adjusting, temporarily tighten the lock nut to install the booster assembly to the vehicle. At
this time, make sure to install a gasket between
the booster assembly and the vehicle.
3. Connect the brake pedal with the clevis of the input rod while installing brake pedal assembly
onto brake booster studs. 4. Install nuts to secure brake pedal assembly to brake booster and
tighten to specification. 5. Install the brake piping from the brake master cylinder to ABS actuator.
Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and
Repair/Hydraulic Circuit.
6. Install the brake master cylinder to the brake booster. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake
Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement.
7. Adjust the height and play of the brake pedal. 8. Tighten the lock nut of the input rod to the
specification. 9. Adjust brake pedal. Refer to See: Brake Pedal Assy/Testing and Inspection.
10. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair.
Vacuum Lines
VACUUM LINES
Removal and Installation
Page 1939
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring
diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location of each wiring diagram.
Testing and Inspection
Hood Latch: Testing and Inspection
HOOD
Hood Lock Control Inspection
CAUTION: If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it.
1. Make sure the secondary latch is properly engaged with the secondary striker with hood's own
weight by dropping it from approx. 200 mm (7.87
in) height.
2. While operating the hood opener, carefully make sure the front end of the hood is raised by
approx. 20 mm (0.79 in). Also make sure the hood
opener returns to the original position.
3. Check the hood lock lubrication condition. If necessary, apply "body grease" to the points shown
in the figure.
Page 3816
e. From the engine compartment, tighten the fittings between the upper and lower high pressure
pipe (A) and the low pressure pipe (B) as shown
to specification.
- Arrow Indicates Front
CAUTION: Do NOT damage the hydraulic brake lines or any other surrounding parts when tightening the
fittings.
4. Connect the power brake booster vacuum hose to the intake manifold collector. 5. Check that
there is sufficient clearance between the lower high/low pressure pipe and the front stabilizer bar.
Adjust the lower high/low pressure
pipe as necessary.
6. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and check the A/C system for leaks. Refer to See:
Service and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service
Procedure.
7. Install the remaining components in the reverse order of removal.
Locations
Collision Avoidance Module: Locations
REAR SONAR SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Calculated Load Value
Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Calculated Load Value
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Calculated Load Value
Page 1269
CAUTION: Press fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting the oil seal. NOTE: Make sure the
garter spring is in position and seal lip is not inverted.
3. Install new O-rings on rear timing chain case.
CAUTION: Use new O-rings for installation.
4. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to front timing chain case as shown.
- Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. - Before installation, wipe off the protruding
sealant. - 2.6 - 3.6 mm (0.102 - 0.142 in) dia.
5. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to top surface of oil pan (upper) as shown.
- Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent.
Locations
Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SRS Component Parts Location
Page 3873
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair MTC
AMBIENT SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the ambient sensor connector.
NOTE: The ambient sensor is located behind the front bumper opening, in front of the condenser.
2. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3550
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 3378
Page 1593
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 1746
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Page 751
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Remove the secondary timing chains. Refer to the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) if needed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to remove the valve covers or intake collector.
^ Before removing the crankshaft pulley, set it to 0° Top Dead Center (TDC).
^ Use Tool J-50288 to secure the flywheel / flex plate when removing the crankshaft pulley and
camshaft sprockets (no picture shown).
NOTE:
The camshaft sprockets bolts will be removed and installed while being held by all three (3) timing
chains.
^ If the crankshaft is determined to be 360° off from 0° TDC on #1 cylinder compression stroke
after removing the front timing chain case (front cover),
put the crankshaft pulley back on, and then rotate the crankshaft 360° (when camshaft and
crankshaft sprocket mating marks are aligned).
^ Use the chain tensioner pins (pin) from Tool Kit J-50246 to hold all three (3) chain tensioners
plungers. Figure 1 shows a pin used on B2 tensioner.
NOTE
The primary timing chain will be reused. If the original markings are not legible, it is recommended
to mark this chain to all three sprockets with "white-out" or suitable marking before removing.
4. Remove the Secondary Timing Chain Tensioner Shoes (shoe) by evenly prying with a couple
pocket screwdrivers or suitable tools where shown in
A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Classification: AT07-006B
Reference: NTB08-049B
Date: March 13, 2009
NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT
This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard
all earlier versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information,
the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to
the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used
as specified by the part number in this bulletin.
If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in
the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan
ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 2052
Page 1572
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Removal and Installation of BCM
REMOVAL
NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference
when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 1. Disconnect negative battery
cable. 2. Remove the parking brake pedal assembly. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Control/Service and
Repair/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the BCM (1) by removing the screw (A) and disconnecting the harness connectors (2). Arrow Indicates : Front
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
- When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition
key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Locations/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS) See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Description and Operation/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle
Immobilizer System-NATS)/System Description See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft
and Alarm Systems/Description and Operation/NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer
System-NATS)/System Composition.
- When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system.
Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ID Registration Procedure.
Page 5019
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Optional Splice
Page 2442
DESCRIPTION
Page 2267
- Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the tube until a click is
heard.
- After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by pulling on the tube and the
connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the quick connector.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks: 1. Turn
the ignition switch to ON (without starting the engine) to check the connections for fuel leaks with
the electric fuel pump applying fuel
pressure to the fuel piping.
2. Start the engine and let it idle to check that there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system tube and
hose connections.
Page 319
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Intake Sensor
ATC
INTAKE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
Intake Sensor
REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair.
Page 158
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 2168
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Component Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Component Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Crash Zone Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor
CRASH ZONE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at
least three minutes.
1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes.
2. Remove front grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Grille/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the
crash zone sensor harness connector. 4. Remove crash zone sensor nuts.
CAUTION: Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
- Do not disassemble crash zone sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes.
Page 1692
13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part.
16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
Page 773
Oil Filter: Service and Repair
OIL FILTER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the RH splash shield.
2. Remove the oil filter using Tool.
Tool number : KV10115801 (J-38956)
WARNING: Be careful not to get burned, the engine and engine oil may be hot.
CAUTION: The oil filter is equipped with a relief valve. Use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent.
- When removing the oil filter, use a shop cloth to absorb any oil leaks or spills.
- Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts.
- Completely wipe off any oil that adheres to the engine and the vehicle.
INSTALLATION 1. Remove any foreign material adhering to the oil filter installation surface.
2. Apply engine oil to the oil seal contact surface of the new oil filter as shown. 3. Screw the oil filter
manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by turning another 2/3 turn as
shown. Or tighten to specification
using Tool.
Page 153
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Locations
Throttle Position Sensor: Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3135
Page 634
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
Page 1203
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Tool J-50288 (Ring Gear Stop) is considered "Essential" and will be shipped to each dealer on
December 3, 2009. Your Non-Vehicle account was charged $26.90 plus applicable taxes and
freight.Tool J-50246 (Tensioner Shoe Installer and Chain Tensioner Pins), also considered
"Essential", was shipped to each dealer November 2009.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Write down all radio station presets.
Locations
Door Switch: Locations
WARNING CHIME
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 2671
5. Remove stopper ring using a suitable tool, then pull out slide joint housing.
6. Put matching marks on spider assembly and shaft.
7. Remove snap ring using a suitable tool, then remove spider assembly from shaft. 8. Remove
boot from shaft. 9. Clean old grease off of the slide joint housing.
Wheel Side 1. Mount the front drive shaft in a vise.
CAUTION: When mounting shaft in a vise, always use copper or aluminum plates between vise
and shaft.
2. Remove boot bands and slide the boot back.
3. Screw a sliding hammer or suitable tool 30 mm (1.18 in) or more into threaded part of joint
sub-assembly. Pull joint sub-assembly out of shaft.
CAUTION: Align sliding hammer or suitable tool and drive shaft then remove joint sub-assembly by pulling
directly.
TCS/ABS
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair TCS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid.
Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and
Repair/Changing Brake Fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit). 5. Disconnect the brake tubes.
CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
6. Remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket bolts and remove the ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit) with the
bracket.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Hose/Line/Service and
Repair/Hydraulic Circuit for torque specifications when connecting the brake tubes.
- After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with
new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the brake hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair.
CAUTION:
Page 1152
4. Apply a bead of sealant to the cylinder block mating surface of the upper oil pan as shown. -
Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications/Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants.
- Be sure the sealant is applied as shown, and the sealant is 4.0 - 5.0 mm (0.157 - 0.197 in) or 4.5 5.5 mm (0.177 - 0.217 in) wide.
- Installation must be done within 5 minutes after applying sealant.
5. Install new O-rings on the cylinder block and oil pump body. 6. Install the upper oil pan.
- Tighten upper oil pan bolts in the order as shown.
CAUTION: Wait at least 30 minutes before refilling the engine with oil.
Page 4217
Page 2484
Page 380
Combination Switch: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
COMBINATION SWITCH
CONSULT-III Function (BCM)
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure 1. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "DATA
MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION
FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen.
4. Touch "START". 5. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored.
When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the signals will be
monitored.
6. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To
stop recording, touch "STOP".
Display Item List
Page 116
Page 1251
Page EM-9
Page 1779
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. Refer to See:
Maintenance See: Maintenance.
1. Disconnect the tube clamp at the air cleaner to electric throttle control actuator tube at the mass
air flow sensor. 2. Separate the mass air flow sensor from the air cleaner to electric throttle control
actuator tube. 3. Unhook the air cleaner case side clips and remove the air cleaner case (upper). 4.
Remove the air cleaner filter. 5. Install a new air cleaner filter. 6. Install the remaining components
in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3258
Fuse Block: Diagrams Fuse And Fusible Link Box
FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX
Terminal Arrangement
Page 761
8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D"
ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7).
9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A).
10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make
sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B).
11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is
firmly applied (see Figure 9).
12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt.
13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring.
Page 4415
Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box.
- Keep primers and adhesives in a cool dry place. ideally they should be stored in a refrigerator.
- Do not leave primers and adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps off.
- The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured. Curing time depends on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase
under lower temperature and lower humidities.
Repairing Water Leaks for Slide Door Glass Leaks can be repaired without removing and
reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass,
determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the glass area while
pushing glass outward. To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to
the leak point.
Page 1378
9. Install upper oil pan bolts as shown.
Upper oil pan bolts : 22.0 N-m (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft-lb)
10. Install lower oil pan.
11. Install IVT control valve covers as follows:
a. Install new collared O-rings in front cover oil hole (LH and RH sides).
b. Install new seal rings on the IVT control valve covers. c. Apply Silicone RTV Sealant to the IVT
control valve covers. - Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent.
- Being careful not to move the seal ring from the installation groove, align the dowel pins on the
chain case with the holes to install the IVT
control valve covers.
- Tighten the intake valve timing control valve cover bolts in the order as shown. - A: Bank 1
(Conventional RH bank) - B: Bank 2 (Conventional LH bank)
Page 2211
Positive Crankcase Ventilation: Testing and Inspection Power Supply And Ground Circuit
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
1.INSPECTION START Start engine. Is engine running? Yes or No Yes >>GO TO 8. No >>GO TO
2.
2.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK >>GO TO 4. NG >>GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Fuse block (J/B) connector E30
- 10 A fuse
- Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
>>Repair harness or connectors.
4.CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Loosen and retighten three
ground screws on the body. Refer to See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests
and General Diagnostics/Power Supply And Ground Circuit.
Page 369
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
ATC
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations ATC
Front Passenger Compartment
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Description and Operation
Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 3320
Page 3193
Page 859
Figure 2.
NOTE
Leave the pins from Tool J-50246 in each tensioner until the timing chains are installed.
5. Install the new shoes to the tensioners with Tool J-50246 (See Figure 3).
^ Tighten the bolt until the shoe is fully seated.
CAUTION
Tighten the bolt no more then necessary.
6. Install the new secondary timing chains. Refer to the ESM as needed.
7. Reassemble the rest of the engine and vehicle. Refer to the ESM as needed.
^ Make sure all three (3) pins are removed before installing the front cover.
8. Install the battery cables, negative cable last.
9. Reprogram the radio presets.
10. Reset / initialize all applied systems i.e., power windows, clock, sunroof, etc.
Page 4903
LT-INT/L-06
WITH REAR ROOF CONSOLE
Page 1866
EC-MIL/DL-02
Page 1918
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 4695
Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Automatic Drive Positioner
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 4894
Page 4093
3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1.
4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2).
5. Replace the battery.
^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece.
6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together.
7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated
in the dot matrix display.
8. If the indicator is still illuminated:
a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door.
b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off.
Page 3489
7. Disconnect the outer tie-rod end from steering knuckle using Tool. Be careful not to damage ball
joint boot.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off suddenly,
temporarily tighten mounting nut.
Tool number : HT72520000 (J-25730-A)
8. Remove transverse link and steering knuckle pinch bolt and nut using power tool. Refer to See:
Control Arm/Service and Repair/Front Suspension.
9. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly from drive shaft using a puller or suitable tool.
CAUTION: When removing wheel hub and bearing assembly, do not apply an excessive angle to drive shaft
joint. Also be careful not to excessively extend slide joint.
- Support drive shaft when removing.
10. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool. 11. Remove splash guard
and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle.
12. Remove the lower strut bolts and nuts using power tool. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Suspension. 13. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if
necessary.
Ball Joint Inspection Check for boot breakage, axial looseness, and torque of transverse link ball joint. Refer to See:
Control Arm/Service and Repair/Front Suspension.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following: Refer to "Removal and Installation" for tightening torques.
Locations
Combination Switch: Locations
CORNERING LAMP
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 1911
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 1545
5. Secure the band clamp with the hex bolt located on the side (or on top, if needed). See Figure 1
above for example.
WARNING:
Do NOT install the hex bolt on the bottom of the exhaust tube.
^ Band clamp hex bolt torque: 4.0 - 5.5 Nm (0.4 - 0.56 Kg-m, 2.9 - 4.0 ft-lb)
6. After securing the band clamp, cut off the clamp's excess at the end.
^ Wrap the end of the band clamp over the hex bolt, and then cut off the excess band clamp within
5 mm (0.2 inches) past the hex bolt (see Figure 2).
WARNING:
Page 429
Knock Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Specifications
Alternator: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Generator
Page 3100
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 2420
Knock Sensor: Connector Locations
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 685
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
SPARK PLUG
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the ignition coils. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Ignition
System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation LH
and See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal And
Installation RH.
CAUTION: Do not shock ignition coil.
2. Remove the spark plugs using a suitable tool. If replacing the spark plugs use the correct spark plug for maximum performance. Refer to See: .
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
CAUTION: Do not use a wire brush for cleaning.
Page 3836
Refrigerant: Service Precautions General Refrigerant Precaution
PRECAUTIONS
General Refrigerant Precaution
WARNING:
Do not release refrigerant into the air. Use approved recovery/recycling equipment to capture the
refrigerant every time an air conditioning system is discharged.
Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air
conditioning system.
Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 52°C (125°F).
Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the
bottom of the container in a warm pail of water.
Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers.
Keep refrigerant away from open flames: poisonous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns.
Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent
suffocation.
Do not pressure test or leak test HFC-134a (R-134a) service equipment and/or vehicle air
conditioning systems with compressed air during repair. Some mixtures of air and HFC-134a
(R-134a) have been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures, if ignited,
may cause injury or property damage. Additional health and safety information may be obtained
from refrigerant manufacturers.
Page 2716
Page 3805
CAUTION: The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not
confuse O-rings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will
leak at or around the connection.
Removal And Installation For Low-Pressure Flexible Hose
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose
REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine under cover. 2. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service
and Repair/HFC.-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air. 3. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to See: Component.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Component.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
ATC
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose
REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine under cover.